HomeMy WebLinkAboutWolf Pen Creek - Festival Park Nov2010Wolf Pen Creek Festival Park
CITY OF COLLEGE STA'.TION
College Station, Texas
Landscape Improvements
November 2010
CCA Project No. 109-062
Clark Condon Associates
10401 Stella Link Rodd
Houston, Texas 77025
WOLF PEN CREEK FESTIVAL PARK
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION TABLE OF CONTENTS
Division 1— General Requirements
Summary
Project Management and Coordination
Submittal Procedures
Traffic Controll
Mobilization
Execution
Closeout Procedures
Division 2 — Existing Conditions
Removal of Existing Concrete
Division 3 - Concrete
Cast in Place Concrete
Concrete Blocking or Anchorage
Grout Fill Existing Line
Division 4 - Masonry
Mortar and Grout
Glass Unit Masonry
Unit Masonry Assemblies
Division 5 - Metals
Metal Fabrications
Metal Stairs
Pipe and Tube Railings
Division 6 — Woods, Plastics and Composites
Rough Carpentry
Sheathing
Shop -fabricated Wood Trusses
Division 7 — Thermal and Moisture Protection
Self -adhering Sheet Waterproofing
Thermal Insulation
Metal Roof Panels
Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing —
Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim
Roof Hatches
Joint Sealers
Division 8 - Openings
Hollow Metal Doors andFrames
Fiberglass Doors and Frames
Access Doors and Frames
Finish Hardware
Louvers and Vents
Torch Application
Division 9 - Finishes
Conductive Trace Wire for Water Pipe Installation
Section 011000
Section 0 13 100
Section 013300
Section 015526
Section 017113
Section 017300
Section 017700
Section 024113
Section 033000
Section 033001
Section 033400
Section 040512
Section 042300
Section 048100
Section 055000
Section 055100
Section 055213
Section 061000
Section 061600
Section 061753
Section 071310
Section 072100
Section 074110
Section 075200
Section 076200
Section 077210
Section 079000
Section 081113
Section 082110
Section 083113
Section 087000
Section 089000
Section 090312
Portland Cement Plaster/Stucco Finish Section 092100
Gypsum Board Section 092900
Painting Section 099120
Division 10 - Specialties
Toilet Compartments Section 102113
Toilet and Bath Accessories Section 102800
Signs Section 104250
Fire Extinguishers Section 104416
Division 11 - Equipment
Chain Hoist System Section 115000
Division 12 - Furnishings
Site Furnishings Section 129300
Division 22 - Plumbing
Basic Materials and Methods - Plumbing
Section 220200
Expansion Materials and Loops for Plumbing Piping
Section 220516
Hangers and Supports for Plumbing and Equipment
Section 220529
Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment
Section 220553
Plumbing Equipment Insulation
Section 220716
Plumbing Piping Insulation
Section 220719
Plumbing Piping
Section 221000
Plumbing Specialties
Section 221119
Plumbing Equipment
Section 223000
Plumbing Fixtures
Section 224000
Division 23 - HVAC
Basic Materials and Methods - HVAC Section 230200
Hangers and Supports for Piping and Equipment — HVAC Section 230529
HVAC Fans Section 233400
Air Distribution Devices Section 233713
Air Cooled Condensing Units Section 236213
Fan Coil Unit Section 238219
Division 26 - Electrical
Basic Materials and Methods — Electrical
Section 260200
Wire, Cable and Related Materials
Section 260519
Grounding
Section 260526
Raceways
Section 260533
Low Voltage Distribution Transformers
Section 262213
Panelboards
Section 262416
Wiring Devices
Section 262726
Safety and Disconnect Switches
Section 262816
Miscellaneous Electrical Controls and Wiring
Section 262926
Surge Protective Device — High Interrupting (TVSS)
Section 264313
Lighting Fixtures
Section 265100
Division 31 - Earthwork
Site Clearing; Tree Removal & Treatment Section 311000
Site Preparation Section 311100
Tree & Plant Protection Section 311200
Excavation and Enbankment Section 312300
Select Borrow Section 312323
Cement Stabilized Sand Backfill
Section 312323.53
Excavating, Trenching and Backfilling
Section 312333
Erosion and Sediment Control
Section 312513
Termite Control
Section 313116
Trench Safety
Section 315000
Pipe Boring, Jacking, Tunneling and Encasement
Section 317800
Division 32 — Exterior Improvements
Sprinkling
Section 321129.01
Rolling
Section 321129.02
Unit Paving
Section 321400
Concrete Curb and Gutter
Section 321613
Concrete Sidewalk
Section 321613.01
Reflectorized Pavement Markings (RPMs)
Section 321723.23
Chain Link Fences and Gates
Section 323113
Planting Irrigation
Section 328400
Hydromulching
Section 329201
Sodding
Section 329202
Plants
Section 329300
Exterior Landscape Maintenance
Section 329301
Division 33 - Utilities
Testing for Sanitary Sewage Gravity System
Section 330130.13
Polyvinylchloride Pipe and Fittings
Section 330501
Water main Construction
Section 331113.1
Water Services
Section 331213
Main Line Valves
Section 331216
Fire Hydrants
Section 331219
Disinfection of Waterlines
Section 331300
Hydrostatic Tests
Section 331310
Sanitary Sewage System
Section 333113
Manholes
Section 333913
Sewer Service
Section 333914
Connection of New Lines to Existing Manholes
Section 333914.01
Storm Drainage System
Section 334001
Reinforced Concrete Pipe
Section 334002
Standard Storm Sewr Inlets
Section 334003
Reinforced Concrete Riprap
Section 334004
Reinforced Concrete Headwalls and Endwalls
Section 334005
Drainage Channel Excavation
Section 334116
HDPE Pipe for Use in Storm Sewers
Section 334120
Precast Reinforced Concrete Box Culverts
Section 334216.13
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Project information.
2. Work covered by Contract Documents.
3. Phased construction.
4. Work under separate contracts.
5. Access to site.
6. Coordination with occupants.
7. Work restrictions.
8. Specification and drawing conventions.
B. Related Section:
Wolf Pen Creek Festival Park
1. Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures
governing temporary use of Owner's facilities.
1.2 PROJECT INFORMATION
A. Project Identification: Wolf Pen Creek Festival Park CCA Proj. 109-062
1. Project Location: 1015 Colgate Drive, College Station, TX 77840
B. Owner: City of College Station
1. Owner's Representative:
Donald Harmon
City of College Station
Assistant Director of Capital Projects
P.O. Box 9960
310 Krenek Tap Rd,
College Station, TX 77842
C. Landscape Architect: Clark Condon Associates, 10401 Stella Link Road, Houston, Texas,
77025, 713-871-1414.
1.3 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. The Work of the Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following:
1. The project will consist of improvements including but not limited to: Parking lot and
entry drive, restroom building, equipment and storage building, interactive water feature,
SUMMARY 011000 - 1
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
Wolf Pen Creek Festival Park
central plaza, arbors, concrete trails, electrical and water connections, landscape
improvements, drainage improvements, site lighting and grading.
B. Type of Contract.
1. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract.
1.4 ACCESS TO SITE
A. General: Contractor shall have full use of Project site for construction operations during
construction period. Contractor's use of Project site is limited only by Owner's right to perform
work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project.
B. General: Contractor shall have limited use of Project site for construction operations as
indicated on Drawings by the Contract limits and as indicated by requirements of this Section.
C. Use of Site: Limit use of Project site to areas within the Contract limits as indicated. Do not
disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.
Limits: Confine construction operations to limits of work as indicated on the drawings.
1.5 WORK RESTRICTIONS
A. Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations.
Comply with limitations on use of public streets and other requirements of authorities
having jurisdiction.
B. On -Site Work Hours: as described in the General Conditions
1.6 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS
A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and
the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations.
These conventions are as follows:
1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The
words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied
where a colon () is used within a sentence or phrase.
2. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated
otherwise.
B. Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the Work
of all Sections in the Specifications.
C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on the Drawings are
described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on the
Drawings to identify materials and products:
SUMMARY 011000 - 2
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
Wolf Pen Creek Festival Park
1. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in
the individual Specifications Sections.
2. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations scheduled on
Drawings.
3. Keynoting: Materials and products are identified by reference keynotes referencing
Specification Section numbers found in this Project Manual.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 011000
SUMMARY 011000 - 3
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek Festival Park
November 2010
SECTION 013100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project
including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Coordination drawings.
2. Requests for Information (RFIs).
3. Project Web site.
4. Project meetings.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 01 Section "Execution" for procedures for coordinating general installation and
field -engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. RFI: Request from Owner, Construction Manager, Architect, or Contractor seeking information
from each other during construction.
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the
Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate
construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper
installation, connection, and operation.
1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where
installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before
or after its own installation.
2. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and
accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.
3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.
B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures
required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees
at meetings.
1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their
Work is required.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 1
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
Wolf Pen Creek Festival Park
C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative
procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of
the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule.
2. Preparation of the schedule of values.
3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls.
4. Delivery and processing of submittals.
5. Progress meetings.
6. Preinstallation conferences.
7. Project closeout activities.
8. Startup and adjustment of systems.
9. Project closeout activities.
1.4 COORDINATION DRAWINGS
A. Coordination Drawings, General: Prepare coordination drawings in accordance with
requirements in individual Sections, where installation is not completely shown on Shop
Drawings, where limited space availability necessitates coordination, or if coordination is
required to facilitate integration of products and materials fabricated or installed by more than
one entity.
1. Content: Project -specific information, drawn accurately to a scale large enough to
indicate and resolve conflicts. Do not base coordination drawings on standard printed
data. Include the following information, as applicable:
a. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural,
structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems.
b. Indicate dimensions shown on the Drawings. Specifically note dimensions that
appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance
requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Architect indicating proposed
resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations
will not be considered changes to the Contract.
B. Coordination Drawing Organization: Organize coordination drawings as follows:
1. Floor Plans and Reflected Ceiling Plans: Show architectural and structural elements, and
mechanical, plumbing, fire protection, fire alarm, and electrical Work. Show locations of
visible ceiling -mounted devices relative to acoustical ceiling grid.
2. Plenum Space: Indicate subframing for support of ceiling and wall systems, mechanical
and electrical equipment, and related Work. Locate components within ceiling plenum to
accommodate layout of light fixtures indicated on Drawings.
3. Mechanical Rooms: Provide coordination drawings for mechanical rooms showing plans
and elevations of mechanical, plumbing, fire protection, fire alarm, and electrical
equipment.
4. Structural Penetrations: Indicate penetrations and openings required for all disciplines.
5. Slab Edge and Embedded Items: Indicate slab edge locations and sizes and locations of
embedded items for metal fabrications, sleeves, anchor bolts, bearing plates, angles, door
floor closers, slab depressions for floor finishes, curbs and housekeeping pads, and
similar items.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 2
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
Wolf Pen Creek Festival Park
6. Review: Architect will review coordination drawings to confirm that the Work is being
coordinated, but not for the details of the coordination, which are the Contractor's
responsibility.
1.5 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs)
A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of
the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified.
1. Architect will return RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by
Contractor with no response.
2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's
work or work of subcontractors.
B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or
interpretation and the following:
1. Project name.
2. Project number.
3. Date.
4. Name of Contractor.
5. Name of Architect and Construction Manager.
6. RFI number, numbered sequentially.
7. RFI subject.
8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate.
9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate.
11. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's solution(s) impacts the Contract Time
or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI.
12. Contractor's signature.
13. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop
Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items
needing interpretation.
C. RFI Forms: AIA Document G716, Form bound in the Project Manual, Software -generated
form with substantially the same content as indicated above, acceptable to Architect.
D. Architect's and Construction Manager's Action: Architect and Construction Manager will
review each RFI, determine action required, and respond. Allow seven (7) working days for
Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received by Architect or Construction Manager after
1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day.
1. The following RFIs will be returned without action:
a. Requests for approval of submittals.
b. Requests for approval of substitutions.
C. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract
Documents.
d. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum.
e. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 3
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek Festival Park
November 2010
f. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs.
2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case
Architect's time for response will date from time of receipt of additional information.
3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the
Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to
Division 01 Section "Contract Modification Procedures."
a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or
the Contract Sum, notify Architect and Construction Manager in writing within ten
(10) days of receipt of the RFI response.
E. On receipt of Architect's and Construction Manager's action, update the RFI log and
immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify
Architect and Construction Manager within seven (7) days if Contractor disagrees with
response.
F. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number.
Submit log weekly. Include the following:
1. Project name.
2. Name and address of Contractor.
3. Name and address of Architect and Construction Manager.
4. RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted.
5. RFI description.
6. Date the RFI was submitted.
7. Date Architect's and Construction Manager's response was received.
8. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and
Proposal Request, as appropriate.
9. Identification of related Field Order, Work Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as
appropriate.
G. General: Construction Manager will schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project
site, unless otherwise indicated.
Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is
required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled
meeting dates and times.
Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees.
Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record significant discussions
and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned,
including Owner, Construction Manager, Contractor and Architect, within three (3) days
of the meeting.
H. Preconstruction Conference: Construction Manager will conduct a preconstruction conference
before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than
fifteen (15) days after execution of the Agreement.
Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Owner's Commissioning Authority,
Construction Manager, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its
superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 4
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
Wolf Pen Creek Festival Park
the conference. Participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and
authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.
Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the
following:
a. Tentative construction schedule.
b. Phasing.
C. Critical work sequencing and long -lead items.
d. Designation of key personnel and their duties.
e. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders.
f. Procedures for RFIs.
g. Procedures for testing and inspecting.
h. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment.
i. Distribution of the Contract Documents.
j. Submittal procedures.
k. Sustainable design requirements.
1. Preparation of record documents.
M. Use of the premises.
n. Work restrictions.
o. Working hours.
p. Owner's occupancy requirements.
q. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls.
r. Procedures for moisture and mold control.
S. Procedures for disruptions and shutdowns.
t. Construction waste management and recycling.
U. Parking availability.
V. Office, work, and storage areas.
W. Equipment deliveries and priorities.
X. First aid.
Y. Security.
Z. Progress cleaning.
Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting
minutes.
I. Progress Meetings: Construction Manager will conduct progress meetings at regular intervals
(determined in the preconstruction meeting.
1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner, Construction Manager and Architect,
each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress
or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be
represented at these meetings. All participants at the meeting shall be familiar with
Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.
2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review
other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as
appropriate to status of Project.
a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting.
Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule,
in relation to Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction
behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 5
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek Festival Park
November 2010
do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and
subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.
1) Review schedule for next period.
b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:
1) Interface requirements.
2) Sequence of operations.
3) Status of submittals.
4) Deliveries.
5) Off -site fabrication.
6) Access.
7) Site utilization.
8) Temporary facilities and controls.
9) Progress cleaning.
10) Quality and work standards.
11) Status of correction of deficient items.
12) Field observations.
13) Status of RFIs.
14) Status of proposal requests.
15) Pending changes.
16) Status of Change Orders.
17) Pending claims and disputes.
18) Documentation of information for payment requests.
Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting the meeting will record and distribute the
meeting minutes to each party present and to parties requiring information.
a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's construction schedule after each progress
meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue
revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 013100
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 6
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART1-GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
Wolf Pen Creek Festival Park
A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural
requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures" for submitting schedules and reports,
including Contractor's construction schedule.
2. Division 01 Section "Close -Out Procedures" for submitting operation and maintenance
manuals.
3. Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record
Specifications, and record Product Data.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require
Architect's and Construction Manager's responsive action.
B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not
require Architect's and Construction Manager's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected
for not complying with requirements.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates
required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing,
fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making
corrections or modifications to submittals noted by the Architect and Construction Manager and
additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections.
1.4 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Architect's Digital Data Files: Electronic copies of CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings
will be provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals.
1. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data drawing files of the Contract
Drawings for use in preparing Shop Drawings and Project record drawings.
a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital
data drawing files as they relate to the Contract Drawings.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 1
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek Festival Park
November 2010
b. Contractor shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of an Agreement
form acceptable to the Owner and Architect.
B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of
construction activities.
1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other
submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.
2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so
processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for
coordination.
a. Architect and Construction Manager reserve the right to withhold action on a
submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are
received.
C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows.
Time for review shall commence on Construction Manager's receipt of submittal. No extension
of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in
advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.
1. Initial Review: Allow fifteen (15) days for initial review of each submittal. Allow
additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Construction
Manager will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for
coordination.
2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner
as initial submittal.
3. Resubmittal Review: Allow fifteen (15) days for review of each resubmittal.
D. Identification and Information: Place a permanent label or title block on each paper copy
submittal item for identification.
1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block.
2. Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches on label or beside title block to record
Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect and
Construction Manager.
3. Include the following information for processing and recording action taken:
a. Project name.
b. Date.
C. Name of Architect.
d. Name of Construction Manager.
e. Name of Contractor.
f. Name of subcontractor.
g. Name of supplier.
h. Name of manufacturer.
i. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.
1) Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a
decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., 061000.01). Resubmittals
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 2
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek Festival Park
November 2010
shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g.,
061000.01.A).
j. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
k. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
1. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate.
in. Other necessary identification.
E. Identification and Information: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic
submittal file as follows:
1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file with links enabling
navigation to each item.
2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.
a. File name shall use project identifier and Specification Section number followed
by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., LNHS-061000.01).
Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g.,
LNHS-061000.01.A).
3. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval
markings and action taken by Architect and Construction Manager.
4. Include the following information on an inserted cover sheet:
a. Project name.
b. Date.
C. Name and address of Architect.
d. Name of Construction Manager.
e. Name of Contractor.
f. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal.
g. Name of subcontractor.
h. Name of supplier.
i. Name of manufacturer.
j. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
k. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
1. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate.
in. Related physical samples submitted directly.
n. Other necessary identification.
F. Options: Identify options requiring selection by the Architect.
G. Deviations: Identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals.
H. Additional Paper Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless
Architect or Construction Manager observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract
Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal.
Submit one copy of submittal to concurrent reviewer in addition to specified number of
copies to Architect and Construction Manager.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 3
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
Wolf Pen Creek Festival Park
Transmittal: Assemble each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and
handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will return submittals,
without review, received from sources other than Contractor.
Transmittal Form: Use AIA Document G810 or similar.
On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant
information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect and
Construction Manager on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the
Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include same
identification information as related submittal.
Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.
1. Note date and content of previous submittal.
2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of
revision.
3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Architect's and
Construction Manager's action stamp.
K. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers,
fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of
construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.
L. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals that are marked with approval notation from
Architect's and Construction Manager's action stamp.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements:
Submit electronic submittals via email as PDF electronic files.
a. Architect, through Construction Manager, will return annotated file. Annotate and
retain one copy of file as an electronic Project record document file.
2. Action Submittals: Submit five (5) paper copies of each submittal, unless otherwise
indicated. Architect, through Construction Manager, will return four (4) copies.
3. Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements
specified in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures."
4. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of
entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be
signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that
entity.
Provide a digital signature with digital certificate on electronically -submitted
certificates and certifications where indicated.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 4
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek Festival Park
November 2010
b. Provide a notarized statement on original paper copy certificates and certifications
where indicated.
Test and Inspection Reports Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in
Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements."
B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and
type of product or equipment.
1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data
are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.
2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable.
3. Include the following information, as applicable:
a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts.
b. Manufacturer's product specifications.
C. Standard color charts.
d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards.
e. Testing by recognized testing agency.
f. Application of testing agency labels and seals.
g. Notation of coordination requirements.
h. Availability and delivery time information.
4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable:
a. Wiring diagrams showing factory -installed wiring.
b. Printed performance curves.
C. Operational range diagrams.
d. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop
Drawings.
5. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples.
6. Submit Product Data in the following format:
a. PDF electronic file.
b. Six (6) paper copies of Product Data, unless otherwise indicated. Architect
through Construction Manager, will return four (4) copies.
C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project -specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base
Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data, unless
submittal based upon Architect's digital data drawing files is otherwise permitted.
Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the
following information, as applicable:
a. Identification of products.
b. Schedules.
C. Compliance with specified standards.
d. Notation of coordination requirements.
e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.
f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 5
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
Wolf Pen Creek Festival Park
g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.
Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop
Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 24 by 36 inches.
Submit Shop Drawings in the following format:
a. PDF electronic file.
b. Three (3) opaque (bond) copies of each submittal. Architect, through Construction
Manager, will return two (2) copies.
D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these
characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between
submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.
1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together
in one submittal package.
2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:
a. Generic description of Sample.
b. Product name and name of manufacturer.
C. Sample source.
d. Number and title of applicable Specification Section.
Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality -
control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be
used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.
a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual
Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time
of use.
b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's
property, are the property of Contractor.
4. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or
sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.
a. Number of Samples: Submit two (2) full set(s) of available choices where color,
pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from
manufacturer's product line. Architect, through Construction Manager, will return
submittal with options selected.
Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared
from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and
physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of
color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the
following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or
containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing
color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing
and inspection.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 6
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek Festival Park
November 2010
a. Number of Samples: Submit three (3) sets of Samples. Architect and
Construction Manager will retain two (2) Sample sets; remainder will be returned.
1) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in
material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three (3) sets of
paired units that show approximate limits of variations.
E. Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary
indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the
following information in tabular form:
Submit product schedule in the following format:
a. PDF electronic file.
b. Four (4) paper copies of product schedule or list, unless otherwise indicated.
Architect, through Construction Manager, will return one (1) copy.
F. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01
Section "Construction Progress Documentation."
G. Application for Payment: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section
"Payment Procedures."
H. Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Payment
Procedures."
Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each
portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a
special design.
1. Submit subcontract list in the following format:
a. PDF electronic file.
b. Number of Copies: Four (4) paper copies of subcontractor list, unless otherwise
indicated. Architect, through Construction Manager, will return one (1) copy.
J. Coordination Drawings: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Project
Management and Coordination."
K. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience
of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact
information of architects and owners, and other information specified.
L. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel
comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure
Specification and Procedure Qualification Record on American Welding Society (AWS) forms.
Include names of firms and personnel certified.
M. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is
authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 7
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
Wolf Pen Creek Festival Park
N. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying
that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of
manufacturing experience where required.
O. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
P. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
Q. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's
standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with
requirements in the Contract Documents.
R. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating current product produced by
manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on
evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or
on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
S. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project.
T. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section
"Quality Requirements."
U. Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing
agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation
of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents.
V. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing
agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed
before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate
preparation needed for adhesion.
W. Field Test Reports: Submit reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed
either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for
compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.
X. Maintenance Data: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and
Maintenance Data."
Y. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information, including, but not limited to,
performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations.
Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads.
Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for
calculations. Include page numbers.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 8
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek Festival Park
November 2010
2.2 DELEGATED -DESIGN SERVICES
A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a
design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide
products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.
If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit
a written request for additional information to Architect.
B. Delegated -Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and
other required submittals, submit three (3) paper copies of certificate, signed and sealed by the
responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor
to be designed or certified by a design professional.
Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the
Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing
these services.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW
A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with
other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections
and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect and
Construction Manager.
B. Project Closeout and Maintenance/Material Submittals: Refer to requirements in Division 01
Section "Closeout Procedures."
C. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name
and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date
of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked,
and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.
3.2 ARCHITECT'S AND CONSTRUCTION MANAGER'S ACTION
A. General: Construction Manager will not review and forward submittals that do not bear
Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action.
B. Action Submittals: Architect and Construction Manager will review each submittal, make
marks to indicate corrections or modifications required, and return it. Architect and
Construction Manager will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp
appropriately to indicate action.
C. Informational Submittals: Architect and Construction Manager will review each submittal and
will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Construction
Manager will forward each submittal to appropriate party.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 9
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek Festival Park
November 2010
D. Incomplete submittals are not acceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be
returned without review.
E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded.
END OF SECTION 013300
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 10
Approved — 112009
B/CS Unified Specifications
SECTION 01 55 26
TRAFFIC CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This Specification includes the general description of the "TRAFFIC CONTROL" and the
requirements of that plan. This specification applies to the furnishing of all labor,
equipment, and materials and in performing all operations in connection with the
"TRAFFIC CONTROL" in accordance with the plans and these specifications.
1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
The work and materials as prescribed by this item will be paid on the following schedule:
A. 50% of the bid value shall be paid when the traffic control plan is fully implemented, and
all of the initial traffic control devices have been installed and are in working order.
B. 25% of the value will be prorated for the installation and maintenance of traffic control
devices during the course of construction as a percent of the total contract value.
C. 25% will be paid at the completion of construction and all traffic control devices are
removed from the site.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. The contractor shall submit a "TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN" or modifications to the plan
provided in the construction documents prior to commencing construction. All plans must
be in accordance with the Texas Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices requirements.
No plan may be implemented until approved by the Engineer.
PART 2 — PRODUCTS
N/A
PART 3 — EXECUTION
3.1 CONSTRUCTION METHODS
A. The "TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN" and the installation of all devices should be
continuously reviewed and updated to reflect the current stage of construction. The
inspector may review minor changes; the engineer shall review major changes. The
construction foreman shall provide the current "TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN" to the
inspector upon request on the site at any time during the construction of the project.
END OF SECTION
Approved — 112009
B/CS Unified Specifications
SECTION 01 71 13
MOBILIZATION
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION:
A. This item shall govern for the establishment of office and other facilities at the project site and
the movement of personnel, construction equipment and supplies to the project site or to the
vicinity of the project site in order to enable the Contractor to begin work on the other contract
items that will be performed by the Contractor. The cost of the payment bond and performance
bond on projects that cannot begin because of a closed construction season or for the
convenience of the City will be considered part of the mobilization item under this contract.
1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
A. This Item will be measured by the "Lump Sum", as the work progresses.
B. Partial payments of the "Lump Sum" bid for mobilization will be as follows. The adjusted
contract amount for construction items as used below is defined as the total contract amount less
the lump sum bid for Mobilization.
1. Upon presentation of a paid invoice for the payment bond, performance bond and/or
required insurance, the Contractor will be paid that cost from the amount bid for
mobilization.
2. When 1% of the adjusted contract amount for construction items is earned, 50% of the
mobilization lump sum bid or 5% of the total contract amount, whichever is less, will be
paid. Previous payments under this Item will be deducted from this amount.
3. When 5% of the adjusted contract amount for construction items is earned, 75% of the
mobilization lump sum bid or 10% of the total contract amount, whichever is less, will be
paid. Previous payments under this Item will be deducted from this amount.
4. When 10% of the adjusted contract amount for construction items is earned, 90% of the
mobilization lump sum bid or 10% of the total contract amount, whichever is less, will be
paid. Previous payments under this Item will be deducted from this amount.
Payment for the remainder of the lump sum bid for "Mobilization" will be made on the
next monthly estimate cycle after the retainage estimate.
PART 2 — PRODUCTS
N/A
PART 3 — EXECUTION
N/A
END OF SECTION
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
SECTION 017300 - EXECUTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
Wolf Pen Creek Festival Park
A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the
Work including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Construction layout.
2. Field engineering and surveying.
3. Installation of the Work.
4. Cutting and patching.
5. Coordination of Owner -installed products.
6. Progress cleaning.
7. Starting and adjusting.
8. Protection of installed construction.
9. Correction of the Work.
B. Related Sections:
Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with
Project Record Documents, recording of Owner -accepted deviations from indicated lines
and levels, and final cleaning.
1.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to accept
hazardous materials, for hazardous waste disposal.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to practice
in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing land -surveying
services of the kind indicated.
B. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of
construction elements.
Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify Architect of
locations and details of cutting and await directions from the Architect before proceeding.
Shore, brace, and support structural element during cutting and patching. Do not cut and
patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load -carrying capacity or
increase deflection
EXECUTION 017300 - 1
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
Wolf Pen Creek Festival Park
2. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components
in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in
increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.
Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or
components in a manner that could change their load -carrying capacity, that results in
reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or
decreased operational life or safety.
4. Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual
evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner
that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and
replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged
during installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not
to void existing warranties.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.
For projects requiring compliance with sustainable design and construction practices and
procedures, utilize products for patching that comply with requirements of Division 01
Section "Sustainable Design Requirements."
B. In -Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in -place materials. For exposed
surfaces, use materials that visually match in -place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent
possible.
If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed,
will provide a match acceptable to the Architect for the visual and functional
performance of in -place materials.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and
construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate
and verify the existence and location of underground utilities, mechanical and electrical
systems, and other construction affecting the Work.
EXECUTION 017300 - 2
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
Wolf Pen Creek Festival Park
1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of
sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water -service piping; underground electrical services,
and other utilities.
2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public
utilities serving Project site.
B. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the
Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where
indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions
affecting performance. Record observations.
1. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with
existing finishes or primers.
2. Examine roughing -in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of
connections before equipment and fixture installation.
3. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are
to be installed.
4. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to local utility operator that is necessary to
adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility
appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having
jurisdiction.
B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck
measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to
other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before
fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the
Work.
C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown
diagrammatically on Drawings.
D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for
clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control
of the Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect according to requirements in
Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."
3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT
A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on
Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are
discovered, Construction Manager promptly.
B. General:
EXECUTION 017300 - 3
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
Wolf Pen Creek Festival Park
1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of
construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project.
2. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain
required dimensions.
3. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply.
4. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses.
5. Notify Construction Manager when deviations from required lines and levels exceed
allowable tolerances.
6. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established
by authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill
and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and rim and invert elevations.
D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building
foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and
electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels.
Level foundations and piers from two or more locations.
E. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and
levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and
duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log
available for reference by Architect and Construction Manager.
3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING
A. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference
points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control
points during construction operations.
B. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two (2) benchmarks on Project site,
referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having
jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark.
Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record
Documents.
3.5 INSTALLATION
A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and
elevation, as indicated.
1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level.
2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance
and ease of removal for replacement.
3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in
applications indicated.
EXECUTION 017300 - 4
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek Festival Park
November 2010
C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results.
Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.
D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or
loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.
E. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.
F. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be
factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that
adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated
requirements.
G. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size
and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with
other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size
and type required for load conditions.
1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at
heights directed by Architect.
2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction.
3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and
directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and
items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver
such items to Project site in time for installation.
H. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated,
arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.
I. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered
hazardous.
3.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching.
Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.
Cut in -place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance
of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their
original condition.
B. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut.
C. Protection: Protect in -place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage.
Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be
exposed during cutting and patching operations.
D. Adjacent Occupied Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free
passage to adjoining areas.
EXECUTION 017300 - 5
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
Wolf Pen Creek Festival Park
E. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems
are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before
cutting to minimize interruption to occupied areas.
F. Cutting: Cut in -place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar
operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or
adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply
with original Installer's written recommendations.
1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not
hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with
minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.
2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces.
3. Concrete: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond -core drill.
4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 31
Sections where required by cutting and patching operations.
5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be
removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent
entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.
6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.
G. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations
following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as
practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other
Sections, where applicable.
Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to
demonstrate physical integrity of installation.
Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish
restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize evidence
of patching and refinishing.
H. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint,
mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces.
3.7 PROGRESS CLEANING
A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce
requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.
1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and
debris.
2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if
the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F.
3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste.
Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.
B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.
EXECUTION 017300 - 6
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
Wolf Pen Creek Festival Park
C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for
proper execution of the Work.
1. Remove liquid spills promptly.
2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom -clean or vacuum the
entire work area, as appropriate.
D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written
instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials
specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning
materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.
E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.
F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure
freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
G. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on -site. Do not wash waste materials
down sewers or into waterways.
H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining
materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from
damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.
I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through
the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure
operability without damaging effects.
J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the
construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise
deleterious exposure during the construction period.
3.8 STARTING AND ADJUSTING
A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove
malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.
B. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation
without binding.
C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties.
Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
D. Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Division 01 Section
"Quality Requirements."
EXECUTION 017300 - 7
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
Wolf Pen Creek Festival Park
3.9 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage
or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.
3.10 CORRECTION OF THE WORK
A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes.
1. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up
with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment.
B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition.
C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired
without visible evidence of repair.
D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components
that cannot be repaired.
E. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces.
END OF SECTION 017300
EXECUTION
017300 - 8
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
SECTION 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
Wolf Pen Creek Festival Park
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including,
but not limited to, the following:
1. Substantial Completion procedures.
2. Final completion procedures.
3. Warranties.
4. Final cleaning.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings,
Record Specifications, and Record Product Data.
2. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements
for the Work in those Sections.
1.2 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial
Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete with request.
1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on
the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete.
2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.
3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final
certifications, and similar documents.
4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to
services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar
releases.
5. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, final
completion construction photographic documentation, damage or settlement surveys,
property surveys, and similar final record information.
6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by
Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.
7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's
personnel of changeover in security provisions.
8. Complete startup testing of systems.
9. Submit test/adjust/balance records.
10. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups,
construction tools, and similar elements.
11. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities.
12. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and
maintenance.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 1
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
Wolf Pen Creek Festival Park
13. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting.
14. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual
defects.
B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of
request, Architect and Construction Manager will either proceed with inspection or notify
Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial
Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or
additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate
will be issued.
1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as
incomplete is completed or corrected.
2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion.
1.3 FINAL COMPLETION
A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining final completion,
complete the following:
1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 01 Section "Payment
Procedures."
2. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be
completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy
of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for
acceptance.
3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance
requirements.
4. Submit pest -control final inspection report and warranty.
5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,
equipment, and systems. Submit demonstration and training video recordings.
B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request,
Architect and Construction Manager will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of
unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection
or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate
will be issued.
Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as
incomplete is completed or corrected.
1.4 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)
A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by
construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if
necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.
1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and
proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 2
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek Festival Park
November 2010
2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling,
individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.
3. Submit list of incomplete items in the following format:
a. PDF electronic file.
1.5 WARRANTIES
A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of
the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is
indicated.
B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the
Project Manual.
1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl -covered, loose-leaf binders,
thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-I I -inch
paper.
2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic -covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark
tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or
installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone
number of Installer.
3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title
"WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor.
4. Scan warranties and bonds and assemble complete warranty and bond submittal package
into a single indexed electronic PDF file with links enabling navigation to each item.
Provide table of contents at beginning of document.
C. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or
fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially
hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.
Use cleaning products that meet Green Seal GS-37, or if GS-37 is not applicable, use
products that comply with the California Code of Regulations maximum allowable VOC
levels.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 3
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FINAL CLEANING
Wolf Pen Creek Festival Park
A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste -removal operations to comply
with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution
regulations.
B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each
surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and
maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification
of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project:
a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities,
including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other
foreign substances.
b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other
foreign deposits.
C. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even -textured
surface.
d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from
Project site.
e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building.
f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard -surfaced finishes to a dirt -free condition,
free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural
weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original
condition.
g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs,
plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.
h. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces.
i. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap;
shampoo if visible soil or stains remain.
j. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows.
Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision -obscuring materials.
Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish
mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.
k. Remove labels that are not permanent.
1. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces.
Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or
that already show evidence of repair or restoration.
1) Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification,
including mechanical and electrical nameplates.
in. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment and similar equipment.
Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign
substances.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 4
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
Wolf Pen Creek Festival Park
n. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede
operation or reduce longevity.
o. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains
resulting from water exposure.
p. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed
surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills.
q. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency.
Replace burned -out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and
defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply
with requirements for new fixtures.
r. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.
C. Pest Control: Engage an experienced, licensed exterminator to make a final inspection and rid
Project of rodents, insects, and other pests. Prepare a report.
END OF SECTION 017700
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 5
Approved — 112009
B/CS Unified Specifications
SECTION 02 41 13.13
REMOVAL OF EXISTING CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This item shall consist of breaking up, removing and satisfactorily disposing of existing
pavement along the right-of-way or at locations shown on the Plans.
1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
A. Existing pavement, concrete sidewalk and driveways, removed as prescribed above will be
measured by the square yard in its original position, regardless of its thickness or the depth
of covering.
B. Existing combined concrete curb and gutter and concrete curb, removed as prescribed
above, will be measured by the linear foot in its original position, regardless of its
thickness or the dimensions of same.
C. The work performed as prescribed by this item and measured as provided under
"Measurement", will be paid for at the unit price bid for "Removal of Existing Concrete"
(of the type specified), which price shall be full compensation for breaking up of the
concrete, loading, hauling, unloading and satisfactorily storing or disposing of the material.
Payment shall include all labor, tools and equipment to complete the work. Payment will
not be made for unauthorized work.
PART 2 — PRODUCTS
N/A
PART 3 — EXECUTION
3.1 CONSTRUCTION METHODS
A. Existing pavement (with or without bituminous top), sidewalk, driveway, curb, or
combined curb and gutter shall be broken up into pieces not greater than eighteen (18)
inches in any dimension by air -driven machinery or other suitable means. The use of
explosives will not be permitted.
B. Where only a portion of the existing concrete is to be removed, special care shall be
exercised to avoid damage to that portion of the concrete to remain in place. The existing
concrete shall be cut to the neat lines shown on the Plans or established by the Engineer.
Any existing concrete beyond the neat lines so established which is damaged or destroyed
by these operations shall be replaced at the Contractor's expense.
C. Existing pavement, which is to be removed, shall be loaded, hauled and neatly stored at
designated sites, or otherwise disposed of as directed by the Engineer. Work performed
under this item shall be inaugurated at such times and prosecuted in such manner as to
cause minimum inconvenience to traffic or to the owners of adjacent property.
END OF SECTION
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Park
SECTION 033000 - CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 specification sections, apply to this section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes cast -in -place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials,
mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for drainage fill under slabs -on -grade.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture.
C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and
placement.
D. Formwork Shop Drawings: Prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified professional
engineer detailing fabrication, assembly, and support of formwork.
E. Welding certificates.
F. Material certificates.
G. Material test reports.
H. Floor surface flatness and levelness measurements.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready -mixed concrete
products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and
equipment.
1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete
Production Facilities."
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - I
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.
C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS DIA/D IAM,
"Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel."
D. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract
Documents:
1. ACI 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete," Sections 1 through 5.
2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials."
E. Concrete Testing Service: A qualified independent testing agency shall be engaged by the Owner
to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures.
F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 FORM -FACING MATERIALS
A. Smooth -Formed Finished Concrete: Form -facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and
smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.
B. Rough -Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material.
Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.
2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed.
B. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening
reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel
wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice.
2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and
source, throughout Project:
1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type 1/Il.
a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F or C.
B. Normal -Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, graded.
1. Maximum Coarse -Aggregate Size: 1 inch (25 mm) nominal.
CAST-M-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 2
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.
C. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable.
2.4 ADMIXTURES
A. Air -Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.
B. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other
admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in
hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.
1. Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A.
2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B.
3. Water -Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D.
4. High -Range, Water -Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G.
2.5 VAPOR RETARDERS
A. Sheet Vapor Retarder: Polyethylene sheet, ASTM D 4397, not less than 10 mils (0.25 mm) thick.
2.6 CURING MATERIALS
A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application
to fresh concrete.
B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing
approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. (305 g/sq. m) when dry.
C. Moisture -Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap -polyethylene sheet.
D. Water: Potable.
E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane -Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B,
dissipating.
F. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane -Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B,
nondissipating, certified by curing compound manufacturer to not interfere with bonding of floor
covering.
G. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane -Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, Type 1,
Class A.
2.7 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Expansion- and Isolation -Joint -Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt -saturated cellulosed fiber or
ASTM D 1752, cork or self -expanding cork.
B. Water stops: Synco-Flex or approved equal.
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 3
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
2.8 CONCRETE MIXTURES
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of
laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301.
B. Cementitious Materials: Use fly ash, pozzolan, ground granulated blast -furnace slag, and silica
fume as needed to reduce the total amount of Portland cement, which would otherwise be used,
by not less than 40 percent.
C. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Use water -reducing, high -range water -reducing or plasticizing admixture in concrete, as
required, for placement and workability.
2. Use water -reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low
humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.
3. Use water -reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy -use industrial slabs
and parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a water-
cementitious materials ratio below 0.50.
D. Proportion normal -weight concrete mixture as follows:
1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 3500 psi at 28 days.
2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: Bellow 0.50
3. Slump Limit:
a. 5 inches (125 mm) for Slabs, ramps, and sloping surfaces.
b. No less than 3inches and not more than 5 inches for reinforced foundation
systems.
c. 8 inches (200 mm) for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4 inches (50 to 100
mm) before adding high -range water -reducing admixture or plasticizing
admixture, plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).
4. Air Content: 5.5 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 1-1/2-inch (38-
mm) nominal maximum aggregate size.
5. Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 3/4-inch (19-mm)
nominal maximum aggregate size.
6. Air Content: Do not allow air content of trowel -finished floors to exceed 3 percent.
2.9 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT
A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."
2.10 CONCRETE MIXING
A. Ready -Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to
ASTM C 94/C 94M and ASTM C 1116/C 1116M, and furnish batch ticket information.
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 4
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg C), reduce mixing and
delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32
deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FORMWORK
A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical,
lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can
support such loads.
B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation,
and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.
C. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete, unless otherwise indicated.
3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS
A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is
attached to or supported by cast -in -place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,
instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
3.3 VAPOR RETARDERS
A. Sheet Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair sheet vapor retarder according to
ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Lap joints 6 inches (150 mm) and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape.
3.4 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement.
1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before
placing concrete.
3.5 JOINTS
A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.
B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations
indicated or as approved by Architect.
C. Contraction Joints in Slabs -on -Grade: Form weakened -plane contraction joints, sectioning
concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-
fourth of concrete thickness as follows:
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 5
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each
edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch (3.2 mm). Repeat grooving of contraction joints after
applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces.
Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive
or diamond -rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- (3.2-mm-) wide joints into concrete when cutting
action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops
random contraction cracks.
D. Isolation Joints in Slabs -on -Grade: After removing formwork, install joint -filler strips at slab
junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and
other locations, as indicated.
E. Waterstops: Install in construction joints and at other joints indicated according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items
is complete and that required inspections have been performed.
B. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new
concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of
weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated.
Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.
1. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301.
C. Cold -Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1.
D. Hot -Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301.
3.7 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES
A. Rough -Formed Finish: As -cast concrete texture imparted by form -facing material with tie holes
and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits
on formed -surface irregularities.
1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view (underground).
B. Smooth -Formed Finish: As -cast concrete texture imparted by form -facing material, arranged in
an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and
defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed -surface
irregularities.
1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view.
C. Rubbed Finish: Apply the following to smooth -formed finished as -cast concrete where indicated:
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 6
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
1. Smooth -Rubbed Finish: Not later than one day after form removal, moisten concrete surfaces
and rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive until producing a uniform color and
texture. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing process.
2. Grout -Cleaned Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply grout of a consistency of thick paint
to coat surfaces and fill small holes. Mix one part portland cement to one and one-half parts
fine sand with a 1:1 mixture of bonding admixture and water. Add white Portland cement in
amounts determined by trial patches so color of dry grout will match adjacent surfaces.
Scrub grout into voids and remove excess grout. When grout whitens, rub surface with clean
burlap and keep surface damp by fog spray for at least 36 hours.
3. Cork -Floated Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply a stiff grout. Mix one part Portland
cement and one part fine sand with a 1:1 mixture of bonding agent and water. Add white
Portland cement in amounts determined by trial patches so color of dry grout will match
adjacent surfaces. Compress grout into voids by grinding surface. In a swirling motion,
finish surface with a cork float.
D. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces
adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed
surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent
unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
3.8 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS
A. General: Comply with ACI302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and
finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.
B. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power -driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or
inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat
float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture.
1. Apply float finish to surfaces indicated.
C. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand
or power -driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel
marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would
telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings.
1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces indicated.
2. Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an unleveled,
freestanding, 10-ft.- (3.05-m-) long straightedge resting on two high spots and placed
anywhere on the surface does not exceed 1/8 inch (3.2 mm).
D. Trowel and Fine -Broom Finish: Apply a first trowel finish to surfaces indicated and where
ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed by either thickset or thin -set method. While concrete is
still plastic, slightly scarify surface with a fine broom.
1. Comply with flatness and levelness tolerances for trowel -finished floor surfaces.
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 7
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Park
E. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, ramps, and elsewhere
as indicated.
3.9 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold -weather protection and ACI 301 for hot -weather
protection during curing.
B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or
windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h (1 kg/sq. m x h) before and
during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing,
screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.
C. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods:
1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days.
2. Moisture -Retaining -Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture -retaining cover for
curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12
inches (300 mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven
days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and
waterproof tape.
3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller
according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall
within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage
during curing period.
a. Removal: After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without damaging
concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound manufacturer unless
manufacturer certifies curing compound will not interfere with bonding of floor covering
used on Project.
4. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a
continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial
application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity of
coating and repair damage during curing period.
3.10 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS
A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and
replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval.
3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform
field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 8
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
1. Payment for these services shall be made by Owner.
2. Retesting of materials failing to comply with specified requirements shall be done at
Contractor's expense.
END OF SECTION 033000
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 9
Revised—1012009 B/CS Unified Specifications
SECTION 03 30 01
CONCRETE BLOCKING OR ANCHORAGE
(Sentences and/or paragraphs that are double underlined indicate revisions that were made from the
2008 specification.)
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This section covers the manufacture of materials and installation of concrete blocking or
anchorage for thrust resistance. Concrete blocking shall be placed at bends, tees, crosses,
fire hydrants, plugs, etc. in the supply line. Blocking shall also be installed for blow -offs as
shown on the plans or as directed by the Engineer.
1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
A. Restrained joints, fittings, and concrete blocking shall not be a separate bid item. Cost for
work herein specified, including the furnishing of all materials, equipment, labor, and
incidentals necessary to complete the work, shall be included in the unit price for water or
sanitary sewer lines in place.
PART 2 — PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Cement shall conform to the current ASTM C 150 standard and be Type I.
B. Aggregates shall conform to the current ASTM C33 standard.
C. Concrete strength shall be at least 2,000 psi at twenty-eight (28) days, unless otherwise
shown on the plans. Concrete for blocking shall be of a quality and placed in accordance
with SECTION 03 30 00 — CONCRETE. The concrete for blocking shall be class 2,000
psi concrete (class "C").
D. 3,000 psi sack-crete may be used but must be hydrated prior to placement.
PART 3 — EXECUTION
3.1 CONSTRUCTION METHODS
A. THRUST RESTRAINT
Hydrants
The bowl of each hydrant shall be well braced against a sufficient area of
unexcavated earth at the end of the trench with concrete blocking, or it shall be tied to
the pipe with restrained joints as shown or directed by the City.
Tie rods, clamps, or other components of dissimilar metal shall be protected against
corrosion by encasement of the entire assembly with 8-mil thick, loose polyethylene
film in accordance with AWWA C105.
Thrust restraint design pressure should be equal to 200 psi.
Revised—1012009
B/CS Unified Specifications
Fittings
The contractor shall install concrete blocking and retaining glands to all tees, Y-
branches, bends deflecting eleven and one-fourth degrees (11 '/4°) or more, and plugs
which are subject to internal pressure in excess of 10 psi. to preclude separation of
joints.
If stainless steel is not used, the contractor shall protect from corrosion all steel
clamps, rods, and other metal accessories used in reaction anchorages, or joint
harnesses subject to submergence, or in direct contact with earth and not encased in
concrete with epoxy coating or wrapped with 8 mil. polyethylene film. All bolts and
nuts shall be 316 Stainless Steel.
Restraint Materials
Vertical and horizontal reaction blocking shall be made of concrete having a
compressive strength of not less than 2,000 psi after twenty-eight (28) days.
Blocking shall be placed between solid ground and the fitting to be anchored; the
area of bearing in the pipe and on the ground in each instance shall be that shown on
the plans or directed by the City. The blocking shall, unless otherwise shown or
directed, be so located as to contain the resultant thrust force, and so that the pipe and
fitting joints will be accessible for repair.
Mechanical joints utilizing set -screw retainer glands (DIP only, use Megalug or pre -
approved equal for PVC), or metal harness of tie rods or clamps shall be used in
addition to concrete blocking. Components of dissimilar metal shall be protected
against corrosion by encasement of the entire assembly with 8-mil thick, loose
polyethylene film in accordance with AWWA C105.
B. PLACING CONCRETE BLOCKING
Extend 2,000 psi concrete blocking from the fitting to solid, undisturbed earth and install so
that all joints are accessible for repair. The bearing area shall be as shown on the plans. If
no details regarding blocking are shown on the plans, provide enough concrete bearing
against the ditch to limit soil loading to 200 psf from the thrust produced at an internal
pressure in the pipe of 200 psi.
Concrete shall not be placed unless all pipes, valves, fittings, forms, and reinforcement
have been inspected.
Handle all concrete in such a manner to avoid segregation, separation, or loss of ingredient,
or the displacement of piping, etc.
Place concrete in continuous horizontal layers not exceeding 24". Place each layer quickly
enough so that the previously placed concrete is still plastic when the next layer is placed.
Provide any construction joints that are necessary.
Before beginning the placement of concrete, inspect all forms, pipes, fittings, valves, etc.
for alignment and rigidity. Tighten all supports and make corrections to alignment as
required. Inspect all reinforcement, if any, for placement and rigidity.
Do not begin placing concrete until all forms and reinforcement have been inspected by the
Engineer.
Revised — 1012009
B/CS Unified Specifications
Clean all loose dirt, mud, water, and debris from the trench and forms. All surface
encrusted with hardened concrete form previous placement operations shall be clean.
Clean all pipe, fittings, valves, etc. projecting from previously placed concrete before
placing new concrete.
Accurately and securely place all embedded items.
END OF SECTION
Approved - 112009
B/CS Unified Specifications
SECTION 03 34 00
GROUT FILL EXISTING LINE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This item shall govern the grout filling of existing lines where specified and/or shown on
the Plans. All work shall conform to this specification
1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
A. Where "Grout Fill Existing Line" is measured for payment the unit of measurement will be
linear feet of line grouted, complete and in place. Payment shall be at the unit price bid in
the Proposal. Unless otherwise specified or directed, mortar and/or grout will not be
measured as pay quantities but will be included in the unit price bid for the specific item or
items into which they are incorporated as set forth in the bid Proposal. The price for this
item shall be full compensation for furnishing all equipment, labor, materials, tools and
incidentals necessary to complete the work.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Mix Design
B. Work Plan
PART 2 — PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Materials shall conform to SECTION 04 05 12 - MORTAR AND GROUT
PART 3 — EXECUTION
3.1 CONSTRUCTION METHODS
A. EXECUTION
Prior to grout filling the line, the Contractor shall verify that no live services remain
connected to the line. Services found during this procedure shall be paid for using the
"Sanitary Sewer Service" item. All live services shall be reconnected to an adjoining main
line.
"Grout Fill Existing Line" shall require that an existing underground conduit (pipe,
waterline, sewer line, storm drain line, etc.) be completely filled with a low strength
cement grout. In order to achieve this, the grout to be pumped into the line shall have a
consistency that will permit forced flow into the entire length of line. Blocking the line by
intermediate excavation and gravity flow concrete or grout is NOT acceptable. The
existing line to be grout filled shall be exposed and plugged with concrete bulkheads at
both ends. In some cases this will require the excavation of the existing line and that the
pipe be broken open. 3" Schedule 40 PVC shall extend through the bulkhead and using a
90 degree elbow extend up to the surface on both ends of the line to be grouted. The
concrete grout shall be pumped through the 3" PVC until the grout is visible at the other
Approved - 112009
B/CS Unified Specifications
end of the conduit through the 3" PVC. No more than 15 psi shall be used to pump the
grout mixture, and care should be used to avoid grout filling adjoining voids.
B. ALTERNATE EXECUTION
At the option of the Contractor, the existing line may be removed from the ground and
disposed of properly. Hazardous materials removed from the ground shall require a receipt
from a site certified to accept hazardous material. When this option is used, the surface
must be restored to existing or better condition per the drawing details for trench
embedment. Restoration of the trench and surface is subsidiary to the price of "Grout Fill
Existing Line."
C. COMPOSITION
The proportions by volume or weight of cement, fine aggregate and water shall produce a
plastic mixture. The degree of workability shall be consistent with the use to which the
mixture is placed, and shall be pre -approved by the Engineer. The mix shall contain no
course or medium aggregates and shall contain at least two sacks of cement per cubic yard
of grout.
D. EQUIPMENT
All equipment, tools and machinery used in handling and mixing grout shall meet the
approval of the Engineer. Grout shall be machine mixed in a batch type mixer.
E. REJECTION
"Grout Fill Existing Line" may be rejected for failure to meet any of the requirements of
the Specifications, and specifically for:
1. Failure to successfully pump grout to the other end of the line.
2. Grout attaining initial set before use.
3. Improper mixing.
If the grout filling is rejected because of "A", all line not filled shall be removed from the
ground and the trench repaired per the drawing details for trench embedment at the
Contractor's expense.
END OF SECTION
2
Approved - 112009
B/CS Unified Specifications
SECTION 04 05 12
MORTAR AND GROUT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Mortar and grout where specified and/or shown on the Plans shall conform to this section
of the Specifications. Mortar and grout shall be designated by type as set forth. The uses
and purposes of said types shall be consistent with the uses and purposes as designated.
For grout filling existing lines please refer to SECTION 03 34 00 — GROUT FILL
EXISTING LINE.
1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
A. Where mortar and/or grout are measured for payment the unit of measurement will be
cubic yards of mortar and/or grout, complete and in place. Payment shall be at the unit
price bid in the Proposal. However, unless otherwise specified or directed, mortar and/or
grout will not be measured as pay quantities but will be included in the unit price bid for
the specific item or items into which they are incorporated as set forth in the bid proposal.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Mix Design
PART 2 — PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. MASONRY MORTAR shall be composed of fine aggregate thoroughly mixed with
cement and water. The mixture produced shall be homogeneous with a consistency
required for ease of handling and spreading by a trowel.
B. STANDARD GROUT shall have a consistency that will permit flow into the joints,
completely filling them.
C. PIPE JOINT MORTAR shall have consistency and workability for use as dictated by
accepted practices and/or as required for specific job conditions.
D. NEAT CEMENT GROUT shall be composed of Portland Cement and water mixed to the
consistency required for specific job conditions.
2.2 TESTING REQUIRMENTS
Mortar and grout may be rejected for failure to meet any of the requirements of the
Specifications, and specifically for:
A. Retempered mortar and/or grout.
B. Mortar and grout attaining initial set before use.
C. Improper mixing.
D. Mortar and grout containing frozen aggregates.
E. Mortar and grout subjected to freezing within three (3) days after being placed in the work.
Approved - 112009
B/CS Unified Specifications
PART 3 — EXECUTION
3.1 CONSTRUCTION METHODS
The proportions by volume or weight of cement, fine aggregate and water shall produce a plastic
mixture. The degree of workability shall be consistent with the use to which the mixture is
placed, and shall be pre -approved by the Engineer.
A. CEMENT: Cement used in mortar and grout shall be Type I or Type III Portland Cement
which shall conform to the current ASTM Designation C-150.
B. FINE AGGREGATE: Fine aggregate to be used in mortar and grout shall consist of sand
or a mixture of sands, with or without a mineral filler. The sand or mixture of sands in fine
aggregate shall consist of clean, hard, durable, uncoated grains, free from lumps. Fine
aggregate shall not contain deleterious substances in excess of the following percentages
by weight:
Material removed by decantation ................... 3.0%
Claylumps......................................................0.5%
Other deleterious substances .......................... 2.0%
(such as coal, shale, coated grains, and soft, flaky particles)
Fine aggregate shall be free from an excess of harmful salts or alkali. When subjected to the
color test for organic impurities the sand or mixture of sands shall not show a color darker
than the standard color. The fine aggregate shall be well graded from coarse to fine, and
when tested by laboratory methods shall meet the following requirements for percentages by
weight:
Retained on 3/8 inch screen ............................ 0%
Retained on 1/4 inch screen ............................0 - 5%
Retained on No. 20 mesh sieve ......................15 - 50%
Retained on No. 100 mesh sieve .................... 85 - 100%
Combining two sands of different gradations may be the most economical way to meet these
specifications. If this is done, each sand shall be separately and accurately measured by
volume or weight in such proportions as the Engineer may direct. Sands and mineral filler
shall not be mixed prior to batching. Mineral filler and the use of it shall be pre -approved by
the Engineer. In no case shall the added amount of mineral filler exceed ten (10) percent of
the weight of the fine aggregate. The mineral filler, when tested by laboratory methods, shall
meet the following percentages by weight:
Retained on No. 20 mesh sieve ..................... 0%
Retained on No. 30 mesh sieve ..................... 0 - 5%
Retained on No. 100 mesh sieve .................... 0 - 30%
C. WATER: Water for use in mortar and grout shall be reasonably clean and free from
injurious amounts of oil, acid, alkali, organic matter or other deleterious substances. Water
suitable for drinking or ordinary household uses may be considered acceptable for use in
mortar and grout.
2
Approved - 112009 B/CS Unified Specifications
D. EQUIPMENT
All equipment, tools and machinery used in handling and mixing mortar and grout shall
meet the approval of the Engineer. Mortar and grout shall be machine mixed when the
amount required justifies machine mixing. Machine mixers shall be of the batch type.
E. MIXING
Mortar and grout shall be mixed only in the quantities required for immediate use. Where
machine mixing is indicated or directed, the fine aggregate along with the cement and
water shall be measured separately, introduced into the mixer, and mixed for a period of
time of not less than one and one-half (1 1/2) minutes. This is the time measured from the
entry of the last aggregate into the drum until the discharging of mortar or grout. The
required water shall be introduced into the mixing drum during the first fifteen (15)
seconds of mixing. The entire contents of the drum shall be discharged before introducing
any materials for the succeeding batch. Any hand mixing as pre -approved by the Engineer
shall be done in a pre -approved watertight box, and the sequence of mixing operations
shall be as follows:
The box shall first be filled with the required amount of sand; the sand shall be
leveled with the required amount of cement spread uniformly on top of the sand;
the materials shall then be dry mixed by turning not less than three (3) times
with a mortar hoe; the required amount of water shall then be added and the hoe
mixing continued until the batch is of uniform color and consistency.
All mortar and grout shall be used within one (1) hour after mixing or before any
visible signs of setting become discernible. Retempering of mortar or grout will
not be permitted.
The types, uses and proportions of mortar and grout shall be as follows:
TYPES
USES
SACKS OF
CEMENT
CUBIC FEET OF
FINE AGGREGATE
"A"
Masonry mortar
1
2
"B"
Standard grout
1
3
"C"
Pipe joint mortar
1
1
"D"
Neat cement grout
1
none
F. ADMIXTURES
Lime may be added to increase workability in an amount not to exceed ten (10) percent of
the cement content of the masonry mortar. Admixtures for the purposes of curing,
accelerating the setting, or lowering the freezing point will not be permitted.
END OF SECTION
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Park
SECTION 042300 - GLASS UNIT MASONRY
PART I - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 specification sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Glass block set in mortar.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Samples: Glass -block units.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire -Rated Glass Unit Masonry Assemblies: Assemblies listed by a testing and inspecting
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire -protection ratings indicated, based
on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 257.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GLASS BLOCK
A. Hollow Glass Block: Hollow units made from transparent glass, with manufacturer's standard
edge coating.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Mulia Inc. (Distributed by Glass Blocks Unlimited and Mulia, Inc.).
b. Nippon Electric Glass Co., Ltd. (Distributed by Glass Blocks Unlimited and
Nippon Electric Glass America, Inc.).
C. Oberland Glas AG, Bauglas Div.; Solaris Glasstein (Distributed by Glass Blocks
Unlimited and North America Glass).
d. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation.
e. Seves (Distributed by Glass Blocks Unlimited, International Product Supply, and
Seves North America).
GLASS UNIT MASONRY 042300 - 1
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
f. J. Weck GmbH (Distributed by Glashaus, Inc. and Glass Blocks Unlimited).
2. Glass Color: Colorless.
3. Pattern: Equal to Pittsburgh Corning "Icescapes"
4. Edge -Coating Color: White
5. Sizes: Manufacturer's standard sizes corresponding to nominal sizes indicated on
Drawings.
6. Thick -Faced Block: Units with faces at least 3/4 inch (19 min) thick.
2.2 MORTAR MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I. Provide natural color or white cement as required to
produce mortar color indicated.
1. Where joints are indicated to be raked out and pointed, gray cement may be used for
setting mortar.
B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.
C. Aggregate: ASTM C 144, with 100 percent passing No. 8 (2.36-mm) sieve.
1. For pointing mortar and joints narrower than 1/4 inch (6 mm), use aggregate graded with
100 percent passing No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve.
2. White Aggregates: Natural white sand or crushed white stone.
3. Colored Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone of color necessary to produce
required mortar color.
D. Water -Repellent Admixture at Exterior: Stearic water-repellent compound.
E. Water: Potable.
2.3 MORTAR MIXES
A. General: Do not use admixtures unless otherwise indicated.
1. For mortar in exterior panels, use water-repellent admixture according to admixture
manufacturer's written instructions.
2. Limit cementitious materials in mortar to Portland cement and lime.
B. Mortar for Glass Unit Masonry Assemblies: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion
Specification for Type S mortar.
C. Pigmented Mortar: Use colored cement product or select and proportion pigments with other
ingredients to produce color required. Do not add pigments to colored cement products.
D. Colored -Aggregate Mortar: Produce required mortar color by using colored aggregates and
natural color or white cement as necessary to produce required mortar color.
GLASS UNIT MASONRY 042300 - 2
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Park
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLING GLASS BLOCK WITH MORTAR
A. Set glass block with completely filled bed and head joints, with no furrowing, accurately spaced
and coordinated with other construction. Maintain 3/8-inch (10-mm) exposed joint widths
unless otherwise indicated.
B. Install panel anchors at locations indicated and in same horizontal joints where panel
reinforcement occurs. Extend panel anchors at least 12 inches (300 min) into joints, and bend
within expansion joints at edges of panels and across the head. Attach panel anchors as
indicated.
C. Use plastic spacers in mortar joints to produce uniform joint widths and to prevent mortar from
being squeezed out of joints.
D. Rake out joints indicated to be pointed to a uniform depth sufficient to accommodate pointing
material, but not less than joint width.
Point joints at both faces of exterior panels with mortar.
E. Point joints with mortar by filling raked joints and voids. Place and compact pointing mortar in
layers not more than 3/8 inch (10 mm) thick. Compact each layer thoroughly and allow to
become thumbprint hard before applying next layer.
Tool exposed joints slightly concave when pointing mortar is thumbprint hard. Use a
smooth plastic jointer larger than joint width.
3.2 CLEANING
A. Perform final cleaning of glass unit masonry assemblies when surface is not exposed to direct
sunlight. Start at top of panel using generous amounts of clean water. Remove water with
clean, dry, soft cloths; change cloths frequently to eliminate dried mortar particles and
aggregate.
END OF SECTION 042300
GLASS UNIT MASONRY 042300 - 3
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
SECTION 048100 - UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 specification sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes unit masonry assemblies consisting of the following:
1. Concrete masonry units (CMUs).
2. Burnished Face CMU.
3. Glazed concrete masonry units.
4. Mortar and grout.
5. Reinforcing steel.
6. Masonry joint reinforcement.
7. Ties and anchors.
8. Miscellaneous masonry accessories.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 7 Section "Water Repellents" for water repellents applied to unit masonry
assemblies.
2. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealing control and expansion joints in unit
masonry.
3. Division 4 Section "Cast Stone".
C. Products installed, but not furnished, under this Section include the following:
1. Cast -stone trim, furnished under Division 4 Section "Cast Stone."
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: For the following:
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 048100 - 1
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
1. Masonry Units: Show sizes, profiles, coursing, and locations of special shapes.
2. Reinforcing Steel: Detail bending and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars.
Comply with ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement." Show
elevations of reinforced walls.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For the following:
1. Colored mortar.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of the following:
1. Burnished Face CMU, (only one).
2. Structural Glazed Tile
3. Pigmented and colored -aggregate mortar. Make Samples using same sand and mortar
ingredients to be used on Project. Label Samples to indicate types and amounts of
pigments used.
E. Qualification Data: For testing agency.
F. Material Certificates: Include statements of material properties indicating compliance with
requirements including compliance with standards and type designations within standards.
Provide for each type and size of the following:
1. Masonry units.
2. Cementitious materials. Include brand, type, and name of manufacturer.
3. Preblended, dry mortar mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients.
4. Grout mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients.
5. Reinforcing bars.
6. Joint reinforcement.
7. Anchors, ties, and metal accessories.
G. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and proportions of
ingredients.
1. Include test reports, per ASTM C 780, for mortar mixes required to comply with property
specification.
2. Include test reports, per ASTM C 1019, for grout mixes required to comply with
compressive strength requirement.
H. Cold -Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and equipment to be
used to comply with cold -weather requirements.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to ASTM C 1093
for testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 048100 - 2
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Park
B. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and
color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, through one
source from a single manufacturer for each product required.
C. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality,
including color for exposed masonry, from a single manufacturer for each cementitious
component and from one source or producer for each aggregate.
D. Sample Panels: Build sample panels to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality
Requirements" for mockups.
1. Build sample panels for each type of exposed unit masonry construction in sizes
approximately 48 inches (1200 mm) long by 48 inches (1200 mm) by full thickness.
2. Clean one-half of exposed faces of panels with masonry cleaner indicated.
3. Protect approved sample panels from the elements with weather -resistant membrane.
4. Approval of sample panels is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units;
relationship of mortar and sealant colors to masonry unit colors; tooling of joints;
aesthetic qualities of workmanship; and other material and construction qualities
specifically approved by Architect in writing.
a. Approval of sample panels does not constitute approval of deviations from the
Contract Documents contained in sample panels unless such deviations are
specifically approved by Architect in writing.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an
enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If
units become wet, do not install until they are dry.
B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not
use cementitious materials that have become damp.
C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and
contamination avoided.
D. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture -resistant containers designed for lifting and
emptying into dispensing silo. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on
elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location or in a metal dispensing silo with
weatherproof cover.
E. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt
and oil.
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 048100 - 3
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Park
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with
waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when
construction is not in progress.
1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm) down both sides and hold cover
securely in place.
2. Where 1 wythe of multiwythe masonry walls is completed in advance of other wythes,
secure cover a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm) down face next to unconstructed wythe
and hold cover in place.
B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least
3 days after building masonry walls or columns.
C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left
exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such
masonry.
1. Protect base of walls from rain -splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading
coverings on ground and over wall surface.
2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings.
3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and
integral finishes, from mortar droppings.
4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from
splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry.
D. Cold -Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice
or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost
or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold -weather construction requirements contained in
ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
1. Cold -Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40
deg F (4 deg C) and above and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than 7
days after completing cleaning.
E. Hot -Weather Requirements: Comply with hot -weather construction requirements contained in
ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified.
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 048100 - 4
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Park
2. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
manufacturers specified.
2.2 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL
A. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to
exceed tolerances and to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the
standard. Do not uses units where such defects, including dimensions that vary from specified
dimensions by more than stated tolerances, will be exposed in the completed Work or will
impair the quality of completed masonry.
2.3 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS (CMUs)
A. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and as follows:
Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints, headers,
bonding, and other special conditions.
Provide square -edged units for outside corners, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 90.
Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net -area compressive
strength of 1900 psi (13.1 Mpa).
Weight Classification: Lightweight, unless otherwise indicated.
Size (Width): Manufactured to dimensions 3/8 inch less than nominal dimensions.
2.4 MASONRY LINTELS
A. Masonry Lintels: Prefabricated or built -in -place masonry lintels made from bond beam
concrete masonry units with reinforcing bars placed as indicated and filled with coarse grout.
Cure precast lintels before handling and installing. Temporarily support built -in -place lintels
until cured.
2.5 GLAZED CONCRETE MASONY UNITS
A. Available Product: Spectra -Glaze II prefaced concrete masonry units licensed by The Burns
and Russell Co., Baltimore, MD, or approved equal subject to specification requirements.
B. Sizes: 8 x 16 nominal including'/4" exposed face joints with face scored to resemble 8 x8 face.
C. Colors: Selected from full range of manufacturer's colors.
D. Shapes: Provide shape to suit project conditions.
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 048100 - 5
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
2.6 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
A. Portland Cement -Lime Mix: Packaged blend of Portland cement complying with ASTM C 150,
Type I, and hydrated lime complying with ASTM C 207, Type S.
B. Colored Cement Product: Packaged blend made from Portland cement and lime and mortar
pigments, all complying with specified requirements, and containing no other ingredients.
1. Formulate blend as required to produce color indicated or, if not indicated, as selected
from manufacturer's standard colors.
2. Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of Portland cement by weight.
3. Available Products:
a. Colored Portland Cement -Lime Mix:
1) Capital Materials Corporation; Riverton Portland Cement Lime Custom
Color.
2) Holcim (US) Inc.; Rainbow Mortamix Custom Color Cement/Lime.
3) Lafarge North America Inc.; Eaglebond.
4) Lehigh Cement Company; Lehigh Custom Color Portland/Lime Cement.
C. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144.
1. For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand or
crushed stone.
2. For joints less than inch (6.5 mm) thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing
the No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve.
3. White -Mortar Aggregates: Natural white sand or crushed white stone.
D. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.
E. Water: Potable.
2.7 REINFORCEMENT
A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M, Grade 60
(Grade 420).
B. Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951.
1. Interior Walls: Hot -dip galvanized, carbon steel.
2. Exterior Walls: Hot -dip galvanized, carbon steel.
3. Wire Size for Side Rods: W 1.7 or 0.148-inch (3.8-mm) diameter.
4. Wire Size for Cross Rods: W 1.7 or 0.148-inch (3.8-mm) diameter.
5. Wire Size for Veneer Ties: W2.8 or 0.188-inch (4.8-mm) diameter.
6. Spacing of Cross Rods, Tabs, and Cross Ties: Not more than 16 inches (407 mm) o.c.
7. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet (3 m), with prefabricated corner and tee units.
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 048100 - 6
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Park
C. Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Single-Wythe Masonry: Either ladder or truss type with single
pair of side rods.
D. Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Multi-wythe Masonry:
1. Ladder type with 1 side rod at each face shell of hollow masonry units more than 4 inches
(100 mm) in width, plus 1 side rod at each wythe of masonry 4 inches (100 mm) or less
in width.
2.8 TIES AND ANCHORS
A. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in subsequent paragraphs that are made from
materials that comply with eight subparagraphs below, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Hot -Dip Galvanized, Carbon -Steel Wire: ASTM A 82; with ASTM A 153/A 153M,
Class B-2 coating.
B. Wire Ties, General: Unless otherwise indicated, size wire ties to extend at least halfway
through veneer but with at least 5/8-inch (16-mm) cover on outside face. Outer ends of wires
are bent 90 degrees and extend 2 inches (50 mm) parallel to face of veneer.
C. Individual Wire Ties: Rectangular units with closed ends and not less than 4 inches (100 mm)
wide.
1. Z-shaped ties with ends bent 90 degrees to provide hooks not less than 2 inches (50 mm)
long may be used for masonry constructed from solid units or hollow units laid with cells
horizontal.
2. Where wythes do not align or are of different materials, use adjustable ties with pintle-
and-eye connections having a maximum adjustment of 1-1/4 inches (32 mm).
3. Wire: Fabricate from 3/16-inch- (4.8-mm-) diameter, hot -dip galvanized steel wire.
2.9 MISCELLANEOUS ANCHORS
A. Anchor Bolts: Headed or L-shaped steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A
(ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where
indicated, flat washers; hot -dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C; of
dimensions indicated.
2.10 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES
A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1;
compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from neoprene,
urethane or PVC.
B. Preformed Control -Joint Gaskets: Made from styrene-butadiene-rubber compound, complying
with ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805 or PVC, complying with ASTM D 2287,
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 048100 - 7
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Park
Type PVC-65406 and designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in
masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated.
C. Bond -Breaker Strips: Asphalt -saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226,
Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt).
D. Reinforcing Bar Positioners: Wire units designed to fit into mortar bed joints spanning masonry
unit cells with loops for holding reinforcing bars in center of cells. Units are formed from
0.142-inch (3.6-mm) steel wire, hot -dip galvanized after fabrication. Provide units with either
two loops or four loops as needed for number of bars indicated.
Available Products:
a. Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; D/A 810, D/A 812 or
D/A 817.
b. Heckmann Building Products Inc.; No. 376 Rebar Positioner.
C. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; #RB or #RB-Twin Rebar Positioner.
d. Wire -Bond; O-Ring or Double O-Ring Rebar Positioner.
2.11 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES
A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air -entraining agents, accelerators,
retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.
2. Limit cementitious materials in mortar to portland cement and lime.
B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix.
Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients
before delivering to Project site.
C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. Provide the
following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated or needed to
provide required compressive strength of masonry.
1. For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type M.
2. For reinforced masonry, use Type N
3. For mortar parge coats, use Type N.
4. For exterior, above -grade, load -bearing and non -load -bearing walls and parapet walls; for
interior load -bearing walls; for interior non -load -bearing partitions; and for other
applications where another type is not indicated, use Type N.
D. Pigmented Mortar: Use colored cement product
E. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476.
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 048100 - 8
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will
comply with Table 1.15.1 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces
and pour height.
2. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches (200 to 280 mm) as measured according to
ASTM C 143/C 143M.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.
1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental
to performance of work.
2. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified.
3. Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed.
B. Before installation, examine rough -in and built-in construction for piping systems to verify
actual locations of piping connections.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to full thickness
shown. Build single-wythe walls to actual widths of masonry units, using units of widths
indicated.
B. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections.
C. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing
equipment, complete masonry to match the construction immediately adjacent to opening.
D. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous
pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor -driven saws; provide clean, sharp,
unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install
cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.
E. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and
textures.
Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed.
F. Comply with construction tolerances in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 and with the following:
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 048100 - 9
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
1. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and
expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3
min in 3 m), '/4 inch in 20 feet (6 min in 6 m), or % inch (12 min) maximum.
2. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than '/4
inch in 10 feet (6 min in 3 m), or '/2 inch (12 min) maximum.
3. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary
from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 min in 3 m), '/4 inch in 20 feet (6 min in 6
m), or '/z inch (12 mm) maximum.
3.3 LAYING MASONRY WALLS
A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint
thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement -type joints, returns, and offsets.
Avoid using less -than -half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at
other locations.
B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in
running bond; do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch (100-mm) horizontal face
dimensions at corners or jambs.
Lay scored glazed concrete masonry units in stack bond so that joints align vertically.
Rake setting mortar '/4" and allow to dry. Then tuckpoint raked joints and scores at the
same time.
C. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not less
than 4-inches (100-mm). Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use
units with less than nominal 4-inch (100-mm) horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.
D. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by racking back units in each course from those in
course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receive
mortar, remove loose masonry units and mortar, and wet brick if required before laying fresh
masonry.
E. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections.
Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.
F. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar, unless otherwise indicated.
G. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of
metal lath, wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core.
H. Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 24 inches (600 min) under bearing plates,
beams, lintels, posts, and similar items, unless otherwise indicated.
3.4 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING
A. Lay hollow concrete masonry units as follows:
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 048100 - 10
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
3.5
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
1. With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed joints.
2. With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, partitions and
pilasters.
3. With webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on
footings.
4. With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting course on
footings where cells are not grouted.
B. Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient
mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head
joints.
C. Set cast -stone trim units in full bed of mortar with full vertical joints. Fill dowel, anchor, and
similar holes.
Clean soiled surfaces with fiber brush and soap powder and rinse thoroughly with clear
water.
2. Allow cleaned surfaces to dry before setting.
3. Wet joint surfaces thoroughly before applying mortar.
D. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint
thickness, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct -applied finishes (other than
paint), unless otherwise indicated.
MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT
A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8
inch (16 mm) on exterior side of walls, '/2 inch (13 mm) elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a
minimum of 6 inches (150 mm).
1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches (406 mm) o.c.
2. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches (203 mm) above and below wall openings
and extending 12 inches (305 mm) beyond openings.
a. Reinforcement above is in addition to continuous reinforcement.
B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units.
D. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units.
E. Cut and bend reinforcing units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at corners, returns,
offsets, and other special conditions.
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 048100 - 11
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
3.6 LINTELS
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
A. Provide masonry lintels where shown and where openings of more than 12 inches (305 mm) are
shown without structural steel or other supporting lintels.
B. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches (200 mm) at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Install cast stone lintels.
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspectors: Owner will engage qualified independent inspectors to perform inspections and
prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas, as needed to perform
inspections.
1. Place grout only after inspectors have verified compliance of grout spaces and grades,
sizes, and locations of reinforcement.
B. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to
perform field tests and inspections indicated below and prepare test reports:
1. Payment for these services will be made by Owner.
2. Retesting of materials failing to comply with specified requirements shall be done at
Contractor's expense.
C. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each batch of mix provided, per ASTM C 1019.
3.8 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING
A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise
damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install
in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.
B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and
completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent
construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application,
where indicated.
C. In -Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove
mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.
D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows:
1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes
or chisels.
2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for
comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding
with cleaning of masonry.
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 048100 - 12
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Park
3. Protect adjacent stone and non -masonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering
them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking
tape.
4. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by
rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water.
5. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2A applicable to
type of stain on exposed surfaces.
6. Clean cast stone to comply with stone supplier's written instructions.
3.9 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL
A. Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's
property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site.
B. Waste Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including excess or soil -
contaminated sand, waste mortar, and broken masonry units, by crushing and mixing with fill
material as fill is placed.
1. Crush masonry waste to less than 4 inches (100 mm) in each dimension.
2. Mix masonry waste with at least two parts of specified fill material for each part of
masonry waste. Fill material is specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork."
3. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches (450 mm) of finished grade.
C. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as
described above, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property.
END OF SECTION 048100
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 048100 - 13
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Park
SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1-GENERAL
1.3
1.4
I:
A.
A
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 specification sections, apply to this section.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1. Miscellaneous steel framing, supports and trim.
Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section:
1. Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted -channel inserts, and wedge -type inserts indicated
to be cast into concrete or built into unit masonry.
2. Steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature
changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints,
overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects.
1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material
surfaces.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For the following:
1. Paint products.
2. Grout.
Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal fabrications.
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their
connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.
METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 1
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Park
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 METALS, GENERAL
A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes.
B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated.
2.2 FASTENERS
A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless -steel fasteners for exterior use
and zinc -plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941
(ASTM F 1941 M), Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls.
B. Cast -in -Place Anchors in Concrete: Either threaded type or wedge type unless otherwise
indicated; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron or
ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, all hot -dip
galvanized per ASTM F 2329.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 09 painting Sections.
B. Universal Shop Primer: Fast -curing, lead- and chromate -free, universal modified -alkyd primer
complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.
C. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High -zinc -dust -content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and
compatible with paints specified to be used over it.
D. Bituminous Paint: Cold -applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
E. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory -packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout
complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for
interior and exterior applications.
F. Concrete: Comply with requirements in Division 03 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete" for
normal -weight, air -entrained, concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000
psi (20 MPa).
2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Use connections that
maintain structural value of joined pieces.
B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges. Remove
sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.
C. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:
METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 2
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended.
D. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or
welds where possible. Locate joints where least conspicuous.
E. Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude
water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.
F. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally
welded steel strap anchors not less than 24 inches (600 mm) o.c.
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
A. Fabricate steel girders for wood frame construction from continuous steel shapes of sizes
indicated.
Where wood nailers are attached to girders with bolts or lag screws, drill or punch holes
at 24 inches (600 mm) o.c.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM
A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown
with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed
field splices where possible.
B. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with
other work.
C. Galvanize exterior miscellaneous steel trim.
D. Prime exterior miscellaneous steel trim with zinc -rich primer.
2.7 STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES
A. Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported from
concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with no fewer than
two integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete.
2.8 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 3
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.
2.9 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
A. Galvanizing: Hot -dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for
steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products.
B. Shop prime iron and steel items not indicated to be galvanized unless they are to be embedded
in concrete, sprayed -on fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated.
1. Shop prime with universal shop primer primers specified in Division 09 painting
Sections.
C. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3,
"Commercial Blast Cleaning." SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." requirements indicated
below: -
1. Exterior Items: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
2. Items Indicated to Receive Zinc -Rich Primer: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial
Blast Cleaning."
3. Items Indicated to Receive Primers Specified in Division 09 Section "High -Performance
Coatings": SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
4. Other Items: SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
D. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification
No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing
metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with
edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and
levels.
B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are
not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot -dip galvanized after
fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.
C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:
Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 4
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Park
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended.
D. Fastening to In -Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal
fabrications are required to be fastened to in -place construction.
E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete,
masonry, or similar construction.
3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop
painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop -painted surfaces.
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair
galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION 055000
METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 5
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
SECTION 055100 - METAL STAIRS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 specification sections, apply to this section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Industrial -type stairs with steel grating treads.
B. See Division 05 Section "Pipe and Tube Railings" for pipe and tube railings not attached to
metal stairs or to walls adjacent to metal stairs.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: Design metal stairs, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a
qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.
B. Structural Performance of Stairs: Metal stairs shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and
the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated.
1. Uniform Load: 100 lbf/sq. ft. (4.79 kN/sq. m).
2. Concentrated Load: 300 lbf (1.33 kN) applied on an area of 4 sq. in. (2580 sq. mm).
3. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
4. Stair Framing: Capable of withstanding stresses resulting from railing loads in addition
to loads specified above.
5. Limit deflection of treads, platforms, and framing members to L/240 or 1/4 inch (6.4
mm), whichever is less.
C. Structural Performance of Railings: Railings shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the
following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated.
Handrails and Top Rails of Guards:
a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. (0.73 kN/m) applied in any direction.
b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf (0.89 kN) applied in any direction.
C. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
2. Inflll of Guards:
METAL STAIRS 055100 - 1
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Park
a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf (0.22 kN) applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft.
(0.093 sq. m).
b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For metal stairs.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
C. Delegated -Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance
requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified
professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. NAAMM Stair Standard: Comply with "Recommended Voluntary Minimum Standards for
Fixed Metal Stairs" in NAAMM AMP 510, "Metal Stairs Manual," for class of stair designated,
unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
1. Industrial -Type Stairs: Industrial class.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 METALS
A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise
indicated. For components exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without
seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.
B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
C. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed) or ASTM A 513.
D. Steel Bars for Grating Treads: ASTM A 36/A 36M or steel strip, ASTM A 1011/A 1011M or
ASTM A 1018/A 1018M.
E. Wire Rod for Grating Crossbars: ASTM A 510 (ASTM A 510M).
2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Provide anchors for embedding units in concrete, either integral or applied to units, as standard
with manufacturer.
B. Apply bituminous paint to concealed surfaces of cast -metal units set into concrete.
METAL STAIRS 055100 - 2
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Park
C. Fasteners: Provide zinc -plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or
ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941 M), Class Fe/Zn 12 for exterior use, and Class Fe/Zn 5 where
built into exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.
D. Bituminous Paint: Cold -applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
2.3 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Provide complete stair assemblies, including metal framing, hangers, struts, railings, clips,
brackets, bearing plates, and other components necessary to support and anchor stairs and
platforms on supporting structure.
1. Join components by welding unless otherwise indicated.
2. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.
3. Fabricate treads and platforms of exterior stairs so finished walking surfaces slope to
drain.
B. Preassembled Stairs: Assemble stairs in shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units
only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations.
C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges. Remove
sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.
D. Form bent -metal corners to smallest radius possible without impairing work.
E. Weld connections to comply with the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. Weld exposed corners and seams continuously unless otherwise indicated.
5. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds to comply with NOMMA's "Voluntary
Joint Finish Standards" for Type 1 welds: no evidence of a welded joint.
F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners
where possible. Locate joints where least conspicuous.
2.4 STEEL -FRAMED STAIRS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
I. Alfab, Inc.
2. American Stair, Inc.
3. Sharon Companies Ltd. (The).
B. Stair Framing:
METAL STAIRS 055100 - 3
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Park
1. Fabricate stringers of steel plates or channels.
2. Construct platforms of steel plate or channel headers and miscellaneous framing
members as needed to comply with performance requirements.
3. If using bolts, fabricate and join so bolts are not exposed on finished surfaces.
C. Metal Bar -Grating Stairs: Comply with NAAMM MBG 531, "Metal Bar Grating Manual."
1. Fabricate treads and platforms from steel grating with 1-1/4-by-3/16-inch (32-by-5-mm)
bearing bars at 15/16 inch (24 mm) o.c., 1-by-3/16-inch (25-by-5-mm) bearing bars at
11/16 inch (17 mm) o.c, or 1-by-1/8-inch (25-by-3-mm) bearing bars at 7/16 inch (11
mm) o.c. and crossbars at 4 inches (100 mm) o.c.
2. Fabricate grating treads with cast abrasive nosing and with steel angle or steel plate
carrier at each end for stringer connections. Secure treads to stringers with bolts.
2.5 STAIR RAILINGS
A. Steel Tube Railings: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design,
dimensions, details, finish, and member sizes, including wall thickness of tube, post spacings,
and anchorage, but not less than that needed to withstand indicated loads.
1. Rails and Posts: 1-5/8-inch- (41-mm-) diameter top and bottom rails.
2. Intermediate Rails Infill: 1-5/8-inch- (41-mm-) diameter intermediate rails spaced less
than 12 inches (305 mm clear.
B. Welded Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections. Cope components at
connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at
connections, including at fittings.
No field welds allowed.
C. Form changes in direction of railings by bending or by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings.
D. Form curves by bending members in jigs to produce uniform curvature without buckling.
E. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings.
F. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, end closures, flanges,
miscellaneous fittings, and anchors for interconnecting components and for attaching to other
work.
G. Fillers: Provide fillers made from steel plate, or other suitably crush -resistant material, to
transfer wall bracket loads through wall finishes. Size fillers to suit wall finish thicknesses.
2.6 FINISHES
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
METAL STAIRS 055100 - 4
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
B. Finish metal stairs after assembly.
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
C. Galvanizing: Hot -dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for
steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing
metal stairs. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from
established lines and levels and free of rack.
B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are
not to be left as exposed joints. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have
been hot -dip galvanized after fabrication.
C. Field Welding: Not allowed.
END OF SECTION 055100
METAL STAIRS 055100 - 5
O
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
SECTION 055213 - PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 specification sections, apply to this section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Steel pipe and tube railings.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: Design railings, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified
professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.
B. Structural Performance: Railings shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following
loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:
1. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards:
a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. (0.73 kN/m) applied in any direction.
b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf (0.89 kN) applied in any direction.
C. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
2. Infill of Guards:
a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf (0.22 kN) applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft.
(0.093 sq. m).
b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
C. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals
and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Manufacturer's product lines of mechanically connected railings.
2. Railing brackets.
3. Grout, anchoring cement, and paint products.
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
055213 - 1
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Park
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
C. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required.
D. Delegated -Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance
requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified
professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified
testing agency, according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Steel Pipe and Tube Railings:
a. Pisor Industries, Inc.
b. Wagner, R & B, Inc.; a division of the Wagner Companies.
2.2 METALS, GENERAL
A. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as
supported rails unless otherwise indicated.
2.3 STEEL AND IRON
A. Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed) or ASTM A 513.
B. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F or Type S, Grade A, Standard Weight (Schedule 40), unless
another grade and weight are required by structural loads.
C. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Fasteners: Provide the following:
1. Hot -Dip Galvanized Railings: Type 304 stainless steel or hot -dip zinc -coated steel
fasteners complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329 for zinc coating.
B. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy
welded.
C. Etching Cleaner for Galvanized Metal: Complying with MPI#25.
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 - 2
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Park
D. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High -zinc -dust -content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and
compatible with paints specified to be used over it.
E. Bituminous Paint: Cold -applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
F. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory -packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout
complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for
interior and exterior applications.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of
approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm) unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on
exposed surfaces.
B. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces.
C. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings
designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings.
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness
shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces.
D. Non -welded Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings.
Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints.
E. Form changes in direction by bending or by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings.
F. Bend members in jigs to produce uniform curvature without buckling or otherwise deforming
exposed surfaces.
G. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings.
H. Provide wall returns at ends of wall -mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated.
I. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings,
and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work unless otherwise indicated.
2.6 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES
A. Galvanized Railings:
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 - 3
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Park
1. Hot -dip galvanize exterior steel and iron railings, including hardware, after fabrication.
2. Comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M for hot -dip galvanized railings.
3. Comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for hot -dip galvanized hardware.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Set railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines
and levels and free of rack.
1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been coated or
finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or
other means without further cutting or fitting.
2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet (2 mm in 1 m).
3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel
with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet (5
mm in 3 m).
B. Attach railings to wall with wall brackets as detailed.
3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair
galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION 055213
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 - 4
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Park
SECTION 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 specification sections, apply to this section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Framing with dimension lumber.
2. Wood blocking and nailers.
3. Wood furring and grounds.
4. Wood sleepers.
5. Plywood backing panels.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory -fabricated product.
1. Include data for wood -preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements
2. Include data for fire -retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES:
1. Wood -preservative -treated wood.
2. Fire -retardant -treated wood.
3. Shear panels.
ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 1
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
4. Power -driven fasteners.
5. Powder -actuated fasteners.
6. Expansion anchors.
Metal framing anchors.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is
indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules -writing agency
certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the
ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.
Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.
2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade stamp on
end or back of each piece or omit grade stamp and provide certificates of grade
compliance issued by grading agency.
3. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 19 percent unless otherwise indicated.
C. Engineered Wood Products: Provide engineered wood products acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction and for which current model code research or evaluation reports exist that show
compliance with building code in effect for Project.
1. Allowable Design Stresses: Provide engineered wood products with allowable design
stresses, as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated.
Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational
engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a
qualified independent testing agency.
2.2 WOOD PRESERVATIVE TREATED LUMBER
A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior
construction not in contact with the ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in
contact with the ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with the ground.
1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no
arsenic or chromium. Do not use inorganic boron (SBX) for sill plates.
ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 2
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
B. Kiln -dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use
material that is warped or that does not comply with requirements for untreated material.
C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board
of Review.
D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:
Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar
members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.
2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in
contact with masonry or concrete.
3. Wood framing and furring attached directly to the interior of below -grade exterior
masonry or concrete walls.
4. Wood framing members that are less than 18 inches (460 mm) above the ground in
crawlspaces or unexcavated areas.
5. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs -on -grade.
2.3 FIRE -RETARDANT TREATED MATERIALS
A. General: Where fire -retardant -treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with
requirements in this article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with fire -
test -response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test
method indicated by a qualified testing agency.
B. Fire -Retardant -Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame spread
index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of significant
progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame
front not extending more than 10.5 feet (3.2 m) beyond the centerline of the burners at any time
during the test.
1. Exterior Type: Treated materials shall comply with requirements specified above for fire -
retardant -treated lumber and plywood by pressure process after being subjected to
accelerated weathering according to ASTM D 2898. Use for exterior locations and where
indicated.
2. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less
when tested according to ASTM D 3201 at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where
exterior type is not indicated.
C. Kiln -dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Kiln -dry
plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent.
ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 3
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Park
D. Identify fire -retardant -treated wood with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing
agency.
E. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:
1. Plywood backing panels.
2.4 DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING
A. Load -Bearing and Non -Load -Bearing Interior Partitions: No. 2 grade.
1. Application: Interior partitions not indicated as load bearing.
2. Species:
a. Mixed southern pine; SPIB.
b. Northern species; NLGA.
C. Eastern softwoods; NeLMA.
d. Western woods; WCLIB or WWPA.
B. Framing Other Than Non -Load -Bearing Interior Partitions: No. 2 grade.
1. Application: Framing other than interior partitions not indicated as load -bearing.
2. Species:
a. Hem -fir (north); NLGA.
b. Douglas fir -larch; WCLIB or WWPA.
C. Mixed southern pine; SPIB.
d. Spruce -pine -fir; NLGA.
e. Douglas fir -south; WWPA.
f. Hem -fir; WCLIB or WWPA.
g. Douglas fir -larch (north); NLGA.
h. Spruce -pine -fir (south); NeLMA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other
construction, including the following:
1. Blocking.
2. Nailers.
3. Furring.
4. Grounds.
ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 4
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction or No. 2 grade lumber of any species.
C. For concealed boards, provide lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content and any of
the following species and grades:
I. Mixed southern pine; No. 2 grade; SPIB.
2. Eastern softwoods; No. 2 Common grade; NeLMA.
3. Northern species; No. 2 Common grade; NLGA.
4. Western woods; Construction or No. 2 Common grade; WCLIB or WWPA.
2.6 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS
A. Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C-D Plugged, fire -retardant treated, in
thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 1/2-inch (13-mm) nominal thickness.
2.7 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified
in this article for material and manufacture.
1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure -preservative
treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot -dip zinc coating
complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M.
B. Power -Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.
C. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6);
with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers.
2.8 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Cleveland Steel Specialty Co.
2. KC Metals Products, Inc.
3. Phoenix Metal Products, Inc.
4. Simpson Strong -Tie Co., Inc.
5. USP Structural Connectors.
B. Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with allowable design loads, as published by
manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be
ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 5
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Park
determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by
comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency.
C. Galvanized -Steel Sheet: Hot -dip, zinc -coated steel sheet complying with
ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180) coating designation.
1. Use for interior locations unless otherwise indicated.
D. Hot -Dip, Heavy -Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M; structural steel (SS), high -
strength low -alloy steel Type A (HSLAS Type A), or high -strength low -alloy steel Type B
(HSLAS Type B); G185 (Z550) coating designation; and not less than 0.036 inch (0.9 mm)
thick.
1. Use for wood -preservative -treated lumber and where indicated.
2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Sill -Sealer Gaskets: Closed -cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick, selected from
manufacturer's standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and
fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit.
Locate furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements for
attaching other construction.
B. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame
Construction," unless otherwise indicated.
C. Install fire -retardant treated plywood backing panels with classification marking of testing
agency exposed to view.
D. Shear Wall Panels: Install shear wall panels to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
E. Metal Framing Anchors: Install metal framing anchors to comply with manufacturer's written
instructions. Install fasteners through each fastener hole.
F. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated.
G. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative -treated
lumber.
H. Where wood -preservative -treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install
continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking.
ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 6
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Park
I. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated,
complying with the following:
NES NER-272 for power -driven fasteners.
2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code.
END OF SECTION 061000
ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 7
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Park
SECTION 061600 - SHEATHING
PARTI- GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 specification sections, apply to this section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Wall and roof sheathing.
2. Sheathing joint and penetration treatment.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory -fabricated product. Indicate component
materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.
1. Include data for wood -preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated plywood complies with requirements.
2. Include data for fire -retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated plywood complies with requirements.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Evaluation Reports: For following products, from ICC-ES:
1. Preservative -treated plywood.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: For assemblies with fire -resistance ratings, provide
materials and construction identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per
ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Fire -Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance
Directory."
2.2 WOOD PANEL PRODUCTS
A. Plywood: DOC PS 1
SHEATHING 061600 - 1
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Park
B. Oriented Strand Board: DOC PS 2.
2.3 PRESERVATIVE -TREATED PLYWOOD
A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior
construction, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction.
B. Mark plywood with appropriate classification marking of an inspection agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Application: Treat all plywood unless otherwise indicated.
D. Kiln -dry material after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent.
2.4 WALL AND ROOF SHEATHING
A. Plywood Sheathing: Exposure 1 sheathing.
1. Span Rating: No less than 32/ 16.
2. Thickness: Not less than 15/32 inch.
B. Oriented -Strand -Board Sheathing: Exposure 1 sheathing.
2.5 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in
this article for material and manufacture.
1. For roof and wall sheathing, provide fasteners with hot -dip zinc coating complying with
ASTM A 153/A 153M of Type 304 stainless steel.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Adhesives for Field Gluing Panels to Framing: Formulation complying with APA AFG-0I or
ASTM D 3498 that is approved for use with type of construction panel indicated by
manufacturers of both adhesives and panels.
B. Sheathing Tape: Pressure -sensitive plastic tape for sealing joints and penetrations in sheathing
and recommended by sheathing manufacturer for use with type of sheathing required.
C. Water Repellent Preservative: NWWDA-tested and accepted formulation containing 3-iodo-2-
propynyl butyl carbamate combined with an insecticide containing chloropyrifos as its main
active ingredient.
SHEATHING 061600 - 2
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Park
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too small to
use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. Arrange joints so that pieces
do not span between fewer than three support members.
B. Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against abutting
construction unless otherwise indicated.
C. Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with the following:
1. NES NER-272 for power -driven fasteners.
2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's "International Building Code."
3. Table R602.3 (1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table R602.3(2),
"Alternate Attachments," in ICC's "International Residential Code for One- and Two -
Family Dwellings."
D. Coordinate wall and roof sheathing installation with flashing and joint -sealant installation so
these materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing
through completed assembly.
E. Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match spacing of
structural support elements.
3.2 WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations in APA Form No. E30, "Engineered Wood
Construction Guide," for types of structural -use panels and applications indicated.
B. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below:
Wall and Roof Sheathing:
a. Nail to wood framing.
b. Space panels 1/8 inch (3 mm) apart at edges and ends.
END OF SECTION 061600
SHEATHING 061600 - 3
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Park
SECTION 061753 - SHOP -FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 specification sections, apply to this section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Wood roof trusses.
2. Metal truss accessories.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For metal -plate connectors, metal truss accessories, and fasteners.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for trusses.
1. Show location, pitch, span, camber, configuration, and spacing for each type of truss
required.
2. Indicate sizes, stress grades, and species of lumber.
3. Indicate locations, sizes, and materials for permanent bracing required to prevent buckling of
individual truss members due to design loads.
4. Indicate type, size, material, finish, design values, orientation, and location of metal
connector plates.
5. Show splice details and bearing details.
C. Delegated -Design Submittal: For metal -plate -connected wood trusses indicated to comply with
performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the
qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product certificates.
B. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES:
1. Metal -plate connectors.
2. Metal truss accessories.
SHOP -FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES 061753 - 1
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
A. Metal Connector -Plate Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer that is a member of TPI and
that complies with quality -control procedures in TPI 1 for manufacture of connector plates.
1. Manufacturer's responsibilities include providing professional engineering services needed to
assume engineering responsibility.
2. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings and comprehensive engineering
analysis by a qualified professional engineer.
B. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that participates in a recognized quality -assurance program that
complies with quality -control procedures in TPI I and that involves third -party inspection by an
independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to Architect and authorities having
jurisdiction.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Handle and store trusses to comply with recommendations in TPI BCSI, "Building Component
Safety Information: Guide to Good Practice for Handling, Installing, Restraining, & Bracing
Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses."
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Division 01 Section
"Quality Requirements," to design metal -plate -connected wood trusses.
B. Structural Performance: Provide metal -plate -connected wood trusses capable of withstanding
design loads within limits and under conditions indicated. Comply with requirements in TPI 1
unless more stringent requirements are specified below.
2.2 DIMENSION LUMBER
A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is
indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules writing agency
certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the
ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.
1. Provide dry lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing.
B. Permanent Bracing: Provide wood bracing that complies with requirements for miscellaneous
lumber in Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry."
2.3 METAL CONNECTOR PLATES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work, include, but are not limited to, the following:
SHOP -FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES 061753 - 2
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
1. Alpine Engineered Products, Inc.; an ITW company.
2. Cherokee Metal Products, Inc.; Masengill Machinery Company.
3. CompuTrus, Inc.
4. Eagle Metal Products.
5. Jager Building Systems, Inc.; a Tembec/SGF Rexfor company.
6. MiTek Industries, Inc.; a subsidiary of Berkshire Hathaway Inc.
7. Robbins Engineering, Inc.
8. Truswal Systems Corporation; an ITW company.
B. General: Fabricate connector plates to comply with TPI 1.
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
C. Hot -Dip Galvanized -Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M; Structural Steel (SS), high -strength
low -alloy steel Type A (HSLAS Type A), or high -strength low -alloy steel Type B (HSLAS
Type B); G60 (Z180) coating designation; and not less than 0.036 inch (0.9 mm) thick.
2.4 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in
this article for material and manufacture.
Provide fasteners for use with metal framing anchors that comply with written
recommendations of metal framing manufacturer.
Where trusses are exposed to weather, in ground contact, made from pressure -preservative
treated wood, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot -dip zinc coating
complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M.
B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.
2.5 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS AND ACCESSORIES
A. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated
on Drawings by Simpson Strong -Tie Co., Inc. or comparable product by one of the following:
1. Cleveland Steel Specialty Co.
2. KC Metals Products, Inc.
3. Phoenix Metal Products, Inc.
4. USP Structural Connectors.
B. Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with allowable design loads, as published by
manufacturer, that meet or exceed those of basis -of -design products. Manufacturer's published
values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and
demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency.
C. Galvanized -Steel Sheet: Hot -dip, zinc -coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M,
G60 (Z180) coating designation.
SHOP -FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES 061753 - 3
--Clark-Condon Associates
November 2 10 0
2.6 FABRICATION
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
A. Assemble truss members in design configuration indicated; use jigs or other means to ensure
uniformity and accuracy of assembly with joints closely fitted to comply with tolerances in TPI 1.
Position members to produce design camber indicated.
1. Fabricate wood trusses within manufacturing tolerances in TPI 1.
B. Connect truss members by metal connector plates located and securely embedded simultaneously
in both sides of wood members by air or hydraulic press.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install wood trusses only after supporting construction is in place and is braced and secured.
B. If trusses are delivered to Project site in more than one piece, assemble trusses before installing.
C. Hoist trusses in place by lifting equipment suited to sizes and types of trusses required, exercising
care not to damage truss members or joints by out -of -plane bending or other causes.
D. Install and brace trusses according to TPI recommendations and as indicated.
E. Anchor trusses securely at bearing points; use metal truss tie -downs or floor truss hangers as
applicable. Install fasteners through each fastener hole in metal framing anchors according to
manufacturer's fastening schedules and written instructions.
F. Securely connect each truss ply required for forming built-up girder trusses.
G. Install and fasten permanent bracing during truss erection and before construction loads are
applied. Anchor ends of permanent bracing where terminating at walls or beams.
Install bracing to comply with Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry."
H. Install wood trusses within installation tolerances in TPI 1.
Do not alter trusses in field. Do not cut, drill, notch, or remove truss members.
J. Replace wood trusses that are damaged or do not meet requirements.
END OF SECTION 061753
SHOP -FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES 061753 - 4
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Park
SECTION 071310 — SELF -ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 specification sections, apply to this Section.
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Modified bituminous sheet waterproofing.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for joint -sealant materials and installation.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating
substrate, technical data, and tested physical and performance properties of waterproofing.
B. Shop Drawings: Show locations and extent of waterproofing. Include details for substrate
joints and cracks, sheet flashings, penetrations, inside and outside corners, tie-ins with adjoining
waterproofing, and other termination conditions.
C. Samples: For the following products:
1. 12-by-12-inch (300-by-300-mm) square of waterproofing and flashing sheet.
2. 12-by-12-inch (300-by-300-mm) square of protection board.
D. Installer Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that installers comply with
requirements.
E. Qualification Data: For Installer.
F. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified
testing agency, for waterproofing.
G. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that is acceptable to waterproofing manufacturer for installation
of waterproofing required for this Project.
SELF -ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING 071310 - 1
--Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010-- ��—_ Festival Park
B. Source Limitations: Obtain waterproofing materials and protection course, through one source — -
from a single manufacturer.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver liquid materials to Project site in original packages with seals unbroken, labeled with
manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, and directions for
storing and mixing with other components.
B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged packages in a clean, dry, protected location
and within temperature range required by waterproofing manufacturer.
C. Remove and replace liquid materials that cannot be applied within their stated shelf life.
D. Store rolls according to manufacturer's written instructions.
E. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Apply waterproofing within the range of ambient and substrate
temperatures recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. Do not apply waterproofing to a
damp or wet substrate.
1. Do not apply waterproofing in snow, rain, fog, or mist.
B. Maintain adequate ventilation during preparation and application of waterproofing materials.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET WATERPROOFING
A. Modified Bituminous Sheet: Not less than 60-mil- (1.5-mm-) thick, self -adhering sheet
consisting of 56 mils (1.4 mm) of rubberized asphalt laminated to a 4-mil- (0.10-mm-) thick,
polyethylene film with release liner on adhesive side.
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. American Hydrotech, Inc.; VM 75.
b. American Permaquik Inc.; PQ 7100.
C. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc.; CCW MiraDRl 860/861.
d. CETCO Building Materials Group; Envirosheet.
e. Grace, W. R. & Co.; Bituthene [3000] [4000].
f. Henry Company; Blueskin WP 200.
g. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; SealTight Mel -Rol.
h. Nervastral, Inc.; BITU-MEM.
i. Pecora Corporation; Duramem 700-SM.
SELF -ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING 071310 - 2
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Park
J. Polyguard Products; Polyguard 650.
k. Progress Unlimited, Inc.; Plastiwrap 60.
1. Tamko Roofing Products, Inc.; TW-60.
3. Physical Properties:
a. Tensile Strength: 250 psi (1.7 MPa) minimum; ASTM D 412, Die C, modified.
b. Ultimate Elongation: 300 percent minimum; ASTM D 412, Die C, modified.
C. Low -Temperature Flexibility: Pass at minus 20 deg F (minus 29 deg C);
ASTM D 1970.
d. Crack Cycling: Unaffected after 100 cycles of 1/8-inch (3-mm) movement;
ASTM C 836.
e. Puncture Resistance: 401bf (180 N) minimum; ASTM E 154.
f. Hydrostatic -Head Resistance: 150 feet (45 m) minimum; ASTM D 5385.
g. Water Absorption: 0.15 percent weight -gain maximum after 48-hour immersion at
70 deg F (21' deg C); ASTM D 570.
h. Vapor Permeance: 0.05 perms (2.9 ng/Pa x s x sq. m); ASTM E 96, Water
Method.
2.2 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Furnish auxiliary materials recommended by waterproofing manufacturer for intended
use and compatible with sheet waterproofing.
1. Furnish liquid -type auxiliary materials that comply with VOC limits of authorities having
jurisdiction.
B. Primer: Liquid waterborne or solvent -borne primer recommended for substrate by
manufacturer of sheet waterproofing material.
C. Surface Conditioner: Liquid, waterborne surface conditioner recommended for substrate by
manufacturer of sheet waterproofing material.
D. Liquid Membrane: Elastomeric, two -component liquid, cold fluid applied, trowel grade or low
viscosity.
E. Substrate Patching Membrane: Low -viscosity, two -component, asphalt -modified coating.
F. Sheet Strips: Self -adhering, rubberized -asphalt sheet strips of same material and thickness as
sheet waterproofing.
G. Mastic, Adhesives, and Tape: Liquid mastic and adhesives, and adhesive tapes recommended
by waterproofing manufacturer.
H. Metal Termination Bars: Aluminum bars, approximately 1 by 1/8 inch (25 by 3 mm) thick,
predrilled at 9-inch (229-mm) centers.
I. Protection Course: ASTM D 6506, semi -rigid sheets of fiberglass or mineral -reinforced -
asphaltic core, pressure laminated between two asphalt -saturated fibrous liners and as follows:
SELF -ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING 071310 - 3
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
2.6 FABRICATION
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
A. Assemble truss members in design configuration indicated; use jigs or other means to ensure
uniformity and accuracy of assembly with joints closely fitted to comply with tolerances in TPI 1.
Position members to produce design camber indicated.
1. Fabricate wood trusses within manufacturing tolerances in TPI 1.
B. Connect truss members by metal connector plates located and securely embedded simultaneously
in both sides of wood members by air or hydraulic press.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install wood trusses only after supporting construction is in place and is braced and secured.
B. If trusses are delivered to Project site in more than one piece, assemble trusses before installing.
C. Hoist trusses in place by lifting equipment suited to sizes and types of trusses required, exercising
care not to damage truss members or joints by out -of -plane bending or other causes.
D. Install and brace trusses according to TPI recommendations and as indicated.
E. Anchor trusses securely at bearing points; use metal truss tie -downs or floor truss hangers as
applicable. Install fasteners through each fastener hole in metal framing anchors according to
manufacturer's fastening schedules and written instructions.
F. Securely connect each truss ply required for forming built-up girder trusses.
G. Install and fasten permanent bracing during truss erection and before construction loads are
applied. Anchor ends of permanent bracing where terminating at walls or beams.
1. Install bracing to comply with Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry."
H. Install wood trusses within installation tolerances in TPI 1.
I. Do not alter trusses in field. Do not cut, drill, notch, or remove truss members.
J. Replace wood trusses that are damaged or do not meet requirements.
END OF SECTION 061753
SHOP -FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES 061753 - 4
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Park
SECTION 071310 — SELF -ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 specification sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Modified bituminous sheet waterproofing.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for joint -sealant materials and installation.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating
substrate, technical data, and tested physical and performance properties of waterproofing.
B. Shop Drawings: Show locations and extent of waterproofing. Include details for substrate
joints and cracks, sheet flashings, penetrations, inside and outside corners, tie-ins with adjoining
waterproofing, and other termination conditions.
C. Samples: For the following products:
1. 12-by-12-inch (300-by-300-mm) square of waterproofing and flashing sheet.
2. 12-by-I2-inch (300-by-300-mm) square of protection board.
D. Installer Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that installers comply with
requirements.
E. Qualification Data: For Installer.
F. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified
testing agency, for waterproofing.
G. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that is acceptable to waterproofing manufacturer for installation
of waterproofing required for this Project.
r
SELF -ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING 071310 - 1
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Park
B. Source Limitations: Obtain waterproofing materials and protection course, through one source
from a single manufacturer.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver liquid materials to Project site in original packages with seals unbroken, labeled with
manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, and directions for
storing and mixing with other components.
B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged packages in a clean, dry, protected location
and within temperature range required by waterproofing manufacturer.
C. Remove and replace liquid materials that cannot be applied within their stated shelf life.
D. Store rolls according to manufacturer's written instructions.
E. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Apply waterproofing within the range of ambient and substrate
temperatures recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. Do not apply waterproofing to a
damp or wet substrate.
1. Do not apply waterproofing in snow, rain, fog, or mist.
B. Maintain adequate ventilation during preparation and application of waterproofing materials.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET WATERPROOFING
A. Modified Bituminous Sheet: Not less than 60-mil- (1.5-mm-) thick, self -adhering sheet
consisting of 56 mils (1.4 mm) of rubberized asphalt laminated to a 4-mil- (0.10-mm-) thick,
polyethylene film with release liner on adhesive side.
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. American Hydrotech, Inc.; VM 75.
b. American Permaquik Inc.; PQ 7100.
C. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc.; CCW MiraDRI 860/861.
d. CETCO Building Materials Group; Envirosheet.
e. Grace, W. R. & Co.; Bituthene [3000] [4000].
f. Henry Company; Blueskin WP 200.
g. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; SealTight Mel -Rol.
h. Nervastral, Inc.; BITU-MEM.
i. Pecora Corporation; Duramem 700-SM.
SELF -ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING 071310 - 2
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
J. Polyguard Products; Polyguard 650.
k. Progress Unlimited, Inc.; Plastiwrap 60.
1. Tamko Roofing Products, Inc.; TW-60.
3. Physical Properties:
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
a. Tensile Strength: 250 psi (1.7 MPa) minimum; ASTM D 412, Die C, modified.
b. Ultimate Elongation: 300 percent minimum; ASTM D 412, Die C, modified.
C. Low -Temperature Flexibility: Pass at minus 20 deg F (minus 29 deg Q
ASTM D 1970.
d. Crack Cycling: Unaffected after 100 cycles of 1/8-inch (3-mm) movement;
ASTM C 836.
e. Puncture Resistance: 40 lbf (180 N) minimum; ASTM E 154.
f. Hydrostatic -Head Resistance: 150 feet (45 m) minimum; ASTM D 5385.
g. Water Absorption: 0.15 percent weight -gain maximum after 48-hour immersion at
70 deg F (21'deg Q ASTM D 570.
h. Vapor Permeance: 0.05 perms (2.9 ng/Pa x s x sq. m); ASTM E 96, Water
Method.
2.2 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Furnish auxiliary materials recommended by waterproofing manufacturer for intended
use and compatible with sheet waterproofing.
Furnish liquid -type auxiliary materials that comply with VOC limits of authorities having
jurisdiction.
B. Primer: Liquid waterborne or solvent -borne primer recommended for substrate by
manufacturer of sheet waterproofing material.
C. Surface Conditioner: Liquid, waterborne surface conditioner recommended for substrate by
manufacturer of sheet waterproofing material.
D. Liquid Membrane: Elastomeric, two -component liquid, cold fluid applied, trowel grade or low
viscosity.
E. Substrate Patching Membrane: Low -viscosity, two -component, asphalt -modified coating.
F. Sheet Strips: Self -adhering, rubberized -asphalt sheet strips of same material and thickness as
sheet waterproofing.
G. Mastic, Adhesives, and Tape: Liquid mastic and adhesives, and adhesive tapes recommended
by waterproofing manufacturer.
H. Metal Termination Bars: Aluminum bars, approximately 1 by 1/8 inch (25 by 3 mm) thick,
predrilled at 9-inch (229-mm) centers.
I. Protection Course: ASTM D 6506, semi -rigid sheets of fiberglass or mineral -reinforced -
asphaltic core, pressure laminated between two asphalt -saturated fibrous liners and as follows:
SELF -ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING 071310 - 3
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
1. Thickness: 1/8 inch (3 mm), nominal, for vertical applications; 1/4 inch (6 mm),
nominal, elsewhere.
2. Adhesive: Rubber -based solvent type recommended by waterproofing manufacturer for
type of protection course.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements and other conditions affecting performance.
1. Verify that concrete has cured and aged for minimum time period recommended by
waterproofing manufacturer.
2. Verify that concrete is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture by
plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263.
3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Clean, prepare, and treat substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions. Provide
clean, dust -free, and dry substrates for waterproofing application.
B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not receiving waterproofing to prevent spillage and overspray
affecting other construction.
C. Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form -release agents, paints, curing compounds, and other
penetrating contaminants or film -forming coatings from concrete.
D. Remove fins, ridges, mortar, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets,
holes, and other voids.
E. Prepare, fill, prime, and treat joints and cracks in substrates. Remove dust and dirt from joints
and cracks according to ASTM D 4258.
F. Bridge and cover discontinuous deck -to -wall and deck -to -deck joints with overlapping sheet
strips in accordance with manufactures recommendations.
G. Corners: Prepare, prime, and treat inside and outside corners according to ASTM D 6135.
1. Install membrane strips centered over vertical inside corners. Install 3/4-inch (19-mm)
fillets of liquid membrane on horizontal inside corners and as follows:
a. At footing -to -wall intersections, extend liquid membrane each direction from
corner or install membrane strip centered over corner.
H. Prepare, treat, and seal vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and penetrations through
waterproofing and at drains and protrusions according to ASTM D 6135.
SELF -ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING 071310 - 4
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Park
3.3 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET WATERPROOFING APPLICATION
A. Install modified bituminous sheets according to waterproofing manufacturer's written
instructions and according to recommendations in ASTM D 6135.
B. Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow to dry. Limit priming to areas that will be
covered by sheet waterproofing in same day. Reprime areas exposed for more than 24 hours.
C. Apply and firmly adhere sheets over area to receive waterproofing. Accurately align sheets and
maintain uniform 2-1/2-inch- (64-mm-) minimum lap widths and end laps. Overlap and seal
seams and stagger end laps to ensure watertight installation.
When ambient and substrate temperatures range between 25 and 40 deg F (minus 4 and
plus 5 deg C), install self -adhering, modified bituminous sheets produced for low -
temperature application. Do not use low -temperature sheets if ambient or substrate
temperature is higher than 60 deg F (16 deg C).
D. Apply continuous sheets over sheet strips bridging substrate cracks, construction, and
contraction joints. -
E. Seal exposed edges of sheets at terminations not concealed by metal counterflashings or ending
in reglets with mastic.
F. Install sheet waterproofing and auxiliary materials to tie into adjacent waterproofing.
G. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in waterproofing not complying with requirements. Slit
and flatten fishmouths and blisters. Patch with sheet waterproofing extending 6 inches (150
mm) beyond repaired areas in all directions.
H. Install protection course with butted joints over waterproofing membrane immediately.
Correct deficiencies in or remove sheet waterproofing that does not comply with requirements;
repair substrates, reapply waterproofing, and repair sheet flashings.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Engage a full-time site representative qualified by waterproofing membrane manufacturer to
inspect substrate conditions; surface preparation; membrane application, flashings, protection,
and drainage components; and to furnish daily reports to Architect.
3.5 PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A. Protect waterproofing from damage and wear during remainder of construction period.
B. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures
recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.
END OF SECTION 071310
SELF -ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING 071310 - 5
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Park
SECTION 072100 - THERMAL INSULATION
PART1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 specification sections, apply to this section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Glass -fiber blanket insulation.
2. Styrofoam pellet insulation.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Product test reports.
C. Research/evaluation reports.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GLASS -FIBER BLANKET INSULATION
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. CertainTeed Corporation.
2. Guardian Building Products, Inc.
3. Johns Manville.
4. Knauf Insulation.
5. Owens Corning.
B. Unfaced, Glass -Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I; with maximum flame -spread
and smoke -developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing
ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. (For ceiling & soundproofing applications)
THERMAL INSULATION 072100 - 1
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Park
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Comply with insulation manufacturers written instructions applicable to products and
applications indicated.
B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice,
rain, or snow at any time.
C. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions
and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.
D. Provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard
thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness
indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION FOR FRAMED CONSTRUCTION
A. Glass -Fiber or Mineral -Wool Blanket Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing
members according to the following requirements:
1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If
more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will produce a
snug fit between ends.
2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between
edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.
3. Maintain 3-inch (76-mm) clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not
rated for or protected from contact with insulation.
4. For wood -framed construction, install blankets according to ASTM C 1320 and as
follows:
a. With faced blankets having stapling flanges, lap blanket flange over flange of
adjacent blanket to maintain continuity of vapor retarder once finish material is
installed over it.
5. Vapor -Retarder -Faced Blankets: Tape joints and ruptures in vapor -retarder facings, and
seal each continuous area of insulation to ensure airtight installation.
B. Miscellaneous Voids: Install insulation in miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where
required to prevent gaps in insulation using the following materials:
Unfaced Glass Fiber Blanket Insulation: Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal
maximum volume equaling a density of approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft. (40 kg/cu. m).
3.3 INSTALLATION OF STYROFOAM PELLETS
END OF SECTION 072100
THERMAL INSULATION 072100 - 2
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Park
SECTION 074110 - METAL ROOF PANELS
PART 1 — GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 specification sections, apply to this section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
Factory -formed and field -assembled, batten -seam metal roof panels, called "standing
seam metal roof' on the drawings.
B. Related Sections include the following:
Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashings and other sheet metal
work not part of metal roof panel assemblies.
2. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for field -applied sealants not otherwise specified in
this Section.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Metal Roof Panel Assembly: Metal roof panels, attachment system components, miscellaneous
metal framing, and accessories necessary for a complete weathertight roofing system.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Provide metal roof panel assemblies that comply with performance requirements
specified as determined by testing manufacturers' standard assemblies similar to those indicated
for this Project, by a qualified testing and inspecting agency.
B. Air Infiltration: Air leakage through assembly of not more than 0.048 cfm/sq. ft of roof area
when tested according to ASTM E 283 at the following test -pressure difference:
1. Test -Pressure Difference: Negative 4 lbf/sq. ft.
2. Positive Preload Test -Pressure Difference: Greater than or equal to 15.0 lbf/sq. ft. (720
Pa) and the greater of 75 percent of building live load or 50 percent of building design
positive wind -pressure difference.
3. Negative Preload Test -Pressure Difference: 50 percent of design wind -uplift -pressure
difference.
METAL ROOF PANELS 074110 - 1
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
C. Water Penetration: No water penetration when tested according to ASTM E 331 at the
following test -pressure difference:
1. Test -Pressure Difference: 4 lbf/sq. ft.
2. Positive Preload Test -Pressure Difference: Greater than or equal to 15.0 lbf/sq. ft. (720
Pa) and the greater of 75 percent of building live load or 50 percent of building design
positive wind -pressure difference.
3. Negative Preload Test -Pressure Difference: 50 percent of design wind -uplift -pressure
difference.
D. Wind -Uplift Resistance: Provide metal roof panel assemblies that comply with UL 580 for
wind -uplift resistance class indicated.
1. Wind -Uplift Resistance Rating: UL 90.
E. Thermal Movements: Provide metal roof panel assemblies that allow for thermal movements
resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by
preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants,
failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface
temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime -sky heat loss.
l . Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C),
material surfaces.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual
components and profiles, and finishes for each type of metal roof panel and accessory.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation layouts of metal roof panels; details of edge
conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, trim, flashings, closures, and accessories;
and special details. Distinguish between factory- and field -assembled work.
Accessories: Include details of the following items, at a scale of not less than 1-1/2 inches per 12 inches:
Flashing and trim.
C. Coordination Drawings: Roof plans drawn to scale and coordinating penetrations and roof -
mounted items. Show the following:
1. Roof panels and attachments.
2. Roof penetrations.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of
size indicated below.
METAL ROOF PANELS 074110 - 2
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Park
1. Metal Roof Panels: 12 inches (300 mm) long by actual panel width. Include fasteners,
clips, battens, closures, and other metal roof panel accessories.
2. Trim and Closures: 12 inches (300 mm) long. Include fasteners and other exposed
accessories.
3. Vapor Retarders: 6-inch- (150-mm-) square Samples.
4. Accessories: 12-inch- (300-mm-) long Samples for each type of accessory.
E. Qualification Data: For Installer.
F. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified
testing agency, for the following:
1. Metal Roof Panels: Include reports for air infiltration, water penetration and structural
performance.
2. Vapor Retarders: Include reports for water -vapor transmission, and water absorption.
G. Maintenance Data: For metal roof panels to include in maintenance manuals.
H. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer.
1. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for metal roof panels, including Shop
Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in
assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of metal roof panels through one source from a single
manufacturer.
C. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of metal roof
panels and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product
Requirements."
1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with
Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory
data to Architect for review.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver components, sheets, metal roof panels, and other manufactured items so as not to be
damaged or deformed. Package metal roof panels for protection during transportation and
handling.
METAL ROOF PANELS 074110 - 3
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Park
B. Unload, store, and erect metal roof panels in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting,
and surface damage.
C. Stack metal roof panels on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and
ventilated covering. Store metal roof panels to ensure dryness. Do not store metal roof panels
in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage.
D. Protect strippable protective covering on metal roof panels from exposure to sunlight and high
humidity, except to extent necessary for period of metal roof panel installation.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit assembly of metal roof panels to be performed according to manufacturers'
written instructions and warranty requirements.
B. Field Measurements: Verify locations of roof framing and roof opening dimensions by field
measurements before metal roof panel fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop
Drawings.
Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying
the Work, either establish framing and opening dimensions and proceed with fabricating
metal roof panels without field measurements, or allow for field -trimming of panels.
Coordinate roof construction to ensure that actual building dimensions, locations of
structural members, and openings correspond to established dimensions.
1.9 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation equipment supports, and roof penetrations, which are specified in
Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories."
B. Coordinate metal panel roof assemblies with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, and
construction of parapets, walls, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and
noncorrosive installation.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of metal roof panel assemblies that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Structural failures, including rupturing, cracking, or puncturing.
b. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal
weathering.
METAL ROOF PANELS 074110 - 4
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Park
2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for
product selection:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the products specified.
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products
specified.
3. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the manufacturers specified.
4. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
manufacturers specified.
5. Basis -of -Design Product: The design for each metal roof panel specified is based on the
product named. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named
product or a comparable product by one of the other manufacturers specified.
2.2 PANEL MATERIALS
A. Metallic -Coated Steel Sheet Prepainted with Coil Coating: Steel sheet metallic coated by the
hot -dip process and prepainted by the coil -coating process to comply with
ASTM A 755/A 755M.
1. Aluminum -Zinc Alloy -Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class A250 coating
designation, Grade 40 (Class AZM 150 coating designation, Grade 275); structural quality.
2. Surface: Smooth, flat finish.
2.3 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS
A. Self-adhereing ice and water shield membrane as approved by metal roof panel manufacturer..
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Fasteners: Self -tapping screws, bolts, nuts, self-locking rivets and bolts, end -welded studs, and
other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed fasteners with
heads matching color of metal roof panels by means of plastic caps or factory -applied coating.
Fasteners for Roof Panels: Self -drilling or self -tapping 410 stainless or zinc -alloy steel
hex washer head, with EPDM or PVC washer under heads of fasteners bearing on weather
side of metal roof panels.
Fasteners for Flashing and Trim: Blind fasteners or self -drilling screws with hex washer
head.
METAL ROOF PANELS 074110 - 5
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Park
3. Blind Fasteners: High -strength aluminum or stainless -steel rivets.
B. Bituminous Coating: Cold -applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil (0.4-
mm) dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert -type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos
fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.
2.5 BATTEN -SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS
A. General: Provide factory -formed metal roof panel assembly designed to be field assembled by
covering vertical side edges of adjacent panels with battens and mechanically attaching panels
to supports using concealed clips. Include battens and accessories required for weathertight
installation.
B. Narrow -Profile, Snap -on -Batten -Seam Metal Roof Panels: Formed with vertical ribs at panel
edges and flat pan between ribs; designed for independent installation by mechanically
attaching panels to supports using concealed clips located under one side of panels and
engaging opposite edge of adjacent panels, and installation of 3/8-to-1/2-inch- (10-to-13-mm-)
wide, snap -on battens over panel joints.
1. Basis -of -Design Product: Berridge Tee -Panel; Berridge Manufacturing Company or a
comparable product of one of the following:
a. MBCI, Division of NCI Building Systems.
2. Panel Material: Aluminum -zinc alloy -coated steel sheet, 0.0209 inch (0.55 mm) thick.
a. Exterior Finish: Galvalume Plus.
b. Color: Zinc Gray.
3. Batten Material: Same material, finish, and color as roof panels
4. Clips: One piece.
a. Material: Manufacturer's standard.
5. Sealant: Factory applied in top of battens.
6. Panel Coverage: Tapered. inches (305 mm) nominal at widest point.
7. Batten Height: 2.0 inch (50 mm).
8. Uplift Rating: UL 90.
2.6 ACCESSORIES
A. Roof Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete metal roof panel
assembly including trim, copings, fasciae, corner units, ridge closures, clips, flashings, sealants,
gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal roof panels,
unless otherwise indicated.
Closures: Provide closures at eaves and ridges, fabricated of same metal as metal roof
panels.
METAL ROOF PANELS 074110 - 6
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
2. Clips: Minimum 0.0625-inch- (1.6-mm-) thick, stainless -steel panel clips designed to
withstand negative -load requirements.
3. Cleats: Mechanically seamed cleats formed from minimum 0.0250-inch- (0.64-mm-)
thick, stainless -steel or nylon -coated aluminum sheet.
4. Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from
material recommended by manufacturer.
5. Closure Strips: Closed -cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin-foam or
closed -cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch- (25-mm-) thick, flexible closure
strips; cut or premolded to match metal roof panel profile. Provide closure strips where
indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction.
B. Flashing and Trim: Formed from 0.0179-inch- (0.45-mm-) thick, zinc -coated (galvanized) steel
sheet or aluminum -zinc alloy -coated steel sheet prepainted with coil coating. Provide flashing
and trim as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations
include, but are not limited to, eaves, rakes, corners, bases, framed openings, ridges, fasciae, and
fillers. Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent metal roof panels.
C. Pipe Flashing: Premolded, EPDM pipe collar with flexible aluminum ring bonded to base.
2.7 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate and finish metal roof panels and accessories at the factory to greatest extent
possible, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated
performance requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles
and with dimensional and structural requirements.
B. Provide panel profile if any, for full length of panel.
C. Where indicated, fabricate metal roof panel joints with factory -installed captive gaskets or
separator strips that provide a tight seal and prevent metal -to -metal contact, in a manner that
will minimize noise from movements within panel assembly.
D. Sheet Metal Accessories: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in
SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the design, dimensions, metal,
and other characteristics of item indicated.
1. Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil canning, buckling,
and tool marks and that are true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded
back to form hems.
2. Seams for Other Than Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams in accessories with flat -
lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder.
3. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate
elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA standards.
4. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not
allowed on faces of accessories exposed to view.
5. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored
or from compatible, noncorrosive metal recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer.
METAL ROOF PANELS 074110 - 7
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
a. Size: As recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" or
metal roof panel manufacturer for application but not less than thickness of metal
being secured.
2.8 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a
strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are
acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations
in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are
acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to
minimize contrast.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances, metal roof panel supports, and other conditions
affecting performance of work.
1. Examine solid roof sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing or
blocking and that installation is within flatness tolerances required by metal roof panel
manufacturer.
2. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental
to performance of work.
B. Examine roughing -in for components and systems penetrating metal roof panels to verify actual
locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of metal roof panels before metal roof panel
installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulation, including removing projections capable of
interfering with insulation attachment.
B. Install flashings and other sheet metal to comply with requirements specified in Division 7
Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."
3.3 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION
METAL ROOF PANELS 074110 - 8
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
A. Self -Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install self -adhering sheet ice and water shield
underlayment, wrinkle free. Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment
manufacturer for installation; use primer rather than nails for installing underlayment at low
temperatures. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with end laps of not less than 6 inches
(150 mm) staggered 24 inches (600 mm) between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3-
1/2 inches (90 mm). Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days.
Apply from eave to ridge.
B. Install flashings to cover underlayment to comply with requirements specified in Division 7
Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."
3.4 METAL ROOF PANEL INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. General: Provide metal roof panels of full length from eave to ridge, unless otherwise indicated
or restricted by shipping limitations. Anchor metal roof panels and other components of the
Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement.
1. Field cutting of metal roof panels by torch is not permitted.
2. Rigidly fasten eave end of metal roof panels and allow ridge end free movement due to
thermal expansion and contraction. Predrill panels.
3. Provide metal closures at peaks, walls each side of ridge and hip caps.
4. Flash and seal metal roof panels with weather closures at eaves, rakes, and at perimeter of
all openings. Fasten with self -tapping screws.
5. Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment.
6. Install ridge, peak and hip caps as metal roof panel work proceeds.
7. Locate panel splices over, but not attached to, structural supports. Stagger panel splices
and end laps to avoid a four -panel lap splice condition.
8. Lap metal flashing over metal roof panels to allow moisture to run over and off the
material.
B. Fasteners:
1. Steel Roof Panels: Use stainless -steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the exterior and
galvanized steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the interior.
C. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates,
protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating, by
applying rubberized -asphalt underlayment to each contact surface, or by other permanent
separation as recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer.
D. Joint Sealers: Install gaskets, joint fillers, and sealants where indicated and where required for
weatherproof performance of metal roof panel assemblies. Provide types of gaskets, fillers, and
sealants indicated or, if not indicated, types recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer.
Seal metal roof panel end laps with double beads of tape or sealant, full width of panel.
Seal side joints where recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer.
METAL ROOF PANELS 074110 - 9
Clark Condon Associates
Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Park
2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 7 Section
"Joint Sealants."
3.5 FIELD -ASSEMBLED METAL ROOF PANEL INSTALLATION
A. Batten -Seam Metal Roof Panels: Fasten metal roof panels to supports with concealed clips at
each batten -seam joint at location, spacing, and with fasteners recommended by manufacturer.
Install clips to supports with self -drilling fasteners.
Apply battens to metal roof panel seams, fully engaged to provide weathertight joints.
3.6 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
A. General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting and
provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components.
Install components required for a complete metal roof panel assembly including trim,
copings, ridge closures, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and
similar items.
B. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation
instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners
where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints,
and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant.
Install exposed flashing and trim that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool
marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form
hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in waterproof
and weather -resistant performance.
Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim.
Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet (3 m) with no joints allowed within 24
inches (600 mm) of corner or intersection. Where lapped or bayonet -type expansion
provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weather resistant and waterproof,
form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep,
filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints).
C. Pipe Flashing: Form flashing around pipe penetration and metal roof panels. Fasten and seal
to metal roof panels as recommended by manufacturer.
3.7 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align metal roof panel units within installed tolerance of 1/4
inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m) on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8-inch (3-
mm) offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.
3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
METAL ROOF PANELS 074110 - 10
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Park
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to inspect
completed metal roof panel installation, including accessories. Report results in writing.
B. Remove and replace applications of metal roof panels where inspections indicate that they do
not comply with specified requirements.
C. Additional inspections, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of
replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
3.9 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal roof panels are
installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On
completion of metal roof panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal
roof panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.
B. Replace metal roof panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful
repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
END OF SECTION 074110
METAL ROOF PANELS 074110 - I 1
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Creek
SECTION 075200 - MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING - TORCH -APPLICATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including the General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 specification sections, apply to this section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes modified bituminous roofing system.
B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere:
1. Rough Carpentry: Section 06 10 00 -Rough Carpentry.
2. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Section 07 62 00 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.
3. Sheet Metal Roof Accessories: Section 07 7100 - Roof Specialties.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE):
1. ASCE 7-02, Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures.
B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. ASTM D4 Standard Specification for Asphalt Primer Used in Roofing, Damp -proofing and
Waterproofing.
2. ASTM D451 Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Granular Mineral Surfacing for
Asphalt Roofing Products.
3. ASTM D1079 Standard Terminology Relating to Roofing, Waterproofing and Bituminous
Materials.
4. ASTM D 1863 Standard Specification for Mineral Aggregate Used as a Protective Coating for
Roofing.
5. ASTM D4586 Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement.
6. ASTM D5147 Standard Test Method for Sampling and Testing Modified Bituminous Sheet
Materials.
7. ASTM D6162 Standard Specification for Styrene Butadiene Styrene (SBS) Modified
Bituminous Sheet Materials Using a Combination of Polyester and Glass Fiber
Reinforcements.
8. ASTM D6163 Standard Specification for Styrene Butadiene Styrene (SBS) Modified
Bituminous Sheet Materials Using Glass Fiber Reinforcements.
9. ASTM E108 Standard Test Methods for Fire Test of Roof Coverings.
C. Factory Mutual Research (FM):
1. Roof Assembly Classifications.
MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING - TORCH -APPLICATION 075200 - 1
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Creek
1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW
A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's technical product data for each type of roofing product
specified. Include data substantiating that materials comply with specified requirements.
B. Specimen Warranty: Provide an unexecuted copy of the thirty (30) year warranty specified for
this Project, identifying the terms and conditions required of the Manufacturer and the Owner.
C. Any material submitted as equal to the specified material must be accompanied by a report signed
and sealed by a professional engineer licensed in the state in which the installation is to take
place. This report shall show that the submitted equal meets the Design and Performance criteria
in this specification. Substitution requests submitted without licensed engineer approval will be
rejected for non-conformance.
1.5 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION
A. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit installation instructions and recommendations
indicating special precautions required for installing the membrane.
B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that materials are manufactured in the United States and
conform to requirements specified herein, are chemically and physically compatible with each
other, and are suitable for inclusion within the total roof system specified herein.
C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Submit a certified copy of the roofing manufacturer's ISO 9001
compliance certificate.
D. Test Reports: Submit test reports, prepared by an independent testing agency, for all modified
bituminous sheet roofing, indicating compliance with ASTM D5147.
E. Written certification from the roofing system manufacturer certifying the applicator is currently
authorized for the installation of the specified roof system.
F. Qualification data for firms and individuals identified in Quality Assurance Article below.
1.6 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. General: Comply with Requirements of Division 01 Section - Closeout Submittals.
B. Special Project Warranty: Provide specified warranty for the Project, executed by the authorized
agent of the Manufacturer.
C. Roofing Maintenance Instructions: Provide a manual of manufacturer's recommendations for
maintenance of installed roofing systems.
MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING - TORCH -APPLICATION 075200 - 2
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Creek
D. Insurance Certification: Assist Owner in preparation and submittal of roof installation acceptance
certification as may be necessary in connection with fire and extended coverage insurance on
roofing and associated work.
E. Demonstration and Training Schedule: Provide a schedule of proposed dates and times for
instruction of Owner's personnel in the maintenance requirements for completed roofing work.
Refer to Part 3 for additional requirements.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in
this Section with not less than 12 years documented experience and have ISO 9001 certification.
B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in modified bituminous roofing installation with
not less than 5 years experience and authorized by roofing system manufacturer as qualified to
install manufacturer's roofing materials.
C. Installer's Field Supervision: Maintain a full-time Supervisor/Foreman on job site during all
phases of roofing work while roofing work is in progress. Maintain proper supervision of
workmen.
D. Maintain a copy of the Contract Documents in the possession of the Supervisor/Foreman and on
the roof at all times.
E. Source Limitations: Obtain all components of roof system from a single manufacturer. Secondary
products that are required shall be recommended and approved in writing by the roofing system
Manufacturer.
Upon request of the Architect or Owner, submit Manufacturer's written approval of
secondary components in list form, signed by an authorized agent of the Manufacturer.
1.8 PRE -INSTALLATION CONFERENCE
A. Pre -Installation Roofing Conference: Convene a pre -roofing conference approximately two (2)
weeks before scheduled commencement of modified bituminous roofing system installation and
associated work.
B. Require attendance of installer of each component of associated work, installers of deck or
substrate construction to receive roofing work, installers of rooftop units and other work in and
around roofing which must precede or follow roofing work (including mechanical work),
Architect, Owner, roofing system manufacturer's representative, and other representatives directly
concerned with performance of the Work, including (where applicable) Owner's insurers, testing
agencies and governing authorities. Objectives of conference include:
1. Review foreseeable methods and procedures related to roofing work, including set up and
mobilization areas for stored material and work area.
MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING - TORCH -APPLICATION 075200 - 3
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Creek
2. Tour representative areas of roofing substrates (decks), inspect and discuss condition of
substrate, roof drains, curbs, penetrations and other preparatory work performed by others.
3. Review structural loading limitations of deck and inspect deck for loss of flatness and for
required attachment.
4. Review roofing system requirements (drawings, specifications and other contract documents).
5. Review required submittals both completed and yet to be completed.
6. Review and finalize construction schedule related to roofing work and verify availability of
materials, installer's personnel, equipment and facilities needed to, make progress and avoid
delays.
7. Review required inspection, testing, certifying and material usage accounting procedures.
8. Review weather and forecasted weather conditions and procedures for coping with
unfavorable conditions, including possibility of temporary roofing (if not mandatory
requirement).
9. Record discussion of conference including decisions and agreements, or disagreements,
reached and furnish copy of record to each party attending. If substantial disagreements exist
at conclusion of conference, determine how disagreements will be resolved and set date for
reconvening conference.
10. Review notification procedures for weather or non -working days.
C. The Owner's Representative will designate one of the conference participants to record the
proceedings and promptly distribute them to the participants for record.
D. The intent of the conference is to resolve issues affecting the installation and performance of
roofing work. Do not proceed with roofing work until such issues are resolved to the satisfaction
of the Owner and Architect of Record. i his shall not be construed as interference with the
progress of Work on the part of the Owner or Architect of Record.
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to site with seals and labels intact, in manufacturer's original containers, dry and
undamaged.
B. Store and handle roofing sheets in a dry, well -ventilated, weather -tight place to prevent moisture
exposure. Store rolls of felt and other sheet materials on pallets or other raised surface. Stand all
roll materials on end. Cover roll goods with a canvas tarpaulin or other breathable material (not
polyethylene).
C. Do not leave unused materials on the roof overnight or when roofing work is not in progress
unless protected from weather and other moisture sources.
D. Secure all material and equipment on the job site. If any material or equipment is stored on the
roof, and assure that the integrity of the deck is not compromised at any time. Damage to the deck
caused by the Contractor's actions will be the sole responsibility of the Contractor and will be
repaired or replaced at his expense.
1.10 MANUFACTURER'S INSPECTIONS
A. When the project is in progress, the roofing system manufacturer will provide the following:
1. Report progress and quality of the work as observed.
2. Provide periodic job site inspections.
MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING - TORCH -APPLICATION 075200 - 4
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Creek
3. Report to the Architect in writing any failure or refusal of the Contractor to correct
unacceptable practices called to the Contractor's attention.
4. Confirm after completion that manufacturer has observed no applications procedures in
conflict with the specifications other than those that may have been previously reported and
corrected.
1.11 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Proceed with roofing work only when existing and forecasted weather conditions will permit unit
of work to be installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and warranty
requirements.
B. Do not apply roofing insulation or membrane to damp deck surface.
C. Do not expose materials subject to water or solar damage in quantities greater than can be
weatherproofed during same day.
1.12 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Sequence installation of roofing with related units of work specified in other sections to ensure
that roof assemblies including roof accessories, flashing, trim and joint sealers are protected
against damage from effects of weather, corrosion and adjacent construction activity.
B. Complete all roofing field assembly work each day. Phased construction will not be accepted.
f�[c��.il:::: ►
A. Upon completion of installation, and acceptance by the Owner and Architect, the manufacturer
will supply to the Owner the Thirty (30) Year warranty covering labor and material.
B. Installer will submit a five (5)-year warranty to the membrane manufacturer with a copy directly
to Owner.
PART 2 — PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. Refer to Division 01 Section "Common Product Requirements."
B. Basis of Design: Materials, manufacturer's product designations, and/or manufacturer's names
specified herein shall be regarded as the minimum standard of quality required for work of this
Section. Comply with all manufacturer and contractor/fabricator quality and performance criteria
specified in Part 1.
C. Substitutions: Products proposed as equal to the products specified in this Section shall be
submitted in accordance with Bidding Requirements and Division 01 provisions.
MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING - TORCH -APPLICATION 075200 - 5
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Creek
1. Proposals shall be accompanied by a copy of the manufacturer's standard specification
section. That specification section shall be signed and sealed by a professional engineer
licensed in the state in which the installation is to take place. Substitution requests containing
specifications without licensed engineer certification shall be rejected for non-conformance.
2. Include a list of three (3) projects of similar type and extent, located within a one hundred
mile radius from the location of the project. In addition, the three projects must be at least
five (5) years old and be available for inspection by the Architect, Owner or Owner's
Representative.
3. Equivalency of performance criteria, warranty terms, submittal procedures, and contractual
terms will constitute the basis of acceptance.
4. The Owner's decision regarding substitutions will be considered final. Unauthorized
substitutions will be rejected.
2.2 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. The design is based upon roofing systems engineered and manufactured by The Garland
Company or approved equals:
The Garland Company
3800 East 91st Street
Cleveland, Ohio 44105
Telephone: 281-989-1740
tstranger@garlandind.com
Website: www.garlandco.com
2.3 DESCRIPTION
A. Modified bituminous roofing work including but not limited to:
1. One ply of SBS Torch Grade Base Sheet fully adhered to approved torchable insulation with
roofer's torches.
2. Base Flashing Ply: One (1) ply of SBS Torch Grade Base sheet covered by an additional
layer of SBS Torch Modified Membrane.
3. Modified Membrane: STRESSPLY IV UV MINERAL 195 mil SBS (Styrene-Butadiene-
Styrene) mineral surfaced rubber modified roofing membrane with a dual fiberglass scrim.
This membrane is designed for torch applications and has a burn -off backer that indicates
when the material is hot enough to be installed. Surfaced with a highly reflective Starburst
mineral.
2.4 BITUMINOUS MATERIALS
A. Asphalt Primer: V.O.C. compliant, ASTM D41, GarlaPrime
B. Asphalt Roofing Mastic: V.O.C. compliant, ASTM D4586, Type II, GarlaFlex
2.5 SHEET MATERIALS
MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING - TORCH -APPLICATION 075200 - 6
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Creek
A. Base Plies
1. SBS Torch Grade Base Sheet
B. Base Flashing Ply: SBS Torch Grade Base Sheet with woven fiberglass scrim reinforcement with
the following minimum performance requirements according to ASTM D5147. Properties
(Finished Membrane):
1. Tensile Strength (ASTM D-5147)
a. 2 in/min. @ 73.4 f 3.6°F MD 210 lbf/in CMD 2101bf/in
b. 50 mm/min. @ 23 f YC MD 36.7 kN/m CMD 36.7 kN/m
2. Tear Strength (ASTM D5147)
a. 2 in/min. @ 73.4 f 3.6°F MD 250 lbf CMD 250 lbf
b. 50 mm/min. @ 23 f 30C MD 1112N CMD 1112N
3. Elongation at Maximum Tensile (ASTM D5147)
a. 2 in/min. @ 73.4 f 3.6°F MD 4.0% CMD 4.0%
b. 50 mm/min. @ 23 f 30C MD 4.0% CMD 4.0%
C. Modified Flashing Ply
1. STRESSPLY IV UV MINERAL
D. Modified Membrane Properties (Finished Membranes): STRESSPLY IV UV MINERAL; ASTM
D6163, Type III Grade G
1. Tensile Strength (ASTM D5147)
a. 2 in/min. @ 73.4 f 3.6°F MD 210 lbf/in CMD 2101bf/in
b. 50 mm/min. @ 23 f YC MD 36.7 kN/m CMD 36.7 kN/m
2. Tear Strength (ASTM D5147)
a. 2 in/min. @ 73.4 f 3.6°F MD 250 lbf CMD 250 lbf
b. 50 mm/min. @ 23 f YC MD 1112 N CMD 1112 N
3. Elongation at Maximum Tensile (ASTM D5147)
a. 2 in/min. @ 73.4 f 3.6°F MD 6.0% CMD 6.0%
b. 50 mm/min. @ 23 f 30C MD 6.0% CMD 6.0%
4. Low Temperature Flexibility (ASTM D5147): Passes -20°F (-29°C)
5. Reflectivity (DNS Method): 45-50%
MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING - TORCH -APPLICATION 075200 - 7
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
2.6 SURFACING MATERIALS
A. Mineral Surfaced Membranes — Starburst Minerals:
1. Initial Reflectance of Mineral Sheet 50% - 60%
2. Aged Reflectance of Mineral Sheet > 50%
3. Bulk Mineral Reflectance 65% - 85%
4. Specific Gravity > 2.5
2.7 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Roof Insulation:
1. Tapered polyisocyanurate.
2. Yz" Securock
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Creek
B. Pitch Pocket Sealer: Two part, 100% solids, self leveling, polyurethane sealant for filling pitch
pans as recommended and furnished by the membrane manufacturer.
1. Durometer (ASTM D2240) 40-50 Shore
2. Elongation (ASTM D412) 250%
3. Tensile Strength (ASTM D412) 200 @ 100 mil
C. Roof Drains: Drain system as recommended by the membrane manufacturer.
D. Pitch pans, Rain Collar 24 gauge stainless or 20oz (567gram) copper. All joints should be
welded/soldered watertight. See details for design.
E. Drain Flashings should be 41b (1.8kg) sheet lead formed and rolled
F. Plumbing stacks should be 41b (1.8kg) sheet lead formed and rolled.
PART 3 — EXECUTION
3.1 EXECUTION, GENERAL
A. Comply with requirements of Division 01 Section "Common Execution Requirements."
3.2 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that deck surfaces and project conditions are ready to receive work of this section.
B. Verify that deck is supported and secured to structural members.
MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING - TORCH -APPLICATION 075200 - 8
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Creek
C. Verify that deck is clean and smooth, free of depressions, projections or ripples, and is properly
sloped to drains.
D. Verify that adjacent roof substrate components do not vary more than 1/4 inch in height.
E. Verify that deck surfaces are dry.
F. Verify that openings, curbs, pipes, conduit, sleeves, ducts, and other items which penetrate the
roof are set solidly, and that cant strips are set in place.
3.3 DECK PREPARATION
A. Wood Deck
1. Verify that wood decking is flat and has tight joints.
2. Seal plywood joints with tape.
3. Fill knot holes with latex filler.
3.4 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Cooperate with manufacturer, inspection and test agencies engaged or required to perform
services in connection with installing the roof system.
B. Insurance/Code Compliance: Where required by code, install and test the roofing system to
comply with governing regulation and specified insurance requirements.
C. Protect other work from spillage of roofing materials and prevent materials from entering or
clogging drains and conductors. Replace or restore other work damaged by installation of the coal
tar modified bituminous roofing system.
D. Coordinate installation of roofing system components so that insulation and roofing plies are not
exposed to precipitation or left exposed overnight. Provide cut-offs at end of each day's work to
cover exposed ply sheets and insulation. Remove cut-offs immediately before resuming work.
E. Substrate Joint Penetrations: Prevent bitumen from penetrating substrate joints, entering building,
or damaging roofing system components or adjacent building construction.
F. Apply roofing materials as specified by manufacturer's instructions.
1. Keep roofing materials dry before and during application.
2. Do not permit phased construction.
3. Complete application of roofing plies, modified sheet and flashing in a continuous operation.
4. Begin and apply only as much roofing in one day as can be completed that same day.
3.6 INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Deck type: Wood
MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING - TORCH -APPLICATION 075200 - 9
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Creek
B. Insulation Base Layer: Polyisocyanurate, ''/2" minimum thickness, '/4:12 slope to drain,
mechanically fastened using 22 fasteners per board
C. Insulation Top Layer: Securock, V2" minimum thickness, adhered with Olybond or equal
D. A minimum two-hour fire watch is required for each day that torch -applied membranes are
installed.
E. Keep an ABC rated fire extinguisher in a central location where all workers know where it is and
how to operate in properly.
3.7 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION
A. Install one layer of SBS Torch Base Sheet to a properly prepared substrate. Shingle in proper
direction to shed water on each area of roofing.
B. To a suitable substrate, lay out the roll in the course to be followed and unroll six (6) feet (1.8m).
C. Using a roofing torch, heat the surface of the coiled portion until the burn -off backer melts away.
At this point, the material is hot enough to lay into the substrate. Progressively unroll the sheet
while heating and press down with your foot to insure a proper bond.
D. After the major portion of the roll is bonded, re -roll the first six (6) feet (1.8m) and bond it in a
similar fashion.
E. Repeat this operation with subsequent rolls with side laps of four (4) inches (101 mm) and end
laps of eight inches.
F. Give each lap a finishing touch by passing the torch along the joint and spreading the melted
bitumen evenly with a rounded trowel to insure a smooth, tight seal.
G. Extend underlayment two (2) inches (50mm) beyond top edges of cants at wall and projection
bases.
H. Install base flashing ply to all perimeter and projections details.
3.8 HPR MODIFIED MEMBRANE APPLICATION
A. Install StressPly IV UV Mineral as described below.
B. Over the SBS Torch Base Sheet underlayment(s), lay out the roll in the course to be followed and
unroll six (6) feet. Seams for the top layer of modified membrane will be staggered over the SBS
Torch Base Sheet seams.
C. Using a roofing torch, heat the surface of the coiled portion until the burn -off backer melts away.
At this point, the material is hot enough to lay into the substrate. Progressively unroll the sheet
while heating and press down with your foot to insure a proper bond.
MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING - TORCH -APPLICATION 075200 - 10
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Creek
D. After the major portion of the roll is bonded, re -roll the first six (6) feet (1.8m) and bond it in a
similar fashion.
E. Repeat this operation with subsequent rolls with side laps of four (4) inches (101mm) and end
laps of eight (8) inches (203mm).
F. Give each lap a finishing touch by passing the torch along the joint and spreading the melted
bitumen evenly with a rounded trowel to insure a smooth, tight seal.
3.9 FLASHING MEMBRANE INSTALLATION
A. Seal all curb, wall and parapet flashings with an application of mastic and mesh on a daily basis.
Do not permit conditions to exist that will allow moisture to enter behind, around or under the
roof or flashing membrane.
B. Prepare all walls and penetrations to be flashed with asphalt primer at the rate of one hundred
(100) square feet per gallon. Allow primer to dry tack free.
C. Use the modified membrane as the flashing membrane. Adhere to the underlying base flashing
ply with specified asphalt unless otherwise noted in these specifications. Nail off at a minimum of
eight (8) inches (203mm) o.c. from the finished roof at all vertical surfaces.
D. Solidly adhere the entire sheet of flashing membrane to the substrate. Tops of all flashings that
are not run up and over curb shall be secured through termination bar 6 inches (152mm) and
sealed at top
E. Seal all vertical laps of flashing membrane with a three -course application of trowel -grade silver
mastic (Silver Flash) and fiberglass mesh.
F. Coordinate counter flashing, cap flashings, expansion joints, and similar work with modified
bitumen roofing work.
G. Through Wall Counterflashing [Detail No. MBT-24]:
1. Minimum flashing height is eight (8) inches (203mm) above finished roof height. Prime
vertical wall at a rate of one hundred (100) square feet per gallon and allow to dry
2. Set cant in Flashing Bond Mastic. Run all plies over cant a minimum of two (2) inches
(50mm).
3. Install base flashing ply covering wall with six (6) inches (152mm) on to field of the roof.
4. Install a second ply of modified flashing ply over the base flashing ply, nine (9) inches
(228mm) on to the field of the roof. Apply a three -course application of mastic and mesh at
all vertical seams using Silver Flash.
5. Apply butyl tape to wall behind flashing. Secure termination bar through flashing, butyl tape
and into wall at eight (8) inches (203mm) o.c. Alternatively, use caulk to replace the butyl
tape.
6. Install counter flashing in through wall reglet.
H. Equipment Support [Detail No. MBT-321:
MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING - TORCH -APPLICATION 075200 - 11
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Creek
1. Minimum curb height is eight (8) inches (203mm) above finished roof height. Prime vertical
at a rate of one hundred (100) square feet per gallon and allow to dry.
2. Set cant in Flashing Bond Mastic. Run all field plies over cant a minimum of two (2) inches
(50mm).
3. Install base flashing ply covering curb with six (6) inches (152mm) on to field of the roof.
4. Install a second ply of modified flashing ply over the base flashing ply, nine (9) inches
(228mm) on to the field of the roof. Attach top of membrane to top of curb and nail at eight
(8) inches (203mm) o.c. Apply a three -course application of mastic and mesh at all vertical
seams using Silver Flash.
5. Install pre -manufactured cover. Fasten sides at twenty four (24) inches (609mm) o.c. with
fasteners and neoprene washers. Furnish all joint cover laps with butyl tape between metal
covers.
6. Set equipment on neoprene pad and fasten as required by equipment manufacturer.
I. Curb Detail/Air Handling Station [Detail No. MBT-33]:
1. Minimum curb height is eight (8) inches (203mm) above finished roof height. Prime vertical
at a rate of one hundred (100) square feet per gallon and allow to dry.
2. Set cant in Flashing Bond Mastic. Run all field plies over cant a minimum of two (2) inches
(50mm).
3. Install base flashing ply covering curb with six (6) inches (152mm) on to field of the roof.
4. Install a second ply of modified flashing ply over the base flashing ply, nine (9) inches
(228mm) on to the field of the roof. Apply a three -course application of mastic and mesh at
all vertical seams using Silver Flash.
5. Install pre -manufactured counterflashing with fasteners and neoprene washers or per
manufacturer's recommendations.
6. Set equipment on neoprene pad and fasten as required by equipment manufacturer.
Exhaust Fan [Detail No. MBT-36]:
1. Minimum curb height is eight (8) inches (203mm) above finished roof height. Prime vertical
at a rate of one hundred (100) square feet per gallon and allow to dry.
2. Set cant in Flashing Bond Mastic. Run all plies over cant a minimum of two (2) inches
(50mm).
3. Install base flashing ply covering curb with six (6) inches (152mm) on to field of the roof.
4. Install a second ply of modified flashing ply installed over the base flashing ply, nine (9)
inches (228mm) on to field of the roof. Attach top of membrane to top of wood curb and nail
at eight (8) inches (203mm) o.c. Apply a three -course application of mastic and mesh at all
vertical seams using Silver Flash.
5. Install metal exhaust fan over the wood nailers and flashing to act as counterflashing. Fasten
per manufacturer's recommendation.
K. Passive Vent/Air Intake [Detail No. MBT-37]:
1. Minimum curb height is eight (8) inches (203mm) above finished roof height. Prime vertical
at a rate of one hundred (100) square feet per gallon and allow to dry.
MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING - TORCH -APPLICATION 075200 - 12
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Creek
2. Set cant in Flashing Bond Mastic. Run all plies over cant a minimum of two (2) inches
(50mm).
3. Install base flashing ply covering curb with six (6) inches (152mm) on to the field of the roof.
4. Install a second ply of modified flashing ply installed over the base flashing ply, nine (9)
inches (228mm) on to field of the roof. Attach top of membrane to top of wood curb and nail
at eight (8) inches (203mm) o.c. Apply a three -course application of mastic and mesh at all
vertical seams using Silver Flash.
5. Install passive vent/air intake over the wood nailers and flashing to act as counterflashing.
Fasten per manufacturer's recommendations.
L. Roof Drain [Detail No. MBT-40]:
1. Plug drain to prevent debris from entering plumbing.
2. Taper insulation to drain minimum of twenty four (24) inches (609mm) from center of drain.
3. Run roof system plies over drain. Cut out plies inside drain bowl.
4. Set lead/copper flashing (thirty (30) inch square minimum) in '/4 inch bed of mastic. Run
lead/copper into drain a minimum of two (2) inches (50mm). Prime lead/copper at a rate of
one hundred (100) square feet per gallon and allow to dry.
5. Install base flashing ply (forty (40) inches square minimum).
6. Install modified membrane (forty eight (48) inches square minimum).
7. Install clamping ring and assure that all plies are under the clamping ring.
8. Remove drain plug and install strainer.
M. Plumbing Stack [Detail No. MBT-50]:
1. Minimum stack height is twelve (12) inches (609mm).
2. Run roof system over the entire surface of the roof. Seal the base of the stack with
elastomeric sealant.
3. Prime flange of new sleeve. Install properly sized sleeves set in '/4 inch (6mm) bed of roof
cement.
4. Install base flashing ply by torch.
5. Install modified membrane by torch.
6. Caulk the intersection of the membrane with elastomeric sealant.
7. Turn sleeve a minimum of one (1) inch (25mm) down inside of stack.
N. Heat Stack [Detail No. MBT-51]:
1. Minimum stack height is twelve (12) inches (609mm).
2. Run roof system over the entire surface of the roof. Seal the base of the stack with
elastomeric sealant.
3. Prime flange of new sleeve. Install properly sized sleeves set in '/4 inch (6mm) bed of roof
cement.
4. Install base flashing ply by torch.
5. Install membrane by torch.
6. Caulk the intersection of the membrane with elastomeric sealant.
7. Install new collar over cap. Weld collar or install stainless steel draw brand.
O. Pitch Pocket Umbrella [Detail No. MBT-53]:
MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING - TORCH -APPLICATION 075200 - 13
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Creek
1. Run all plies up to the penetration.
2. Place the pitch pocket over the penetration and prime all flanges.
3. Strip in flange of pitch pocket with one (1) ply of base flashing ply. Extend six (6) inches
(152mm) onto field of roof.
4. Install second layer of membrane extending nine (9) inches (228mm) onto field of the roof.
5. Fill pitch pocket half full with non -shrink grout. Let this cure and top off with pourable
sealant.
6. Caulk joint between roof system and pitch pocket with roof cement.
7. Place a watershedding type bonnet over the top of the pitch pocket and clamp the top with a
drawband collar. Caulk the upper edge of the band with an elastomeric sealant.
3.10 APPLICATION OF SURFACING
A. Mineral Surfaced Membrane System: While bleed out from the side and end laps are still hot,
hand broadcast minerals into asphalt bleed out for a monolithic appearance. Apply mineral lap
sealant to any areas of improper adherence of minerals and rebroadcast minerals while coating is
still wet.
3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform field inspection as required under Quality Requirements.
B. Correct defects or irregularities discovered during field inspection.
C. Require attendance of roofing materials manufacturers' representatives at site during installation
of the roofing system. A copy of the specification should also be on site at all times.
3.12 CLEANING
A. Remove bitumen adhesive drippings from all walls, windows, floors, ladders and finished
surfaces.
B. In areas where finished surfaces are soiled by asphalt or any other sources of soiling caused by
work of this section, consult manufacturer of surfaces for cleaning instructions and conform to
their instructions.
C. Repair or replace defaced or disfigured finishes caused by work of this section.
3.13 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT
A. Remove and properly dispose of waste products generated during roofing procedures. Comply
with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction
3.14 FINAL INSPECTION
MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING - TORCH -APPLICATION 075200 - 14
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Creek
A. At completion of roofing installation and associated work, meet with Contractor, Architect,
installer, installer of associated work, Owner, roofing system manufacturer's representative and
other representatives directly concerned with performance of roofing system.
B. Walk roof surface areas of the building, inspect perimeter building edges as well as flashing of
roof penetrations, walls, curbs and other equipment. List all items requiring correction or
completion and furnish copy of list to each party in attendance.
C. The roofing system manufacturer reserves the right to request a thermographic scan of the roof
during final inspection to determine if any damp or wet materials have been installed. The
thermographic scan shall be provided by the Roofing Contractor.
D. If core cuts verify the presence of damp or wet materials, the Roofing Contractor shall be
required to replace the damaged areas at his own expense.
E. Repair or replace deteriorated or defective work found at time above inspection as required to a
produce an installation which is free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial
Completion and according to warranty requirements.
F. Notify the Architect upon completion of corrections.
G. Following the final inspection, provide written notice of acceptance of the installation from the
roofing system manufacturer.
H. Immediately correct roof leakage during construction. If the Contractor does not respond within
twenty four (24) hours, the Owner will exercise rights to correct the Work under the terms of the
Conditions of the Contract.
3.15 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
A. At a time and date agreed to by the Owner, instruct the Owner's facility manager, or other
representative designated by the Owner, on the following procedures:
1. Roof troubleshooting procedures.
2. Notification procedures for reporting leaks or other apparent roofing problems.
3. Roofing maintenance.
4. The Owner's obligations for maintaining the roofing warranty in effect and force.
5. The Manufacturer's obligations for maintaining the roofing warranty in effect and force.
END OF SECTION 075200
MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING - TORCH -APPLICATION 075200 - 15
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Park
SECTION 076200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 specification sections, apply to this section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Formed wall sheet metal flashing.
2. Formed roof sheet metal flashing.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show installation layouts of sheet metal flashing and trim, including plans,
elevations, expansion joint locations, and keyed details. Distinguish between shop- and field -
assembled work.
1. Include details for forming, joining, supporting, and securing sheet metal flashing and _
trim, including pattern of seams, termination points, fixed points, expansion joints,
expansion joint covers, edge conditions, special conditions, and connections to adjoining
work.
C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each finish specified.
D. Maintenance data.
E. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal
Manual" unless more stringent requirements are specified or shown on Drawings.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to
repair finish or replace sheet metal flashing and trim that shows evidence of deterioration of
factory -applied finishes within 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 1
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SHEET METALS
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a
strippable, temporary protective film before shipping.
B. Metallic -Coated Steel Sheet: Restricted flatness steel sheet, metallic coated by the hot -dip
process.
1. Aluminum -Zinc Alloy -Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 coating
designation, Grade 40 (Class AZM150 coating designation, Grade 275); structural
quality.
2. Surface: Mill phosphatized for field painting.
2.2 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS
A. Polyethylene Sheet: 6-mil- (0.15-mm-) thick polyethylene sheet complying with
ASTM D 4397.
B. Felt: ASTM D 226, Type II (No. 30), asphalt -saturated organic felt, nonperforated.
C. Slip Sheet: Building paper, 3-lb/100 sq. ft. (0.16-kg/sq. m) minimum, rosin sized.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings,
separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing
and trim installation and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured
item unless otherwise indicated.
B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self -tapping screws, self-locking rivets and
bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by
manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item.
1. General: Blind fasteners or self -drilling screws, gasketed, with hex -washer head.
a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps or
factory -applied coating.
b. Blind Fasteners: High -strength aluminum or stainless steel rivets suitable for
metal being fastened.
2. Fasteners for Aluminum -Zinc Alloy -Coated Steel Sheet: Hot -dip galvanized steel
according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329 or Series 300 stainless steel.
C. Solder:
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 2
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Park
1. For Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn50, 50 percent tin and 50
percent lead or Grade Sn60, 60 percent tin and 40 percent lead.
D. Sealant Tape: Pressure -sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant
tape with release -paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining
tape 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide and 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick.
E. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polymer sealant; low modulus; of type, grade,
class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain
watertight.
F. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single -component, solvent -release butyl rubber sealant;
polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked -type expansion joints with limited
movement.
G. Bituminous Coating: Cold -applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in
SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, geometry,
metal thickness, and other characteristics of item indicated. Fabricate items at the shop to
greatest extent possible.
Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication.
2. Form sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool
marks and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form
hems.
3. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not
allowed on faces exposed to view.
B. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric
sealant.
C. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used, form expansion
joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with butyl
sealant concealed within joints.
D. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or
from compatible, noncorrosive metal.
E. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat -lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams,
and solder.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 3
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Park
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION
A. Polyethylene Sheet: Install polyethylene sheet with adhesive for anchorage. Apply in shingle
fashion to shed water, with lapped and taped joints of not less than 2 inches (50 mm).
B. Felt Underlayment: Install felt underlayment with adhesive for temporary anchorage. Apply in
shingle fashion to shed water, with lapped joints of not less than 2 inches (50 mm).
C. Self -Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install self -adhering sheet underlayment, wrinkle free.
Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation; use primer
rather than nails for installing underlayment at low temperatures. Apply in shingle fashion to
shed water, with end laps of not less than 6 inches (150 mm) staggered 24 inches (600 mm)
between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3-1/2 inches (90 mm). Roll laps with roller.
Cover underlayment within 14 days.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in
place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement so that completed sheet metal
flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight. Use fasteners,
solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as
required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system.
Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide uniform,
neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant.
Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight
performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating
sheet metal.
Space cleats not more than 12 inches (300 mm) apart. Anchor each cleat with two
fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners.
4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and
tool marks.
Install sealant tape where indicated.
6. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted.
B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates,
protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other
permanent separation as recommended by SMACNA.
Underlayment: Where installing metal flashing directly on cementitious or wood
substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet or install a
course of polyethylene sheet.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 4
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space
movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet (3 m) with no joints allowed within 24 inches (600
mm) of corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not
be sufficiently watertight, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1
inch (25 mm) deep, filled with sealant concealed within joints.
D. Fastener Sizes: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate metal decking not less than
recommended by fastener manufacturer to achieve maximum pull-out resistance.
E. Seal joints as shown and as required for watertight construction.
F. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pre -tin edges
of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm), except reduce pre -tinning where
pre -tinned surface would show in completed Work.
Do not solder metallic -coated steel and aluminum sheet.
Do not use torches for soldering. Heat surfaces to receive solder and flow solder into
joint. Fill joint completely. Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces.
Stainless -Steel Soldering: Tin edges of uncoated sheets using solder recommended for
stainless steel and acid flux. Promptly remove acid flux residue from metal after tinning
and soldering. Comply with solder manufacturer's recommended methods for cleaning
and neutralization.
4. Copper Soldering: Tin edges of uncoated copper sheets using solder for copper.
G. Rivets: Rivet joints in uncoated aluminum where indicated and where necessary for strength.
3.3 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements, sheet
metal manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet
Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, set units true to line, and level as
indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and
weather resistant.
B. Roof Edge Flashing: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations
in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and as indicated. Interlock bottom edge of
roof edge flashing with continuous cleat anchored to substrate at staggered 3-inch (75-mm)
centers.
C. Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base flashing.
Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing. Extend
counterflashing 4 inches (100 mm) over base flashing. Lap counterflashing joints a minimum
of 4 inches (100 mm) and bed with sealant.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 5
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
D. Roof -Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof -penetration flashing with installation
of roofing and other items penetrating roof. Seal with elastomeric sealant and clamp flashing to
pipes that penetrate roof.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim
are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions.
END OF SECTION 076200
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 6
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Park
SECTION 077210 — ROOF HATCHES
PART 1— GENERAL
: � : 1�1� � � �1 Ju�i �1�1► 1.
A Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 specification sections, apply to this section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes roof hatches.
B. Submittals: For each type of product indicated, submit the following:
1. Product Data
2. Shop Drawings
3. Coordination Drawings showing other items on roof
4. Finish Samples
PART 2 — PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
l . Roof Hatches:
a. Babcock -Davis Hatchways, Inc.
b. Bilco Company
C. Milcor, Inc.
d. O'Keeffe's, Inc.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Materials: Fabricate units using the following materials:
1. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M).
2. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating designation.
3. Insulation: Manufacturer's standard.
4. Wood Nailers: Softwood lumber, pressure treated, complying with AWPA C2.
5. Accessories: As recommended by manufacturer.
6. Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard neoprene, EPDM, PVC, foam rubber, or cork.
7. Bituminous Coating: SSPC-Paint 12 for 15-mil (0.4-mm) dry film thickness per
coating.
8. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, and Uses NT, G,
A, and, as applicable, O.
9. Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, compatible with roofing system.
ROOF HATCHES 077210 - 1
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
B. Roof Hatches: Fabricate units to withstand 40-lbf/sq. ft. (1.9-kPa) external and 20-
lbf/sq.ft. (0.95 kPa) internal loading pressure. Frame with minimum 9 inch (225 mm) high,
integral -curb, double -wall construction with 1-1/2-inch (38- mm) insulation, formed cants
and cap flashing (roofing counterflashing), with welded or sealed mechanical corner joints.
Provide double -wall cover (lid) construction with 1-inch- (25 mm) thick insulation
core. Provide gasketing and equip with corrosion resistant or hot -dip galvanized
hardware including pintle hinges, hold -open devices, interior padlock hasps and both
interior and exterior latch handles.
l . Material: Galvanized steel sheet curbs and aluminum covers (lids).
a. Finish: Prime painted.
C. Finishes: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal
Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
D. Aluminum Sheet Finishes: Clean surfaces and welds, mechanical connections, and
abraded areas, and apply repair paint.
1. Shop Primer: Exterior metal primer per Division 9 Section "Painting."
E. Galvanized Steel Sheet Finishes: Clean surfaces and apply a conversion coating. Clean welds,
mechanical connections, and abraded areas, and apply galvanizing repair paint to
comply with ASTM A 780.
1. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High -zinc -dust -content paint for regalvanizing welds
in steel, complying with SSPC-Paint 20.
2. Shop Primer: Exterior galvanized metal primer per Division 9 Section "Painting."
PART 3 — EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. INSTALLATION
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Coordinate with other roof construction,
and anchor roof accessories securely.
B. SEPARATION
Separate metal from incompatible metal or corrosive substrates, including wood, by
coating concealed surfaces, at locations of contact, with bituminous coating or
providing other permanent separation.
C. CLEANING AND PROTECTION
Clean exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. Touch up damaged
metal coatings.
END OF SECTION
ROOF HATCHES 077210 - 2
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Park
SECTION 079000 - JOINT SEALERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 specification sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Provide sealants at intersection of building components and at control and expansion joints.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit for approval samples, product data.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers,
which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced
installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Joints designed for expansion and movement conditions at site:
1. Exterior joints on vertical surfaces: Non -sag polyurethane; Pecora Dynatrol II or Tremco
Dymeric or approved equal.
2. Interior joints, joints at fiber cement siding: per manufacturer's recommendation.
3. Primers, bond breakers, and backer rods compatible with sealant and adjacent surfaces.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Examine substrate; report unsatisfactory conditions in writing
acceptance of substrates.
B. Provide sealants in colors as selected from manufacturer's standards.
Beginning work means
JOINT SEALERS 079000-1
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
C. Install materials and systems in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved
submittals. Install materials and systems in proper relation with adjacent construction and with
uniform appearance. Coordinate with work of other sections. Clean and prime joints, and
install bond breakers, backer rods and sealant as recommended by manufacturers.
D. Depth shall equal width up to 1/2" wide; depth shall equal 1/2 width for joints over 1/2" wide.
E. Cure and protect sealants as directed by manufacturers. Replace or restore damaged sealants.
Clean adjacent surfaces to remove spillage.
END OF SECTION 079000
JOINT SEALERS 079000-2
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Park
SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 specification sections, apply to this section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Standard hollow metal doors and frames.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Include elevations, door edge details, frame profiles, metal thicknesses,
preparations for hardware, and other details.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory -applied color finishes.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required.
E. Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for
details and openings as those on Drawings.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Amweld Building Products, LLC.
2. Benchmark; a division of Therma-Tru Corporation.
3. Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company.
4. Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company.
5. Deansteel Manufacturing Company, Inc.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 1
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Park
6. Firedoor Corporation.
7. Fleming Door Products Ltd.; an Assa Abloy Group company.
8. Habersham Metal Products Company.
9. Kewanee Corporation (The).
10. Mesker Door Inc.
11. Pioneer Industries, Inc.
12. Security Metal Products Corp.
13. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company.
14. Windsor Republic Doors.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Cold -Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, CS, Type B; suitable for exposed
applications.
B. Hot -Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, CS, Type B.
C. Metallic -Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with
minimum G60 (Z 180) or A60 (ZF 180) metallic coating.
D. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 591/A 591M, Commercial Steel (CS), 40Z (12G) coating
designation; mill phosphatized.
1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M
or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot -dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M,
Class B.
E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot -dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.
F. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches (102 mm), as measured
according to ASTM C 143/C 143M.
G. Mineral -Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I.
H. Bituminous Coating: Cold -applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil
(0.4-mm) dry film thickness per coat.
2.3 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL DOORS
A. General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 2
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
1. Design: Flush panel
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
2. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, polystyrene,
polyurethane, polyisocyanurate, mineral -board, or vertical steel -stiffener core.
3. Vertical Edges for Single -Acting Doors: Beveled edge, 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3 mm in 50
mm).
4. Top and Bottom Edges: Closed with flush or inverted 0.042-inch- (1.0-mm-) thick, end
closures or channels of same material as face sheets.
5. Tolerances: SDI 117, "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and Frames."
B. Exterior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from 16 gage metallic -coated steel sheet.
C. Hardware Reinforcement: ANSUSDI A250.6.
2.4 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL FRAMES
A. General: Comply with ANSUSDI A250.8.
B. Exterior Frames: Fabricated from 14 gage metallic -coated steel sheet.
1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners.
2. Fabricate frames as full profile welded unless otherwise indicated.
C. Hardware Reinforcement: ANSUSDI A250.6.
2.5 FRAME ANCHORS
A. Jamb Anchors:
1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap -and -stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not
less than 0.042 inch (1.0 mm) thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2
inches (50 mm) wide by 10 inches (250 mm) long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177
inch (4.5 mm) thick.
2. Post -installed Expansion Type for In -Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 3/8-inch-
(9.5-mm-) diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from
frame to wall, with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor location.
B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.042 inch (1.0 mm) thick,
and as follows:
1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip -type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 3
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Park
2. Separate Topping Concrete Slabs: Adjustable -type anchors with extension clips,
allowing not less than 2-inch (50-mm) height adjustment. Terminate bottom of frames at
finish floor surface.
2.6 STOPS AND MOLDINGS
A. Fixed Frame Moldings: Formed integral with hollow metal frames, a minimum of 5/8 inch (16
mm) high unless otherwise indicated.
B. Terminated Stops: Where indicated, terminate stops 6 inches (152 mm) above finish floor with
a 90-degree angle cut, and close open end of stop with steel sheet closure. Cover opening in
extension of frame with welded -steel filler plate, with welds ground smooth and flush with
frame.
2.7 LOUVERS
A. Provide sight proof louvers, where indicated, that comply with SDI I I I C, with blades or baffles
formed of 0.020-inch- (0.5-mm-) thick, cold -rolled steel sheet set into 0.032-inch- (0.8-mm-)
thick steel frame.
2.8 ACCESSORIES
A. Ceiling Struts: Minimum 1/4-inch-thick by 1-inch- (6.4-mm-thick by 25.4-mm-) wide steel.
B. Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inch (0.4 mm) thick.
2.9 FABRICATION
A. Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in SDI 117.
B. Hollow Metal Doors:
1. Exterior Doors: Provide weep -hole openings in bottom of exterior doors. Seal joints in
top edges of doors against water penetration.
C. Hollow Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections, provide alignment plates or
angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames.
1. Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth,
flush, and invisible.
2. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval -head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners
unless otherwise indicated.
3. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be
grouted.
4. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot
welds per anchor.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 4
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Park
5. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:
a. Stud -Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches (457 mm) from top and
bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches (813 mm) o.c. and as
follows:
1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches (1524 mm) high.
6. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped doors, drill stops to receive door silencers.
a. Single -Door Frames: Three door silencers.
b. Double -Door Frames: Two door silencers.
D. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive templated mortised
hardware according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in
Division 08 Section "Door Hardware."
1. Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to ANSI/SDI A250.8.
2. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised and surface -mounted door
hardware.
3. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSUSDI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI A115 Series
specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware.
4. Coordinate locations of conduit and wiring boxes for electrical connections with
Division 26 electrical Sections.
2.10 STEEL FINISHES
A. Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating.
1. Shop Primer: ANSUSDI A250.10.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Hollow Metal Frames: Comply with ANSUSDI A250.11.
1. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent
anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving
surfaces smooth and undamaged.
a. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling
limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously;
grind, fill, dress and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.
b. Install frames with removable glazing stops located on secure side of opening.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 5
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Park
C. Install door silencers in frames before grouting.
d. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been
properly set and secured.
e. Check plumbness, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim
as necessary to comply with installation tolerances.
2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor,
and secure with post -installed expansion anchors.
a. Floor anchors may be set with powder -actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled
expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings.
Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow metal door frames for squareness, alignment,
twist, and plumb to the following tolerances:
a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at door rabbet on a line
90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.
b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a horizontal
line parallel to plane of wall.
C. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at opposite face corners of
jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.
d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs at floor.
B. Hollow Metal Doors: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified
below. Shim as necessary.
Non -Fire -Rated Standard Steel Doors:
a. Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch (3 mm) plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).
b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch (3 mm) plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6
mm).
C. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch (9.5 mm).
d. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold): Maximum 3/4
inch (19 mm).
3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final
inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace
defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.
B. Prime -Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of
prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air -drying, rust -inhibitive primer.
END OF SECTION 081113
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 6
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Park
SECTION 082110 — FIBERGLASS DOORS AND FRAMES
PART1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 specification sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Provide fiberglass doors and frames.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit for approval samples, shop drawings, product data, warranty.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers,
which have been in satisfactory use in similar use for three years. Use experienced installers.
Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Fiberglass reinforced plastic door and frame "Tiger Door" as manufactured by Composite
Structures, Inc. and available through Regent Environmental Products: 713-461-8491.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NWMA I.S. —1 and AWI quality standard. Pre -fit doors to frames. Pre -machine
doors for hardware listed on final schedules. Factory bevel doors.
B. Install doors not more than 1/8" clearance at top and sides, 1/4" at bottom. Comply with NFPA
80 for rated assemblies.
C. Shop Finish: None. Wrap and protect.
D. Adjust, clean, and protect.
END OF SECTION 082110
FIBERGLASS DOORS AND FRAMES 082110-1
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Park
SECTION 083113 - ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 specification sections, apply to this section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes access doors and frames for wells and ceilings.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of access door and frame indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
C. Samples: For each door face material in specified finish.
D. Schedule: Types, locations, sizes, latching or locking provisions, and other data pertinent to
installation.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. If retaining this Article, also retain "Schedule" Paragraph in "Submittals" Article.
B. Verification: Determine specific locations and sizes for access doors needed to gain access to
concealed plumbing, mechanical, or other concealed work, and indicate in the schedule
specified in "Submittals" Article.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 STEEL MATERIALS
A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
1. ASTM A 123/A 123M, for galvanizing steel and iron products.
2. ASTM A 153/A 153M, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware.
B. Steel Sheet: Electrolytic zinc -coated, ASTM A 591/A 591M with cold -rolled steel sheet
substrate complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), exposed.
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 083113 - 1
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
C. Metallic -Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS) with A60 (ZF180)
zinc -iron -alloy (galvannealed) coating or G60 (Z180) mill-phosphatized zinc coating.
D. Steel Finishes: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal
Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
1. Factory -Primed Finish: Manufacturer's standard shop primer.
E. Drywall Beads: 0.0299-inch (0.76-mm) zinc -coated steel sheet to receive joint compound.
F. Manufacturer's standard finish.
2.2 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES FOR WALLS AND CEILINGS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Acudor Products, Inc.
2. Babcock -Davis; A Cierra Products Co.
3. Bar -Co, Inc. Div.; Alfab, Inc.
4. Cendrex Inc.
5. Dur-Red Products.
6. Elmdor/Stoneman; Div. of Acorn Engineering Co.
7. Jensen Industries.
8. J. L. Industries, Inc.
9. Karp Associates, Inc.
10. Larsen's Manufacturing Company.
11. MIFAB, Inc.
12. Milcor Inc.
13. Nystrom, Inc.
14. Williams Bros. Corporation of America (The).
B. Flush Access Doors and Frames with Exposed Trim: Fabricated from steel sheet.
1. Locations: Ceiling.
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 083113 - 2
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Park
2. Door: Minimum 0.060-inch- (1.5-mm-) thick sheet metal.
3. Frame: Minimum 0.060-inch- (1.5-mm-) thick sheet metal with 1-1/4-inch- (32-mm-)
wide, surface -mounted trim.
4. Hinges: Spring -loaded, concealed -pin type.
5. Latch: Cam latch with interior release.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. General: Provide access door and frame assemblies manufactured as integral units ready for
installation.
B. Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view, provide materials with smooth, flat
surfaces without blemishes.
C. Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish
attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access panels to types of supports
indicated.
D. Recessed Access Doors: Form face of panel to provide recess for application of applied finish.
Reinforce panel as required to prevent buckling.
E. Latching Mechanisms: Furnish number required to hold doors in flush, smooth plane when
closed.
1. For cylinder lock, furnish two keys per lock and key all locks alike.
2. For recessed panel doors, provide access sleeves for each locking device. Furnish plastic
grommets and install in holes cut through finish.
F. Extruded Aluminum: After fabrication, apply manufacturer's standard protective coating on
aluminum that will come in contact with concrete.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames.
B. Set frames accurately in position and attach securely to supports with plane of face panels
aligned with adjacent finish surfaces.
C. Install doors flush with adjacent finish surfaces or recessed to receive finish material.
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 083113 - 3
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Park
3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjust doors and hardware after installation for proper operation.
B. Remove and replace doors and frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged.
END OF SECTION 083113
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 083113 - 4
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Park
SECTION 087000 — FINISH HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 specification sections, apply to this section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes furnishing and installing door hardware, thresholds, weatherstripping and
seals.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 8 Section 08 1100 "Metal Doors and Frames".
2. Division 8 Section 08 14 00 "Wood Doors".
3. Division 8 Section 08 4100 "Entrances and Storefronts".
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Furnish and install each door hardware item to provide proper operation and required function
of every unit without binding or failure.
1. Interior Door Opening Force: Adjust hardware operation at interior non -fire -rated doors
to provide an opening force not greater than 5 lbs at a point 3" from latch, measured to
leading edge of door.
2. Exterior and Fire Rated Door Opening Force: At exterior doors and fire -rated doors,
adjust hardware opening force in small increments above the opening force required for
interior non -fire -rated doors to close and latch the door.
3. Closer Sweep Adjustment: Adjust closer sweep period so that from a 70 degree open
position, door will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3" from latch, measured to
leading edge of door.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's technical product data for each item of hardware. Final Hardware
Schedule Content: Based on hardware indicated, organize schedule into vertical format
"hardware sets" indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or
opening. Use specification heading numbers with any variations suffixed a, b, etc
B. Coordinate hardware with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size thickness, hand,
function, and finish of hardware. If requested by Architect, submit one sample of each type of
exposed hardware unit, finished as required, and tagged with full description for coordination
with schedule. Submit data and schedule at earliest possible date, particularly where
acceptance of schedule must precede fabrication of other work (e. g. hollow metal frames) that
is critical to the Project construction schedule.
1. Type, style, function, size and finish of each hardware item.
FINISH HARDWARE 087000 - 1
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
2. Name and manufacturer of each item.
3. Fastenings and other pertinent information.
4. Hardware set location cross-referenced to
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
both Drawing floor plan and door schedule
indications.
5. Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols, and codes in schedule.
6. Mounting locations for hardware.
7. Door and frame sizes and materials.
C. Coordinate keying instructions, and keying information. Deliver keys and key control box to
Owner in person and obtain receipt (No Exceptions).
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Supplier Qualifications: A recognized finish hardware supplier who has been furnishing
hardware in the Project's vicinity for a period of not less than 2 years, and who is, or employs
an experienced hardware consultant (AHC) who is available, at reasonable times during the
course of the Work, for consultation about Project's hardware requirements, to Owner,
Architect and Contractor.
B. Coordination and Schedules: Hardware units and usage specified in Part 2 of this Section and
scheduled on the Drawings establish quality, quantity, function and finish required for each
door opening. Review, coordinate and confirm that hardware specified for each opening is the
proper function. In case of controversy, make appropriate notations of proposed changes from
specified requirements on supplier's hardware schedule and request written clarification from
the Architect prior to proceeding.
C. Fire -Rated Openings: Provide door hardware for fire rated openings that comply with NFPA
Standards No. 80 and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide only items of
door hardware that are listed and tested by UL or Warnock Hersey for given type/size opening
and degree of label. Provide proper latching hardware, door closers, approved -bearing hinges
and seals whether listed in the Hardware Schedule or not. All hardware shall comply with
standards UBC 702 (1997) and UL IOC.
1. Where emergency exit devices are required on fire -rated doors (with supplementary
marking on doors' UL labels indicating "Fire Door to be equipped with Fire Exit
Hardware") provide UL label on exit devices indicating "Fire Exit Hardware".
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to final hardware schedule, and
include basic installation instructions with each item or package.
B. Packaging of door hardware is the responsibility of supplier. As material is received by
hardware supplier from various manufacturers, sort and repackage in containers clearly marked
with appropriate hardware set number to match set numbers of approved hardware schedule.
Two or more identical sets may be packed in same container.
C. Inventory door hardware jointly with representatives of hardware supplier and hardware
installer until each is satisfied that count is correct.
FINISH HARDWARE 087000 - 2
M
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Park
D. Deliver individually packaged door hardware items promptly to place of installation (shop or
Project site).
E. Provide secure lock -up for door hardware delivered to the Project, but not yet installed. Control
handling and installation of hardware items that are not immediately replaceable so that
completion of the Work will not be delayed by hardware losses both before and after
installation.
AMENEWMITIMIRNW1
A. Special warranties:
1. Door Closers: Ten year period
2. Exit Devices: Three year period
3. Locks and Cylinders: Three year period
1.8 MAINTENANCE
A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and
maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and
removal and replacement of door hardware.
B. Parts kits: Furnish manufacturer's standard parts kits for locksets, exit devices, and door closers.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. General: Provide hardware manufactured to conform to published templates, generally prepared
for machine screw installation. Do not provide hardware that has been prepared for self -tapping
sheet metal screws. With each hardware item, furnish machine screws for installation into steel,
and provide threaded to the head wood screws for installation into wood; all-purpose threads
are not acceptable. Provide Phillips flat -head screws except as otherwise indicated. Finish
exposed screws to match the hardware finish. Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units
that are exposed when the door is closed, except to the extent no standard units of the type
specified are available with concealed fasteners. Provide through bolts for closer installation.
2.2 HARDWARE UNITS AND USAGE
A. Units specified below establish the design, grade, function, finish, size, and other qualities
required for this Project. Provide the following hardware units in the quantities specified and
locations indicated on the Door Schedule. Provide US 26D finish unless otherwise specified.
Refer to Door Schedule on Drawings for door sizes, fire ratings, hardware function, exit
devices, door closers, and other requirements at each door opening
1. Continuous Hinges:
a. Acceptable manufacturers: Ives, Markar
FINISH HARDWARE 087000 - 3
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
b. Continuous gear hinges to be manufactured of extruded 6063-T6 aluminum alloy
with anodized finish, or factory painted finish as scheduled.
C. All hinges are to be manufactured to template. Uncut hinges shall be non -handed
and shall be a pin less assembly of three interlocking extrusions applied to the full
height of the door and frame without mortising.
d. Vertical door loads shall be carried on chemically lubricated polyacetal thrust
bearings. The door and frame leaves shall be continually geared together for the
entire hinge length and secured with a full cover channel. Hinge to operate to a
full .
e. Hinges to be milled, anodized and assembled in matching pairs. Fasteners
supplied shall be 410 stainless steel, plated and hardened.
f. Provide UL listed continuous hinges at fire doors. Continuous hinges at fire doors
(suffix -FR) shall meet the required ratings without the use of auxiliary fused pins
or studs.
2. Door Closers:
a. Adjust closers to comply with ADA requirements. Provide type of arm
recommended by closer manufacturer for door conditions (use, door hand and
swing) indicated. Provide appropriate adapter plates for parallel arm mounting at
exterior doors.
b. All closers to be furnished with sex nuts and bolts.
C. Closers for fire -rated doors shall be provided with temperature stabilizing fluid that
complies with standards UBC 7-2 (1997) and UL IOC.
d. Door closer shall have fully hydraulic, full rack and pinion action. Closer shall
have 1-1/2-inch in diameter piston.
e. Hydraulic fluid shall be of a type requiring no seasonal closer adjustment for
temperatures ranging from 120 degrees F to minus 30 degrees F.
f. Spring power shall be continuously adjustable over the full range of closer sizes,
and allow for reduced opening force for the physically handicapped. Closers shall
have separate adjustment for latch speed, general speed, and back check.
g. Provide powder coating certified to exceed 100 hours salt Spray testing by ETL, an
independent testing laboratory used by BHMA for ANSI certification.
h. Pressure relief valves are not accepted.
i. Closers to be installed to allow door swing as shown on plans. Doors swinging into
exit corridors shall provide for corridor clear width as required by code. Where
possible, mount closers on room side of door.
j. Door closers meeting this specification: Falcon SC71 Series or equal product by
LCN, Sargent.
3. Heavy Duty Cylindrical Locks and latches: as scheduled, fastened with through -bolts
and threaded chassis hubs.
a. Chassis: Cold -rolled steel, handing field -changeable.
b. Latch bolts: 1/2 inch projection.
C. Lever Trim: Through -bolt, accessible design, cast lever or metal -filled wrought
types as schedule.
d. Strikes: 16 gage curved steel, bronze or brass with I" deep box construction, lips
of sufficient length to clear trim and project clothing.
e. Certifications:
1) ANSI Al56.2, Grade 1
2) UL listed for 3-hour doors
£ Approved Manufacturers: Falcon T Series x Dane Lever Design (No Substitution —
to match existing).
FINISH HARDWARE 087000 - 4
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
4. Exit Devices: Provide the following at the locations shown on the Door Schedule:
a. Exit Devices shall be touchpad type, fabricated of bronze, brass, stainless steel, or
aluminum, plated to the standard architectural finishes to match the balance of the
door hardware.
b. Touchpad shall extend a minimum of one half of the door width. Touchpad shall
match exit device finish, and shall be stainless steel for US26, US26D, US28,
US32, and US32D finishes. Only compression springs will be used in devices,
latches, and outside trims or controls.
C. Exit devices shall be UL listed panic exit hardware. All exit devices for fire rated
openings shall be UL labeled fire exit hardware.
d. Lever trim for exit devices shall be vandal -resistant type, which will travel to a 90-
degree down position when more than 35 pounds of torque are applied, and which
can easily be re -set.
e. Exit devices meeting this specification: Falcon 25 Series or equal product by Von
Duprin.
5. Kick Plates, Push, and Pulls: Provide the following at locations designated; Ives or
equivalent by Trimco or Rockwood.
a. Kick Plates shall be 10" high x 2" less than door width x minimum 0.0538" (1.3
mm) thick x 133E.
b. Push/Pulls: 8200 6" x 16", 8303EZ 6" x 16".
6. Stops, Flush Bolts, Dust Proof Strikes, & Silencers: Provide the following at locations
designated; IVES, or equivalent by Trimco or Rockwood.
a. Floor Stops: Ives FS441, FS18
b. Wall Stops: Ives WS402
C. Manual Flush Bolts: 1 set IVES FB458/FB358 x DP-1/DP-2 dustproof strike as
required at each inactive leaf of a pair of doors (except equipped with exit
devices).
d. Silencers: IVES SR 64; (3) per single leaf opening, (4) per double leaf opening.
7. Weather stripping, Seals and Thresholds: Provide the following at locations designated;
National Guard Products or equivalent by Zero Weather stripping or Pemko.
2.3 KEYING REQUIREMENTS
A. Keys and Keying:
1. All locks shall be keyed to the existing Falcon 7 pin interchangeable core key system as
directed by the Owner.
2. Provide brass construction cores installed in all locks and cylinders prior to shipping to
jobsite.
3. All keys and cores shall be stamped with key set symbol. Stamp keys "DO NOT
DUPLICATE".
4. Provide 3 change key per cylinder/lock.
5. Provide 5 of each cut Master key and higher level.
6. Provide 2 control keys.
7. Provide 10 construction master keys.
B. Key Control System:
FINISH HARDWARE 087000 - 5
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
1. Provide a Telkee (302) 678-7800 key control system, or equivalent by Lund Equipment
Co., Inc., Cleveland, OH (Tel) 330-659-4800. Include envelopes, labels, tags with self-
locking key clips, receipt forms, 3-way visible card index, temporary markers,
permanent markers, and standard metal wall cabinet, all as recommended by system
manufacturer, with capacity for 150% of the number of locks required for the Project.
Hardware supplier to assist Owner in setting up key control system. Organize keys by
room, by master, grand master and key blanks, in key envelopes with neatly marked
room numbers, as determined at key meeting.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Mount hardware units at heights indicated in "Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware
for Custom Steel Doors and Frames" by the Door and Hardware Institute, except as specifically
indicated or required to comply with governing regulations and except as otherwise directed by
Architect. Reinforce the attachment substrate for secure installation and adjust for proper
operation. Provide clean, properly sized mortises and drilled holes for all mortised and surface
applied finish hardware
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and
recommendations.
B. Do not install surface -mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrate.
Before painter's finish is applied, remove all finish hardware, except prime painted items.
After finish coats are dry, permanently replace and readjust finish hardware for proper
operation.
C. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location
D. Cut and fit threshold and floor covers to profile of doorframes, with mitered corners and hairline
joints. Join units with concealed welds or concealed mechanical joints. Cut smooth openings
for bolts and similar items, if any. Screw thresholds to substrate with No. 10 or larger stainless
steel screws
E. Installation survey is to be performed by a certified "AHC" in the employment of the hardware
supplier.
3.3 ADJUSTMENT
A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door, to ensure proper operation or
function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted and lubricated to operate freely
and smoothly as intended for the application made.
3.4 HARDWARE SCHEDULE:
FINISH HARDWARE 087000 - 6
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Park
SPECWORKS # 103285-B7NQ3LNTE
HW SET: 01
DOOR NUMBER:
O1 02 04 05
EACH TO HAVE:
1 EA
CONTINUOUS HINGE
224HD
628
IVE
1 EA
DEADLOCK
D111H
626
FAL
1 EA
IC CORE ONLY, KEYED
C607
626
FAL
1 EA
PUSH PLATE
8200 6" X 16"
630
IVE
1 EA
PULL PLATE
8303EZ-0 6" X 16"
630
IVE
1 EA
SURFACE CLOSER
SC71 RW/PA
689
FAL
1 EA
KICK PLATE
8400 10" X 2" LDW
630
NE
1 EA
WALL STOP
WS402CCV
626
IVE
1 SET
SEALS
5050B
BRN
NGP
1 EA
DRIP CAP
16A
AL
NGP
1 EA
DOOR SWEEP
198NA
AL
NGP
1 EA
THRESHOLD
425
AL
NGP
HW SET: 02
DOOR NUMBER:
03
EACH TO HAVE:
2 EA
CONTINUOUS HINGE
224HD
628
IVE
2 EA
MANUAL FLUSH BOLT
FB458
626
IVE
1 EA
DUST PROOF STRIKE
DPI
626
IVE
1 EA
STOREROOM LOCK
T581H7D D
626
FAL
1 EA
IC CORE ONLY, KEYED
C607
626
FAL
1 EA
SURFACE CLOSER
SC71 RW/PA
689
FAL
2 EA
KICK PLATE
8400 10" X V LDW
630
IVE
2 EA
FLOOR STOP
FS441
626
IVE
2 EA
DOOR SWEEP
198NA
AL
NGP
1 EA
THRESHOLD
425
AL
NGP
2 EA
SILENCER
SR64
GRY
NE
NOTE: INSTALL CLOSER @ ACTIVE LEAF ONLY.
HW SET: 03
DOOR NUMBER:
06
EACH TO HAVE:
2 EA CONTINUOUS HINGE 224HD 628 IVE
2 EA MANUAL FLUSH BOLT FB458 626 NE
1 EA DUST PROOF STRIKE DPI 626 NE
FINISH HARDWARE 087000 - 7
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
1 EA STOREROOM LOCK
T5811-17D D
626
FAL
1 EA IC CORE ONLY, KEYED
C607
626
FAL
1 SET ASTRAGAL
125NA
AL
NGP
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER
SC71 HD/PA
689
FAL
2 EA KICK PLATE
8400 10" X 1" LDW
630
IVE
2 EA SECURITY FLOOR STOP FS18S
BLK
IVE
1 SET SEALS
5050B
BRN
NGP
1 EA DRIP CAP
16A
AL
NGP
2 EA DOOR SWEEP
198NA
AL
NGP
1 EA THRESHOLD
425
AL
NGP
NOTE: INSTALL CLOSER @ ACTIVE LEAF ONLY.
HW SET: 04
DOOR NUMBER:
07
EACH TO HAVE:
1 EA
CONTINUOUS HINGE
224HD
628
IVE
1 EA
STOREROOM LOCK
MA5811-17 DG
630
FAL
I EA
IC CORE ONLY, KEYED
C607
626
FAL
1 EA
SURFACE CLOSER
SC71 RW/PA
689
FAL
1 EA
FLOOR STOP
FS441
626
IVE
1 SET
SEALS
5050B
BRN
NGP
1 EA
DOOR SWEEP
198NA
AL
NGP
1 EA
THRESHOLD
425
AL
NGP
HW SET: 05
DOOR NUMBER:
08
EACH TO HAVE:
2 EA
CONTINUOUS HINGE
224HD
628
WE
2 EA
MANUAL FLUSH BOLT
FB458
626
IVE
1 EA
DUST PROOF STRIKE
DPI
626
IVE
1 EA
PANIC DEVICE
25-M-NL
630
FAL
1 EA
IC CORE ONLY, KEYED
C607
626
FAL
1 EA
MORTISE CYLINDER
C987H X REQ'D CAM/COLLAR
626
FAL
FINISH HARDWARE 087000 - 8
Clark Condon Associates
Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010
Festival Park
1 SET ASTRAGAL
125NA
AL NGP
2 EA SURFACE CLOSER
SC71 DS
689 FAL
2 EA KICK PLATE
8400 10" X 1" LDW
630 NE
1 SET SEALS
5050B
BRN NGP
1 EA DRIP CAP
16A
AL NGP
2 EA DOOR SWEEP
198NA
AL NGP
1 EA THRESHOLD
425
AL NGP
END OF SECTION 087100
FINISH HARDWARE 087000 - 9
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Park
SECTION 089000 - LOUVERS AND VENTS
PART1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 specification sections, apply to this section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Fixed, extruded -aluminum.
B. See Division 08 Section "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames" for louvers in hollow -metal doors.
C. See Division 08 Section "Flush Wood Doors" for louvers in flush wood doors.
D. See Division 23 Sections for louvers that are a part of mechanical equipment.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Louvers shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following
loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated without permanent deformation
of louver components, noise or metal fatigue caused by louver blade rattle or flutter, or
permanent damage to fasteners and anchors.
1. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on a uniform pressure of 30 lbf/sq. ft. (1436 Pa)
acting inward or outward.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1. For louvers specified to bear AMCA seal, include printed catalog pages showing
specified models with appropriate AMCA Certified Ratings Seals.
B. Shop Drawings: For louvers and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and
attachments to other work. Show frame profiles and blade profiles, angles, and spacing.
C. Samples: For each type of metal finish required.
D. Product Test Reports: Based on tests performed according to AMCA 500-L.
LOUVERS AND VENTS 089000 - 1
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T5, T-52, or T6.
B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003 or 5005 with temper as required
for forming, or as otherwise recommended by metal producer for required finish.
C. Fasteners: Use types and sizes to suit unit installation conditions.
For fastening aluminum, use aluminum or 300 series stainless -steel fasteners.
2. For color -finished louvers, use fasteners with heads that match color of louvers.
D. Bituminous Paint: Cold -applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
2.2 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Fabricate frames, including integral sills, to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with allowances
made for fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoining material tolerances, and perimeter
sealantjoints.
B. Join frame members to each other and to fixed louver blades with welds, threaded fasteners, or
both, as standard with louver manufacturer unless otherwise indicated or size of louver
assembly makes bolted connections between frame members necessary.
2.3 FIXED, EXTRUDED -ALUMINUM LOUVERS
A. Horizontal, Drainable-Blade Louver:
Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Arrow
United Industries; EA-425-DD or comparable product by one of the following:
a. Air Balance Inc.; a Mestek company.
b. Air Flow Company, Inc.
C. Airolite Company, LLC (The).
d. All-Lite Architectural Products.
e. American Warming and Ventilating, Inc.; a Mestek company.
f. Arrow United Industries; a division of Mestek, Inc.
g. Carnes Company, Inc.
h. Cesco Products; a division of Mestek, Inc.
i. Construction Specialties, Inc.
j. Dowco Products Group; Safe -Air of Illinois, Inc.
k. Greenheck Fan Corporation.
1. Industrial Louvers, Inc.
in. Louvers & Dampers, Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc.
n. Metal Form Manufacturing Inc.
o. NCA Manufacturing, Inc.
LOUVERS AND VENTS 089000 - 2
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
p. Nystrom Building Products.
q. Reliable Products, Inc.
r. Ruskin Company; Tomkins PLC.
S. United Enertech Corp.
t. Vent Products Company, Inc.
2. AMCA Seal: Mark units with AMCA Certified Ratings Seal.
2.4 LOUVER SCREENS
A. General: Provide insect and bird screen(s) at each exterior louver.
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
B. Louver Screen Frames: Same kind and form of metal as indicated for louver to which screens
are attached.
C. Louver Screening:
1. Bird Screening: Aluminum, 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) square mesh, 0.063-inch (1.60-mm)
wire.
2. Insect screening.
2.5 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. High -Performance Organic Finish: 3-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2605
and containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat,
and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers'
written instructions.
1. Color and Gloss: Match Architect's sample.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Locate and place louvers and vents level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work.
B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws where
required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection.
C. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers, as
indicated.
D. Repair damaged finishes so no evidence remains of corrective work. Return items that cannot
be refinished in the field to the factory and refinish entire unit or provide new units.
LOUVERS AND VENTS 089000 - 3
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
E. Protect galvanized and nonferrous -metal surfaces that will be in contact with concrete, masonry,
or dissimilar metals from corrosion and galvanic action by applying a heavy coating of
bituminous paint.
END OF SECTION 089000
LOWERS AND VENTS 089000 - 4
Revised-112009 B/CS Unified Specifications
SECTION 09 03 12
CONDUCTIVE TRACE WIRE FOR
WATER PIPE INSTALLATION
(Sentences and/or paragraphs that are double underlined indicate revisions that were made from the
2008 specification.)
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Install electrically continuous trace wire with access points as described herein to be used
for 1 cati with an electronic pipe locator after installation.
1.2 MEASUREMENT
A. There is no separate payment for the supply and installation of tracer wire on any
construction or installation of water main by the Contractor. The Contractor shall consider
the supply and installation of the tracer wire incidental to all construction of water main.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's data on materials furnished that indicate compliance with the
specifications regarding materials used.
B. Indicate on plans location of each trace wire test station.
PART 2 — PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Trace wire to be fourteen (14) gauge minimum solid copper with thermoplastic insulation
recommended for direct burial. Wire connectors to be 3M DBR, or approved equal, and
shall be watertight to provide electrical continuity. Each trace wire access point to be
composed of one Copperhead® SnakePit® Magnetized Tracer Box Test and Monitoring
Station or approved eaual installed in each proposed 24"x24"x6" concrete valve box
collar.
2.2 TESTING REQUIREMENTS
A. Contractor shall perform a continuity test on all trace wire in the presence of the Engineer
or the Engineers' representative. If the trace wire is found to be not continuous after
testing, Contractor shall repair or replace the failed segment of the wire.
PART 3 — EXECUTION
A. Trace wire shall be installed on all water mains. The wire shall be installed in such a
manner as to be able to properly trace all water mains without loss or deterioration of signal
or without the transmitted signal migrating off the tracer wire.
Revised — 112009
B/CS Unified Specifications
B. Trace wire shall be installed in the same trench and inside bored holes and casing with nine
during pipe installation. It shall be secured to the pipe as required to insure that the wire
remains adjacent to the pipe. The trace wire shall be securely bonded together at all wire
joints with an approved watertight connector to provide electrical continuity, and it shall be
accessible at all trace wire access points.
C. Trace wire access points shall in general be no more than five -hundred (500) feet and at
every proposed 24" x 24" x 6" concrete valve box collar. Concentrations of multiple
proposed valves near pipe intersections, i.e. tees or crosses, may require more than one
access point assembly in each concrete valve box collar. Trace wire access points shall be
within public right-of-way or public utility easements,
D. At the point of connection between cast or ductile iron water mains, with any non iron
water main, the tracer wire shall be properly connected to the iron pipe with a cad weld or
approved equivalent. Tracer wire welds shall be completely sealed with the use of an
approved mastic type sealer specifically manufactured for underground use. Mastic shall
be applied in a thick coat a minimum of 2 inches thick and shall be protected from
contamination by the backfill material with the use of a plastic membrane.
E. Tracer wire shall be laid flat and securely affixed to the pipe at 10 foot intervals. The wire
shall be protected from damage during the execution of the works. No breaks or cuts in the
tracer wire or tracer wire insulation shall be permitted. At water service saddles, the tracer
wire shall not be allowed to be placed between the saddle and the water main.
F. Except for approved spliced -in connections, tracer wire shall be continuous and without
splices from each trace wire access point. Where any approved spliced -in connections
occur. 3M DBR water tight connectors or approved equal shall be used to provide
electrical continuity.
G. At all water main end caps, a minimum of 6 feet of tracer wire shall be extended beyond
the end of the pipe, coiled and secured for future connections. The end of the tracer wire
shall be spliced to the wire of a six pound zinc anode and is to be buried at the same
elevations as the water main.
H. For directional drilling, auguring or boring installations, four #14 tracer wires shall be
installed with the pipe and connected to the tracer wire at both ends, or cad welded to the
existing iron pipe at both ends.
I. Spliced connections between the main line tracer wire and branch connection tracer wire
shall only be allowed at water main tees, crosses or at iron or copper water services where a
portion of the branch connection water main or water service is replaced with a non iron or
non copper material. The branch connection tracer wire shall be a single tracer wire
properly spliced to the main line tracer wire. Where the existing branch connection is
neither iron nor copper, then the new branch connection tracer wire shall be properly
spliced to the existing tracer wire on the branch connection.
At all repair locations where there is existing tracer wire, the tracer wire shall be properly
reconnected and spliced as outlined above.
END OF SECTION
2
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Park
SECTION 092100 - PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER/STUCCO FINISH
PART1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 specification sections, apply to this section.
1.2 SCOPE
A. The contractor shall provide all materials, labor and equipment necessary to complete this system
of Portland cement plaster as shown on drawings and/or as described herein.
1.3 EXCLUSIONS
A. Flashing, caulking, sealants, sealers, shall be furnished and installed by others.
1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS
Workmanship and installation shall be performed per:
A. Texas Lathing and Plastering Contractors Association/Texas Bureau for Lath and Plaster.
B. ASTM C-I063 installations of lathing and furring for Portland cement plaster.
C. ASTM C-926 application of Portland cement plaster.
D. Where products and or systems are specified they shall be installed in accordance with the
Applicable Building Codes and/or manufacturers requirements.
1.5 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Applicator and / or contractor must be qualified in the workmanship of plastering. Must be able to
show completed work of equal scope.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. The applicator and/or contractor shall be prepared and may be required to supply mock-up finish
samples. Do not proceed with lathing or plastering until all products and/or finish samples are
approved, if required.
1.7 PRE -CONSTRUCTION MEETING
A. Be prepared for a pre job meeting with the architect, owner, general contractor; if required,
before the start of lathing and plastering procedures.
1.8 MATERIALS
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER/STUCCO FINISH 092100 - 1
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
A. To be delivered to job in original containers with labels intact and legible.
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
B. Storage and protection of all products are the responsibility of the contractor performing the
scope of the work.
1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS/ REQUIREMENTS FOR CEMENT PLASTER
A. Cold Weather
1. Do not use frozen material.
2. Do not apply cement plaster to frozen surfaces or surfaces containing frost.
3. Do not mix materials or apply cement plaster when ambient temperature is less than
350F/1.60C.
B. Hot Weather
1. Protect cement plaster from uneven and excessive evaporation during hot, windy, and dry
weather.
2. Moist curing after each coat of cement plaster with water if ambient temperature is more than
75°F/24°C. Moist cure for 48 hours after application of coats.
3. Hot, dry, or windy weather the cement plaster should be moistened down.
4. Moist curing is required at the start and end of work day.
5. Humidity higher than 75%. Moist curing not required.
1.10 DOUBLE BACK METHOD
A. Double Back method -whereby the scratched and brown coats are applied and cured as one
system is approved as an option to the standard 3-coat method.
B. The second coat (brown) should be applied as soon as the first coat is rigid.
1.11 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS/ REQUIREMENTS FOR STUCCO FINISH
A. Do not apply stucco finish when ambient temperature is less than 40°F/4.4°C.
B. Do not apply stucco finish unless the temperature has been 40°F/4.4°C for at least 24 hours
before the application.
C. Do not apply finish coat when there is any chance of precipitation.
D. Protect cement plaster from all forms of precipitation during the application and the setting/curing
period of finish coat. Ensure that the finish is fully set prior to removing protective covering.
1.12 CONTROL JOINTS
A. It is not required to cut lath behind control points if flanges of control joint are designed to get a
good key of the cement plaster.
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER/STUCCO FINISH 092100 - 2
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
B. Panels should be relatively square.
C. No area should exceed 18 lineal feet in length without a control joint.
D. Install control joints for surface areas of approximately 150 square feet.
E. Where dissimilar back-up materials join.
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
F. Control joints are recommended at surface penetrations, (Windows, doors, etc) and at areas of
structural stress.
PART 2 - MATERIALS/PRODUCTS
2.1 BUILDING PAPER
A. Federal Specifications UU-B- 790A, Style 2, Grade D, 60 minute water resistance.
2.2 LATH SYSTEMS
A. Self -furring, expanded metal lath, galvanized steel, 1.75 lbs. per sq. ft. minimum.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Shapes used as grounds, sized and dimensioned to provide for required plaster thickness.
B. All accessories manufactured of galvanized steel, zinc, aluminum, or plastic materials.
C. Configuration of casing beads and control joints to provide lip flange and/or embedment section.
D. Standard trim items: control joints, casing beads, exterior corner beads, and base screeds.
2.4 PLASTER MATERIAL
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150 Type I or II
B. Masonry Cement: ASTM C91
C. Lime: ASTM C206- Type S
D. Sand: ASTM C 144, type used for cement plaster.
E. Water: Clear and free form substances harmful to plaster.
F. 'h" chopped AR (alkaline resistant) fiberglass strands (optional).
G. Additives: may be added per manufacturer's recommendations for the aid of pumping, curing,
and bonding.
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER/STUCCO FINISH 092100 - 3
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
2.5 MIX GENERAL
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
A. Accurate proportions of materials for each batch. Measuring devices of known volume for all
materials.
B. Size batches for complete use within maximum of one hour after mixing.
2.6 MIX PROPORTIONS BY VOLUME
Mix proportions by volume. Selection of either A, B, or C mix only. Do not inter -mix these three
sections or change volume proportions for these sections.
A. Mixture
1 Portland Cement
1 Masonry Cement
1 '/2 -2 %2 lbs. of'h" Chopped Fiberglass (optional)
4 -5 Sand
Water
B. Mixture
1 Portland Cement
'/z Lime
1 %2 - 2 '/z lbs. of %" Chopped Fiberglass (optional)
3 '/2 - 4 '/z Sand
Water
C. Mixture
1 Type 1 P Portland Cement
1 Masonry Cement
1 % - 2 ''/2 lbs. of ''/2" Chopped Fiberglass (optional)
4-5 Sand
Water
2.7 EXTERIOR STUCCO FINISH
A. Stucco Finish Coat: Add water only; comply with stucco manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Acceptable Manufacturers:
California Stucco Products Corp.
Florida Stucco Corp.
Highland Stucco
IPA Systems, Inc.
United States Gypsum Co.
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER/STUCCO FINISH 092100 - 4
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Park
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF LATH & ACCESSORIES
A. All items to be attached so that they are level, plumb, true, and create a proper screed and depth
for the cement plaster.
B. Attach lath, support systems and accessories per standards and code using two-part corrosion
resistant fasteners (no concrete nails).
3.2 CEMENT PLASTER OVER LATH
A. Total thickness of base coats to meet code requirements for fire rated construction. (Minimum
7/8" thick for frame construction).
B. Examine wall surface to ensure proper application of lath and accessories.
C. Nominal plaster base coat thickness:
1. First Coat "Scratch-1/4"-3/8"
2. Second Coat "Brown-3/8"-1/2"
D. Cement plaster must be applied with sufficient force (by hand or machine) to develop full
adhesion between plaster and the substrate.
E. First Coat to completely embed lath. Cross rake slightly to provide key for second base coat. Coat
must be uniform in thickness.
F. Second coat applied so that it meets the required total thickness and it must be uniform in its
thickness.
G. Second coat of cement plaster must be rodded to the desired thickness and leveled to screeds. Rod
off to a true flat plane. Follow this by wood floating or darbying the surface. Fill all voids and
dress surface for acrylic finish.
3.3 EXTERIOR STUCCO FINISH COAT
A. The mixing and application must follow the manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Texture and color as selected by Architect.
END OF SECTION 092100
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER/STUCCO FINISH 092100 - 5
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Park
SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 specification sections, apply to this section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Interior gypsum board ceilings.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire -Resistance -Rated Assemblies: For fire -resistance -rated assemblies, provide materials and
construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an
independent testing agency.
B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical
to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to
ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.
2.2 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. American Gypsum.
2. CertainTeed Corp.
3. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC.
4. Lafarge North America Inc.
5. National Gypsum Company.
6. PABCO Gypsum.
7. Temple-Inland.
GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 1
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
8. USG Corporation.
B. Gypsum Ceiling Board: ASTM C 36/C 36M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M applicable to type of
gypsum board indicated and whichever is more stringent.
l . Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm).
2. Core: Moisture and mold -resistant, Type X.
3. Long Edges: Tapered.
2.3 TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.
1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum -coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper -faced
galvanized steel sheet.
2.4 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.
B. Joint Tape:
1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper.
C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatible
with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.
2.5 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering
gypsum panels to continuous substrate.
B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation."
D. Vapor Retarder: As specified in Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS
A. Comply with ASTM C 840.
B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold
damaged.
C. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.
GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 2
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
D. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not
intended to receive tape.
E. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to
ASTM C 840:
1. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated.
a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other Division 09 Sections.
F. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and texture finishes and promptly remove
from floors and other non -drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise
damaged during drywall application.
G. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
END OF SECTION 092900
GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 3
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
SECTION — 099120 -
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes surface preparation and field painting and staining of exposed exterior
and interior items and surfaces.
1. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to
shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections.
B. Paint exposed surfaces, except where these Specifications indicate that the surface or material is
not to be painted or is to remain natural. If an item or a surface is not specifically mentioned,
paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces. If a color of finish
is not indicated, Architect will select from standard colors and finishes available.
Painting includes field painting exposed steel and iron supports, and surfaces of
mechanical and electrical equipment that do not have a factory -applied final finish.
C. Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts, and
labels.
1. Prefinished items include the following factory -finished components:
a. Light fixtures.
b. Brick, stone or cast stone.
2. Concealed surfaces include walls or ceilings in the following generally inaccessible
spaces:
a. Attic spaces.
3. Finished metal surfaces include the following:
a. Anodized aluminum.
b. Stainless steel.
C. Chromium plate.
d. Copper and copper alloys.
e. Bronze and brass.
f. Prefinished metal panels and flashing.
PAINTING 099120 - 1
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Park
4. Labels: Do not paint over UL, FMG, or other code -required labels or equipment name,
identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
D. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 2 Section "Hot -Mix Asphalt Paving" for traffic -marking paint.
2. Division 2 Section "Cement Concrete Pavement" for traffic -marking paint.
3. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for shop priming ferrous metal.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. General: Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D 16 apply to this Section.
1. Flat refers to a lusterless or matte finish with a gloss range below 15 when measured at an
85-degree meter.
2. Eggshell refers to low -sheen finish with a gloss range between 20 and 35 when measured
at a 60-degree meter.
3. Semi -gloss refers to medium -sheen finish with a gloss range between 35 and 70 when
measured at a 60-degree meter.
4. Full gloss refers to high -sheen finish with a gloss range more than 70 when measured at a
60-degree meter.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each paint system indicated. Include primers.
1. Material List: An inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each material and
cross-reference specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by
manufacturer's catalog number and general classification.
2. Manufacturer's Information: Manufacturer's technical information, including label
analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of finish -coat material indicated.
After color selection, Architect will furnish color chips for surfaces to be coated.
C. Samples for Verification: For each color and material to be applied, on representative Samples
of the actual substrate.
Provide stepped Samples, defining each separate coat, primers. Use representative colors
when preparing Samples for review. Resubmit until required sheen, color, and texture
are achieved.
Provide a list of materials and applications for each coat of each Sample. Label each
Sample for location and application.
Submit three Samples on the following substrates for Architect's review of color and
texture only:
a. Stained or Natural Wood: 8-by-10-inch Samples of natural- or stained -wood finish
on representative species of wood surfaces to be finished.
PAINTING 099120 - 2
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
0
1.5
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
b. Ferrous Metal: 4-inch square Samples of flat metal and 6-inch long Samples of
solid metal for each color and finish.
C. Zinc -Coated Metal: 4-inch square Samples of flat metal and 6-inch long Samples
of solid metal for each color and finish.
Qualification Data: For Applicator.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in applying paints and coatings
similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project, whose work has
resulted in applications with a record of successful in-service performance.
f w:
1.7
B. Source Limitations: Obtain primers for each coating system from the same manufacturer as the
finish coats.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers
bearing manufacturer's name and label and the following information:
1. Product name or title of material.
2. Product description (generic classification or binder type).
3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture.
4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents.
5. Thinning instructions.
6. Application instructions.
7. Color name and number.
8. VOC content.
B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well -ventilated area at a minimum
ambient temperature of 45 deg F (7 deg C). Maintain storage containers in a clean condition,
free of foreign materials and residue.
Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste
daily.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Apply waterborne paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air
are between 50 and 90 deg F (10 and 32 deg C).
B. Apply solvent -thinned paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding
air are between 45 and 95 deg F (7 and 35 deg C).
C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or
at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
PAINTING 099120 - 3
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Park
1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are
enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by manufacturer during
application and drying periods.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra paint materials from the same production run as the materials applied and in the
quantities described below. Package with protective covering for storage and identify with
labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to Owner.
Quantity: Furnish Owner with an additional 3 percent, but not less than 1 gal. (3.8 L) or
1 case, as appropriate, of each material and color applied.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products listed in other Part2
articles.
B. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following
manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles:
1. Benjamin Moore & Co. (Benjamin Moore) (Moore).
2. Carboline Company (Carboline).
3. Coronado Paint Company (Coronado).
4. DuPont Company, High Performance Coatings (DuPont)
5. ICI Dulux Paint Centers (ICI Dulux Paints).
6. International Protective Coatings: Courtaulds Coatings (International)
7. Kelly -Moore Paint Co. (Kelly -Moore).
8. PPG Industries, Inc. (Pittsburgh Paints).
9. Rust-Oleum Corporation (R-O).
10. Samuel Cabot, Inc. (Samuel Cabot)
11. Sherwin-Williams Co. (Sherwin-Williams) (S-W).
12. Tnemec Company, Inc. (Tnemec)
2.2 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, and finish -coat materials that are
compatible with one another and with the substrates indicated under conditions of service and
application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
B. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best -quality paint material of the various coating
types specified that are factory formulated and recommended by manufacturer for application
PAINTING 099120 - 4
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
indicated. Paint -material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will
not be acceptable.
Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate colors
or materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the
exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. Furnish manufacturer's material
data and certificates of performance for proposed substitutions.
C. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.3 EXTERIOR PRIMERS
A. Exterior Wood Primer for Acrylic Enamels: Factory -formulated alkyd or latex wood primer for
exterior application.
1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Alkyd Exterior Primer No. 176: Applied at a
dry film thickness of not less than 1.8 mils (0.046 mm).
2. Coronado; 8-11 Supreme Acrylic Bonding Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not
less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm).
3. ICI Dulux Paints; 2000-1200 Dulux Professional Exterior 100 Percent Acrylic Latex
Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils (0.041 mm).
4. Kelly -Moore; 255 Stain --Lock II Stain Resistant Acrylic Primer: Applied at a dry film
thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm).
5. M. A. B. Paint; Sea Shore/Four Seasons Latex Primer Coat 056-958: Applied at a dry
film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils (0.041 mm).
6. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-609 SpeedHide Exterior House & Trim Wood Primer 100 Percent
Acrylic Latex: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils (0.041 mm).
7. Sherwin-Williams; A-100 Exterior Latex Wood Primer B42W41: Applied at a dry film
thickness of not less than 1.4 mils (0.036 mm).
B. Exterior Ferrous -Metal Primer: Factory -formulated rust -inhibitive metal primer for exterior
application.
1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's IMC Alkyd Metal Primer No. M06: Applied at a dry film
thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm).
2. Coronado; 35-147 Rust Scat Alkyd Metal Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not
less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm).
3. ICI Dulux Paints; 4160-XXXX Devguard Multi -Purpose Tank & Structural Primer.
Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm).
4. Kelly -Moore; 1711 Kel-Guard Alkyd White Rust Inhibitive Primer: Applied at a dry
film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm).
5. Kelly -Moore; 5725 DTM-Acrylic Metal Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not
less than 1.8 mils (0.048 mm).
6. Pittsburgh Paints; 90-712 Pitt -Tech One Pack Interior/Exterior Primer Finish DTM
Industrial Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils (0.076 mm).
7. Sherwin-Williams; Kem Kromik Universal Metal Primer B50NZ6/B50WZI: Applied at
a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils (0.076 mm).
PAINTING 099120 - 5
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
C. Exterior Galvanized Metal Primer: Factory -formulated galvanized metal primer for exterior
application.
1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's IMC Acrylic Metal Primer No. M04: Applied at a dry film
thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm).
2. Coronado; 36-11 Rust Scat Latex Metal Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not
less than 1.4 mils (0.036 mm).
3. ICI Dulux Paints; 4020-XXXX Devflex DTM Flat Interior/Exterior Waterborne Primer
& Finish: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.2 mils (0.056 mm).
4. ICI Dulux Paints; 4160-XXXX Devguard Multi -Purpose Tank & Structural Primer:
Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm).
5. Kelly -Moore; 1722 Kel-Guard Acrylic Galvanized Iron Primer: Applied at a dry film
thickness of not less than 1.8 mils (0.046 mm).
6. Kelly -Moore; 5725 DTM-Acrylic Metal Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not
less than 1.8 mils (0.046 mm).
7. Pittsburgh Paints; 90-709 Pitt -Tech One Pack Interior/Exterior Primer/Finish DTM
Industrial Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils (0.076 mm).
8. Sherwin-Williams; primer not required over this substrate.
9. Sherwin-Williams; Galvite HS Paint B50WZ3: Applied at a dry film thickness of not
less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm).
2.4 EXTERIOR FINISH COATS
A. Exterior Semi -gloss Acrylic Enamel: Factory -formulated semi -gloss waterborne acrylic -latex
enamel for exterior application.
1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Latex House & Trim Paint No. 170: Applied at
a dry film thickness of not less than 1.1 mils (0.028 mm).
2. Coronado; 12-Line Supreme Acrylic Semi -Gloss: Applied at a dry film thickness of not
less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm).
3. ICI Dulux Paints; 2406-XXXX Dulux Professional Exterior 100 Percent Acrylic Semi -
Gloss Finish: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils (0.033 mm).
4. Kelly -Moore; 1250 Acry-Lustre Exterior Semi -Gloss Acrylic Finish: Applied at a dry
film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils (0.041 mm).
5. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-900 Series SpeedHide Exterior House & Trim Semi -Gloss Acrylic
Latex Paint: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm).
6. Sherwin-Williams; A-100 Latex Gloss A8 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not
less than 1.3 mils (0.033 mm).
2.5 EXTERIOR WOOD STAINS
A. Semitransparent OiUAlkyd Stain: Factory -formulated oil- or oil/alkyd-resin-based
semitransparent wood stain applied at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer.
1. Benjamin Moore: Moorwood Semi -Transparent Stain & Wood Preservative No. 081.
2. Coronado: 92 Line Nordik Semi -Transparent Stain and Preservative.
3. Dulux Paint: 2710-XXXX Woodpride Exterior Oil Semi -Transparent Stain.
PAINTING 099120 - 6
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Park
4. Pittsburgh Paints: 77-900 Series Rez Exterior Water Repellent Semi -Transparent Oil
Stains.
5. Samuel Cabot: Semi -Transparent Stains 0300/6300 Series.
6. Sherwin-Williams: Exterior Alkyd Semi -Transparent Wood Preservative Stain A14
Series.
2.6 INTERIOR HIGH PERFORMANCE SYSTEMS
A. Semi -gloss Epoxy Finish System (Concrete Masonry): One finish coat over an intermediate coat
and a block filler.
Block Filler: Acrylic or epoxy block filler applied at spreading rate recommended by
manufacturer as sufficient to fill pores.
a. Carboline: Flexide Masonry Block Filler.
b. DuPont: 300P Acrylic Emulsion Block Filler.
C. ICI: Bloxfi14000 Interior/Exterior Heavy Duty Acrylic Block Filler.
d. International: Interlac 895 Epoxy Ester Block Filler.
e. PPG: 97-68X Series Aquapon Polyamide-Epoxy Block Filler.
f. R-O: 5199 Block Filler Surfa-Sele.
g. S-W: Epoxy Ester Masonry Filler Sealer B61 W2 Series.
h. Tnemec: Series 130 Envirofill Waterborne Cementitious Acrylic.
2. Intermediate Coat: Epoxy applied at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer to
achieve a dry film thickness of 2.0 to 5.0 mils (0.051 to 0.127 mm), unless otherwise
indicated.
a. Carboline: Sanitile 250 WB Finish Waterbome Epoxy -Acrylic.
b. DuPont: 25P High Solids Epoxy Mastic.
C. ICI: Devran 224 HS High Build Epoxy Enamel.
d. International: Intergard 475 Semi -Gloss Polyamide Epoxy Intermediate/Finish.
e. PPG: 97-1XXX Series Aquapon High Build Semi -Gloss Polyamide Epoxy
Coating.
f. R-O: 9500 System High Build Polyamide Epoxy at 5.0- to 8.0-mil (0.127- to
0.203-mm) dry film thickness.
g. S-W: Epolon II Multi -Mil Epoxy Series B62V800.
h. Tnemec: Series 66 Hi -Build Epoxoline Polamidoamine Epoxy.
3. Topcoat: Semi -gloss epoxy applied at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer to
achieve a dry film thickness of 2.0 to 5.0 mils (0.051 to 0.127 mm), unless otherwise
indicated.
a. Carboline: Sanitile 250 WB Finish Waterborne Epoxy -Acrylic.
b. DuPont: 25P High Solids Epoxy Mastic.
C. ICI: Devran 224 HS High Build Epoxy Enamel.
d. International: Intergard 475 Semi -Gloss Polyamide Epoxy Intermediate/Finish.
e. PPG: 97-1XXX Series Aquapon High Build Semi -Gloss Polyamide Epoxy
Coating.
PAINTING 099120 - 7
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Park
f. R-O: 9500 System High Build Polyamide Epoxy at 5.0- to 8.0-mil (0.127- to
0.203-mm) dry film thickness.
g. S-W: Epolon II Multi -Mil Epoxy Series B62V800.
h. Tnemec: Series 66 Hi -Build Epoxoline Polamidoamine Epoxy.
2.7 INTERIOR CONCRETE SUBSTRATES
A. Interior Concrete Substrates:
Concrete Stain System: MPI INT 3.2E.
a. Sherwin Williams, H & C ® InfusionTM or approved equal. Match color chips
selected.
2. Water -Based Clear Sealer System: MPI INT 3.2G.
a. Sherwin Williams, H & C & Infusion Water -based Sealer or approved equal.
2.8 ANTI -GRAFFITI COATING SYSTEM
A. Graffi Coat, a sacrificial anti -graffiti coating system consisting of a primer and sacrificial
coating to be applied to all finishes exterior wall and door surfaces.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with
requirements for paint application. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P4.
1. Proceed with paint application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected
and surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly dry.
2. Start of painting will be construed as Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions
within a particular area.
B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure
compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on
characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers.
Notify Architect about anticipated problems when using the materials specified over
substrates primed by others.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting
fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical
PAINTING 099120 - 8
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
or impossible because of size or weight of the item, provide surface -applied protection before
surface preparation and painting.
After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed using
workers skilled in the trades involved.
B. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean substrates of substances that
could impair bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning.
Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process
will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.
C. Surface Preparation for Painting: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to
manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified.
Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime.
Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous -metal surfaces that have not been shop
coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use
solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with SSPC's recommendations.
a. Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash coat
before priming.
b. Touch up bare areas and shop -applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire -
brush, clean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer, and touch up with
same primer as the shop coat.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-based solvents so
surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized
sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods.
D. Surface Preparation for Staining: Clean and prepare surfaces to be stained according to
manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified.
Allow unseasoned or shiny new wood to weather three months before staining.
1. Remove surface dirt, oil, or grease by washing with a detergent solution; rinse thoroughly
with clean water -and allow to dry. Remove grade stamps and pencil marks by sanding
lightly. Remove loose wood fibers by brushing.
2. Remove mildew by scrubbing with a commercial wash formulated for mildew removal
and as recommended by stain manufacturer.
3. Countersink steel nails, if used, and fill with putty tinted to final color to eliminate rust
leach stains.
E. Material Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of
foreign materials and residue.
Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required
during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface
film and strain material before using.
PAINTING 099120 - 9
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and
techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied.
1. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the paint schedules.
2. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions
detrimental to formation of a durable paint film.
3. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used.
4. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures
and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to
maintain system integrity and provide desired protection.
5. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel.
B. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or
otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent
surface deterioration.
1. The number of coats and film thickness required are the same regardless of application
method. Do not apply succeeding coats until previous coat has cured as recommended by
manufacturer. If sanding is required to produce a smooth, even surface according to
manufacturer's written instructions, sand between applications.
2. Omit primer over metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted.
3. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply
additional coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special
attention to ensure that edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a
dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces.
4. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat
surfaces until paint has dried to where it feels firm, and does not deform or feel sticky
under moderate thumb pressure, and until application of another coat of paint does not
cause undercoat to lift or lose adhesion.
C. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Brushes: Use brushes best suited for type of material applied. Use brush of appropriate
size for surface or item being painted.
Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet -back, or high -pile sheep's wool as recommended by
manufacturer for material and texture required.
Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by
manufacturer for material and texture required.
D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's
recommended spreading rate to achieve dry film thickness indicated. Provide total dry film
thickness of the entire system as recommended by manufacturer.
E. Electrical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following:
PAINTING 099120 - 10
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Park
1. Switchgear.
2. Panelboards.
3. Electrical equipment that is indicated to have a factory -primed finish for field painting.
F. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat, as recommended by
manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime
coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or
unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn -through or other defects
due to insufficient sealing.
G. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth,
opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting,
holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be
acceptable.
H. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish,
or repaint work not complying with requirements.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Owner reserves the right to invoke the following test procedure at any time and as often as
Owner deems necessary during the period when paint is being applied:
Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to sample paint material being
used. Samples of material delivered to Project will be taken, identified, sealed, and
certified in the presence of Contractor.
Testing agency will perform appropriate tests for the following characteristics as required
by Owner:
a. Analysis for content of material actually delivered to the site as compared to the
specified .product's published label analysis.
b. Applied thickness of each coat.
Owner may direct Contractor to stop painting if test results show material being used
does not comply with specified requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying
paint from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces previously coated with the
noncomplying paint. If necessary, Contractor may be required to remove noncomplying
paint from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with specified paint, the two
coatings are incompatible.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded
paint materials from Project site.
After completing painting, clean glass and paint -spattered surfaces. Remove spattered
paint by washing and scraping without scratching or damaging adjacent finished surfaces.
PAINTING 099120 - 11
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
3.6 PROTECTION
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
A. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage from painting.
Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect.
B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. After completing painting
operations, remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work.
1. After work of other trades is complete, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted
surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P 1.
3.7 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE
A. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over exterior ferrous metal. Primer is not
required on shop -primed items.
1. Semi -gloss Acrylic -Enamel Finish (All exterior ferrous metal that is not prefinished):
Two finish coats over a rust -inhibitive primer.
a. Primer: Exterior ferrous -metal primer.
b. Finish Coats: Exterior semi -gloss acrylic enamel.
B. Zinc -Coated Metal: Provide the following finish systems over exterior zinc -coated metal
surfaces:
1. Semi -gloss Acrylic -Enamel Finish (All exterior zinc coated metal that is not prefinished):
Two finish coats over a galvanized metal primer.
a. Primer: Exterior galvanized metal primer.
b. Finish Coats: Exterior semi -gloss acrylic enamel.
C. Wood Trim: Provide the following finish systems over exterior wood trim:
1. Semi -gloss Acrylic -Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.
a. Primer: Exterior wood primer for acrylic enamels.
b. Finish Coats: Exterior semi -gloss acrylic enamel.
3.8 EXTERIOR WOOD STAIN SCHEDULE
A. Exterior Wood Trim: Provide the following stain systems on exterior wood trim including
fasciae and soffits:
1. Semitransparent Oil/Alkyd Finish: Two coats.
a. Stain Coats: Semitransparent oil/alkyd stain.
B. Exposed Glue -Laminated Beam Substrates:
PAINTING 099120 - 12
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
1. Semitransparent Oil/Alkyd Finish: Two coats.
a. Stain Coats: Semitransparent oil/alkyd stain.
3.9 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE
A. Plywood Walls, Ceiling and Trim: Provide the following finish systems:
1. Semi -gloss Acrylic -Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.
a. Primer: Exterior wood primer for acrylic enamels.
b. Finish Coats: Exterior semi -gloss acrylic enamel.
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
B. Concrete Masonry: Provide the following finish systems over interior concrete masonry:
1. Semi -gloss Epoxy Finish: One finish coat over an intermediate coat over a block filler.
a. Block Filler: Acrylic or epoxy block filler.
b. Intermediate Coat: Epoxy.
C. Finish Coat: Semi -gloss epoxy.
C. Concrete Columns: Provide the following finish systems over interior sandblasted concrete
columns:
1. Water -Based Clear Sealer System: MPI INT 3.2G.
D. Concrete Other than Columns and Floors: Provide the following finish systems:
1. Semi -gloss Epoxy Finish: One finish coat over an intermediate coat over a primer.
a. Primer: Latex primer.
b. Intermediate Coat: Epoxy.
C. Finish Coat: Semi -gloss epoxy
E. Concrete Floors:
1. Concrete Stain System: MPI INT 3.2E.
2. Water -Based Clear Sealer System: MPI INT 3.2G.
F. Gypsum Board Substrates:
1. Latex System: MPI INT 9.2A.
a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer.
b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat.
C. Topcoat: Interior latex (semi -gloss).
END OF SECTION 099120
PAINTING 099120 - 13
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Park
SECTION 102113 - TOILET COMPARTMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 specification sections, apply to this section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes toilet compartments and screens as follows:
1. Type: Solid -plastic, polymer resin.
2. Compartment Style: Ceiling anchored.
3. Screen Style: Wall anchored.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for supports that attach units to overhead
structural system.
2. Division 10 "Toilet and Bath Accessories" for toilet paper holders, grab bars, purse
shelves, and similar accessories.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type and style of toilet compartment and screen specified. Include
details of construction relative to materials, fabrication, and installation. Include details of
anchors, hardware, and fastenings.
B. Shop Drawings: For fabrication and installation of toilet compartment and screen assemblies.
Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of sections of actual units
showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of compartment
or screen indicated.
D. Samples for Verification: Of each compartment or screen color and finish required, prepared on
6-inch- (150-mm-) square Samples of same thickness and material indicated for Work.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions in areas of installation by field measurements before
fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with
construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
TOILET COMPARTMENTS 102113 - 1
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Park
1. Accurate Partitions Corporation.
2. Capitol Partitions, Inc.
3. Compression Polymers Group; Comtec Industries.
4. Crane Plumbing; Sanymetal.
5. Global Steel Products Corp.
6. Santana Products, Inc.
7. Weis/Robart Partitions, Inc.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials that have been selected for surface flatness and smoothness.
Exposed surfaces that exhibit pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations,
telegraphing of core material, or other imperfections on finished units are unacceptable.
B. Solid -Plastic, Polymer Resin: High -density polyethylene (HOPE) with homogenous color
throughout. Provide material not less than 1 inch (25 mm) thick with seamless construction and
eased edges in color and pattern as follows:
1. Color and Pattern: One color and pattern in each room as selected by Architect from
manufacturer's full range of colors and patterns.
C. Pilaster Shoes and Sleeves (Caps): ASTM A 666, Type 302 or 304 stainless steel, not less than
0.0312 inch (0.8 mm) thick and 3 inches (75 mm) high, finished to match hardware.
D. Full -Height (Continuous) Brackets: Manufacturer's standard design for attaching panels and
screens to walls and pilasters of the following material:
1. Material: Clear -anodized aluminum.
E. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard design, heavy-duty operating hardware and
accessories of the following material:
I. Material: Chrome -plated, nonferrous, cast zinc alloy (zamac) or clear -anodized
aluminum.
F. Heat -Sink Strip: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded -aluminum strip in
manufacturer's standard finish.
G. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel or chrome -
plated steel or brass, finished to match hardware, with theft -resistant -type heads. Provide sex -type
bolts for through -bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use hot -dip galvanized or other rust -
resistant, protective -coated steel.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. General: Provide standard doors, panels, screens, and pilasters fabricated for compartment
system. Provide units with cutouts and drilled holes to receive compartment -mounted hardware,
accessories, and grab bars, as indicated.
B. Solid -Plastic, Polymer -Resin Compartments and Screens: Provide aluminum heat -sink strips at
exposed bottom edges of HDPE units to prevent burning.
C. Ceiling Anchored Compartments: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion -resistant
anchoring assemblies complete with leveling adjustment at tops of pilasters. Provide sleeves
(caps) at pilasters to conceal anchorage.
TOILET COMPARTMENTS 102113 - 2
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Park
D. Wall -Hung Screens: Provide units in sizes indicated of same construction and finish as
compartment panels, unless otherwise indicated.
Provide metal -faced screens with integral full -height flanges for attachment to wall.
E. Doors: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24-inch- (610-mm-) wide in -swinging doors for
standard toilet compartments and 36-inch- (914-mm-) wide out -swinging doors with a
minimum 32-inch- (813-mm-) wide clear opening for compartments indicated to be
handicapped accessible.
1. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard aluminum 54" long continuous spring or gravity
hinge.
2. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's standard surface -mounted latch unit with
combination rubber -faced door strike and keeper designed for emergency access.
Provide units that comply with accessibility requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction at compartments indicated to be handicapped accessible.
3. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard combination hook and rubber -tipped bumper,
sized to prevent door from hitting compartment -mounted accessories.
4. Door Bumper: Manufacturer's standard rubber -tipped bumpers at out -swinging doors or
entrance screen doors.
5. Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit that complies with accessibility requirements
of authorities having jurisdiction at out -swinging doors. Provide units on both sides of
doors at compartments indicated to be handicapped accessible.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturers written installation instructions. Install units rigid,
straight, plumb, and level. Provide clearances of not more than 1/2 inch (13 mm) between
pilasters and panels and not more than 1 inch (25 mm) between panels and walls. Secure units
in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices.
B. Ceiling -Anchored Compartments: Secure pilasters to supporting construction and level, plumb,
and tighten. Hang doors and adjust so doors are level and aligned with panels when doors are in
closed position.
C. Screens: Attach with anchoring devices according to manufacturer's written instructions and to
suit supporting structure. Set units level and plumb and to resist lateral impact.
3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to manufacturers written
instructions for proper operation. Set hinges to return to fully closed position.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure toilet compartments and screens
are without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 102113
TOILET COMPARTMENTS 102113 - 3
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Park
SECTION 102800 - TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
PART1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 specification sections, apply to this section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Toilet and bath accessories.
2. Warm -air dryers.
3. Infant -care products.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 10 Section "Toilet Compartments" for compartments and screens.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions and thicknesses, dimensions,
profiles, fastening and mounting methods, specified options, and finishes for each type of
accessory specified.
B. Setting Drawings: For cutouts required in other work; include templates, substrate preparation
instructions, and directions for preparing cutouts and installing anchoring devices.
C. Maintenance Data: For accessories to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.
Provide lists of replacement parts and service recommendations.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Provide products of same manufacturer for each type of accessory unit and
for units exposed to view in same areas, unless otherwise approved by Architect.
B. Product Options: Accessory requirements, including those for materials, finishes, dimensions,
capacities and performance, are established by specific products indicated in the Toilet and
Bath Accessory Schedule.
1. Products of other manufacturers listed in Part 2 with equal characteristics, as judged
solely by Architect, may be provided.
2. Do not modify aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's
approval. Where modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data
to Architect for review.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required
for access by disabled persons, proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and
TOILET AND BATHROOM ACCESSORIES 102800 - 1
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
servicing of accessories.
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent
delaying the Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
accessories that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1. Toilet and Bath Accessories:
a. A & J Washroom Accessories, Inc.
b. American Specialties, Inc.
C. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
d. Bradley Corporation.
e. General Accessory Manufacturing Co. (GAMCO).
f. McKinney/Parker Washroom Accessories Corp.
2. Warm -Air Dryers:
a. A & J Washroom Accessories, Inc.
b. American Dryer, Inc.
C. American Specialties, Inc.
d. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
C. Bradley Corporation.
f. Excel Dryer Corporation.
g. General Accessory Manufacturing Co. (GAMCO).
h. McKinney/Parker Washroom Accessories Corp.
i. World Dryer.
3. Infant -Care Products:
a. American Infant Care Products Inc.
b. American Specialties, Inc.
C. Brocar Products, Inc.
d. General Accessory Manufacturing Co. (GAMCO).
e. Koala Corporation.
f. Safe -Strap Company, Inc.
B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, those indicated in the Toilet
and Bath Accessory Schedule at the end of Part 3.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, with No. 4 finish (satin), in 0.0312-inch (0.8-mm)
minimum nominal thickness, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Brass: ASTM B 19, leaded and unleaded flat products; ASTM B 16 (ASTM B 16M), rods,
TOILET AND BATHROOM ACCESSORIES 102800 - 2
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Park
shapes, forgings, and flat products with finished edges; ASTM B 30, castings.
C. Sheet Steel: ASTM A 366/A 366M, cold rolled, commercial quality, 0.0359-inch (0.9-mm)
minimum nominal thickness; surface preparation and metal pretreatment as required for applied
finish.
D. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180).
E. Chromium Plating: ASTM B 456, Service Condition Number SC 2 (moderate service), nickel
plus chromium electrodeposited on base metal.
F. Baked -Enamel Finish: Factory -applied, baked -acrylic -enamel coating.
G. Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot -dip galvanized after
fabrication.
H. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit, tamper and theft
resistant when exposed, and of galvanized steel when concealed.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. General: One, maximum 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) diameter, unobtrusive stamped manufacturer
logo, as approved by Architect, is permitted on exposed face of accessories. On interior surface
not exposed to view or back surface of each accessory, provide printed, waterproof label or
stamped nameplate indicating manufacturer's name and product model number.
B. Surface -Mounted Toilet Accessories: Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units with tight
seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and access panels with continuous
stainless -steel hinge. Provide concealed anchorage where possible.
C. Recessed Toilet Accessories: Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units of all -welded
construction, without mitered corners. Hang doors and access panels with full-length, stainless
steel hinge. Provide anchorage that is fully concealed when unit is closed.
D. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying.
Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate
to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and
firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.
B. Secure mirrors to walls in concealed, tamper -resistant manner with special hangers, toggle bolts
or screws. Set units level, plumb, and square at locations indicated, according to manufacturer's
written instructions for substrate indicated.
C. Install grab bars to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf (1112 N), when tested
according to method in ASTM F 446.
3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
TOILET AND BATHROOM ACCESSORIES 102800 - 3
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Park
A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation and verify that mechanisms function
properly. Replace damaged or defective items.
B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings.
C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
3.3 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORY SCHEDULE
A. Toilet Accessories:
1. Electric Hand Dryer: Bobrick B-7007, #889 Surface Hand Dryer; two in each toilet
room.
2. Toilet Tissue Dispensers, double roll: Bobrick B-4288; one for each water closet.
3. Grab Bars: 36" & 42" Bobrick B-6809.99; one each in each accessible toilet stall;
4. Sanitary Napkin Disposal: Single Bobrick B-4353; one in each women's accessible
stall.
5. Sanitary Napkin Disposal: Bobrick B-4354. Partition mounted between women's toilet
stalls.
6. Baby Changing Stations: Brocar Products Inc. #100E; one in each toilet room.
7. Soap Dispenser: Provided with lavatory systems.
B Mirrors and Frames:
1. Stainless steel mirror: Bobrick B-1566-1836; Three in each toilet room.
END OF SECTION 102800
TOILET AND BATHROOM ACCESSORIES 102800 - 4
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
SECTION 104250 — SIGNS
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 specification sections, apply to this section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Provide Toilet Room signs.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit for approval samples, shop drawings, product data.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers,
which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced
installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Regulations: ADAAG and TAS.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Manufacturers: Andco Industries, ASI Sign Systems, Supersine Co., Vomar Products or
approved equal.
B. Toilet Room Signs:
1. Type: unframed.
2. Material: Aluminum.
3. Size: 6" x 6".
4. Copy: Raised lettering with Grade II Braille per ADAAG and TAS.
a. Men.
b. Women.
5. International Symbol of Accessibility: Raised per ADAAG and TAS.
SIGNS 104250 - 1
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Park
6. Anchorage: Studs set in epoxy.
C. Metal Finishes:
1. Aluminum: Clear anodized copy and symbols; Baked enamel background; color to be
selected by Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install materials and systems in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved
submittals. Install materials and systems in proper relation with adjacent construction and with
uniform appearance. Coordinate with work of other sections.
B. Mount signs on strike side of each restroom door centered at 60" AFF.
C. Restore damaged finishes. Clean and protect work from damage.
END OF SECTION 104250
SIGNS 104250 - 2
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Park
SECTION 104416 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 specification sections, apply to this section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes portable, hand -carried fire extinguishers and mounting brackets for fire
extinguishers.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Operation and maintenance data.
C. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable
Fire Extinguishers."
B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent
testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers with fire protection cabinets to ensure fit and
function.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty
period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10.
b. Faulty operation of valves or release levers.
2. Warranty Period: Six years from date of Substantial Completion.
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 104416 - 1
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Park
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 PORTABLE, HAND -CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
A. Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each fire protection cabinet and mounting
bracket indicated.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Amerex Corporation.
b. Ansul Incorporated; Tyco International Ltd.
C. Badger Fire Protection; a Kidde company.
d. Buckeye Fire Equipment Company.
e. Fire End & Croker Corporation.
f. J. L. Industries, Inc.; a division of Activar Construction Products Group.
g. Kidde Residential and Commercial Division; Subsidiary of Kidde plc.
h. Larsen's Manufacturing Company.
i. Moon -American.
j. Pem All Fire Extinguisher Corp.; a division of PEM Systems, Inc.
k. Potter Roemer LLC.
1. Pyro-Chem; Tyco Safety Products.
2. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10,
Appendix Band bar coding for documenting fire extinguisher location, inspections,
maintenance, and recharging.
B. Multipurpose Dry -Chemical Type: UL-rated 2-A:10-B:C, 10-1b nominal capacity, with
monoammonium phosphate -based dry chemical in manufacturer's standard enameled container.
C. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard galvanized steel, designed to secure fire
extinguisher to wall or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers
indicated, with plated or black baked -enamel finish.
D. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size,
spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect.
1. Identify bracket -mounted fire extinguishers with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" in
red-letter decals applied to mounting surface.
a. Orientation: Horizontal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging.
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 104416 - 2
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
l . Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers.
B. Install fire extinguishers and mounting brackets in locations indicated and in compliance with
requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Mounting Brackets: 54 inches (1372 mm) above finished floor to top of fire
extinguisher.
C. Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at locations
indicated.
END OF SECTION 104416
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 104416 - 3
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Park
SECTION 115000 - CHAIN HOIST SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 specification sections, apply to this section.
1.2 . SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the equipment indicated on Drawings or specified herein.
1. Beam Mounted Motorized Trolley Hoist System
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 4 Miscellaneous Metals for trolley beam mounting components.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's model number, components, accessories and
installation requirements.
B. Shop Drawings and Coordination Drawings: Include installation details and
attachments to other work.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer to perform work of this
Section who has specialized in installing ceiling mounted bridge crane systems who has
completed installations similar in design and extent to that indicated for this Project, and
who has a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of food service equipment through one source
from a single manufacturer.
D. Product Options: Drawings indicate ceiling mounted bridge crane system based on the
specific products indicated. Other manufacturers' equipment with equal size and
performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section
"Substitutions."
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Chain Hoist System 11500 - 1
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
A. Deliver and store equipment in original protective crating and covering and in a dry
location.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions of ceiling mounted crane system installation
areas by field measurements before equipment fabrication and indicate measurements
on Shop Drawings and Coordination Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with
construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without
delaying the Work, establish required dimensions and proceed with fabricating
equipment without field measurements. Coordinate construction to ensure actual
dimensions correspond to established dimensions.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate equipment hanger and bracing locations.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the
Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract
Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made
by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Warranty Period:
1. Beam Mounted Motorized Trolley Hoist System: Manufacturer's Standard
Lifetime Warranty.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 BEAM MOUNTED MOTORIZED TROLLEY HOIST SYSTEM
A. Coffing JLCMT Motorized Trolley Hoist System by Columbus McKinnon Corporation
or approved equal.
1. Load Capacity: 2000 lbs.
2. Track Type: S 1 Ox25.4 beam
3. Track Length: approximately 19 feet.
4. Lift: 20 feet.
B. System includes:
Chain Hoist System 11500 - 2
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
1. JLCM Motorized trolley
2. S 1 Ox25.4 beam.
3. JLC Electric chain hoist.
4. Commercial duty cord reel.
5. Push button drop to control trolley and hoist
6. Bolts and other hardware and components required for complete assembly.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Install materials and systems in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and
approved submittals. Install materials and systems in proper relation with adjacent
construction and with uniform appearance.
B. Coordinate work with other sections.
C. Test equipment for proper operation.
D. Restore damaged finishes and test for proper operation. Clean and protect work from
damage.
END OF SECTION 11500
Chain Hoist System 11500 - 3
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
SECTION 129300 - SITE FURNISHINGS
PART1-GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Seating.
2. Trash receptacles.
3. Bollards.
4. Bike Racks.
Wolf Pen Creek Festival Park
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Samples: For each exposed finish.
C. Material Certificates: For site furnishings, signed by manufacturers.
D. Maintenance Data.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Refer to equipment list on drawings for all site furnishings, materials, finishes, colors, etc.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine subgrades, finished surfaces and installation conditions. Do not start site furnishings
work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.2 LOCATION AND INSTALLATION
A. All locations shall be staked by Contractor and approved by Owner's representative prior to
commencement of work. Location shall be as indicated on drawings.
SITE FURNISHINGS 129300 - 1
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
Wolf Pen Creek Festival Park
B. Install landscape furnishings as per manufacturer's instructions. The manufacturer's instructions
shall be considered a part of these Specifications. Installation contractor shall be a contractor
approved by manufacturer for installation of manufacturer's equipment.
C. All areas surrounding locations of landscape accessories shall be minimally disturbed.
Contractor shall re -grade and repair areas and return site and improvements to original
condition.
D. Contractor to confirm all fall zone requirements prior to installing equipment. Immediately
notify the Owner's Representative of any descrepencies.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Site Furniture
1. Assemble sections per manufacturer's recommendations.
2. Install level and plumb. Shim as required to obtain an unyielding surface.
3. Touch up all abraded, welded and scratched surfaces with matching rust inhibitive paint
supplied by manufacturer.
PART 4 — COMPLETION
4.1 CLEAN-UP
A. The Contractor shall clean the site daily from trash and debris resulting from construction
operations at no additional cost to Owner. All walks, roads and circulation routes shall be kept
clean and free from debris, material and equipment.
B. Upon completion of the work covered by this section, the Contractor shall clean up all areas by
removing spoil piles, surplus material and equipment from the site. The ground surface shall be
restored to its original condition.
END OF SECTION 129300
SITE FURNISHINGS 129300 - 2
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Park
SECTION 22 02 00 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all Work
herein.
B. The Contract Drawings indicate the extent and general arrangement of the systems. If any
departure from the Contract Drawings are deemed necessary by the Contractor, details of
such departures and the reasons therefore, shall be submitted to the Architect for approval
as soon as practicable. No such departures shall be made without the prior written approval
of the Architect.
C. Notwithstanding any reference in the Specifications to any article, device, product, material,
fixture, form or type of construction by name, make or catalog number, such reference shall
not be construed as limiting competition; and the Contractor, in such cases, may at his option
use any article, device, product, material, fixture, form or type of construction which in the
judgment of the Architect, expressed in writing, is equal to that specified.
1.02 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The Work included under this Contract consists of the furnishing and installation of all
equipment and material necessary and required to form the complete and functioning
systems in all of its various phases, all as shown on the accompanying Drawings and/or
described in these Specifications. The contractor shall review all pertinent drawings, including
those of other contracts prior to commencement of Work.
B. This Division requires the furnishing and installing of all items Specified herein, indicated on
the Drawings or reasonably inferred as necessary for safe and proper operation; including
every article, device or accessory (whether or not specifically called for by item) reasonably
necessary to facilitate each system's functioning as indicated by the design and the
equipment specified. Elements of the work include, but are not limited to, materials, labor,
supervision, transportation, storage; equipment, utilities, all required permits, licenses and
inspections. All work performed under this Section shall be in accordance with the Project
Manual, Drawings and Specifications and is subject to the terms and conditions of the
Contract.
C. The approximate locations of Mechanical (HVAC) and Plumbing items are indicated on the
Drawings. These Drawings are not intended to give complete and accurate details in regard
to location of outlets, apparatus, etc. Exact locations are to be determined by actual
measurements at the building, and will in all cases be subject to the Review of the Owner or
Engineer, who reserves the right to make any reasonable changes in the locations indicated
without additional cost to the Owner.
D. Items specifically mentioned in the Specifications but not shown on the Drawings and/or
items shown on Drawings but not specifically mentioned in the Specifications shall be
installed by the Contractor under the appropriate section of work as if they were both
specified and shown.
E. All discrepancies between the Contract Documents and actual job -site conditions shall be
reported to the Owner or Engineer so that they will be resolved prior to the bidding, where this
cannot be done at least 7 working days prior to bid; the greater or more costly of the
discrepancy shall be bid. All labor and materials required to perform the work described shall
be included as part of this Contract.
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 22 02 00 - 1
Clark Condon Associates
August 2010
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
F. It is the intention of this Section of the Specifications to outline minimum requirements to
furnish the Owner with a turn -key and fully operating system in cooperation with other trades.
G. It is the intent of the above "Scope" to give the Contractor a general outline of the extent of
the Work involved; however, it is not intended to include each and every item required for the
Work. Anything omitted from the "Scope" but shown on the Drawings, or specified later, or
necessary for a complete and functioning heating, ventilating and air conditioning system
shall be considered a part of the overall "Scope".
H. The Contractor shall rough -in fixtures and equipment furnished by others from rough -in and
placement drawings furnished by others. The Contractor shall make final connection to
fixtures and equipment furnished by others.
1.03 SCHEMATIC NATURE OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. The contract documents are schematic in nature in that they are only to establish scope and
a minimum level of quality. They are not to be used as actual working construction drawings.
The actual working construction drawings shall be the approved shop drawings.
B. All piping or equipment locations as indicated on the documents do not indicate every
transition, offset, or exact location. All transitions, offsets clearances and exact locations shall
be established by actual field measurements, coordination with the structural, architectural
and reflected ceiling plans, and other trades. Submit shop drawings for approval.
C. All transitions, offsets and relocations as required by actual field conditions shall be
performed by the contractor at no additional cost to the owner.
D. Additional coordination with electrical contractor may be required to allow adequate
clearances of electrical equipment, fixtures and associated appurtenances. Contractor to
notify Architect and Engineer of unresolved clearances, conflicts or equipment locations.
1.04 SITE VISIT AND FAMILIARIZATION
A. Before submitting a bid, it will be necessary for each Contractor whose work is involved to
visit the site and ascertain for himself the conditions to be met therein in installing his work
and make due provision for same in his bid. It will be assumed that this Contractor in
submitting his bid has visited the premises and that his bid covers all work necessary to
properly install the equipment shown. Failure on the part of the Contractor to comply with this
requirement shall not be considered justification for the omission or faulty installation of any
work covered by these Specifications and Drawings.
B. Understand the existing utilities from which services will be supplied; verify locations of utility
services, and determine requirements for connections.
C. Determine in advance that equipment and materials proposed for installation fit into the
confines indicated.
1.05 WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. Finish painting is specified. Prime and protective painting are included in the work of this
Division.
B. Owner and General Contractor furnished equipment shall be properly connected to Plumbing
systems.
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 22 02 00 - 2
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
August 2010 Festival Park
C. Furnishing and installing all required Plumbing equipment control relays and electrical
interlock devices, conduit, wire and J-boxes are included in the Work of this Division.
1.06 PERMITS, TESTS, INSPECTIONS
A. Arrange and pay for all permits, fees, tests, and all inspections as required by governmental
authorities.
1.07 DATE OF FINAL ACCEPTANCE
A. The date of final acceptance shall be the date of owner occupancy, or the date all punch list
items have been completed or final payment has been received. Refer to Division 01 for
additional requirements.
B. The date of final acceptance shall be documented in writing and signed by the architect,
owner and contractor.
1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to the project properly identified with names, model numbers, types, grades,
compliance labels, and other information needed for identification.
B. Deliver products to the project at such time as the project is ready to receive the equipment,
pipe or valves properly protected from incidental damage and weather damage.
C. Damaged equipment, valves or pipe shall be promptly removed from the site and new,
undamaged equipment, pipe and valves shall be installed in its place promptly with no
additional charge to the Owner.
1.09 NOISE AND VIBRATION
A. The pumping systems and the component parts there of, shall be guaranteed to operate
without objectionable noise and vibration.
B. Provide foundations, supports and isolators as specified or indicated, properly adjusted to
prevent transmission of vibration to the Building structure, piping and other items.
C. Carefully fabricate pipe and fittings with smooth interior finish to prevent turbulence and
generation or regeneration of noise.
D. All equipment shall be selected to operate with minimum of noise and vibration. If, in the
opinion of the Architect, objectionable noise or vibration is produced or transmitted to or
through the building structure by equipment, piping or other parts of the Work, the Contractor
shall rectify such conditions without extra cost to the Owner.
1.10 APPLICABLE CODES
A. Obtain all required permits and inspections for all work required by the Contract Documents
and pay all required fees in connection thereof.
B. Arrange with the serving utility companies for the connection of all required utilities and pay all
charges, meter charges, connection fees and inspection fees, if required.
C. Comply with all applicable codes, specifications, local ordinances, industry standards, utility
company regulations and the applicable requirements of the following nationally accepted
codes and standards:
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 22 02 00 - 3
Clark Condon Associates
August 2010
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
1. American Society of Plumbing Engineers, ASPE.
2. American Standards Association, ASA.
3. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air -Conditioning Engineers, Inc.,
ASHRAE.
4. American Society of Mechanical Engineers, ASME.
5. American Society of Plumbing Engineers, ASPE.
6. American Society of Testing Materials, ASTM.
7. American Water Works Association, AWWA.
8. National Bureau of Standards, NBS.
9. National Fire Protection Association, NFPA.
10. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., UL.
11. International Energy Conservation Code, IECC.
D. Where differences existing between the Contract Documents and applicable state or city
building codes, state and local ordinances, industry standards, utility company regulations
and the applicable requirements of the above listed nationally accepted codes and standards,
the more stringent or costly application shall govern. Promptly notify the Engineer in writing of
all differences.
E. When directed in writing by the Engineer, remove all work installed that does not comply with
the Contract Documents and applicable state or city building codes, state and local
ordinances, industry standards, utility company regulations and the applicable requirements
of the above listed nationally accepted codes and standards, correct the deficiencies, and
complete the work at no additional cost to the Owner.
1.11 DEFINITIONS AND SYMBOLS
A. General Explanation: A substantial amount of construction and Specification language
constitutes definitions for terms found in other Contract Documents, including Drawings
which must be recognized as diagrammatic and schematic in nature and not completely
descriptive of requirements indicated thereon. Certain terms used in Contract Documents are
defined generally in this article, unless defined otherwise in Division 01.
B. Definitions and explanations of this Section are not necessarily either complete or exclusive,
but are general for work to the extent not stated more explicitly in another provision of the
Contract Documents.
C. Indicated: The term "Indicated" is a cross-reference to details, notes or schedules on the
Drawings, to other paragraphs or schedules in the Specifications and to similar means of
recording requirements in Contract Documents. Where such terms as "Shown", "Noted",
"Scheduled", "Specified" and "Detailed" are used in lieu of "Indicated", it is for the purpose of
helping the reader locate cross-reference material, and no limitation of location is intended
except as specifically shown.
D. Directed: Where not otherwise explained, terms such as "Directed", "Requested",
"Accepted", and "Permitted" mean by the Architect or Engineer. However, no such implied
meaning will be interpreted to extend the Architect's or Engineer's responsibility into the
Contractor's area of construction supervision.
E. Reviewed: Where used in conjunction with the Engineer's response to submittals, requests
for information, applications, inquiries, reports and claims by the Contractor the meaning of
the term "Reviewed" will be held to limitations of Architect's and Engineer's responsibilities
and duties as specified in the General and Supplemental Conditions. In no case will
"Reviewed" by Engineer be interpreted as a release of the Contractor from responsibility to
fulfill the terms and requirements of the Contract Documents.
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 22 02 00 - 4
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
August 2010 Festival Park
F. Furnish: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, the term "Furnish" is used to mean
supply and deliver to the project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation,
etc., as applicable in each instance.
G. Install: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, the term "Install" is used to describe
operations at the project site including unloading, unpacking, assembly, erection, placing,
anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protection, cleaning and similar
operations, as applicable in each instance.
H. Provide: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, the term "Provide" is used to mean
"Furnish and Install", complete and ready for intended use, as applicable in each instance.
Installer: Entity (person or firm) engaged by the Contractor or its subcontractor or
Sub -contractor for performance of a particular unit of work at the project site, including
unloading, unpacking, assembly, erection, placing, anchoring, applying, working to
dimension, finishing, curing, protection, cleaning and similar operations, as applicable in each
instance. It is a general requirement that such entities (Installers) be expert in the operations
they are engaged to perform.
Imperative Language: Used generally in Specifications. Except as otherwise indicated,
requirements expressed imperatively are to be performed by the Contractor. For clarity of
reading at certain locations, contrasting subjective language is used to describe
responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by the Contractor, or when so noted by other
identified installers or entities.
K. Minimum Quality/Quantity: In every instance, the quality level or quantity shown or specified is
intended as minimum quality level or quantity of work to be performed or provided. Except as
otherwise specifically indicated, the actual work may either comply exactly with that minimum
(within specified tolerances), or may exceed that minimum within reasonable tolerance limits.
In complying with requirements, indicated or scheduled numeric values are either minimums
or maximums as noted or as appropriate for the context of the requirements. Refer instances
of uncertainty to Owner or Engineer via a request for information (RFI) for decision before
proceeding.
L. Abbreviations and Symbols: The language of Specifications and other Contract Documents
including Drawings is of an abbreviated type in certain instances, and implies words and
meanings which will be appropriately interpreted. Actual word abbreviations of a self
explanatory nature have been included in text of Specifications and Drawings. Specific
abbreviations and symbols have been established, principally for lengthy technical
terminology and primarily in conjunction with coordination of Specification requirements with
notations on Drawings and in Schedules. These are frequently defined in Section at first
instance of use or on a Legend and Symbol Drawing. Trade and industry association names
and titles of generally recognized industry standards are frequently abbreviated. Singular
words will be interpreted as plural and plural words will be interpreted as singular where
applicable and where full context of Contract Documents so indicate. Except as otherwise
indicated, graphic symbols and abbreviations used on Drawings and in Specifications are
those recognized in construction industry for indicated purposes. Where not otherwise noted
symbols and abbreviations are defined by 2009 ASHRAE Fundamentals Handbook, chapter
34 "Abbreviations and Symbols", ASME and ASPE published standards.
1.12 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A. These Specifications are intended to supplement the Drawings and it will not be the province
of the Specifications to mention any part of the work which the Drawings are competent to
fully explain in every particular and such omission is not to relieve the Contractor from
carrying out portions indicated on the Drawings only.
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 22 02 00 - 5
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
August 2010 Festival Park
B. Should items be required by these Specifications and not indicated on the Drawings, they are
to be supplied even if of such nature that they could have been indicated thereon. In case of
disagreement between Drawings and Specifications, or within either Drawings or
Specifications, the better quality or greater quantity of work shall be estimated and the matter
referred to the Architect or Engineer for review with a request for information and clarification
at least 7 working days prior to bid opening date for issuance of an addendum.
C. The listing of product manufacturers, materials and methods in the various sections of the
Specifications, and indicated on the Drawings, is intended to establish a standard of quality
only. It is not the intention of the Owner or Engineer to discriminate against any product,
material or method that is equal to the standards as indicated and/or specified, nor is it
intended to preclude open, competitive bidding. The fact that a specific manufacturer is listed
as an acceptable manufacturer should not be interpreted to mean that the manufacturers'
standard product will meet the requirements of the project design, Drawings, Specifications
and space constraints.
D. The Architect or Engineer and Owner shall be the sole judge of quality and equivalence of
equipment, materials and methods.
E. Products by other reliable manufacturers, other materials, and other methods, will be
accepted as outlined, provided they have equal capacity, construction, and performance.
However, under no circumstances shall any substitution by made without the written
permission of the Architect or Engineer and Owner. Request for prior approval must be made
in writing 10 days prior to the bid date without fail.
F. Wherever a definite product, material or method is specified and there is not a statement that
another product, material or method will be acceptable, it is the intention of the Owner or
Engineer that the specified product, material or method is the only one that shall be used
without prior approval.
G. Wherever a definite material or manufacturer's product is specified and the Specification
states that products of similar design and equal construction from the specified list of
manufacturers may be substituted, it is the intention of the Owner or Engineer that products
of manufacturers that are specified are the only products that will be acceptable and that
products of other manufacturers will not be considered for substitution without approval.
H. Wherever a definite product, material or method is specified and there is a statement that
"OR EQUAL" product, material or method will be acceptable, it is the intention of the Owner
or Engineer that the specified product, material or method or an "OR EQUAL" product,
material or method may be used if it complies with the specifications and is submitted for
review to the Engineer as outline herein.
I. Where permission to use substituted or alternative equipment on the project is granted by the
Owner or Engineer in writing, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor or Subcontractor
involved to verify that the equipment will fit in the space available which includes allowances
for all required Code and maintenance clearances, and to coordinate all equipment structural
support, plumbing and electrical requirements and provisions with the Mechanical and
Plumbing Design Documents and all other trades, including Division 26.
Changes in architectural, structural, electrical, mechanical, and plumbing requirements for
the substitution shall be the responsibility of the bidder wishing to make the substitution. This
shall include the cost of redesign by the affected designer(s). Any additional cost incurred by
affected subcontractors shall be the responsibility of this bidder and not the owner.
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 22 02 00 - 6
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
August 2010 Festival Park
K. If any request for a substitution of product, material or method is rejected, the Contractor will
automatically be required to furnish the product, material or method named in the
Specifications. Repetitive requests for substitutions will not be considered.
L. The Owner or Engineer will investigate all requests for substitutions when submitted in
accordance with above and if accepted, will issue a letter allowing the substitutions.
M. Where equipment other than that used in the design as specified or shown on the Drawings
is substituted (either from an approved manufacturers list or by submittal review), it shall be
the responsibility of the substituting Contractor to coordinate space requirements, building
provisions and connection requirements with his trades and all other trades and pay all
additional costs to other trades, the Owner, the Architect or Engineer, if any, due to the
substitutions.
1.13 SUBMITTALS
A. Coordinate with Division 01 for submittal timetable requirements, unless noted otherwise
within thirty (30) days after the Contract is awarded the Contractor shall submit a minimum of
eight (8) complete bound sets of shop drawings and complete data covering each item of
equipment or material. The first submittal of each item requiring a submittal must be received
by the Architect or Engineer within the above thirty day period. The Architect or Engineer shall
not be responsible for any delays or costs incurred due to excessive shop drawing review
time for submittals received after the thirty (30) day time limit. The Architect and Engineer will
retain one (1) copy each of all shop drawings for their files. Where full size drawings are
involved, submit one (1) print and one (1) reproducible sepia or mylar in lieu of eight (8) sets.
All literature pertaining to an item subject to Shop Drawing submittal shall be submitted at
one time. A submittal shall not contain information from more than one Specification section,
but may have a section subdivided into items or equipment as listed in each section. The
Contractor may elect to submit each item or type of equipment separately. Each submittal
shall include the following items enclosed in a suitable binder:
1. A cover sheet with the names and addresses of the Project, Architect, MEP
Engineer, General Contractor and the Subcontractor making the submittal. The
cover sheet shall also contain the section number covering the item or items
submitted and the item nomenclature or description.
2. An index page with a listing of all data included in the Submittal.
3. A list of variations page with a listing all variations, including unfurnished or additional
required accessories, items or other features, between the submitted equipment and
the specified equipment. If there are no variations, then this page shall state "NO
VARIATIONS". Where variations affect the work of other Contractors, then the
Contractor shall certify on this page that these variations have been fully coordinated
with the affected Contractors and that all expenses associated with the variations will
be paid by the submitting Contractor. This page will be signed by the submitting
Contractor.
4. Equipment information including manufacturer's name and designation, size,
performance and capacity data as applicable. All applicable Listings, Labels,
Approvals and Standards shall be clearly indicated.
5. Dimensional data and scaled drawings as applicable to show that the submitted
equipment will fit the space available with all required Code and maintenance
clearances clearly indicated and labeled at a minimum scale of 1/4" = V-0", as
required to demonstrate that the alternate or substituted product will fit in the space
available.
6. Identification of each item of material or equipment matching that indicated on the
Drawings.
7. Sufficient pictorial, descriptive and diagrammatic data on each item to show its
conformance with the Drawings and Specifications. Any options or special
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 22 02 00 - 7
Clark Condon Associates
August 2010
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
requirements or accessories shall be so indicated. All applicable information shall be
clearly indicated with arrows or another approved method.
8. Additional information as required in other Sections of this Division.
9. Certification by the General Contractor and Subcontractor that the material submitted
is in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications, signed and dated in long
hand. Submittals that do not comply with the above requirements shall be returned to
the Contractor and shall be marked "REVISE AND RESUBMIT".
B. Refer to Division 01 for additional information on shop drawings and submittals.
C. Equipment and materials submittals and shop drawings will be reviewed for compliance with
design concept only. It will be assumed that the submitting Contractor has verified that all
items submitted can be installed in the space allotted. Review of shop drawings and
submittals shall not be considered as a verification or guarantee of measurements or building
conditions.
D. Where shop drawings and submittals are marked "REVIEWED", the review of the submittal
does not indicate that submittals have been checked in detail nor does it in any way relieve
the Contractor from his responsibility to furnish material and perform work as required by the
Contract Documents.
E. Shop drawings shall be reviewed and returned to the Contractor with one of the following
categories indicated:
1. REVIEWED: Contractor need take no further submittal action, shall include this
submittal in the O&M manual and may order the equipment submitted on.
2. REVIEWED AS NOTED: Contractor shall submit a letter verifying that required
exceptions to the submittal have been received and complied with including
additional accessories or coordination action as noted, and shall include this
submittal and compliance letter in the O&M manual. The contractor may order the
equipment submitted on at the time of the returned submittal providing the
Contractor complies with the exceptions noted.
3. NOT APPROVED: Contractor shall resubmit new submittal on material, equipment
or method of installation when the alternate or substitute is not approved, the
Contractor will automatically be required to furnish the product, material or method
named in the Specifications and/or drawings. Contractor shall not order equipment
that is not approved. Repetitive requests for substitutions will not be considered.
4. REVISE AND RESUBMIT: Contractor shall resubmit new submittal on material,
equipment or method of installation when the alternate or substitute is marked revise
and resubmit, the Contractor will automatically be required to furnish the product,
material or method named in the Specifications and/or provide as noted on previous
shop drawings. Contractor shall not order equipment marked revise and resubmit.
Repetitive requests for substitutions will not be considered.
5. CONTRACTOR'S CERTIFICATION REQUIRED: Contractor shall resubmit submittal
on material, equipment or method of installation. The Contractor's stamp is required
stating the submittal meets all conditions of the contract documents. The stamp shall
be signed by the General Contractor. The submittal will not be reviewed if the stamp
is not placed and signed on all shop drawings.
6. MANUFACTURER NOT AS SPECIFIED: Contractor shall resubmit new submittal on
material, equipment or method of installation when the alternate or substitute is
marked manufacturer not as specified, the Contractor will automatically be required
to furnish the product, material or method named in the specifications. Contractor
shall not order equipment where submittal is marked manufacturer not as specified.
Repetitive requests for substitutions will not be considered.
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 22 02 00 - 8
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
August 2010 Festival Park
F. Materials and equipment which are purchased or installed without shop drawing review shall
be at the risk of the Contractor and the cost for removal and replacement of such materials
and equipment and related work which is judged unsatisfactory by the Owner or Engineer for
any reason shall be at the expense of the Contractor. The responsible Contractor shall
remove the material and equipment noted above and replace with specified equipment or
material at his own expense when directed in writing by the Architect or Engineer.
G. Shop Drawing Submittals shall be complete and checked prior to submission to the Engineer
for review.
H. Submittals are required for, but not limited to, the following items:
1. Basic Materials.
2. Plumbing Fixture and Valves.
3. Support and Couriers.
4. Floor Drain, Roof Drain and Cleanouts.
5. Water Heaters
6. Water Softeners.
7. Water Treatment.
8. Backflow Preventers.
9. Plumbing Piping.
10. Expansion Compensation.
11. Noise and Vibration Controls.
12. Portable Pipe Hanger and Equipment Supports.
13. Plumbing Specialties.
14. Water Filters.
15. Test, Adjust and Balance Reports.
16. Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Contractor Qualifications.
17. Coordination Drawings.
Refer to Division 26 sections for additional shop drawing requirements. Provide samples of
actual materials and/or equipment to be used on the Project upon request of the Owner or
Engineer.
1.14 COORDINATION DRAWINGS
A. Prepare coordination drawings to a scale of 1/4"=1'-0" or larger; detailing major elements,
components, and systems of mechanical equipment and materials in relationship with other
systems, installations, and building components. Indicate locations where space is limited for
installation and access and where sequencing and coordination of installations are of
importance to the efficient flow of the Work, including (but not necessarily limited to) the
following:
1. Indicate the proposed locations of pipe, equipment, and other materials. Include the
following:
a.
Wall and type locations.
b.
Clearances for installing and maintaining insulation.
C.
Locations of light fixtures and sprinkler heads.
d.
Clearances for servicing and maintaining equipment, including tube removal
and space for equipment disassembly required for periodic maintenance.
e.
Equipment connections and support details.
f.
Exterior wall and foundation penetrations.
g.
Routing of storm, sanitary sewer piping and plumbing piping.
h.
Fire -rated wall and floor penetrations.
i.
Sizes and location of required concrete pads and bases.
j.
Valve stem movement.
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 22 02 00 - 9
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
August 2010 Festival Park
k. Structural floor, wall and roof opening sizes and details.
2. Indicate scheduling, sequencing, movement, and positioning of large equipment into
the building during construction.
3. Prepare floor plans, elevations, and details to indicate penetrations in floors, walls,
and ceilings and their relationship to other penetrations and installations.
B. This Contractor shall be responsible for coordination of all items that will affect the installation
of the work of this Division. This coordination shall include, but not be limited to: voltage,
ampacity, capacity, electrical and piping connections, space requirements, sequence of
construction, building requirements and special conditions.
C. By submitting shop drawings on the project, this Contractor is indicating that all necessary
coordination has been completed and that the systems, products and equipment submitted
can be installed in the building and will operate as specified and intended, in full coordination
with all other Contractors and Subcontractors.
1.15 RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Prepare record documents in accordance with the requirements in Special Project
Requirements, in addition to the requirements specified in Division 23, indicate the following
installed conditions:
1. Mains and branches of piping systems, with valves and control devices located and
numbered, concealed unions located, and with items requiring maintenance located
(i.e., traps, strainers, expansion compensators, tanks, etc.). Valve location diagrams,
complete with valve tag chart. Indicate actual inverts and horizontal locations of
underground piping.
2. Equipment locations (exposed and concealed), dimensioned from prominent building
lines.
3. Approved substitutions, Contract Modifications, and actual equipment and materials
installed.
4. Contract Modifications, actual equipment and materials installed.
B. Engage the services of a Land Surveyor or Professional Engineer registered in the state in
which the project is located as specified herein to record the locations and invert elevations of
underground installations.
C. The Contractor shall maintain a set of clearly marked black line record "AS -BUILT" prints on
the job site on which he shall mark all work details, alterations to meet site conditions and
changes made by "Change Order" notices. These shall be kept available for inspection by the
Owner, Architect or Engineer at all times.
D. Refer to Division 01 for additional requirements concerning record drawings. If the Contractor
does not keep an accurate set of as -built drawings, the pay request may be altered or
delayed at the request of the Architect. Mark the drawings with a colored pencil. Delivery of
as -built prints and reproducibles is a condition of final acceptance.
E. The record prints shall be updated on a daily basis and shall indicate accurate dimensions for
all buried or concealed work, precise locations of all concealed pipe or duct, locations of all
concealed valves, controls and devices and any deviations from the work shown on the
Construction Documents which are required for coordination. All dimensions shall include at
least two dimensions to permanent structure points.
F. Submit three prints of the tracings for approval. Make corrections to tracings as directed and
delivered "Auto Positive Tracings" to the architect. "As -Built" drawings shall be furnished in
addition to shop drawings.
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 22 02 00 - 10
Clark Condon Associates
August 2010
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
G. When the option described in paragraph F., above is not exercised then upon completion of
the work, the Contractor shall transfer all marks from the submit a set of clear concise set of
reproducible record "AS -BUILT" drawings and shall submit the reproducible drawings with
corrections made by a competent draftsman and three (3) sets of black line prints to the
Architect or Engineer for review prior to scheduling the final inspection at the completion of
the work. The reproducible record "AS -BUILT" drawings shall have the Engineers Name and
Seal removed or blanked out and shall be clearly marked and signed on each sheet as
follows:
CERTIFIED RECORD DRAWINGS
DATE:
(NAME OF GENERAL CONTRACTOR)
BY:
(SIGNATURE)
(NAME OF SUBCONTRACTOR)
BY:
(SIGNATURE)
1.16 OPERATING MANUALS
A. Prepare maintenance manuals in accordance with Division 01 and in addition to the
requirements specified in Division 01, include the following information for equipment items:
1. Description of function, normal operating characteristics and limitations, performance
curves, engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and commercial
numbers of replacement parts.
2. Manufacturer's printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in, and
routine and normal operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping, shutdown,
and emergency instructions; and summer and winter operating instructions.
3. Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and troubleshooting;
disassembly, repair, and reassembly; aligning and adjusting instructions.
4. Servicing instructions and lubrication charts and schedules.
1.17 CERTIFICATIONS AND TEST REPORTS
A. Submit a detailed schedule for completion and testing of each system indicating scheduled
dates for completion of system installation and outlining tests to be performed and schedule
date for each test. This detailed completion and test schedule shall be submittal at least 90
days before the projected Project completion date.
B. Test result reporting forms shall be submitted for review no later than the date of the detailed
schedule submitted.
C. Submit 4 copies of all certifications and test reports to the Architect or Engineer for review
adequately in advance of completion of the Work to allow for remedial action as required to
correct deficiencies discovered in equipment and systems.
D. Certifications and test reports to be submitted shall include, but not be limited to those items
outlined in Section of Division 22.
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 22 02 00 - 11
Clark Condon Associates
August 2010
1.18 MAINTENANCE MANUALS
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
A. Coordinate with Division 01 for maintenance manual requirements, unless noted otherwise
bind together in "D ring type" binders by National model no. 79-883 or equal, binders shall be
large enough to allow'/4" of spare capacity. Three (3) sets of all approved shop drawing
submittals, fabrication drawings, bulletins, maintenance instructions, operating instructions
and parts exploded views and lists for each and every piece of equipment furnished under
this Specification. All sections shall be typed and indexed into sections and labeled for easy
reference and shall utilize the individual specification section numbers shown in the Plumbing
Specifications as an organization guideline. Bulletins containing information about equipment
that is not installed on the project shall be properly marked up or stripped and reassembled.
All pertinent information required by the Owner for proper operation and maintenance of
equipment supplied by Division 22 shall be clearly and legibly set forth in memoranda that
shall, likewise, be bound with bulletins.
B. Prepare maintenance manuals in accordance with Special Project Conditions, in addition to
the requirements specified in Division 22, include the following information for equipment
items:
1. Identifying names, name tags designations and locations for all equipment.
2. Valve tag lists with valve number, type, color coding, location and function.
3. Reviewed shop drawing submittals with exceptions noted compliance letter.
4. Fabrication drawings.
5. Equipment and device bulletins and data sheets clearly highlighted to show
equipment installed on the project and including performance curves and data as
applicable, i.e., description of function, normal operating characteristics and
limitations, performance curves, engineering data and tests, and complete
nomenclature and model numbers of replacement parts.
6. Manufacturer's printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in, and
routine and normal operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping, shutdown,
and emergency instructions; and summer and winter operating instructions.
7. Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and troubleshooting;
disassembly, repair, and reassembly; aligning and adjusting instructions, servicing
instructions and lubrication charts and schedules.
8. Equipment and motor name plate data.
9. Wiring diagrams.
10. Exploded parts views and parts lists for all equipment and devices.
11. Color coding charts for all painted equipment and conduit.
12. Location and listing of all spare parts and special keys and tools furnished to the
Owner.
13. Furnish recommended lubrication schedule for all required lubrication points with
listing of type and approximate amount of lubricant required.
C. Refer to Division 1 for additional information on Operating and Maintenance Manuals.
D. Operating and Maintenance Manuals shall be turned over to the Owner or Engineer a
minimum of 14 working days prior to the beginning of the operator training period.
1.19 OPERATOR TRAINING
A. The Contractor shall furnish the services of factory trained specialists to instruct the Owner's
operating personnel. The Owner's operator training shall include 12 hours of on site training
in three 4 hour shifts.
B. Before proceeding with the instruction of Owner Personnel, prepare a typed outline in
triplicate, listing the subjects that will be covered in this instruction, and submit the outline for
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 22 02 00 - 12
Clark Condon Associates
August 2010
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
review by the Owner. At the conclusion of the instruction period obtain the signature of each
person being instructed on each copy of the reviewed outline to signify that he has a proper
understanding of the operation and maintenance of the systems and resubmit the signed
outlines.
C. Refer to other Division 22 Sections for additional Operator Training requirements.
1.20 FINAL COMPLETION
A. At the completion of the work, all equipment and systems shall be tested and faulty
equipment and material shall be repaired or replaced. Refer to Sections of Division 26 for
additional requirements.
B. Clean and adjust all air distribution devices and replace all air filters immediately prior to final
acceptance.
C. Touch up and/or refinish all scratched equipment and devices immediately prior to final
acceptance.
1.21 CONTRACTOR'S GUARANTEE
A. Use of the Plumbing systems to provide temporary service during construction period will not
be allowed without permission from the Owner in writing and if granted shall not be cause
warranty period to start, except as defined below.
B. Contractor shall guarantee to keep the entire installation in repair and perfect working order
for a period of one year after its completion and final acceptance, and shall furnish free of
additional cost to the Owner all materials and labor necessary to comply with the above
guarantee throughout the year beginning from the date of issue of Substantial Completion,
Beneficial Occupancy by the Owner or the Certificate of Final Payment as agreed upon by all
parties.
C. This guarantee shall not include cleaning or changing filters except as required by testing,
adjusting and balancing.
D. All air compressors shall have parts and labor guarantees for a period of not less than 5
years beyond the date of final acceptance.
E. Refer to Sections in Division 22 for additional guarantee or warranty requirements.
1.22 TRANSFER OF ELECTRONIC FILES
A. Project documents are not intended or represented to be suitable for reuse by
Architect/Owner or others on extensions of this project or on any other project. Any such
reuse or modification without written verification or adaptation by Engineer, as appropriate for
the specific purpose intended, will be at Architect/Owner's risk and without liability or legal
exposure to Engineer or its consultants from all claims, damages, losses and expense,
including attorney's fees arising out of or resulting thereof.
B. Because data stored in electric media format can deteriorate or be modified inadvertently, or
otherwise without authorization of the data's creator, the party receiving the electronic files
agrees that it will perform acceptance tests or procedures within sixty (60) days of receipt,
after which time the receiving party shall be deemed to have accepted the data thus
transferred to be acceptable. Any errors detected within the sixty (60) day acceptance period
will be corrected by the parry delivering the electronic files. Engineer is not responsible for
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 22 02 00 - 13
Clark Condon Associates
August 2010
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
maintaining documents stored in electronic media format after acceptance by the
Architect/Owner.
C. When transferring documents in electronic media format, Engineer makes no
representations as to the long term compatibility, usability or readability of documents
resulting from the use of software application packages, operating systems, or computer
hardware differing from those used by Engineer at the beginning of the Project.
D. Any reuse or modifications will be Contractor's sole risk and without liability or legal exposure
to Architect, Engineer or any consultant.
E. The Texas Board of Architectural Examiners (TBAE) has stated that it is in violation of Texas
law for persons other than the Architect of record to revise the Architectural drawings without
the Architect's written consent.
It is agreed that "MEP" hard copy or computer -generated documents will not be issued to any
other party except directly to the Architect/Owner. The contract documents are contractually
copyrighted and cannot be used for any other project or purpose except as specifically
indicated in AIA B-141 Standard Form of Agreement Between Architect and Owner.
If the client, Architect/Owner, or developer of the project requires electronic media for "record
purposes", then an AutoCAD based compact disc ("CD") will be prepared. The "CD" will be
submitted with all title block references intact and will be formatted in a "plot" format to permit
the end user to only view and plot the drawings. Revisions will not be permitted in this
configuration.
F. At the Architect/Owner's request, Engineer will prepare one "CD" of electronic media to assist
the contractor in the preparation of submittals. The Engineer will prepare and submit the "CD"
to the Architect/Owner for distribution to the contractor. All copies of the "CD" will be
reproduced for a cost of reproduction fee of Five Hundred Dollars ($500.00) per "CD".
The "CD" will be prepared and all title blocks, names and dates will be removed. The "CD"
will be prepared in a ".dwg" format to permit the end user to revise the drawings.
G. This Five Hundred Dollars ($500.00) per "CD" cost of reproduction will be paid directly from
the Contractor to the Engineer. The "CD" will be prepared only after receipt of the Five
Hundred Dollars ($500.00). The Five Hundred Dollars ($500.00) per "CD" cost of
reproduction is to only recover the cost of the man-hours necessary to reproduce the
documents. It is not a contractual agreement between the Contractor and Engineer to provide
any engineering services, nor any other service.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Provide materials and equipment manufactured by a domestic United States manufacturer.
B. Access Doors: Provide access doors as required for access to equipment, valves, controls,
cleanouts and other apparatus where concealed. Access doors shall have concealed hinges
and screw driver cam locks.
C. All access panels located in wet areas such as restrooms, locker rooms, shower rooms,
kitchen and any other wet areas shall be constructed of stainless steel.
D. Access Doors: shall be as follows:
1. Plastic Surfaces: Milcor Style K.
2. Ceramic Tile Surface: Milcor Style M.
3. Drywall Surfaces: Milcor Style DW.
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 22 02 00 - 14
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
August 2010 Festival Park
4. Install panels only in locations approved by the Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 ROUGH -IN
A. Verify final locations for rough -ins with field measurements and with the requirements of the
actual equipment to be connected via reviewed submittals.
B. Refer to equipment specifications in Divisions 21 through 22 for additional rough -in
requirements.
3.02 PLUMBING INSTALLATIONS
A. General: Sequence, coordinate, and integrate the various elements of plumbing and fire
systems, materials, and equipment. Comply with the following requirements:
1. Coordinate plumbing systems, equipment, and materials installation with other
building components.
2. Verify all dimensions by field measurements.
3. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components during
progress of construction, to allow for plumbing installations.
4. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in
poured -in -place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed.
5. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of plumbing materials and
equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Give particular attention to large equipment
requiring positioning prior to closing in the building.
6. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install systems, materials,
and equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible.
7. Coordinate connection of plumbing systems with exterior underground and overhead
utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised
service companies, and controlling agencies. Provide required connection for each
service.
8. Install systems, materials, and equipment to conform with architectural action
markings on submittal, including coordination drawings, to greatest extent possible.
Conform to arrangements indicated by the Contract Documents, recognizing that
portions of the Work are shown only in diagrammatic form. Where coordination
requirements conflict with individual system requirements, resolve conflicts and route
proposed solution to the Architect for review.
9. Install systems, materials, and equipment level and plumb, parallel and
perpendicular to other building systems and components, where installed exposed in
finished spaces.
10. Install plumbing equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance, and repair or
replacement of equipment components. As much as practical, connect equipment
for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installations.
Extend grease fittings to an accessible location and label.
11. Install access panel or doors where valves and equipment are concealed behind
finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified.
12. Install systems, materials, and equipment giving right-of-way priority to systems
required to be installed at a specified slope.
13. Provide roof curbs for all roof mounted equipment. Coordinate with roof construction
for pitched roof. Provide roof curb to match roof slope. Refer to architectural
drawings and details.
14. The equipment to be furnished under this Specification shall be essentially the
standard product of the manufacturer. Where two or more units of the same class of
equipment are required, these units shall be products of a single manufacturer;
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 22 02 00 - 15
Clark Condon Associates
August 2010
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
however, the component parts of the system need not be the product of the same
manufacturer.
15. The architectural and structural features of the building and the space limitations
shall be considered in selection of all equipment. No equipment shall be furnished
which will not suit the arrangement and space limitations indicated.
16. Lubrication: Prior to start-up, check and properly lubricate all bearings as
recommended by the manufacturer.
17. Where the word "Concealed" is used in these Specifications in connection with
insulating, painting, piping, ducts, etc., it shall be understood to mean hidden from
sight as in chases, furred spaces or suspended ceilings. "Exposed" shall be
understood to mean the opposite of concealed.
18. Identification of Plumbing Equipment:
a. Plumbing equipment shall be identified by means of nameplates
permanently attached to the equipment. Nameplates shall be engraved
laminated plastic or etched metal. Shop drawings shall include dimensions
and lettering format for approval. Attachments shall be with escutcheon
pins, self -tapping screws, or machine screws.
b. Tags shall be attached to all valves, including control valves, with nonferrous
chain. Tags shall be brass and at least 1-1/2 inches in diameter. Nameplate
and tag symbols shall correspond to the identification symbols on the
temperature control submittal and the "as -built" drawings.
3.03 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Protection of Installed Work: During cutting and patching operations, protect adjacent
installations.
B. Perform cutting, fitting, and patching of plumbing I equipment and materials required to:
1. Uncover Work to provide for installation of ill-timed Work.
2. Remove and replace defective Work.
3. Remove and replace Work not conforming to requirements of the Contract
Documents.
4. Remove samples of installed Work as specified for testing.
5. Install equipment and materials in existing structures.
6. Upon written instructions from the Engineer, uncover and restore Work to provide for
Engineer/Owner's observation of concealed Work, without additional cost to the
Owner.
7. Patch existing finished surfaces and building components using new materials
matching existing materials and experienced Installers. Patch finished surfaces and
building components using new materials specified for the original installation and
experienced Installers; refer to the materials and methods required for the surface
and building components being patched; Refer to Section "DEFINITIONS" for
definition of "Installer."
C. Cut, remove and legally dispose of selected plumbing equipment, components, and materials
as indicated, including but not limited to removal of plumbing piping, plumbing fixtures and
trim, and other plumbing I items made obsolete by the new Work.
D. Protect the structure, furnishings, finishes, and adjacent materials not indicated or scheduled
to be removed.
E. Provide and maintain temporary partitions or dust barriers adequate to prevent the spread of
dust and dirt to adjacent areas.
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 22 02 00 - 16
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
August 2010 Festival Park
3.04 WORK SEQUENCE, TIMING, COORDINATION WITH OWNER
A. The Owner will cooperate with the Contractor, however, the following provisions must be
observed:
A meeting will be held at the project site, prior to any construction, between the
Owner's Representative, the General Contractor, the Sub -Contractors and the
Engineer to discuss Contractor's employee parking space, access, storage of
equipment or materials, and use of the Owner's facilities or utilities. The Owner's
decisions regarding such matters shall be final.
During the construction of this project, normal facility activities will continue in
existing buildings until renovated areas are completed. Plumbing, fire protection,
lighting, electrical, communications, heating, air conditioning, and ventilation systems
will have to be maintained in service within the occupied spaces of the existing
building.
END OF SECTION
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 22 02 00 - 17
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
SECTION 22 05 16 — EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Flexible pipe connections.
B. Expansion joints and compensators
C. Pipe loops, offsets, and swing joints.
1.02 RELATED WORK
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
A. Section 22 05 29 — Hangers and Support for Plumbing Piping and Equipment.
B. Section 22 10 00 — Plumbing Piping.
1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide structural work and equipment required to control expansion and contraction of
piping. Verify that anchors, guides, and expansion joints provided, adequately protect
system.
B. Expansion Calculations:
1. Installation Temperature: 50 degrees F (10 degrees C).
2. Hot Water Heating: 210 degrees F (99 degrees C).
3. Domestic Hot Water: 140 degrees F (60 degrees C).
4. Safety Factor: 30 percent.
C. Pipe sizes indicated are to establish a minimum quality of compensator. Refer to
manufacturers' literature for model series for different pipe sizes.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Division One.
B. Product Data:
1. Flexible Pipe Connectors: Indicate maximum temperature and pressure rating,
face-to-face length, live length, hose wall thickness, hose convolutions per foot
(meter) and per assembly, fundamental frequency of assembly, braid structure,
and total number of wires in braid.
2. Expansion Joints: Indicate maximum temperature and pressure rating, and
maximum expansion compensation.
C. Design Data: Indicate selection calculations.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, and external
controls.
1.05 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Submit under provisions of Division One.
EXPANION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 16 - 1
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
August 2010 Festival Park
B. Record actual locations of flexible pipe connectors, expansion joints, anchor, and guides.
1.06 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit under provisions of Division One.
B. Maintenance Data: Include adjustment instructions.
1.07 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this
section with minimum five years documented experience.
B. Design expansion compensation system under direct supervision of a Professional
Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in the state where the project is
located.
1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, project and handle products to site under provisions of Division One.
B. Accept expansion joints on site in factory packing with shipping bars and positioning
devices intact. Inspect for damage.
C. Protect equipment from exposure by leaving factory coverings, pipe end protection, and
packaging in place until installation.
1.09 WARRANTY
A. Provide five year warranty under provisions of Division One.
B. Warranty: Include coverage for leak free performance of packed expansion joints.
1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish under provisions of Division One.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.01 FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTORS
A. Steel Piping (Based on 2" Pipe):
1. Manufacturers:
a. Amber/Booth Metal -Flex, Model Type SS -PM or FW
b. Triplex, Model Flexonics Series 400M
C. Mercer Rubber Company, Model BSS-EM (Mason Industries)
2. Inner Hose: Type 321, stainless steel, corrugated metal.
3. Exterior Sleeve: Type 321, single braided stainless steel.
4. Pressure Rating: 350 psig WOG and 70 degrees F. For 4 inch pipe - 200 psig
WOG and 70 degrees F.
5. Joint: Schedule 40 steel, threaded with male nipple and hex boss each end and
Union. Flanged joints for pipe sizes 2'/2 inch and larger.
6. Size: Use pipe sized units.
7. Maximum offset: 1/2 inch on each side of installed center line.
8. Application: Air handling units cooling and heating coils.
EXPANION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 16 - 2
Clark Condon Associates
August 2010
B. Copper Piping (Based on 2" Pipe):
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
1. Manufacturers:
a. Amber/Booth Metal -Flex, Model Type BR-SM
b. Triplex, Model Flexonics Series 300
C. Mercer Rubber Company, Type BFF (Mason Industries)
2. Inner Hose: Corrugated Bronze
3. Exterior Sleeve: Braided bronze.
4. Pressure Rating: 250 psig WOG and 70 degrees F.
5. Joint: Threaded with male nipple and hex boss each end with Union. Flanged
joints for pipe sizes 2'h inch and larger.
6. Size: Use pipe sized units.
7. Maximum offset: 1/2 inch on each side of installed center line.
8. Application: Air handling units cooling and heating coils.
2.02 EXPANSION JOINTS
A. Bellows Type (Based on 4" Pipe):
1
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10
2.03 ACCESSORIES
Manufacturers:
a. Amber/Booth, Style EB
b. Triplex, Model Resistoflex R6905
C. Mercer Rubber Company, Style 803 or 805 (Mason Industries)
Body: Monel wire reinforced molded TFE teflon bellows, multiple arch.
Pressure Rating: 70 psig WSP and 250 degrees F (66 degrees C).
Maximum Compression: 1 inch.
Maximum Extension: 1 inch.
Maximum Offset: 1/2 inch.
Joint: ASA standard ductile iron flanges, integral molded gasket.
Size: Use pipe sized units.
Accessories: Control rod limit bolts.
Application: Steel piping 8 inch and under.
A. Pipe Alignment Guides to Direct Axial Movement:
1. Manufacturers:
a. Triplex, Model Flexonics
b. Metraflex, Style II
2. Two piece welded steel with shop paint, bolted, with spider to fit standard pipe,
frame with four mounting holes, clearance for minimum 1 inch thick insulation,
minimum 3 inch travel.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Construct spool pieces to exact size of flexible connection for future insertion.
C. Install flexible pipe connectors on pipes connected to equipment supported by vibration
isolation. Provided line size flexible connectors.
D. Install flexible connectors at right angles to displacement. Install one end immediately
EXPANION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 16 - 3
Clark Condon Associates
August 2010
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
adjacent to isolated equipment and anchor other end. Install in horizontal plane unless
indicated otherwise.
E. Provide miscellaneous metals to rigidly anchor pipe to building structure. Provide pipe
guides so that movement takes place along axis of pipe only. Erect piping such that strain
and weight is not on cast connections or apparatus.
F. Provide support and equipment required to control expansion and contraction of piping.
Provide loops, pipe offsets, and swing joints, or expansion joints where required.
3.02 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES
A. Prepare and start systems under provisions of Division One.
B. Provide inspection services by flexible pipe manufacturer's representative for final
installing and certify installation is in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations
and connectors are performing satisfactorily.
END OF SECTION
EXPANION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 16 - 4
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Park
SECTION 22 05 29 — HANGERS AND SUPPORT FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Pipe, and equipment hangers, supports, and associated anchors.
B. Sleeves and seals.
C. Flashing and sealing equipment and pipe stacks.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 22 05 29 — Hangers and Support for Plumbing Piping and Equipment.
B. Section 22 07 19 — Plumbing Piping Insulation.
C. Section 22 07 16 — Plumbing Equipment Insulation.
D. Section 21 00 00 - Fire Protection and 21 13 13 Wet Pipe Sprinkler System.
E. Section 22 10 00 - Plumbing System.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/ASME B31.1 - Power Piping.
B. NFPA 13 - Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems.
C. NFPA 14 - Standard for the Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Supports for Sprinkler Piping: In conformance with NFPA 13.
B. Supports for Standpipes: In conformance with NFPA 14.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Division One.
B. Indicate hanger and support framing and attachment methods.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 Inch Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, split ring.
B. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 to 4 Inches Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.
C. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and Over: Adjustable steel yoke, cast iron roll, double
hanger.
D. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods; cast
HANGERS AND SUPPORT FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 29 - 1
Clark Condon Associates
August 2010
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
iron roll and stand for pipe sizes 6 inches and over.
E. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches: Cast iron hook.
F. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 Inches and Over: adjustable steel yoke and cast iron roll.
G. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.
H. Floor Support for Pipe Sizes to 4 Inches: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, locknut nipple,
floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support.
I. Floor Support for Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and Over: Adjustable cast iron roll and stand, steel
screws, and concrete pier or steel support.
J. Roof Pipe Supports and Hangers: Galvanized Steel Channel System as manufactured by
Portable Pipe Hangers, Inc. or approved equal.
For pipes 2-1/2" and smaller— Type PP10 with roller
For pipes 3" through 8" — Type PS
For multiple pipes — Type PSE - Custom
K. Copper Pipe Support and Hangers: Electro-galvanized with thermoplastic elastomer
cushions; Unistrut "Cush -A -Clamp" or equal. Hangers: Plastic coated; Unistrut or equal.
L. For installation of protective shields refer to specification section 22 07 19 -3.03.
M. Shields for Vertical Copper Pipe Risers: Sheet lead.
N. Pipe Rough -In Supports in Walls/Chases: Provide preformed plastic pipe supports, Sioux
Chief "Pipe Titan" hold rite or equal.
2.02 HANGER RODS
A. Galvanized Hanger Rods: Threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuous
threaded.
2.03 FLASHING
A. Metal Flashing: 20 gage galvanized steel.
B. Lead Flashing: 4 lb./sq. ft. sheet lead for waterproofing; 1 lb./sq. ft. sheet lead for
soundproofing.
C. Caps: Steel, 20 gage minimum; 16 gage at fire resistant elements.
D. Coordinate with roofing contractor/architect for type of flashing on metal roofs.
2.04 EQUIPMENT CURBS
A. Fabricate curbs of hot dipped galvanized steel.
2.05 SLEEVES
A. Sleeves for Pipes through Non -fire Rated Floors: Form with 18 gage galvanized steel,
tack welded to form a uniform sleeve.
HANGERS AND SUPPORT FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 29 - 2
Clark Condon Associates
August 2010
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
B. Sleeves for Pipes through Non -fire Rated Beams, Walls, Footings, and Potentially Wet
Floors: Form with steel pipe, schedule 40.
C. Sleeves for Pipes through Fire Rated and Fire Resistive Floors and Walls, and
Fireproofing: Prefabricated fire rated steel sleeves including seals, UL listed.
D. Sleeves for Round Ductwork: Form with galvanized steel.
E. Sleeves for Rectangular Ductwork: Form with galvanized steel.
F. Fire Stopping Insulation: Glass fiber type, non-combustible, U.L. listed.
G. Caulk: Paintable 25-year acrylic sealant.
H. Pipe Alignment Guides: Factory fabricated, of cast semi -steel or heavy fabricated steel,
consisting of bolted, two -section outer cylinder and base with two -section guiding spider
that bolts tightly to pipe. Length of guides shall be as recommended by manufacturer to
allow indicated travel.
2.06 FABRICATION
A. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction.
Provide for continuous insulation wrapping.
B. Design hangers without disengagement of supported pipe.
C. Design roof supports without roof penetrations, flashing or damage to the roofing material.
2.07 FINISH
A. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Hangers and supports located in crawl
spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Support horizontal piping as follows:
PIPE SIZE MAX. HANGER SPACING
(Steel Pipe)
1/2 to 1-1/4 inch
7'-0"
1-1/2 to 3 inch
10'-0"
4 to 6 inch
10'-0"
8 to 10 inch
10'-0"
12 to 14 inch
10'-0"
(Copper Pipe)
1/2 to 1-1/4 inch
5'-0"
1-1/2 to 2-1/2 inch
8'-0"
3 to 4 inch
10'-0"
(Cast Iron)
2 to 3 inch
5'-0"
4 to 6 inch
10'-0"
8 to 10 inch
10'-0"
12 to 14 inch
10'-0"
HANGER DIAMETER
3/8"
3/8"
1/2"
5/8"
3/4"
3/8"
3/8"
3/8"
3/8"
1/2"
5/8"
3/4"
HANGERS AND SUPPORT FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 29 - 3
Clark Condon Associates
August 2010
(PVC Pipe)
1-1/2 to 4 inch 4'-0" 3/8"
6 to 8 inch 4'-0" 1/2"
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
B. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and
adjacent work.
C. Place a hanger within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow and at the vertical horizontal
transition.
D. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment.
B. Support horizontal cast iron pipe adjacent to each hub, with 5 feet maximum spacing
between hangers.
C. Support vertical piping at every floor. Support vertical cast iron pipe at each floor at hub.
D. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or
trapeze hangers.
E. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping.
F. Install hangers with nut at base and above hanger; tighten upper nut to hanger after final
installation adjustments.
G. Portable pipe hanger systems shall be installed per manufactures instructions.
3.02 Insulated Piping: Comply with the following installation requirements.
A. Clamps: Attach galvanized clamps, including spacers (if any), to piping with clamps
projecting through insulation; do not exceed pipe stresses allowed by ASME B31.9.
B. Saddles: Install galvanized protection saddles MSS Type 39 where insulation without vapor
barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with segments of insulation that match adjoining pipe
insulation.
C. Shields: Install protective shields MSS Type 40 on cold and chilled water piping that has
vapor barrier. Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees and shall have dimensions in inches
not less than the following:
NPS LENGTH THICKNESS
1/4 THROUGH 3-1/2 12 0.048
4 12 0.060
5 & 6 18 0.060
8 THROUGH 14 24 0.075
D. Piping 2" and larger provide galvanized sheet metal shields with calcium silicate at
hangers/supports.
E. Insert material shall be at least as long as the protective shield.
F. Thermal Hanger Shields: Install where indicated, with insulation of same thickness as
piping.
3.03 EQUIPMENT BASES AND SUPPORTS
HANGERS AND SUPPORT FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 29 - 4
Clark Condon Associates
August 2010
A. Provide equipment bases of concrete.
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
B. Provide templates, anchor bolts, and accessories for mounting and anchoring equipment.
C. Construct support of steel members. Brace and fasten with flanges bolted to structure.
D. Provide rigid anchors for pipes after vibration isolation components are installed.
3.04 FLASHING
A. Provide flexible flashing and metal counter flashing where piping and ductwork penetrate
weather or waterproofed walls, floors, and roofs.
B. Flash vent and soil pipes projecting 8 inches minimum above finished roof surface with
lead worked one inch minimum into hub, 8 inches minimum clear on sides with 24 x 24
inches sheet size. For pipes through outside walls, turn flanges back into wall and caulk,
metal counter flash and seal.
C. Flash floor drains in floors with topping over finished areas with lead, 10 inches clear on
sides with minimum 36 x 36 inch sheet size. Fasten flashing to drain clamp device.
D. Seal floor shower mop sink and all other drains watertight to adjacent materials.
E. Provide curbs for mechanical roof installations 8 inches minimum high above roofing
surface. Contact architect for all flashing details and roof construction. Seal penetrations
watertight.
3.05 SLEEVES
A. Set sleeves in position in formwork. Provide reinforcing around sleeves.
B. Extend sleeves through floors minimum one inch above finished floor level. Caulk sleeves
full depth with fire rated thermfiber and 3M caulking and provide floor plate.
C. Where piping or ductwork penetrates floor, ceiling, or wall, close off space between pipe
or duct and adjacent work with U.L. listed fire stopping insulation and caulk seal air tight.
Provide close fitting metal collar or escutcheon covers at both sides of penetration.
D. Fire protection sleeves may be flush with floor of stairways.
END OF SECTION
HANGERS AND SUPPORT FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 29 - 5
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Park
SECTION 22 05 53 — IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all
work herein.
B. The Basic Materials and Methods, Section 22 02 00, are included as a part of this Section
as though written in full in this document.
1.02 SCOPE
Scope of the Work shall include the furnishing and complete installation of the equipment covered
by this Section, with all auxiliaries, ready for owner's use.
1.03 Refer to Architectural Sections for additional requirements.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.01 VALVE AND PIPE IDENTIFICATION
A. Valves:
1. All valves shall be identified with a 1-1/2" diameter brass disc wired onto the
handle. The disc shall be stamped with 1/2" high depressed black filled identifying
numbers. These numbers shall be numerically sequenced for all valves on the
job.
2. The number and description indicating make, size, model number and service of
each valve shall be listed in proper operational sequence, properly typewritten.
Three copies to be turned over to Owner at completion.
3. Tags shall be fastened with approved meter seal and 4 ply 0.018 smooth copper
wire. Tags and fastenings shall be manufactured by the Seton Name Plate
Company or approved equal.
4. All valves shall be numbered serially with all valves of any one system and/or
trade grouped together.
B. Pipe Marking:
1. All interior visible piping located in accessible spaces such as above accessible
ceilings, equipment rooms, attic space, under floor spaces, etc., shall be
identified with all temperature pipe markers as manufactured by W.H. Brady
Company, 431 West Rock Ave., New Haven, Connecticut, or approved equal.
2. All exterior visible piping shall be identified with UV and acid resistant outdoor
grade acrylic plastic markers as manufactured by Set Mark distributed by Seton
nameplate company. Factory location 20 Thompson Road, Branford,
Connecticut, or approved equal.
3. Generally, markers shall be located on each side of each partition, on each side
of each tee, on each side of each valve and/or valve group, on each side of each
piece of equipment, and, for straight runs, at equally spaced intervals not to
exceed 75 feet. In congested area, marks shall be placed on each pipe at the
points where it enters and leaves the area and at the point of connection of each
piece of equipment and automatic control valve. All markers shall have directional
arrows.
4. Markers shall be installed after final painting of all piping and equipment and in
IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 53 - 1
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
August 2010 Festival Park
such a manner that they are visible from the normal maintenance position.
Manufacturer's installation instructions shall be closely followed.
5. Markers shall be colored as indicated below per ANSI/OSHA Standards:
SYSTEM
Sanitary Sewer
Storm Drain
Domestic Water
Domestic Hot Water
Supply
Domestic Hot Water
Recirculating
C. Pipe Painting:
COLOR
LEGEND
Green
Vent
Sanitary Sewer
Green
Storm Drain
Green
Domestic Water
Yellow
Domestic Hot
Water Supply
Yellow
Domestic Hot
Water Return
1. All piping exposed to view shall be painted as indicated or as directed by the
Architect in the field. Confirm all color selections with Architect prior to installation.
2. The entire fire protection piping system shall be painted red.
3. All piping located in mechanical rooms and exterior piping shall be painted as
indicated below:
System Color
Storm Sewer White
Sanitary Sewer Waste and Vent Light Gray
Domestic Cold Water Dark Blue
Domestic Hot Water Supply and Return Orange
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 All labeling equipment shall be installed as per manufacturers printed installation instructions.
3.02 All items required for a complete and proper installation are not necessarily indicated on the plans
or in the specifications. Contractors price shall include all items required as per manufacturers'
requirements.
3.03 All piping shall be cleaned of rust, dirt, oil and all other contaminants prior to painting. Install
primer and a quality latex paint over all surfaces of pipe.
END OF SECTION
IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 53 - 2
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
SECTION 22 07 16 — PLUMBING EQUIPMENT INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all
work herein.
B. The Basic Materials and Methods, Section 22 02 00, are included as a part of this Section
as though written in full in this document.
1.02 SCOPE
A. Scope of the Work shall include the furnishing and complete installation of the equipment
covered by this Section, with all auxiliaries, ready for owner's use.
B. Work specified elsewhere.
1. Basic materials and methods.
2. Piping systems.
3. Air distribution equipment.
1.03 WARRANTY
A. Warrant the Work specified herein for one year against becoming unserviceable or
causing an objectionable appearance resulting from either defective or nonconforming
materials and workmanship.
B. Defects shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
1. Mildewing.
2. Peeling, cracking, and blistering.
3. Condensation on exterior surfaces.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. SHOP DRAWINGS: Indicate size, material, and finish. Show locations and installation
procedures. Include details of joints, attachments, and clearances.
B. PRODUCT DATA: Submit schedules, charts, literature, and illustrations to indicate the
performance, fabrication procedures, product variations, and accessories.
1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. DELIVERY: Deliver undamaged materials in the manufacturer's unopened containers
clearly labeled with flame and smoke ratings.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.01 It is the intent of these specifications to secure superior quality workmanship resulting in an
absolutely satisfactory installation of insulation from the standpoint of both function and
appearance. Particular attention shall be given to valves, fittings, pumps, etc., requiring low
temperature insulation to insure full thickness of insulation and proper application of the vapor
seal. All flaps of vapor barrier jackets and/or canvas covering must be neatly and securely
smoothed and sealed down.
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT INSULATION 22 07 16 - 1
Clark Condon Associates
August 2010
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
2.02 The type of insulation and its installation shall be in strict accordance with these specifications for
each service, and the application technique shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. All
insulation types, together with adhesives and finishes shall be submitted and approved before any
insulation is installed.
2.03 A sample quantity of each type insulation and each type application shall be installed and approval
secured prior to proceeding with the main body of the work. Condensation caused by improper
installation of insulation shall be corrected by Installing Contractor. Any damage caused by
condensation shall be made good at no cost to the Owner or Architect/Engineer.
2.04 Glass fiber materials as manufactured by Owens/Corning, PPG, CSG, or Johns Manville will be
acceptable, if they comply with the specifications.
2.05 All insulation shall have composite (insulation, jacket or facing, and adhesive used to adhere the
facing or jacket to insulation) fire and smoke hazard as tested by Procedure ASTM E084, NFPA
255 and UL 723 not exceeding:
Flame Spread 25
Smoke Developed 50
2.06 Accessories, such as adhesives, mastics and cements shall have the same component ratings as
listed above.
2.07 All products or their shipping cartons shall have a label affixed, indicating flame and smoke ratings
do not exceed the above requirements.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 All insulation shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations and
printed installation instructions.
3.02 All items required for a complete and proper installation are not necessarily indicated on the plans
or in the specifications. Provide all items required as per manufacturers requirements.
END OF SECTION
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT INSULATION 22 07 16 - 2
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Park
SECTION 22 07 19 — PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all
work herein.
B. The Basic Materials and Methods, Section 22 02 00, are included as a part of this Section
as though written in full in this document.
1.02 SCOPE
A. Scope of the Work shall include the furnishing and complete installation of the equipment
covered by this Section, with all auxiliaries, ready for owner's use.
B. Furnish and install piping insulation to:
1. Interior domestic hot and cold water piping.
2. Exterior domestic cold water piping.
3. Drain bodies and horizontal downspouts.
4. Condensate drainage piping.
5. All pipes subject to freezing conditions shall be insulated.
C. Work specified elsewhere.
1. Painting.
2. Pipe hangers and supports.
D. For insulation purpose piping is defined as the complete piping system including supplies
and returns, pipes, valves, automatic control valve bodies, fittings, flanges, strainers,
thermometer well, unions, reducing stations, and orifice assemblies.
1.03 WARRANTY
A. Warrant the Work specified herein for one year against becoming unserviceable or
causing an objectionable appearance resulting from either defective or nonconforming
materials or workmanship.
B. Defects shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
1. Mildewing.
2. Peeling, cracking, and blistering.
3. Condensation on exterior surfaces.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. SHOP DRAWINGS: Indicate size, material, and finish. Show locations and installation
procedures. Include details of joints, attachments, and clearances.
B. PRODUCT DATA: Submit schedules, charts, literature, and illustrations to indicate the
performance, fabrication procedures, project variations, and accessories.
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 22 07 19 - 1
Clark Condon Associates
August 2010
1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
A. DELIVERY: Deliver undamaged materials in the manufacturer's unopened containers.
Containers shall be clearly labeled with the insulation's flame and smoke ratings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 It is the intent of these specifications to secure superior quality workmanship resulting in an
absolutely satisfactory installation of insulation from the standpoint of both function and
appearance. Particular attention shall be given to valves, fittings, pumps, etc., requiring low
temperature insulation to insure full thickness of insulation and proper application of the vapor
seal. All flaps of vapor barrier jackets and/or canvas covering must be neatly and securely
smoothed and sealed down.
2.02 The type of insulation and its installation shall be in strict accordance with these specifications for
each service, and the application technique shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. All
insulation types, together with adhesives and finishes shall be submitted and approved prior to
installation.
2.03 A sample quantity of each type of insulation and each type application shall be installed and
approval secured prior to proceeding with the main body of the work. Condensation caused by
improper installation of insulation shall be corrected by Installing Contractor. Any damage caused
by condensation shall be made good at no cost to the Owner or Architect/Engineer.
2.04 All insulation shall have composite (insulation, jacket or facing, and adhesive used to adhere the
facing or jacket to insulation) fire and smoke hazard as tested by Procedure ASTM E084, NFPA
255 and UL 723 not exceeding:
Flame Spread 25
Smoke Developed 50
2.05 Accessories, such as adhesives, mastics and cements shall have the same component ratings as
listed above.
2.06 All products or their shipping cartons shall have a label affixed, indicating flame and smoke ratings
do not exceed the above requirements.
2.07 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
A. Calcium silicate materials shall be as manufactured by Johns Manville.
B. Glass fiber materials shall be as manufactured by Johns Manville or Owens-Corning and
shall have the same thermal properties, density, fire rating, vapor barrier, etc., as the
types specified herein, subject to review by the Engineer.
C. Adhesives shall be as manufactured by Childers, Foster, HB Fuller or Armstrong, and
shall have the same adhesive properties, fire rating, vapor seal, etc., as the types
specified herein, subject to review by the Engineer.
D. Armaflex elastomeric cellular thermal insulation by Armstrong.
E. Phenolic foam insulation shall be as manufactured by Kooltherm Insulation (Koolphen).
F. Metal jacketing and fitting covers shall be as manufactured by Childers or RPR Products.
2.08 MATERIALS
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 22 07 19 - 2
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
August 2010 Festival Park
A. INTERIOR DOMESTIC WATER PIPE: provide fiberglass pipe insulation with all service
jackets with self sealing lap joint.
B. EXTERIOR DOMESTIC WATER PIPE: Provide elastomeric cellular thermal, or
preformed phenolic foam pipe insulation with secured metal jacketing.
C. DRAIN BODIES AND DOWN SPOUTS: Insulate horizontal roof drain down spouts,
underside of roof drain bodies, chilled water waste lines from drinking fountain to junction
with main waste stacks, and branch lines including traps and exposed underside of floor
drains receiving cooling coil condensate, same as water piping where exposed to building
occupant view. When concealed, insulation may be same as specified for external duct
wrap.
D. CONDENSATE DRAINAGE PIPING: Fire resistant fiberglass insulation; insulation not
required when piping is exposed on roof.
E. METAL JACKETING: Utilize Childers "Strap -On" jacketing. Provide preformed fitting
covers for all elbows and tees.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 All insulation shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations and
printed installation instructions, including high density inserts at all hangers and pipe supports to
prevent compression of insulation.
3.02 All items required for a complete and proper installation are not necessarily indicated on the plans
or in the specifications. Provide all items required as per manufacturers requirements.
3.03 Pipes located outdoors or in tunnels shall be insulated same as concealed piping; and in addition
shall have a jacket of 0.016 inch thick, smooth aluminum with longitudinal modified Pittsburg Z-
Lock seam and 2 inch overlap. Jacketing shall be easily removed and replaced without damage.
All butt joints shall be sealed with gray silicone. Galvanized banding is not acceptable.
3.04 All insulated piping located over driveways shall have an aluminum shield permanently banded
over insulation to protect it from damage from car antennas.
3.05 WATER PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. The insulation shall be applied to clean, dry pipes with all joints firmly butted together.
Where piping is interrupted by fittings, flanges, valves or hangers and at intervals not to
exceed 25 feet on straight runs, an isolating seal shall be formed between the vapor
barrier jacket and the bare pipe. The seal shall be by the applications of adhesive to the
exposed insulation joint faces, carried continuously down to and along 4 inches of pipe
and up to and along 2 inches of jacket.
B. Pipe fittings and valves shall be insulated with pre -molded or shop fabricated glass fiber
covers finished with two brush coats of vapor barrier mastic reinforced with glass fabric.
C. All under lap surfaces shall be clean and free of dust, etc. before the SSL is sealed.
These laps shall be firmly rubbed to insure a positive seal. A brush coat of vapor retarder
shall be applied to all edges of the vapor barrier jacket.
3.06 FIRE RATED INSULATION
A. All pipe penetrations through walls and concrete floors shall be fire rated by applying USG
Thermafiber in the space between the concrete and the pipe.
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 22 07 19 - 3
Clark Condon Associates
August 2010
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
B. The fire rating shall be additionally sealed by using 3M brand model CP 25 or 303 fire
barrier caulk and putty.
C. All fire rating material shall be insulated in accordance with manufacturer's printed
instructions.
PART 4 - SCHEDULES
4.01 LOW TEMPERATURE SURFACES MINIMUM INSULATION THICKNESS
A. Exposed exterior domestic water pipe:
B. Interior domestic cold water pipe
exposed to freezing temperatures:
C. Condensate drain lines:
D. Drains receiving condensate:
E. Concealed horizontal leader from roof drain:
Exposed horizontal leader from roof drain:
4.02 HIGH TEMPERATURE SURFACES
A. Hot Water Piping:
BASED ON FIBERGLASS
V/z inch
1 inch
3/. inch
1 inch
1'/2 inch blanket wrap
1 inch thick rigid with
all service jackets
MINIMUM INSULATION
THICKNESS
(1) Operating temperature 105°F or less: 1 inch
(2) Operating temperature higher than 1050F 1 inch
and pipe size 1'/z inch or smaller
(3) Operating temperature higher than 1050F 2 inch
and pipe size more than 1'/2 inch
B. Domestic Hot Water and Hot Water Circulating Piping 1 inch
END OF SECTION
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 22 07 19 - 4
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
SECTION 22 10 00 - PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Pipe and pipe fittings.
B. Valves.
C. Sanitary sewer piping system.
D. Storm water piping system.
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
E. Domestic water piping system.
F. Excavation and backfill.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 22 05 29 — Hangers and Support for Plumbing Piping and Equipment.
B. Section 22 05 53 — Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment.
C. Section 22 07 19 — Plumbing Piping Insulation.
D. Section 22 11 19 - Plumbing Specialties.
E. Section 22 30 00 - Plumbing Equipment.
F. Section 22 40 00 - Plumbing Fixtures.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ANSI B31.1 - Power Piping.
B. ANSI B31.9 - Building Service Piping.
C. ASME - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
D. ASME Sec. 9 - Welding and Brazing Qualifications.
E. ASME B16.1 - Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings Class 25,125, 250 and 800.
F. ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings.
G. ASME B16.4 - Cast Iron Threaded Fittings Class 125 and 250.
H. ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Bronze Solder -Joint Pressure Fittings
I. ASTM A47 - Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings.
J. ASTM A53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot -Dipped Zinc Coated, Welded and Seamless.
K. ASTM A74 - Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings.
PLUMBING PIPING 22 10 00 - 1
Clark Condon Associates
August 2010
L. ASTM B32 - Solder Metal.
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
M. ASTM B42 - Seamless Copper Pipe.
N. ASTM B306 - Copper Drainage Tube (DWV).
O. ASTM D1785 - Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedule 40, 80, and 120.
P. ASTM D2241 - Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe (SDR-PR).
Q. ASTM D2466 - Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40.
R. ASTM D2564 - Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings.
S. ASTM D2729 - Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings.
T. ASTM D2846 - Chlorinated Polyvinyl Chloride (CPVC) Pipe, Fittings, Solvent Cements and
Adhesives for Potable Hot Water Systems.
U. ASTM F493 - Solvent Cements for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe and
Fittings.
V. AWWA C111- Rubber -Gasket Joints for Ductile Iron and Gray -Iron Pressure Pipe and
Fittings.
W. AWWA C651 - Disinfecting Water Mains.
X. CISPI 301 - Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Hubless Cast Iron Sanitary Systems.
Y. CISPI 310 - Joints for Hubless Cast Iron Sanitary Systems.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Division One.
B. Product Data: Provide data on pipe materials, Pipe fittings, valves, and accessories. Provide
manufacturers catalog information. Indicate valve data and ratings.
1.05 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Submit under provisions of Division One.
B. Record actual locations of valves.
1.06 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit under provisions of Division One.
B. Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, spare parts lists, exploded assembly
views.
1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating cast or marked on valve body.
PLUMBING PIPING 22 10 00 - 2
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
August 2010 Festival Park
B. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME Code and applicable state labor
regulations.
C. Welders Certification: In accordance with ASME Sec 9.
D. Foreign pipe, fittings or valves are unacceptable.
E. Piping shall be labeled along entire length indicating size, class, material specification,
manufacturers name and country of origin.
1.08 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section
with minimum 5 years documented experience and must be a domestic manufacturer.
B. Installer: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5 years
documented experience.
1.09 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Perform Work in accordance with plumbing and building codes having jurisdiction.
B. Conform to applicable codes for the provision and installation of all required backflow
prevention devices.
C. Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of
installation of backflow prevention devices.
D. No PVC pipe or fittings will be allowed for any areas where pipe is to penetrate a fire rated
assembly or to be installed in a return air plenum unless the entire length of all such piping is
encased within a minimum 2 hour fire rated enclosure.
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Division One.
B. Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage.
C. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves.
D. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until
installation.
E. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing
sections of the work, and isolating parts of completed system. Tape will not be allowed as an
acceptable end cover.
1.11 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish under provisions of Division One.
B. Provide two repacking kits for each size valve.
PLUMBING PIPING 22 10 00 - 3
Clark Condon Associates
August 2010
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
2.01 SANITARY SOIL, WASTE AND VENT PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING, BELOW
GRADE
A. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785/D 2665 schedule 40
1. Fittings: PVC, ASTM D 3311/D 2665 drainage pattern, with bell and spigot ends to
be furnished by the same manufacturer as pipe or approved equal.
2. Joints: solvent weld with ASTM D 2564 solvent cement, clear, medium bodied, for
sizes 3" and smaller and gray, heavy bodied, for sizes 4" and larger, mating surfaces
shall be prepared with ASTM F 656 purple primer immediately prior to cement
application.
2.02 SANITARY SOIL, WASTE AND VENT PIPING, WITHIN BUILDING, ABOVE GRADE
A. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A 888, hubless, service weight.
1. Fittings: Cast iron, ASTM A 888 drainage pattern.
2. Joints: No hub, ASTM C 564 neoprene gaskets with ASTM C1540 wide bodied
stainless steel clamp and solid shield assembly constructed of type 300 series
stainless steel. Couplings shall have four clamps for pipe sizes up to and including 4"
and shall have six clamps for pipe sizes over 4" through 10". Clamp assemblies shall
conform to FM 1680 where required by the administrative authority.
2.03 STORM WATER PIPING, BURIED BEYOND 5 FEET OUTSIDE OF BUILDING
[SELECT ONE]
A. Pipe and fittings shall be same as specified for sanitary piping system.
B. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A 74 service weight.
1. Fittings: Cast iron, ASTM A 74 drainage pattern.
2. Joints: Hub and spigot, ASTM C 564 neoprene, compression type gaskets or lead
and oakum.
[Note: Use PVC SEWER only on case by case basis verify project requirements with project manager]
******
C. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785/D 2665 schedule 40
1. Fittings: PVC, ASTM D 3311/D 2665 drainage pattern, with bell and spigot ends to
be furnished by the same manufacturer as pipe or approved equal.
2. Joints: ASTM D 2855, solvent weld with ASTM D2564 solvent cement.
D. PVC pipe: ASTM D 3034, SDR 35; installed per ASTM D 2321.
PLUMBING PIPING 22 10 00 - 4
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
August 2010 Festival Park
1. Fittings: PVC, drainage pattern, with bell and spigot ends to be furnished by the
same manufacturer as pipe or approved equal.
2. Joints: ASTM F 477 or F 913, elastomeric gaskets or solvent weld.
2.04 STORM WATER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING, BELOW GRADE
[SELECT ONE]
A. Pipe and fittings shall be same as specified for sanitary soil, waste and vent piping system.
B. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A 74 service weight.
1. Fittings: Cast iron, ASTM A 74 drainage pattern.
2. Joints: Hub and spigot, ASTM C 564 neoprene, compression type gaskets or lead
and oakum.
[Note: Use PVC SEWER only on case by case basis verify project requirements with project manager]
******
C. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665/D 1785 schedule 40
1. Fittings: PVC, ASTM D 2665 drainage pattern, with bell and spigot ends to be
furnished by the same manufacturer as pipe or approved equal.
2. Joints: ASTM D 2855, solvent weld with ASTM D 2564 solvent cement.
2.05 STORM WATER PIPING, WITHIN BUILDING, ABOVE GRADE
[SELECT ONE]
A. Pipe and fittings shall be same as specified for sanitary soil, waste and vent piping system.
***OR***
B. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A 74 service weight.
Fittings: Cast iron, ASTM A 74 drainage pattern.
Joints: Hub and spigot, ASTM C 564 neoprene, compression type gaskets or lead
and oakum.
C. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A 888, hubless, service weight.
Fittings: Cast iron, ASTM A 888 drainage pattern.
Joints: No hub,
a. Standard Service (building of two stories in height or less): CISPI 310,
ASTM C 564 neoprene gaskets and standard stainless steel clamp and
solid shield assemblies constructed of type 300 series stainless steel.
b. Heavy duty service (building over two stories and joints 6" and larger only):
CISPI 310, ASTM C 564 neoprene gaskets and wide body stainless steel
clamp and solid shield assemblies constructed of type 300 series stainless
steel.
C. Clamp assemblies shall conform to FM 1680 where required by the
administrative authority.
PLUMBING PIPING 22 10 00 - 5
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
August 2010 Festival Park
d. Torque all clamps as indicated by manufacturer.
***OR***
******
[Note: Use PVC SEWER only on case by case basis confirm project requirements with project
manager]
******
D. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665/D 1785 schedule 40
1. Fittings: PVC, ASTM D 2665 drainage pattern, with bell and spigot ends to be
furnished by the same manufacturer as pipe or approved equal.
Joints: ASTM D 2855, solvent weld with ASTM D 2564 solvent cement.
2.06 DOMESTIC WATER PIPE, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING, BELOW GRADE
A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type K, soft annealed.
1. Fittings: ASME B 16.18, cast bronze, ASTM B 16.22 wrought copper alloy or ASTM
B 16.26 cast bronze for flared fittings.
2. Joints: Sweat solder or flared. Note: No joints will be permitted in pressure water
pipe below slab on grade. All such piping must be brought up above finished floor
line a minimum of 12" before joining. Exception may be taken when pipe is fully
enclosed in pressure rated sleeve and pre -approved by the Architect and Engineer.
2.07 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING, WITHIN BUILDING, ABOVE GRADE
A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type L, hard drawn.
1. Fittings: ASME B 16.18, cast bronze, or ASTM B 16.22 wrought copper alloy.
2. Joints: ASTM B 32, solder.
2.08 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL
A. This section shall govern for all excavation and soil testing for the construction and laying of
all sewers.
B. Excavation:
1. Excavate trenches for underground piping to the required depth to ensure 2 foot
minimum coverage over piping unless noted otherwise.
2. The bottom of the trench or excavation shall be cut to a uniform grade.
3. Should rock be encountered, excavate 6 inches below grade, fill with bedding
material and temp to existing density.
4. Coordinate alignment of pipe trenches to avoid obstructions. Assure that proposed
routing of pipe will not interfere with building foundation before any trenching has
begun. Should conflicts occur, contact Architect/Engineer before proceeding.
C. Backfill:
Backfill shall not be placed until the work has been inspected, tested and approved.
Complete backfill to the surface of natural ground or to the lines and grades
indicated on drawings. Use 6 inch stabilized sand bed with 4 inch stabilized sand
cover around each pipe and select fill up to finished surface or grade.
PLUMBING PIPING 22 10 00 - 6
Clark Condon Associates
August 2010
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
2. Compacting Backfill: Place material in uniform layers of 8 inches maximum, loose
measure and compact to not less than 95% of maximum soil density as determined
by ASTM D-698 Standard Proctor.
3. Restoration: Compact backfill , where trenching or excavation is required in
improved areas such as pavements, walks and similar areas, to a condition equal to
the adjacent undisturbed earth and restore surface of the area to the condition
existing prior to trenching or excavating operation.
4. A clay fill "trench plug" extending 3 feet inside the building line and 5 feet outside the
building line shall be placed to completely surround utility lines passing beneath the
foundation and grade beam. The materials shall consist of on -site soils with a
plasticity index (PI) between 30 and 40 percent compacted to at least 95 percent of
the Standard Proctor and maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D-698.
2.09 FLANGES, UNIONS AND COUPLINGS
A. Pipe size 2 inches and under: *
1. Ferrous pipe: ANSI B16.39, 150 psig malleable iron threaded unions.
2. Copper tube and pipe: 150 psig bronze unions with soldered ends.
3. Ferrous pipe: ANSI B16.5, 150 psig forged steel flanges; screwed neck, 1/16" thick
preformed neoprene gaskets.
B. Pipe size 2-1/2 inches and larger:
1. Ferrous pipe: 150 psig forged steel slip-on flanges; weld neck, 1/16" thick preformed
neoprene gaskets.
2. Copper tube and pipe: 150 psig slip-on bronze flanges; 1/16" thick preformed
neoprene gaskets.
C. Dielectric Connections:
1. Pipe size 2 inches and under: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end,
copper solder end, water impervious isolation barrier.
2. Pipe size 2-1/2 inch and larger: flange, connection as above, with water impervious
isolation barrier.
D. Mechanical Couplings:
1. Grooved mechanical pipe couplings, fittings, valves and other grooved components
may be used as an option to soldered or braised methods. Fittings shall be cast of
bronze for copper tubing systems. All grooved components shall be of one domestic
manufacturer, and conform to local code approval and/or as listed by ANSI-B-31, B-
31.3M B-31.9, ASME, UL/ULC, FM, IAPMO OR BOCA. Grooved end manufacturer
to be ISO-9001 certified. Grooved couplings shall meet the requirements of ASTM F-
1476. Manufacturer shall be Victaulic or approved equal.
2.10 BALL VALVES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Nibco No. T-585-70-66
2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products.
a. Crane No. 9303-B
b. Stockham Model S-216BR-1 R-T
C. Grinnell No. 3700-6
PLUMBING PIPING 22 10 00 - 7
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
August 2010 Festival Park
B.
Up to and including 2 Inches: Bronze two 600 PSI piece body full port, stainless steel ball and
stem, Teflon seats and stuffing box ring, lever handle and balancing stops, threaded ends
with union.
C.
Ball valves used for balancing shall have memory stops.
2.11
SWING CHECK VALVES
A.
Manufacturers:
1. Nibco No. T-413-B up to 2-1/2"; F-918 3" and over.
2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products.
a. Crane No. 37 up to 2-1/2"; 372 3" and over.
b. Stockham No. B-319; up to 2-1/2"; G931 3" and over.
C. Grinnell No. 3300 up to 2-1/2"; 6300A 3" and over.
B.
Up to and including 2-1/2 Inches: Bronze swing disc, screwed ends.
C.
Over 2-1/2 Inches: Iron body, bronze trim, swing disc, renewable disc and seat, flanged ends.
Include outside lever and adjustable weight where required for quiet operation.
2.12
SPRING
LOADED (SILENT) CHECK VALVES
A.
Manufacturers:
1. Nibco No. W-910
2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products.
a. Grinnell No. 402
B.
Iron body, bronze trim, stainless steel spring, renewable composition disc, screwed, wafer, or
flanged ends.
2.13
SOLDER
A.
95.5% tin, 4% copper, 0.5% silver.
B.
Lead free, antimony free, zinc -free.
C.
Silvabrite 100, by Engelhard Corporation or approved equal.
PART
3 - EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A.
Coordinate and verify excavations under provisions of Division Two.
B.
Verify that all excavations are to the required grade, dry, and not over -excavated.
3.02
PREPARATION
A.
Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.
B.
Remove scale, oil and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly.
C.
Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.
PLUMBING PIPING 22 10 00 - 8
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
August 2010 Festival Park
D. Install, clean bank sand backfill in trench to a minimum of 6 inches below pipe, and to cover
all piping a minimum of 12 inches above pipe.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install all materials in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions.
B. All exposed sewer and water pipe in toilet rooms or other finished areas of the building shall
be chromium plated.
C. Provide non -conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals.
D. Route piping in orderly manner, parallel and perpendicular to building column grid lines,
t unless indicated otherwise on drawings, and maintain gradients.
E. Install piping to conserve building space and not conflict with other trades or interfere with
intended use of space.
F. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.
G. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or
connected equipment.
H. Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings. Valves
installed beyond reasonable reach shall be provided with chain operator.
Provide access doors where valves and operable fittings are not exposed. Access doors shall
be of approved types set in locations pre -approved by submittal to the Architect.
J. Establish elevations of buried piping outside the building to ensure not less than 2 feet of
cover, or maximum depth of frost penetration, which ever is the greater.
K. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean,
and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding.
L. Provide encasement for and support of utility meters in accordance with requirements of
utility companies.
M. Prepare pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories not pre -finished, ready for finish painting.
N. Excavate in accordance with Division 22.
O. Backfill in accordance with Division 22.
P. Install bell and spigot pipe with bell end upstream.
Q. Maintain uniformity in the installation of piping materials and joining methods. Do not mix
materials types.
R. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.
S. Solder joints shall be wiped clean at each joint, remove excess metal while molten and flux
residue when cooled.
PLUMBING PIPING 22 10 00 - 9
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
August 2010 Festival Park
T. No PVC pipe or fittings will be allowed for any areas where pipe is installed in return air
plenum unless the entire length of all such piping is encased within a minimum 2 hour fire
rated enclosure.
U. Provide minimum 18 gauge copper tracer wire laid six inches directly above all underground
non-metallic pipe.
V. Installations of thermoplastic piping systems shall be in strict conformityto the manufacturers
published instructions. Under ground drainage pipe installations shall be in conformity to
ASTM D 2321.
W. Installation of solvent cement joints for PVC piping shall be in strict conformity to the
requirements outlined in ASTM D 2855.
X. Waste nipple from wall to tapped tee shall be schedule 40 threaded galvanized steel pipe or
brass or copper with threaded adapter.
Y. Provide approved PVC slip by cast iron no hub adaptor at each transition from underground
PVC piping to above ground cast iron pipe using heavy duty wide bodied no hub couplings as
specified elsewhere in this section. Transition shall be made as close as possible to floor for
sanitary DWV piping systems and at test tee "minimum 12 in. A.F.F." for storm drainage
piping. Support vertical cast iron pipe from floor anchors using riser clamp and galvanized all
thread rod as specified in section 15140.
Z. Provide bracing to prevent axial movement for all storm drainage piping above ground floor.
Provide restraints for all drainage piping at al changes in direction and at all diameter
changes greater than two pipe sizes. Braces blocks, rodding and other permanent methods
as prescribed by cast iron soil pipe institute.
AA. All grooved components (couplings, fittings, valves, gaskets and specialties) shall be of one
domestic manufacturer.
BB. Grooved manufacturer shall provide on -site training for contractor's field personnel by a
factory trained representative in the proper use of grooving tools, application of groove, and
product installation. Factory trained representative shall periodically visit the job site and
inspect installation. Contractor shall remove and replace any improperly installed products.
3.04 APPLICATION
A. Install union downstream of all valves at equipment or apparatus connections.
B. Install male adapters each side of threaded valves in copper piped system. Sweat solder
adapters to tube prior to make-up of threaded connections.
C. Install ball valves for shut-off and to isolate all equipment items, distinct parts of systems, or
vertical risers.
D. Each plumbing fixture shall have a shut-off valve on each hot water and cold water supply
line.
E. Each plumbing water rough -in stub out shall be fitted with a shut off valve.
F. Install globe, ball or butterfly valves for throttling, bypass, or balancing (manual flow control)
services.
PLUMBING PIPING 22 10 00 - 10
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
August 2010 Festival Park
G. Ball valves installed in insulated piping shall be fitted with extended lever operators of
sufficient length to raise handle above the insulation jacket material. Where valve is used for
throttling service valve handle shall be equipped with adjustable memory stop device.
H. Provide spring loaded, non -slam, check valves on discharge of water pumps.
3.05 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. All drainage lines in the building shall have 1/4 inch to the foot fall where possible and not
less than 1/8 inch to the foot fall toward the main sewer. Pipe must be so laid that the slope
will be uniform and continuous. Permission shall be secured from the Architect and Engineer
before proceeding with any Work where existing conditions prevent the installation at
minimum grade specified.
B. Slope all water piping and arrange to drain at low points. Provide loose key operated,
polished chrome, sill cock flush to wall where fixture stop will not suffice for this requirement.
3.06 DISINFECTION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM
A. Prior to starting work, all domestic water systems shall be complete, thoroughly flushed clean
and free of all foreign matter or erection residue.
B. Ensure PH of water to be treated is between 7.4 and 7.6 by adding alkali (caustic soda or
soda ash) or acid (hydrochloric).
C. On building side of the main shut off valve, provide a 3/4" connection through which chlorine
can be introduced into the water piping
D. Inject disinfectant, free chlorine in liquid, powder, tablet or gas form, in sufficient quantity to
obtain 50 to 80 mg/L residual free chlorine solution throughout the entire domestic water
piping systems.
E. Bleed water from outlets as required to ensure complete distribution and test for disinfectant
residual at a minimum 15 percent of total outlets.
F. Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours.
G. If final disinfectant residual tests less than 25 mg/L, repeat treatment.
H. Flush disinfectant from system until residual equal to that of incoming water or 1.0 mg/L.
Take samples no sooner than 24 hours after flushing, from 5 percent of outlets and from
water entry, and analyze in accordance with AWWA C651.
3.07 SERVICE CONNECTIONS
A. Provide new sanitary and storm sewer services connecting to existing building services or
utility lines as shown on the drawings.
B. Before commencing work, field verify invert elevations required for sewer connections,
confirm inverts and ensure that these can be properly connected with slope for drainage and
cover as required.
C. Provide new domestic water service connecting to existing building services or utility lines as
shown on plans. Assure connections are in compliance with requirements of the jurisdiction
having authority.
PLUMBING PIPING 22 10 00 - 11
Clark Condon Associates
August 2010
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
D. Extension of services to the building shall be fabricated from the same materials as the utility
service lines or those materials specified herein.
E. Should points of connection vary from those indicated on the drawings contractor shall
properly allow for this in the actual connections field fabricated.
3.08 RODDING SEWERS
A. All sanitary soil and waste lines, both in the building and out, shall be rodded out after
completion of the installation.
B. This Work shall be done, as part of the contract, to make certain that all lines are clear, and
any obstruction that may be discovered shall be removed immediately. Rodding shall be
accomplished by utilizing a rotary cutter, which shall be full size of pipe being cleaned.
3.09 TESTING OF PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEMS
A. During the progress of the work and upon completion, tests shall be made as specified herein
and as required by Authorities Having Jurisdiction, including Inspectors, Owner or Architect.
The Architect or duly authorized Construction Inspector shall be notified in writing at least 2
working days prior to each test or other Specification requirement which requires action on
the part of the Construction Inspector.
B. Tests shall be conducted as part of this work and shall include all necessary instruments,
equipment, apparatus, and service as required to perform the tests with qualified personnel.
Submit proposed test procedures, recording forms, and test equipment for approval prior to
the execution of testing.
C. Tests shall be performed before piping of various systems have been covered or furred -in.
For insulated piping systems testing shall be accomplished prior to the application of
insulation.
D. All piping systems shall be tested and proved absolutely tight for a period of not less than 24
hours. Tests shall be witnessed by the Architect or an authorized representative and
pronounced satisfactory before pressure is removed or any water drawn off.
E. Leaks, damage or defects discovered or resulting from test shall be repaired or replaced to a
like new condition. Leaking pipe joints, or defective pipe, shall be removed and replaced with
acceptable materials. Test shall be repeated after repairs are completed and shall continue
until such time as the entire test period expires without the discovery of any leaks.
F. Wherever conditions permit, each piping system shall thereafter be subjected to its normal
operating pressure and temperature for a period of no less than five 5 days. During that
period, it shall be kept under the most careful observation. The piping systems must
demonstrate the propriety of their installation by remaining absolutely tight during this period.
G. Domestic Water:
Pressure test at one and one half times the normal working pressure or 125 psig,
which ever is the greater, for 24 hours.
H. Sanitary Soil, Waste and Vents and Storm Sewer:
After the rough -in soil, waste and vent and other parts of the sanitary sewer including
branch laterals have been set from the lowest level, at point of connection to existing
utility lines, to above the floor line, all outlets shall be temporarily plugged or capped,
except as are required for testing as described herein. Ground work shall not permit
PLUMBING PIPING 22 10 00 - 12
Clark Condon Associates
August 2010
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
the backfill of trenches to cover any joints until the completion of testing. Back fill
shall be limited to mid sections of full joints of piping only. For pipe in ground the
piping shall be readied as described herein and filled with water to a verifiable and
visible level to 10' above the lowest portions of the system being tested.
2. On multi -level buildings only one floor level shall be tested at a time. Each floor shall
be tested from a level below the structure of the floor, or the outlet of the building in
the case of the lowest level, to a level of 12 inches above the floor immediately
above the floor being tested, or the top of the highest vent in the case of the highest
building level. The pipes for the level being tested shall be filled with water to a
verifiable and visible level as described above and be allowed to remain so for 24
hours. If after 24 hours the level of the water has been lowered by leakage, the leaks
must be found and stopped, and the water level shall again be raised to the level
described, and the test repeated until, after a 24 hour retention period, there shall be
no perceptible lowering of the water level in the system being tested.
3. Should the completion of these tests leave any reasonable question or doubt of the
integrity of the installation, additional tests including peppermint smoke, or other
measures shall be performed to demonstrate the reliability of these systems to the
complete satisfaction of the Owner's duly authorized representative. Such tests shall
be conducted and completed before any joints in plumbing are concealed or made
inaccessible.
3.10 COMPLETE FUNCTIONING OF WORK
A. All work fairly implied as essential to the complete functioning of the systems shown on the
Drawings and Specification shall be completed as part of the work of this Division unless
specifically stated otherwise. It is the intention of the Drawings and Specification to establish
the type and function of systems but not to set forth each item essential to the functioning of
any system. In case of doubt as to the work intended or in the event of amplification or
clarification thereof, the Contractor shall call upon the Architect for Supplementary
Instructions and Drawings, etc.
END OF SECTION
PLUMBING PIPING 22 10 00 - 13
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010
Festival Park
SECTION 22 11
19 - PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A.
Roof and floor drains.
B.
Cleanouts.
C.
Backflow preventors.
D.
Water hammer arrestors.
E.
Thermostatic mixing valves.
F.
Hose bibbs hydrants.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A.
Roofing: Roof drains.
B.
Section 22 05 29 — Hangers and Support for Plumbing Piping and Equipment.
C.
Section 22 10 00 - Plumbing Piping.
D.
Section 22 30 00 - Plumbing Equipment.
E.
Section 22 40 00 - Plumbing Fixtures.
1.03 REFERENCES
A.
ANSI/ASSE 1012 - Backflow Preventers with Immediate Atmospheric Vent.
B.
ANSI/ASSE 1011 - Hose Connection Vacuum Breakers.
C.
ANSI/ASSE 1013 - Backflow Preventers, Reduced Pressure Principle.
D.
ANSI/ASSE 1019 - Wall Hydrants, Frost Proof Automatic Draining Anti-Backflow Types.
E.
ANSI Al12.21.1 - Floor Drains.
F.
ANSI Al 12.21.2 - Roof Drains.
G.
ANSI Al 12.26.1 - Water Hammer Arresters.
H.
PDI WH-201 Water Hammer Arresters
I.
AWWA C506 - Backflow Prevention Devices - Reduced Pressure Principle and Double
Check Valve Types.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer: For each product specified, provide components by same manufacturer
throughout.
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 2211 19 - 1
Clark Condon Associates
August 2010
1.05 SUBMITTALS
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
A.
Submit under provisions of Division One.
B.
Submit [shop drawings and] product data under provisions of Division One.
C.
Include component sizes, rough -in requirements, service sizes, and finishes.
D.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate assembly and support requirements.
1.06
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A.
Submit under provisions of Division One.
B.
Record actual locations of equipment, cleanouts, and backflow preventers.
1.07
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A.
Submit under provisions of Division One.
B.
Operation Data: Indicate frequency of treatment required for interceptors.
C.
Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, spare parts lists, exploded assembly
views.
1.08
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Division One.
B.
Accept specialties on site in original factory packaging. Inspect for damage.
1.09
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Furnish under provisions of Division One.
B.
Provide two loose keys for hose bibbs and spare hose end vacuum breakers.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.01
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - ROOF DRAINS
A.
J.R. Smith.
B.
Zurn.
C.
Mifab.
D.
Substitutions: Under provisions of Division One.
E.
Roof Drains
1. Roof Drains: ANSI All 12.21.2; Galvanized cast iron body with sump, removable cast
aluminum dome strainer, membrane flange and membrane clamp with integral
gravel stop, with adjustable underdeck clamp roof sump receiver waterproofing
flange controlled flow weir leveling frame adjustable extension sleeve (for insulation)
perforated or slotted ballast guard extension for inverted roof.
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 2211 19 - 2
Clark Condon Associates
August 2010
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
2. Roof Overflow Drains (OD): Galvanized cast iron body and clamp collar and bottom
clamp ring; pipe extended to 2 inches above flood elevation.
2.02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - CLEANOUTS
A. J.R. Smith
B. Zurn.
C. Mifab.
D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division One.
E. Ceeanouts
1. Exterior Surfaced Areas: Square cast nickel bronze access frame and non-skid
cover.
2. Exterior Unsurfaced Areas: Line type with lacquered cast iron body and round epoxy
coated gasketted cover.
3. Interior Finished Floor Areas: Galvanized cast iron, two piece body with double
drainage flange, weep holes, reversible clamping collar, and adjustable
nickel -bronze strainer, round with scoriated cover in service areas and round with
depressed cover to accept floor finish in finished floor areas.
4. Interior Finished Wall Areas: Line type with lacquered cast iron body and round
epoxy coated gasketted cover, and round stainless steel access cover secured with
machine screw.
5. Interior Unfinished Accessible Areas: Calked or threaded type. Provide bolted stack
cleanouts on vertical rainwater leaders.
2.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - HOSE BIBBS/HYDRANTS
A. Woodford.
B. Zurn.
C. Mifab.
D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division One.
E. HOSE BIBBS/HYDRANTS
1. Bronze or brass, replaceable hexagonal disc, hose thread spout, [chrome plated
where exposed] to interior and [to exterior] with lockshield and removable key,
integral vacuum breaker in conformance with ANSI/ASSE 1011.
2. Wall Hydrant: ANSI/ASSE 1019; non -freeze, self -draining type with chrome plated
lockable recessed box hose thread spout, lockshield and removable key, and
vacuum breaker.
3. Floor Hydrant: ANSI/ASSE 1019; chrome plated lockable recessed box, hose thread
spout, lockshield and removable key, and vacuum breaker.
2.04 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - BACKFLOW PREVENTORS
A. Watts.
B. Wilkins.
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 2211 19 - 3
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
August 2010 Festival Park
C. Ames.
D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division One.
E. BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
1. Reduced Pressure Backflow Preventers: ANSI/ASSE 1013; bronze bodywith bronze
and plastic internal parts and stainless steel springs; two independently operating,
spring loaded check valves; diaphragm type differential pressure relief valve located
between check valves; third check valve which opens under back pressure in case
of diaphragm failure; non -threaded vent outlet; assembled with two gate valves,
strainer, and four test cocks.
2. Double Check Valve Assemblies: ANSI/ASSE 1012; Bronze body with corrosion
resistant internal parts and stainless steel springs; two independently operating
check valves with intermediate atmospheric vent.
2.05 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS
A. P.P.P.
B. J.R. Smith.
C. Zurn.
D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division One.
E. WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS
1. ANSI All 12.26.1; sized in accordance with PDI WH-201, precharged suitable for
operation in temperature range -100 to 300 degrees F (-73 to 149 degrees C) and
maximum 250 psig (1700 kPa) working pressure.
2.06 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVES
A. Powers.
B. Leonard.
C. Symmons.
D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division One.
E. Thermostatic Mixing Valves
1. Provide thermostatic mixing valve, with check valve, volume control shut-off valve on
outlet, stem type thermometer on outlet, strainer stop check on inlet, mounted in
lockable cabinet of 16 gage (1.5 mm) prime coated steel.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate cutting forming of roof floor construction to receive drains to required invert
elevations.
3.02 INSTALLATION AND APPLICATION
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 2211 19 - 4
Clark Condon Associates
August 2010
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
A. Install specialties in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to permit intended
performance.
B. Extend cleanouts to finished floor or wall surface. Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs with
mixture of graphite and linseed oil. Ensure clearance at cleanout for rodding of drainage
system.
C. Encase exterior cleanouts in concrete flush with grade.
D. Pipe relief from back flow preventer to nearest drain.
END OF SECTION
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 2211 19 - 5
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010
Festival Park
SECTION 22 30
00 - PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Water Heaters.
B.
Water softeners.
C.
In -line circulator pumps.
D.
Sump Pumps
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 22 05 29 — Hangers and Support for Plumbing Piping and Equipment.
B.
Section 22 10 00 - Plumbing Piping.
C.
Section 22 11 19 - Plumbing Specialties.
D.
Section 26 05 19 - Wire, Cable, and Related Materials.
1.03 REFERENCES
A.
ANSI/ASHRAE 90A - Energy Conservation in New Building Design.
B.
ASME Section VIIID - Pressure Vessels; Boiler and Pressure Vessel Codes.
C.
ANSI/NFPA 54 - National Fuel Gas Code.
D.
ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
E.
ANSI/UL 1453 - Electric Booster and Commercial Storage Tank Water Heaters.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit under provisions of Division One.
B.
Shop Drawings:
1. Include heat exchanger dimensions. size of tappings, and performance data.
2. Include dimensions of tanks, tank lining methods, anchors, attachments, lifting
points, tappings, and drains.
C.
Product Data:
1. Include dimension drawings of water heaters indicating components and
connections to other equipment and piping.
2. Indicate pump type, capacity, power requirements, and affected adjacent
construction.
3. Submit certified pump curves showing pump performance characteristics with
pump and system operating point plotted. Include NPSH curve when applicable.
4. Provide electrical characteristics and connection requirements.
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 22 30 00 - 1
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
August 2010 Festival Park
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions.
1.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit under provisions of Division 22.
B. Include operation, maintenance, and inspection data, replacement part numbers and
availability, and service depot location and telephone number.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Provide pumps with manufacturer's name, model number, and rating/capacity identified.
C. Ensure products and installation of specified products are in conformance with
recommendations and requirements of the following organizations:
1. American Gas Association (AGA).
2. National Sanitation Foundation (NSF).
3. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME).
4. National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors (NBBPVI).
5. National Electrical Manufacturers' Association (NEMA).
6. Underwriters Laboratories (UL).
D. Ensure pumps operate at specified system fluid temperatures without vapor binding and
cavitation, are non -overloading in parallel or individual operation, operate within 25
percent of midpoint of published maximum efficiency curve.
1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to AGA NSF ANSI/NFPA 54 ANSI/NFPA 70 ANSI/UL 1453 requirements for
water heaters.
B. Conform to ASME Section VIIID for manufacture of pressure vessels for heat
exchangers.
1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section Division
One.
B. Provide temporary inlet and outlet caps. Maintain caps in place until installation.
1.09 WARRANTY
A. Provide five year warranty under provisions of Division One.
B. Warranty: Include coverage of domestic water heaters, water storage tanks, and
- - packaged water heating systems.
1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish under provisions of Division One.
B. Provide two sets of electric heater elements.
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 22 30 00 - 2
Clark Condon Associates
August 2010
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.01 COMMERCIAL ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. A.O. Smith
2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products.
a. Lochinvar
b. Rheem.
C. PVI.
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
B. Type: Factory -assembled and wired, electric, vertical storage.
C. Tank: Glass lined welded steel; 4 inch diameter inspection port, thermally insulated with
minimum 2 inches glass fiber encased in corrosion -resistant steel jacket; baked -on
enamel finish.
D. Controls: Automatic immersion water thermostat; externally adjustable temperature range
from 60 to 180 degrees F (16 to 82 degrees C), flanged or screw -in nichrome elements,
high temperature limit thermostat.
E. Accessories: Brass water connections and dip tube, drain valve, high -density magnesium
anode, and ASME rated temperature and pressure relief valve.
2.02 IN -LINE CIRCULATOR PUMPS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Bell & Gossett.
2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products.
a. TACO.
b. Grundfos.
B. Casing: Bronze, rated for 125 psig working pressure.
C. Impeller: Bronze.
D. Shaft: Alloy steel with integral thrust collar and two oil lubricated bronze sleeve bearings.
E. Seal: Carbon rotating against a stationary ceramic seat.
F. Drive: Flexible coupling.
2.03 [SUMP PUMPS] [SEWAGE EJECTORS]
A. Manufacturers:
1. Weil.
2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products.
a. Aurora.
b. Chicago.
B. Type: Vertical centrifugal, direct connected, duplex arrangement. Motor and controls shall
be mounted on integral steel frame 2'- 0" minimum above finished floor level.
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 22 30 00 - 3
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
August 2010 Festival Park
C. Casing: Cast iron volute with radial clearance around impeller, inlet strainer, slide away
couplings.
D. Impeller: Bronze; open non -clog, keyed to stainless steel shaft.
E. Support: Cast iron pedestal motor support on steel floor plate with gas tight gaskets.
Provide means to remove each pump separately without removing large gas tight cover.
F. Bearings: Forced grease lubricated bronze sleeve spaced maximum 48 inches and
grease lubricated ball thrust at floor plate.
G. Drive: Flexible coupling to vertical, solid shaft ball bearing electric motor.
H. Sump: Gas tight steel cover plate with steel curb frame for grouting into concrete sump
with inspection opening and cover, alarm fittings and opening for a vent.
Controls (Duplex): Float operated mechanical alternator with float rod, stops, and
corrosion resistant float to alternate operation of pumps, cut -in second pump on rising
level or lead pump failure, separate pressure switch high level alarm with transformer,
alarm bell, and standpipe, and extra set of wired terminals for remote alarm circuit and
emergency float switch with float rod, stops, and corrosion resistant float to operate both
pumps on failure of alternator.
2.04 SUBMERSIBLE [SUMP PUMPS] [SEWAGE EJECTORS]
A. Manufacturers:
1. Weil.
2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products.
a. Aurora.
b. Chicago
B. Type: Completely submersible vertical centrifugal. -
C. Casing: [Bronze] [Cast iron] pump body and oil filled motor chamber totally enclosed.
D. Impeller: Bronze; closed, stainless steel shaft.
E. Bearings: Ball bearings.
F. Accessories: Oil resistant 6 foot cord and plug with three -prong connector for connection
to electric wiring system including grounding connector. Gas tight steel cover with
openings for discharge piping, float rods, conduit and an accessible manhole cover.
G. Servicing: Slide -away coupling consisting of discharge elbow secure to sump floor,
movable bracket, guide pipe system, lifting chain and chain hooks. Design shall permit
removal of motor -shaft -impeller assembly without disconnecting piping or removing pump
casing from the basin.
H. Motor control panel containing across -the -line electric motor starters with ambient
compensated quick trip overloads in each phase with manual trip button and reset button,
circuit breaker, control transformer, electro mechanical alternator, hand -off -automatic
selector switches, pilot lights, high water alarm pilot light, reset button and alarm horn.
Provide mercury switch liquid level controls, steel shell switch encased in polyurethane
foam with cast iron weight for pump on (each pump), pump off (common), and alarm.
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 22 30 00 - 4
Clark Condon Associates
August 2010
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 WATER HEATER INSTALLATION
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
A. Install water heaters in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and to AGA NSF
ANSI/NFPA 54 UL requirements.
B. Coordinate with plumbing piping and related work to achieve operating system.
3.02 PUMP INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Ensure shaft length allows sump pumps to be located minimum 24 inches below lowest
invert into sump pit and minimum 6 inches clearance from bottom of sump pit.
C. Provide air cock and drain connection on horizontal pump casings.
D. Provide line sized isolating valve and strainer on suction and line sized soft seated check
valve and balancing valve on discharge.
E. Decrease from line size with long radius reducing elbows or reducers. Support piping
adjacent to pump such that no weight is carried on pump casings. Provide supports under
elbows on pump suction and discharge line sizes 4 inches and over.
F. Ensure pumps operate at specified system fluid temperatures without vapor binding and
cavitation, are non -overloading in parallel or individual operation, and operate within 25
percent of midpoint of published maximum efficiency curve.
G. Align and verify alignment of base mounted pumps prior to start-up.
END OF SECTION
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 22 30 00 - 5
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Park
SECTION 22 40 00 - PLUMBING FIXTURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all work
herein.
B. The Basic Materials and Methods, Section 22 02 00, are included as a part of this Section as
though written in full in this document.
1.02 SCOPE
Scope of the Work shall include the furnishing and complete installation of the equipment covered by
this Section, with all auxiliaries, ready for owner's use.
A. WORK INCLUDED: Include the following Work in addition to items normally part of this
Section:
1. Plumbing fixtures.
2. Drains and cleanouts.
B. WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE:
1. Piping systems.
2. Pipe valves and fittings.
3. Plumbing systems testing.
1.03 WARRANTY
A. Warrant the Work specified herein for one year against becoming unserviceable or causing
an objectionable appearance resulting from either defective or nonconforming materials and
workmanship.
B. Defects shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
1. Noisy operation.
2. Noticeable deterioration of finish.
3. Leakage of water.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. SHOP DRAWINGS: Indicate size, material, and finish. Show locations and installation
procedures. Include details of joints, attachments, and clearances.
B. PRODUCT DATA: Submit schedules, charts, literature, and illustrations to indicate the
performance, fabrication procedures, product variations, and accessories.
C. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS: Provide pre-printed operating and
maintenance instructions for each item specified. Instruct and demonstrate the proper
operation and maintenance to the Owner's designated representative.
1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. DELIVERY: Deliver clearly labeled, undamaged materials in the manufacturers' unopened
PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 40 00 - 1
Clark Condon Associates
August 2010
containers.
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
B. TIMING AND COORDINATION: Deliver materials to allow for minimum storage time at the
project site. Coordinate delivery with the scheduled time of installation.
C. STORAGE: Store materials in a clean, dry location, protected from weather and abuse.
1.06 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings.
B. Confirm and field coordinate that millwork is constructed with adequate provision for the
installation of counter top lavatories and sinks.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. PLUMBING FIXTURES:
1. GENERAL: Provide plumbing fixtures as specified on drawings. The approved equal
products manufacturers are as follows:
a. Water closet, urinals and lavatories: American Standard, Kohler, Eljer.
b. Stainless steel sinks: Elkay, Just and Moen.
C. Mop sinks: Stern -Williams, Fiat
d. Faucets: American Standard, Kohler, Eljer.
e. Faucets: Chicago, T&S Brass, Zurn
f. Faucets: Moen, Speakman
g. Flush Valves: Sloan "Royal'
h. Drinking fountains: Halsey Taylor, Elkay, Haws, Oasis and Sunroc.
i. Floor drains and roof drains: Zurn, J.R. Smith, Mifab, Josam and Wade.
j. Emergency Fixtures: Bradley, Chicago, Haws, Speakman and Encon
k. Trap Primers: PPP inc. (All brass construction). Sioux Chief.
2. CHAIR CARRIERS: ANSI/ASME Al 12.6.1.; Adjustable cast iron frame, integral drain
hub and vent, adjustable spud, lugs for floor and wall attachment, threaded fixture
studs with nuts and washers. As manufactured by Zurn, J. R. Smith, Josam or
Wade.
3. DRINKING FOUNTAIN & URINAL WALL SUPPORTS: ANSI/ASME Al 12.6.1; cast
iron and steel frame with tubular legs, lugs for floor and wall attachment, threaded
fixture studs for fixture hanger, bearing studs. As manufactured by Zurn, J. R. Smith,
Josam or Wade.
4. TRAPS, STOPS AND RISERS: Heavy pattern as manufactured by McGuire,
Chicago or Zurn.
B. CLEANOUTS:
1. GENERAL: Provide cleanouts as shown on Drawings and as required by the city
building code.
2. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: Zurn, J. R. Smith, Mifab, Josam and Wade.
3. TYPES:
a. FINISHED FLOOR CLEANOUTS: Provide cast iron, adjustable floor level
assembly with round nickel bronze top and gasket cover.
b. RESILIENT OR TILE FINISHED FLOOR CLEANOUTS: Provide cast iron,
adjustable assembly with round nickel -bronze top with gasketed water tight
cover and depressed top to receive flooring finish material.
C. DRY WALL CLEANOUTS: Provide cast iron tee and counter sink bronze
PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 40 00 - 2
Clark Condon Associates
August 2010
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
plug with square nickel bronze frame and stainless steel cover.
d. Provide membrane clamp rings for slab on grade cleanouts.
e. All cleanouts shall have tapered bronze plugs.
f. All cleanouts outside of building on grade shall be set in a 18" x 18" x 4"
thick concrete pad.
A. EXAMINATION OF CONDITIONS: Examine conditions affecting this Work. Report
unsatisfactory conditions to the proper authority and do not proceed until those conditions
have been corrected. Commencing Work implies acceptance of existing conditions as
satisfactory to the outcome of this Work.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install fixtures in locations and heights as shown on Drawings or as directed by the Architect.
B. Install materials plumb, level, securely, and in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations.
C. All rough -in pipe openings, for final connections with all supply waste soil and vent systems
shall be closed with caps or plugs during early stages of construction and installation. Tape
shall not be considered sufficient protection.
D. Rough -in fixture piping connections in accordance with minimum sizes indicated in fixture
rough -in schedule for particular fixtures.
E. Provide gate valves in piping serving batteries of fixtures. Label stops "Hot" and "Cold."
Valves to be located above accessible ceiling. If ceiling are not accessible, provide access
panels of adequate size to make valves fully accessible.
F. Plumbing fixtures shall be supported by a concealed chair carrier where required to properly
support the fixture specified. All carriers to be securely mounted, bolted and checked prior to
concealment.
G. Caulk around fixtures with best grade white silicone caulking. Do not use grout.
H. All handles on supply and drainage fittings or other brass items shall be properly lined up and
adjusted. Fittings shall not be left in any haphazard manner.
All fixtures shall have individual chrome plated loose key cutoff stops on supply lines. Where
same are not specified as a part of the fixture trim, they shall be installed as close to fixtures
as possible in the hot and cold water supply.
J. Install each fixture with trap, easily removable for servicing and cleaning.
K. Provide chrome plated rigid or flexible supplies to fixtures with loose key stops, reducers, and
escutcheons.
L. Hot and cold water riser air chambers: Provide air chambers for hot and/or cold water riser
located at the rough -in tee at all fixtures.
The air chamber shall be of the same materials and the next larger diameter than the
required rough -in supply pipe and a minimum of 24" tall.
PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 40 00 - 3
Clark Condon Associates
August 2010
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
The contractor may install water hammer arrestors in lieu of air chambers. Water hammer
arrestors shall be PDI Certified and sized and placed as recommended by manufacture.
Provide an accessible isolation valve and proper access to arrestor for replacement.
3.03 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
A. Review millwork shop drawings. Confirm location and size of fixtures and openings before
rough -in and installation.
3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust work under provisions of Division One.
B. Adjust stops or valves for intended water flow rate to fixtures without splashing, noise, or
overflow.
3.05 CLEANING
A. Clean work under provisions of Division One.
B. At completion clean plumbing fixtures and equipment.
3.06 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. Protect finished Work under provisions of Division One.
B. Do not permit use of fixtures.
3.07 ADA ACCESSIBLE FIXTURES
A. Install fixtures to heights, indicated on architectural drawings.
B. Handicapped fixtures shall be installed to required heights, shall be of types suitable for, and
supplied with controls properly installed, to comply with requirements as directed by ADA
Accessibility of Federal Registry, Part III, Department of Justice 28 CFR 36 and comply with
all state and local ADA Code requirements.
C. Exposed accessible sink or lavatory p-trap and angle valve assemblies shall be insulated with
the fully molded, Truebro, Handi Lav-guard insulation kit. Provide the proper model for
fixtures specified. All kits shall be White or as selected by Architect.
D. Wall mounted drinking fountains and coolers which protrude into passages or corridor space,
whether single or paired with adjacent accessible fixture, shall be supplied with skirt or apron
to lower the underside clearance of non -accessible fixture equal to that required for
accessible fixture.
END OF SECTION
PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 40 00 - 4
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Park
SECTION 23 02 00 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all Work
herein.
B. The Contract Drawings indicate the extent and general arrangement of the systems. If any
departure from the Contract Drawings are deemed necessary by the Contractor, details of
such departures and the reasons therefore, shall be submitted to the Architect for approval
as soon as practicable. No such departures shall be made without the prior written approval
of the Architect.
C. Notwithstanding any reference in the Specifications to any article, device, product, material,
fixture, form or type of construction by name, make or catalog number, such reference shall
not be construed as limiting competition; and the Contractor, in such cases, may at his option
use any article, device, product, material, fixture, form or type of construction which in the
judgment of the Architect, expressed in writing, is equal to that specified.
1.02 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The Work included under this Contract consists of the furnishing and installation of all
equipment and material necessary and required to form the complete and functioning
systems in all of its various phases, all as shown on the accompanying Drawings and/or
described in these Specifications. The contractor shall review all pertinent drawings,
including those of other contracts prior to commencement of Work.
B. This Division requires the furnishing and installing of all items Specified herein, indicated on
the Drawings or reasonably inferred as necessary for safe and proper operation; including
every article, device or accessory (whether or not specifically called for by item) reasonably
necessary to facilitate each system's functioning as indicated by the design and the
equipment specified. Elements of the work include, but are not limited to, materials, labor,
supervision, transportation, storage, equipment, utilities, all required permits, licenses and
inspections. All work performed under this Section shall be in accordance with the Project
Manual, Drawings and Specifications and is subject to the terms and conditions of the
Contract.
C. The approximate locations of Mechanical (HVAC) items are indicated on the Drawings.
These Drawings are not intended to give complete and accurate details in regard to location
of outlets, apparatus, etc. Exact locations are to be determined by actual measurements at
the building, and will in all cases be subject to the Review of the Owner or Engineer, who
reserves the right to make any reasonable changes in the locations indicated without
additional cost to the Owner.
D. Items specifically mentioned in the Specifications but not shown on the Drawings and/or
items shown on Drawings but not specifically mentioned in the Specifications shall be
installed by the Contractor under the appropriate section of work as if they were both
specified and shown.
E. All discrepancies between the Contract Documents and actual job -site conditions shall be
reported to the Owner or Engineer so that they will be resolved prior to the bidding, where this
cannot be done at least 7 working days prior to bid; the greater or more costly of the
discrepancy shall be bid. All labor and materials required to perform the work described shall
be included as part of this Contract.
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 02 00 - 1
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
August 2010 Festival Park
F. It is the intention of this Section of the Specifications to outline minimum requirements to
furnish the Owner with a turn -key and fully operating system in cooperation with other trades.
G. It is the intent of the above "Scope" to give the Contractor a general outline of the extent of
the Work involved; however, it is not intended to include each and every item required for the
Work. Anything omitted from the "Scope" but shown on the Drawings, or specified later, or
necessary for a complete and functioning heating, ventilating and air conditioning system
shall be considered a part of the overall "Scope".
H. The Contractor shall rough -in fixtures and equipment furnished by others from rough -in and
placement drawings furnished by others. The Contractor shall make final connection to
fixtures and equipment furnished by others.
1.03 SCHEMATIC NATURE OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. The contract documents are schematic in nature in that they are only to establish scope and
a minimum level of quality. They are not to be used as actual working construction drawings.
The actual working construction drawings shall be the approved shop drawings.
B. All duct or pipe or equipment locations as indicated on the documents do not indicate every
transition, offset, or exact location. All transitions, offsets clearances and exact locations
shall be established by actual field measurements, coordination with the structural,
architectural and reflected ceiling plans, and other trades. Submit shop drawings for
approval.
C. All transitions, offsets and relocations as required by actual field conditions shall be
performed by the contractor at no additional cost to the owner.
D. Additional coordination with electrical contractor may be required to allow adequate
clearances of electrical equipment, fixtures and associated appurtenances. Contractor to
notify Architect and Engineer of unresolved clearances, conflicts or equipment locations.
1.04 SITE VISIT AND FAMILIARIZATION
A. Before submitting a bid, it will be necessary for each Contractor whose work is involved to
visit the site and ascertain for himself the conditions to be met therein in installing his work
and make due provision for same in his bid. It will be assumed that this Contractor in
submitting his bid has visited the premises and that his bid covers all work necessary to
properly install the equipment shown. Failure on the part of the Contractor to comply with this
requirement shall not be considered justification for the omission or faulty installation of any
work covered by these Specifications and Drawings.
B. Understand the existing utilities from which services will be supplied; verify locations of utility
services, and determine requirements for connections.
C. Determine in advance that equipment and materials proposed for installation fit into the
confines indicated.
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 02 00 - 2
Clark Condon Associates
August 2010
1.05 WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
A. Finish painting is specified. Prime and protective painting are included in the work of this
Division.
B. Owner and General Contractor furnished equipment shall be properly connected to
Mechanical (HVAC) systems.
C. Furnishing and installing all required Mechanical (HVAC) equipment control relays and
electrical interlock devices, conduit, wire and J-boxes are included in the Work of this
Division.
1.06 PERMITS, TESTS, INSPECTIONS
A. Arrange and pay for all permits, fees, tests, and all inspections as required by governmental
authorities.
1.07 DATE OF FINAL ACCEPTANCE
A. The date of final acceptance shall be the date of owner occupancy, or the date all punch list
items have been completed or final payment has been received. Refer to Division One for
additional requirements.
B. The date of final acceptance shall be documented in writing and signed by the architect,
owner and contractor.
1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to the project properly identified with names, model numbers, types, grades,
compliance labels, and other information needed for identification.
B. Deliver products to the project at such time as the project is ready to receive the equipment,
pipe or duct properly protected from incidental damage and weather damage.
C. Damaged equipment, duct or pipe shall be promptly removed from the site and new,
undamaged equipment, pipe and duct shall be installed in its place promptly with no
additional charge to the Owner.
1.09 NOISE AND VIBRATION
A. The heating, ventilating and air conditioning systems, and the component parts there of, shall
be guaranteed to operate without objectionable noise and vibration.
B. Provide foundations, supports and isolators as specified or indicated, properly adjusted to
prevent transmission of vibration to the Building structure, piping and other items.
C. Carefully fabricate ductwork and fittings with smooth interior finish to prevent turbulence and
generation or regeneration of noise.
D. All equipment shall be selected to operate with minimum of noise and vibration. If, in the
opinion of the Architect, objectionable noise or vibration is produced or transmitted to or
through the building structure by equipment, piping, ducts or other parts of the Work, the
Contractor shall rectify such conditions without extra cost to the Owner.
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 02 00 - 3
Clark Condon Associates
August 2010
1.10 APPLICABLE CODES
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
A. Obtain all required permits and inspections for all work required by the Contract Documents
and pay all required fees in connection thereof.
B. Arrange with the serving utility companies for the connection of all required utilities and pay all
charges, meter charges, connection fees and inspection fees, if required.
C. Comply with all applicable codes, specifications, local ordinances, industry standards, utility
company regulations and the applicable requirements which includes and is not limited to the
following nationally accepted codes and standards:
1. Air Moving & Conditioning Association, AMCA.
2. American Standards Association, ASA.
3. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air -Conditioning Engineers, Inc.,
ASHRAE.
4. American Society of Mechanical Engineers, ASME.
5. American Society of Plumbing Engineers, ASPE.
6. American Society of Testing Materials, ASTM.
7. American Water Works Association, AWWA.
8. National Bureau of Standards, NBS.
9. National Fire Protection Association, NFPA.
10. Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association, SMACNA.
11. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., UL.
12. International Energy Conservation Code, IECC.
13. International Fire Code.
14. International Gas Code.
D. Where differences existing between the Contract Documents and applicable state or city
building codes, state and local ordinances, industry standards, utility company regulations
and the applicable requirements of the listed nationally accepted codes and standards, the
more stringent or costly application shall govern. Promptly notify the Engineer in writing of all
differences.
E. When directed in writing by the Engineer, remove all work installed that does not comply with
the Contract Documents and applicable state or city building codes, state and local
ordinances, industry standards, utility company regulations and the applicable requirements
of the above listed nationally accepted codes and standards, correct the deficiencies, and
complete the work at no additional cost to the Owner.
1.11 DEFINITIONS AND SYMBOLS
A. General Explanation: A substantial amount of construction and Specification language
constitutes definitions for terms found in other Contract Documents, including Drawings
which must be recognized as diagrammatic and schematic in nature and not completely
descriptive of requirements indicated thereon. Certain terms used in Contract Documents
are defined generally in this article, unless defined otherwise in Division 1.
B. Definitions and explanations of this Section are not necessarily either complete or exclusive,
but are general for work to the extent not stated more explicitly in another provision of the
Contract Documents.
C. Indicated: The term "Indicated" is a cross-reference to details, notes or schedules on the
Drawings, to other paragraphs or schedules in the Specifications and to similar means of
recording requirements in Contract Documents. Where such terms as "Shown", "Noted",
"Scheduled", "Specified" and "Detailed" are used in lieu of "Indicated", it is for the purpose of
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 02 00 - 4
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
August 2010 Festival Park
helping the reader locate cross-reference material, and no limitation of location is intended
except as specifically shown.
D. Directed: Where not otherwise explained, terms such as "Directed", "Requested",
"Accepted", and "Permitted" mean by the Architect or Engineer. However, no such implied
meaning will be interpreted to extend the Architect's or Engineer's responsibility into the
Contractor's area of construction supervision.
E. Reviewed: Where used in conjunction with the Engineer's response to submittals, requests
for information, applications, inquiries, reports and claims by the Contractor the meaning of
the term "Reviewed" will be held to limitations of Architect's and Engineer's responsibilities
and duties as specified in the General and Supplemental Conditions. In no case will
"Reviewed" by Engineer be interpreted as a release of the Contractor from responsibility to
fulfill the terms and requirements of the Contract Documents.
F. Furnish: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, the term "Furnish" is used to mean
supply and deliver to the project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation,
etc., as applicable in each instance.
G. Install: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, the term "Install" is used to describe
operations at the project site including unloading, unpacking, assembly, erection, placing,
anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protection, cleaning and similar
operations, as applicable in each instance.
H. Provide: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, the term "Provide" is used to mean
"Furnish and Install", complete and ready for intended use, as applicable in each instance.
Installer: Entity (person or firm) engaged by the Contractor or its subcontractor or
Sub -contractor for performance of a particular unit of work at the project site, including
unloading, unpacking, assembly, erection, placing, anchoring, applying, working to
dimension, finishing, curing, protection, cleaning and similar operations, as applicable in each
instance. It is a general requirement that such entities (Installers) be expert in the operations
they are engaged to perform.
J. Imperative Language: Used generally in Specifications. Except as otherwise indicated,
requirements expressed imperatively are to be performed by the Contractor. For clarity of
reading at certain locations, contrasting subjective language is used to describe
responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by the Contractor, or when so noted by other
identified installers or entities.
K. Minimum Quality/Quantity: In every instance, the quality level or quantity shown or specified
is intended as minimum quality level or quantity of work to be performed or provided. Except
as otherwise specifically indicated, the actual work may either comply exactly with that
minimum (within specified tolerances), or may exceed that minimum within reasonable
tolerance limits. In complying with requirements, indicated or scheduled numeric values are
either minimums or maximums as noted or as appropriate for the context of the
requirements. Refer instances of uncertainty to Owner or Engineer via a request for
information (RFI) for decision before proceeding.
L. Abbreviations and Symbols: The language of Specifications and other Contract Documents
including Drawings is of an abbreviated type in certain instances, and implies words and
meanings which will be appropriately interpreted. Actual word abbreviations of a self
explanatory nature have been included in text of Specifications and Drawings. Specific
abbreviations and symbols have been established, principally for lengthy technical
terminology and primarily in conjunction with coordination of Specification requirements with
notations on Drawings and in Schedules. These are frequently defined in Section at first
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 02 00 - 5
Clark Condon Associates
August 2010
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
instance of use or on a Legend and Symbol Drawing. Trade and industry association names
and titles of generally recognized industry standards are frequently abbreviated. Singular
words will be interpreted as plural and plural words will be interpreted as singular where
applicable and where full context of Contract Documents so indicate. Except as otherwise
indicated, graphic symbols and abbreviations used on Drawings and in Specifications are
those recognized in construction industry for indicated purposes. Where not otherwise noted
symbols and abbreviations are defined by 1993 ASHRAE Fundamentals Handbook, chapter
34 "Abbreviations and Symbols", ASME and ASPE published standards.
1.12 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A. These Specifications are intended to supplement the Drawings and it will not be the province
of the Specifications to mention any part of the work which the Drawings are competent to
fully explain in every particular and such omission is not to relieve the Contractor from
carrying out portions indicated on the Drawings only.
B. Should items be required by these Specifications and not indicated on the Drawings, they are
to be supplied even if of such nature that they could have been indicated thereon. In case of
disagreement between Drawings and Specifications, or within either Drawings or
Specifications, the better quality or greater quantity of work shall be estimated and the matter
referred to the Architect or Engineer for review with a request for information and clarification
at least 7 working days prior to bid opening date for issuance of an addendum.
C. The listing of product manufacturers, materials and methods in the various sections of the
Specifications, and indicated on the Drawings, is intended to establish a standard of quality
only. It is not the intention of the Owner or Engineer to discriminate against any product,
material or method that is equal to the standards as indicated and/or specified, nor is it
intended to preclude open, competitive bidding. The fact that a specific manufacturer is listed
as an acceptable manufacturer should not be interpreted to mean that the manufacturers'
standard product will meet the requirements of the project design, Drawings, Specifications
and space constraints.
D. The Architect or Engineer and Owner shall be the sole judge of quality and equivalence of
equipment, materials and methods.
E. Products by other reliable manufacturers, other materials, and other methods, will be
accepted as outlined, provided they have equal capacity, construction, and performance.
However, under no circumstances shall any substitution by made without the written
permission of the Architect or Engineer and Owner. Request for prior approval must be
made in writing 10 days prior to the bid date without fail.
F. Wherever a definite product, material or method is specified and there is not a statement that
another product, material or method will be acceptable, it is the intention of the Owner or
Engineer that the specified product, material or method is the only one that shall be used
without prior approval.
G. Wherever a definite material or manufacturer's product is specified and the Specification
states that products of similar design and equal construction from the specified list of
manufacturers may be substituted, it is the intention of the Owner or Engineer that products
of manufacturers that are specified are the only products that will be acceptable and that
products of other manufacturers will not be considered for substitution without approval.
H. Wherever a definite product, material or method is specified and there is a statement that
"OR EQUAL" product, material or method will be acceptable, it is the intention of the Owner
or Engineer that the specified product, material or method or an "OR EQUAL" product,
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 02 00 - 6
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
August 2010 Festival Park
material or method may be used if it complies with the specifications and is submitted for
review to the Engineer as outline herein.
Where permission to use substituted or alternative equipment on the project is granted by the
Owner or Engineer in writing, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor or Subcontractor
involved to verify that -the equipment will fit in the space available which includes allowances
for all required Code and maintenance clearances, and to coordinate all equipment structural
support, plumbing and electrical requirements and provisions with the Mechanical (HVAC)
Design Documents and all other trades, including Division 26.
Changes in architectural, structural, electrical, mechanical, and plumbing requirements for
the substitution shall be the responsibility of the bidder wishing to make the substitution. This
shall include the cost of redesign by the affected designer(s). Any additional cost incurred by
affected subcontractors shall be the responsibility of this bidder and not the owner.
K. If any request for a substitution of product, material or method is rejected, the Contractor will
automatically be required to furnish the product, material or method named in the
Specifications. Repetitive requests for substitutions will not be considered.
L. The Owner or Engineer will investigate all requests for substitutions when submitted in
accordance with above and if accepted, will issue a letter allowing the substitutions.
M. Where equipment other than that used in the design as specified or shown on the Drawings
is substituted (either from an approved manufacturers list or by submittal review), it shall be
the responsibility of the substituting Contractor to coordinate space requirements, building
provisions and connection requirements with his trades and all other trades and pay all
additional costs to other trades, the Owner, the Architect or Engineer, if any, due to the
substitutions.
1.13 SUBMITTALS
A. Coordinate with Division 1 for submittal timetable requirements, unless noted otherwise within
thirty (30) days after the Contract is awarded the Contractor shall submit a minimum of eight
(8) complete bound sets of shop drawings and complete data covering each item of
equipment or material. The first submittal of each item requiring a submittal must be
received by the Architect or Engineer within the above thirty day period. The Architect or
Engineer shall not be responsible for any delays or costs incurred due to excessive shop
drawing review time for submittals received after the thirty (30) day time limit. The Architect
and Engineer will retain one (1) copy each of all shop drawings for their files. Where full size
drawings are involved, submit one (1) print and one (1) reproducible sepia or mylar in lieu of
eight (8) sets. All literature pertaining to an item subject to Shop Drawing submittal shall be
submitted at one time. A submittal shall not contain information from more than one
Specification section, but may have a section subdivided into items or equipment as listed in
each section. The Contractor may elect to submit each item or type of equipment separately.
Each submittal shall include the following items enclosed in a suitable binder:
1. A cover sheet with the names and addresses of the Project, Architect, MEP
Engineer, General Contractor and the Subcontractor making the submittal. The
cover sheet shall also contain the section number covering the item or items
submitted and the item nomenclature or description.
2. An index page with a listing of all data included in the Submittal.
3. A list of variations page with a listing all variations, including unfurnished or additional
required accessories, items or other features, between the submitted equipment and
the specified equipment. If there are no variations, then this page shall state "NO
VARIATIONS". Where variations affect the work of other Contractors, then the
Contractor shall certify on this page that these variations have been fully coordinated
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 02 00 - 7
Clark Condon Associates
August 2010
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
with the affected Contractors and that all expenses associated with the variations will
be paid by the submitting Contractor. This page will be signed by the submitting
Contractor.
4. Equipment information including manufacturer's name and designation, size,
performance and capacity data as applicable. All applicable Listings, Labels,
Approvals and Standards shall be clearly indicated.
5. Dimensional data and scaled drawings as applicable to show that the submitted
equipment will fit the space available with all required Code and maintenance
clearances clearly indicated and labeled at a minimum scale of 1/4" = V-0", as
required to demonstrate that the alternate or substituted product will fit in the space
available.
6. Identification of each item of material or equipment matching that indicated on the
Drawings.
7. Sufficient pictorial, descriptive and diagrammatic data on each item to show its
conformance with the Drawings and Specifications. Any options or special
requirements or accessories shall be so indicated. All applicable information shall be
clearly indicated with arrows or another approved method.
8. Additional information as required in other Sections of this Division.
9. Certification by the General Contractor and Subcontractor that the material submitted
is in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications, signed and dated in long
hand. Submittals that do not comply with the above requirements shall be returned
to the Contractor and shall be marked "REVISE AND RESUBMIT".
B. Refer to Division 1 for additional information on shop drawings and submittals.
C. Equipment and materials submittals and shop drawings will be reviewed for compliance with
design concept only. It will be assumed that the submitting Contractor has verified that all
items submitted can be installed in the space allotted. Review of shop drawings and
submittals shall not be considered as a verification or guarantee of measurements or building
conditions.
D. Where shop drawings and submittals are marked "REVIEWED", the review of the submittal
does not indicate that submittals have been checked in detail nor does it in any way relieve
the Contractor from his responsibility to furnish material and perform work as required by the
Contract Documents.
E. Shop drawings shall be reviewed and returned to the Contractor with one of the following
categories indicated:
1. REVIEWED: Contractor need take no further submittal action, shall include this
submittal in the O&M manual and may order the equipment submitted on.
2. REVIEWED AS NOTED: Contractor shall submit a letter verifying that required
exceptions to the submittal have been received and complied with including
additional accessories or coordination action as noted, and shall include this
submittal and compliance letter in the O&M manual. The contractor may order the
equipment submitted on at the time of the returned submittal providing the
Contractor complies with the exceptions noted.
3. NOT APPROVED: Contractor shall resubmit new submittal on material, equipment
or method of installation when the alternate or substitute is not approved, the
Contractor will automatically be required to furnish the product, material or method
named in the Specifications and/or drawings. Contractor shall not order equipment
that is not approved. Repetitive requests for substitutions will not be considered.
4. REVISE AND RESUBMIT: Contractor shall resubmit new submittal on material,
equipment or method of installation when the alternate or substitute is marked revise
and resubmit, the Contractor will automatically be required to furnish the product,
material or method named in the Specifications and/or provide as noted on previous
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 02 00 - 8
Clark Condon Associates
August 2010
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
shop drawings. Contractor shall not order equipment marked revise and resubmit.
Repetitive requests for substitutions will not be considered.
5. CONTRACTOR'S CERTIFICATION REQUIRED: Contractor shall resubmit
submittal on material, equipment or method of installation. The Contractor's stamp is
required stating the submittal meets all conditions of the contract documents. The
stamp shall be signed by the General Contractor. The submittal will not be reviewed
if the stamp is not placed and signed on all shop drawings.
6. MANUFACTURER NOT AS SPECIFIED: Contractor shall resubmit new submittal
on material, equipment or method of installation when the alternate or substitute is
marked manufacturer not as specified, the Contractor will automatically be required
to furnish the product, material or method named in the specifications. Contractor
shall not order equipment where submittal is marked manufacturer not as specified.
Repetitive requests for substitutions will not be considered.
F. Materials and equipment which are purchased or installed without shop drawing review shall
be at the risk of the Contractor and the cost for removal and replacement of such materials
and equipment and related work which is judged unsatisfactory by the Owner or Engineer for
any reason shall be at the expense of the Contractor. The responsible Contractor shall
remove the material and equipment noted above and replace with specified equipment or
material at his own expense when directed in writing by the Architect or Engineer.
G. Shop Drawing Submittals shall be complete and checked prior to submission to the Engineer
for review.
H. Submittals are required for, but not limited to, the following items:
1. Basic Materials.
2. Air Handling Units.
3. Air Cooled Condensing Units.
4. Expansion Compensation.
5. Variable Frequency Drives.
6. Noise and Vibration Controls.
7. HVAC Pipe and Duct Insulation.
8. Portable Pipe Hanger and Equipment Supports.
9. Fan Coil Units.
10. Filters.
11. Fans.
12. Temperature Controls and Control Sequences.
13. Coordination Drawings.
Refer to other Division 23 sections for additional shop drawing requirements. Provide
samples of actual materials and/or equipment to be used on the Project upon request of the
Owner or Engineer.
1.14 COORDINATION DRAWINGS
A. Prepare coordination drawings to a scale of 1/4"=V-0" or larger; detailing major elements,
components, and systems of mechanical equipment and materials in relationship with other
systems, installations, and building components. Indicate locations where space is limited for
installation and access and where sequencing and coordination of installations are of
importance to the efficient flow of the Work, including (but not necessarily limited to) the
following:
Indicate the proposed locations of pipe, duct, equipment, and other materials.
Include the following:
a. Wall and type locations.
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 02 00 - 9
Clark Condon Associates
August 2010
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
b. Clearances for installing and maintaining insulation.
C. Locations of light fixtures and sprinkler heads.
d. Clearances for servicing and maintaining equipment, including tube
removal, filter removal, and space for equipment disassembly required for
periodic maintenance.
e. Equipment connections and support details.
f. Exterior wall and foundation penetrations.
g. Routing of storm and sanitary sewer piping.
h. Fire -rated wall and floor penetrations.
i. Sizes and location of required concrete pads and bases.
j. Valve stem movement.
k. Structural floor, wall and roof opening sizes and details.
2. Indicate scheduling, sequencing, movement, and positioning of large equipment into
the building during construction.
3. Prepare floor plans, elevations, and details to indicate penetrations in floors, walls,
and ceilings and their relationship to other penetrations and installations.
4. Prepare reflected ceiling plans to coordinate and integrate installations, air
distribution devices, light fixtures, communication systems components, and other
ceiling -mounted items.
B. This Contractor shall be responsible for coordination of all items that will affect the installation
of the work of this Division. This coordination shall include, but not be limited to: voltage,
ampacity, capacity, electrical and piping connections, space requirements, sequence of
construction, building requirements and special conditions.
C. By submitting shop drawings on the project, this Contractor is indicating that all necessary
coordination has been completed and that the systems, products and equipment submitted
can be installed in the building and will operate as specified and intended, in full coordination
with all other Contractors and Subcontractors.
1.15 RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Prepare record documents in accordance with the requirements in Special Project
Requirements, in addition to the requirements specified in Division 23, indicate the following
installed conditions:
1. Duct mains and branches, size and location, for both exterior and interior; locations
of dampers, fire dampers, duct access panels, and other control devices; filters, fuel
fired heaters, fan coils, condensing units, and roof -top A/C units requiring periodic
maintenance or repair.
2. Mains and branches of piping systems, with valves and control devices located and
numbered, concealed unions located, and with items requiring maintenance located
(i.e., traps, strainers, expansion compensators, tanks, etc.). Valve location
diagrams, complete with valve tag chart. Indicate actual inverts and horizontal
locations of underground piping.
3. Equipment locations (exposed and concealed), dimensioned from prominent building
lines.
4. Approved substitutions, Contract Modifications, and actual equipment and materials
installed.
5. Contract Modifications, actual equipment and materials installed.
B. Engage the services of a Land Surveyor or Professional Engineer registered in the state in
which the project is located as specified herein to record the locations and invert elevations of
underground installations.
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 02 00 - 10
Clark Condon Associates
August 2010
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
C. The Contractor shall maintain a set of clearly marked black line record "AS -BUILT" prints on
the job site on which he shall mark all work details, alterations to meet site conditions and
changes made by "Change Order" notices. These shall be kept available for inspection by
the Owner, Architect or Engineer at all times.
D. Refer to Division 1 for additional requirements concerning record drawings. If the Contractor
does not keep an accurate set of as -built drawings, the pay request may be altered or
delayed at the request of the Architect. Mark the drawings with a colored pencil. Delivery of
as -built prints and reproducibles is a condition of final acceptance.
E. The record prints shall be updated on a daily basis and shall indicate accurate dimensions for
all buried or concealed work, precise locations of all concealed pipe or duct, locations of all
concealed valves, controls and devices and any deviations from the work shown on the
Construction Documents which are required for coordination. All dimensions shall include at
least two dimensions to permanent structure points.
F. Submit three prints of the tracings for approval. Make corrections to tracings as directed and
delivered "Auto Positive Tracings" to the architect. "As -Built" drawings shall be furnished in
addition to shop drawings.
G. When the option described in paragraph F., above is not exercised then upon completion of
the work, the Contractor shall transfer all marks from the submit a set of clear concise set of
reproducible record "AS -BUILT" drawings and shall submit the reproducible drawings with
corrections made by a competent draftsman and three (3) sets of black line prints to the
Architect or Engineer for review prior to scheduling the final inspection at the completion of
the work. The reproducible record "AS -BUILT" drawings shall have the Engineers Name and
Seal removed or blanked out and shall be clearly marked and signed on each sheet as
follows:
CERTIFIED RECORD DRAWINGS
DATE:
(NAME OF GENERAL CONTRACTOR)
BY:
(SIGNATURE)
(NAME OF SUBCONTRACTOR)
BY:
(SIGNATURE)
1.16 OPERATING MANUALS
A. Prepare maintenance manuals in accordance with Division 1 and in addition to the
requirements specified in Division 1, include the following information for equipment items:
1. Description of function, normal operating characteristics and limitations, performance
curves, engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and commercial
numbers of replacement parts.
2. Manufacturer's printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in, and
routine and normal operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping, shutdown,
and emergency instructions; and summer and winter operating instructions.
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 02 00 - 11
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
August 2010 Festival Park
3. Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and troubleshooting;
disassembly, repair, and reassembly; aligning and adjusting instructions.
4. Servicing instructions and lubrication charts and schedules.
1.17 CERTIFICATIONS AND TEST REPORTS
A. Submit a detailed schedule for completion and testing of each system indicating scheduled
dates for completion of system installation and outlining tests to be performed and schedule
date for each test. This detailed completion and test schedule shall be submittal at least 90
days before the projected Project completion date.
B. Test result reporting forms shall be submitted for review no later than the date of the detailed
schedule submitted.
C. Submit 4 copies of all certifications and test reports to the Architect or Engineer for review
adequately in advance of completion of the Work to allow for remedial action as required to
correct deficiencies discovered in equipment and systems.
D. Certifications and test reports to be submitted shall include, but not be limited to those items
outlined in Section of Division 23.
1.18 MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Coordinate with Division 1 for maintenance manual requirements, unless noted otherwise
bind together in "D ring type" binders by National model no. 79-883 or equal, binders shall be
large enough to allow '/4" of spare capacity. Three (3) sets of all approved shop drawing
submittals, fabrication drawings, bulletins, maintenance instructions, operating instructions
and parts exploded views and lists for each and every piece of equipment furnished under
this Specification. All sections shall be typed and indexed into sections and labeled for easy
reference and shall utilize the individual specification section numbers shown in the
Mechanical Specifications as an organization guideline. Bulletins containing information
about equipment that is not installed on the project shall be properly marked up or stripped
and reassembled. All pertinent information required by the Owner for proper operation and
maintenance of equipment supplied by Division 23 shall be clearly and legibly set forth in
memoranda that shall, likewise, be bound with bulletins.
B. Prepare maintenance manuals in accordance with Special Project Conditions, in addition to
the requirements specified in Division 23, include the following information for equipment
items:
1. Identifying names, name tags designations and locations for all equipment.
2. Valve tag lists with valve number, type, color coding, location and function.
3. Reviewed shop drawing submittals with exceptions noted compliance letter.
4. Fabrication drawings.
5. Equipment and device bulletins and data sheets clearly highlighted to show
equipment installed on the project and including performance curves and data as
applicable, i.e., description of function, normal operating characteristics and
limitations, performance curves, engineering data and tests, and complete
nomenclature and model numbers of replacement parts.
6. Manufacturer's printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in, and
routine and normal operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping, shutdown,
and emergency instructions; and summer and winter operating instructions.
7. Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and troubleshooting;
disassembly, repair, and reassembly; aligning and adjusting instructions, servicing
instructions and lubrication charts and schedules.
8. Equipment and motor name plate data.
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 02 00 - 12
Clark Condon Associates
August 2010
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
9. Wiring diagrams.
10. Exploded parts views and parts lists for all equipment and devices.
11. Color coding charts for all painted equipment and conduit.
12. Location and listing of all spare parts and special keys and tools furnished to the
Owner.
13. Furnish recommended lubrication schedule for all required lubrication points with
listing of type and approximate amount of lubricant required.
C. Refer to Division 1 for additional information on Operating and Maintenance Manuals.
D. Operating and Maintenance Manuals shall be turned over to the Owner or Engineer a
minimum of 14 working days prior to the beginning of the operator training period.
1.19 OPERATOR TRAINING
A. The Contractor shall furnish the services of factory trained specialists to instruct the Owner's
operating personnel. The Owner's operator training shall include 12 hours of on site training
in three 4 hour shifts.
B. Before proceeding with the instruction of Owner Personnel, prepare a typed outline in
triplicate, listing the subjects that will be covered in this instruction, and submit the outline for
review by the Owner. At the conclusion of the instruction period obtain the signature of each
person being instructed on each copy of the reviewed outline to signify that he has a proper
understanding of the operation and maintenance of the systems and resubmit the signed
outlines.
C. Refer to other Division 23 Sections for additional Operator Training requirements.
1.20 FINAL COMPLETION
A. At the completion of the work, all equipment and systems shall be tested and faulty
equipment and material shall be repaired or replaced. Refer to Sections of Division 23 for
additional requirements.
B. Clean and adjust all air distribution devices and replace all air filters immediately prior to final
acceptance.
C. Touch up and/or refinish all scratched equipment and devices immediately prior to final
acceptance.
1.21 CONTRACTOR'S GUARANTEE
A. Use of the HVAC systems to provide temporary service during construction period will not be
allowed without permission from the Owner in writing and if granted shall not be cause
warranty period to start, except as defined below.
B. Contractor shall guarantee to keep the entire installation in repair and perfect working order
for a period of one year after its completion and final acceptance, and shall furnish free of
additional cost to the Owner all materials and labor necessary to comply with the above
guarantee throughout the year beginning from the date of issue of Substantial Completion,
Beneficial Occupancy by the Owner or the Certificate of Final Payment as agreed upon by all
parties.
C. This guarantee shall not include cleaning or changing filters except as required by testing,
adjusting and balancing.
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 02 00 - 13
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
August 2010 Festival Park
D. All air conditioning compressors shall have parts and labor guarantees for a period of not less
than 5 years beyond the date of final acceptance.
E. Refer to Sections in Division 23 for additional guarantee or warranty requirements.
1.22 TRANSFER OF ELECTRONIC FILES
A. Project documents are not intended or represented to be suitable for reuse by
Architect/Owner or others on extensions of this project or on any other project. Any such
reuse or modification without written verification or adaptation by Engineer, as appropriate for
the specific purpose intended, will be at Architect/Owner's risk and without liability or legal
exposure to Engineer or its consultants from all claims, damages, losses and expense,
including attorney's fees arising out of or resulting thereof.
B. Because data stored in electric media format can deteriorate or be modified inadvertently, or
otherwise without authorization of the data's creator, the party receiving the electronic files
agrees that it will perform acceptance tests or procedures within sixty (60) days of receipt,
after which time the receiving party shall be deemed to have accepted the data thus
transferred to be acceptable. Any errors detected within the sixty (60) day acceptance period
will be corrected by the party delivering the electronic files. Engineer is not responsible for
maintaining documents stored in electronic media format after acceptance by the
Architect/Owner.
C. When transferring documents in electronic media format, Engineer makes no
representations as to the long term compatibility, usability or readability of documents
resulting from the use of software application packages, operating systems, or computer
hardware differing from those used by Engineer at the beginning of the Project.
D. Any reuse or modifications will be Contractor's sole risk and without liability or legal exposure
to Architect, Engineer or any consultant.
E. The Texas Board of Architectural Examiners (TBAE) has stated that it is in violation of Texas
law for persons other than the Architect of record to revise the Architectural drawings without
the Architect's written consent.
It is agreed that "MEP" hard copy or computer -generated documents will not be issued to any
other party except directly to the Architect/Owner. The contract documents are contractually
copyrighted and cannot be used for any other project or purpose except as specifically
indicated in AIA B-141 Standard Form of Agreement Between Architect and Owner.
If the client, Architect/Owner, or developer of the project requires electronic media for "record
purposes", then an AutoCAD based compact disc ("CD") will be prepared. The "CD" will be
submitted with all title block references intact and will be formatted in a "plot" format to permit
the end user to only view and plot the drawings. Revisions will not be permitted in this
configuration.
F. At the Architect/Owner's request, Engineer will prepare one "CD" of electronic media to assist
the contractor in the preparation of submittals. The Engineer will prepare and submit the
"CD" to the Architect/Owner for distribution to the contractor. All copies of the "CD" will be
reproduced for a cost of reproduction fee of Five Hundred Dollars ($500.00) per "CD".
The "CD" will be prepared and all title blocks, names and dates will be removed. The "CD"
will be prepared in a ".dwg" format to permit the end user to revise the drawings.
G. This Five Hundred Dollars ($500.00) per "CD" cost of reproduction will be paid directly from
the Contractor to the Engineer. The "CD" will be prepared only after receipt of the Five
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 02 00 - 14
Clark Condon Associates
August 2010
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
Hundred Dollars ($500.00). The Five Hundred Dollars ($500.00) per "CD" cost of
reproduction is to only recover the cost of the manhours necessary to reproduce the
documents. It is not a contractual agreement between the Contractor and Engineer to
provide any engineering services, nor any other service.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Provide materials and equipment manufactured by a domestic United States manufacturer.
B. Access Doors: Provide access doors as required for access to equipment, valves, controls,
cleanouts and other apparatus where concealed. Access doors shall have concealed hinges
and screw driver cam locks.
C. All access panels located in wet areas such as restrooms, locker rooms, shower rooms,
kitchen and any other wet areas shall be constructed of stainless steel.
D. Access Doors: shall be as follows:
1. Plastic Surfaces: Milcor Style K.
2. Ceramic Tile Surface: Milcor Style M.
3. Drywall Surfaces: Milcor Style DW.
4. Install panels only in locations approved by the Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 ROUGH -IN
A. Verify final locations for rough -ins with field measurements and with the requirements of the
actual equipment to be connected via reviewed submittals.
B. Refer to equipment specifications in Divisions 2 through 48 for additional rough -in
requirements.
3.02 MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS
A. General: Sequence, coordinate, and integrate the various elements of mechanical systems,
materials, and equipment. Comply with the following requirements:
1. Coordinate mechanical systems, equipment, and materials installation with other
building components.
2. Verify all dimensions by field measurements.
3. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components during
progress of construction, to allow for mechanical installations.
4. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in
poured -in -place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed.
5. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of mechanical materials and
equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Give particular attention to large equipment
requiring positioning prior to closing in the building.
6. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install systems, materials,
and equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible.
7. Coordinate connection of mechanical systems with exterior underground and
overhead utilities and services. Complywith requirements of governing regulations,
franchised service companies, and controlling agencies. Provide required
connection for each service.
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 02 00 - 15
Clark Condon Associates
August 2010
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
8. Install systems, materials, and equipment to conform with architectural action
markings on submittal, including coordination drawings, to greatest extent possible.
Conform to arrangements indicated by the Contract Documents, recognizing that
portions of the Work are shown only in diagrammatic form. Where coordination
requirements conflict with individual system requirements, resolve conflicts and route
proposed solution to the Architect for review.
9. Install systems, materials, and equipment level and plumb, parallel and
perpendicular to other building systems and components, where installed exposed in
finished spaces.
10. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance, and repair or
replacement of equipment components. As much as practical, connect equipment
for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installations.
Extend grease fittings to an accessible location and label.
11. Install access panel or doors where units are concealed behind finished surfaces.
Access panels and doors are specified.
12. Install systems, materials, and equipment giving right-of-way priority to systems
required to be installed at a specified slope.
13. Provide roof curbs for all roof mounted equipment. Coordinate with roof construction
for pitched roof. Provide roof curb to match roof slope. Refer to architectural
drawings and details.
14. The equipment to be furnished under this Specification shall be essentially the
standard product of the manufacturer. Where two or more units of the same class of
equipment are required, these units shall be products of a single manufacturer;
however, the component parts of the system need not be the product of the same
manufacturer.
15. The architectural and structural features of the building and the space limitations
shall be considered in selection of all equipment. No equipment shall be furnished
which will not suit the arrangement and space limitations indicated.
16. Lubrication: Prior to start-up, check and properly lubricate all bearings as
recommended by the manufacturer.
17. Where the word "Concealed" is used in these Specifications in connection with
insulating, painting, piping, ducts, etc., it shall be understood to mean hidden from
sight as in chases, furred spaces or suspended ceilings. "Exposed" shall be
understood to mean the opposite of concealed.
18. Identification of Mechanical Equipment:
a. Mechanical equipment shall be identified by means of nameplates
permanently attached to the equipment. Nameplates shall be engraved
laminated plastic or etched metal. Shop drawings shall include dimensions
and lettering format for approval. Attachments shall be with escutcheon
pins, self -tapping screws, or machine screws.
b. Tags shall be attached to all valves, including control valves, with nonferrous
chain. Tags shall be brass and at least 1-1/2 inches in diameter.
Nameplate and tag symbols shall correspond to the identification symbols
on the temperature control submittal and the "as -built" drawings.
3.03 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Protection of Installed Work: During cutting and patching operations, protect adjacent
installations.
B. Perform cutting, fitting, and patching of mechanical equipment and materials required to:
1. Uncover Work to provide for installation of ill-timed Work.
2. Remove and replace defective Work.
3. Remove and replace Work not conforming to requirements of the Contract
Documents.
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 02 00 - 16
Clark Condon Associates
August 2010
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
4. Remove samples of installed Work as specified for testing.
5. Install equipment and materials in existing structures.
6. Upon written instructions from the Engineer, uncover and restore Work to provide for
Engineer/Owner's observation of concealed Work, without additional cost to the
Owner.
7. Patch existing finished surfaces and building components using new materials
matching existing materials and experienced Installers. Patch finished surfaces and
building components using new materials specified for the original installation and
experienced Installers; refer to the materials and methods required for the surface
and building components being patched; Refer to Section "DEFINITIONS" for
definition of "Installer."
C. Cut, remove and legally dispose of selected mechanical equipment, components, and
materials as indicated, including but not limited to removal of mechanical piping, mechanical
ducts and HVAC units, and other mechanical items made obsolete by the new Work.
D. Protect the structure, furnishings, finishes, and adjacent materials not indicated or scheduled
to be removed.
E. Provide and maintain temporary partitions or dust barriers adequate to prevent the spread of
dust and dirt to adjacent areas.
3.04 WORK SEQUENCE, TIMING, COORDINATION WITH OWNER
A. The Owner will cooperate with the Contractor, however, the following provisions must be
observed:
A meeting will be held at the project site, prior to any construction, between the
Owner's Representative, the General Contractor, the Sub -Contractors and the
Engineer to discuss Contractor's employee parking space, access, storage of
equipment or materials, and use of the Owner's facilities or utilities. The Owner's
decisions regarding such matters shall be final.
During the construction of this project, normal facility activities will continue in
existing buildings until renovated areas are completed. Plumbing, fire protection,
lighting, electrical, communications, heating, air conditioning, and ventilation systems
will have to be maintained in service within the occupied spaces of the existing
building.
END OF SECTION
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 02 00 - 17
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Park
SECTION 23 05 29 — HANGERS AND SUPPORT FOR PIPING AND EQUIPMENT - HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Pipe, and equipment hangers, supports, and associated anchors.
B. Sleeves and seals.
C. Flashing and sealing equipment and pipe stacks.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 21 00 00 — Fire Suppression.
B. Section 22 10 00 — Plumbing Piping and Pumps.
C. Section 23 05 48 — Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment.
D. Section 23 07 16 — HVAC Equipment Insulation.
E. Section 23 07 19 — HVAC Piping Insulation.
F. Section 23 21 13 — Above Ground Hydronic Piping.
G. Section 23 21 16 — Underground Hydronic Piping.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/ASME B31.1 - Power Piping.
B. NFPA 13 - Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems.
C. NFPA 14 - Standard for the Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Supports for Sprinkler Piping: In conformance with NFPA 13.
B. Supports for Standpipes: In conformance with NFPA 14.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Division One.
B. Indicate hanger and support framing and attachment methods.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 Inch Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, split ring.
B. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 to 4 Inches Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.
HANGERS AND SUPPORT FOR PIPING AND EQUIPMENT HVAC 23 05 29 - 1
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
August 2010 Festival Park
C. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and Over: Adjustable steel yoke, cast iron roll, double
hanger.
D. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods; cast
iron roll and stand for pipe sizes 6 inches and over.
E. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches: Cast iron hook.
F. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 Inches and Over: adjustable steel yoke and cast iron roll.
G. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.
H. Floor Support for Pipe Sizes to 4 Inches: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, locknut nipple,
floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support.
I. Floor Support for Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and Over: Adjustable cast iron roll and stand, steel
screws, and concrete pier or steel support.
J. Roof Pipe Supports and Hangers: Galvanized Steel Channel System as manufactured by
Portable Pipe Hangers, Inc. or approved equal.
For pipes 2-1/2" and smaller— Type PP10 with roller
For pipes 3" through 8" — Type PS
For multiple pipes — Type PSE - Custom
K. Copper Pipe Support and Hangers: Electro-galvanized with thermoplastic elastomer
cushions; Unistrut "Cush -A -Clamp" or equal. Hangers: Plastic coated; Unistrut or equal.
L. For installation of protective shields refer to specification section 22 05 29 - 3.03.
M. Shields for Vertical Copper Pipe Risers: Sheet lead.
N. Pipe Rough -In Supports in Walls/Chases: Provide preformed plastic pipe supports, Sioux
Chief "Pipe Titan" or equal.
2.02 HANGER RODS
A. Galvanized Hanger Rods: Threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuous
threaded.
2.03 INSERTS
A. Inserts: Malleable iron case of galvanized steel shell and expander plug for threaded
connection with lateral adjustment, top slot for reinforcing rods, lugs for attaching to
forms; size inserts to suit threaded hanger rods.
2.04 FLASHING
A. Metal Flashing: 20 gage galvanized steel.
B. Lead Flashing: 4 lb./sq. ft. sheet lead for waterproofing; 1 lb./sq. ft. sheet lead for
soundproofing.
C. Caps: Steel, 20 gage minimum; 16 gage at fire resistant elements.
D. Coordinate with roofing contractor/architect for type of flashing on metal roofs.
HANGERS AND SUPPORT FOR PIPING AND EQUIPMENT HVAC 23 05 29 - 2
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
August 2010 Festival Park
2.05 EQUIPMENT CURBS
A. Fabricate curbs of hot dipped galvanized steel.
2.06 SLEEVES
A. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non -fire Rated Floors: Form with 18 gage galvanized steel,
tack welded to form a uniform sleeve.
B. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non -fire Rated Beams, Walls, Footings, and Potentially Wet
Floors: Form with steel pipe, schedule 40.
C. Sleeves for Pipes Through Fire Rated and Fire Resistive Floors and Walls, and
Fireproofing: Prefabricated fire rated steel sleeves including seals, UL listed.
D. Sleeves for Round Ductwork: Form with galvanized steel.
E. Sleeves for Rectangular Ductwork: Form with galvanized steel.
F. Fire Stopping Insulation: Glass fiber type, non-combustible, U.L. listed.
G. Caulk: Paintable 25-year acrylic sealant.
H. Pipe Alignment Guides: Factory fabricated, of cast semi -steel or heavy fabricated steel,
consisting of bolted, two -section outer cylinder and base with two -section guiding spider
that bolts tightly to pipe. Length of guides shall be as recommended by manufacturer to
allow indicated travel.
2.07 FABRICATION
A. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction.
Provide for continuous insulation wrapping.
B. Design hangers without disengagement of supported pipe.
C. Design roof supports without roof penetrations, flashing or damage to the roofing material.
2.08 FINISH
A. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Hangers and supports located in crawl
spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSERTS
A. Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of
reinforced concrete beams. Coordinate with structural engineer for placement of inserts.
B. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 4
inches.
C. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, provide inserts to be flush with slab surface.
D. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide thru-bolt
HANGERS AND SUPPORT FOR PIPING AND EQUIPMENT HVAC 23 05 29 - 3
Clark Condon Associates
Wolf Pen Creek
August 2010
Festival Park
with recessed square steel plate and nut recessed into and grouted flush with slab. Verify
with structural engineer prior to start of work.
3.02 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A.
Support horizontal piping as follows:
PIPE SIZE MAX. HANGER SPACING
HANGER DIAMETER
(Steel Pipe)
1/2 to 1-1/4 inch 7'-0"
3/8"
1-1/2 to 3 inch 10'-0"
3/8"
4 to 6 inch 10'-0"
1/2"
8 to 10 inch 10'-0"
5/8"
12 to 14 inch 10'-0"
3/4"
15 inch and over 10'-0"
7/8"
(Copper Pipe)
1/2 to 1-1/4 inch 5-0"
3/8"
1-1/2 to 2-1/2 inch 8'-0"
3/8"
3 to 4 inch 10'-0"
3/8"
6 to 8 inch 10'-0"
1/2"
(Cast Iron)
2 to 3 inch 5'-0"
3/8"
4 to 6 inch 10'-0"
1/2"
8 to 10 inch 10'-0"
5/8"
12 to 14 inch 10'-0"
3/4"
15 inch and over 10'-0"
7/8"
(PVC Pipe)
1-1/2 to 4 inch 4'-0"
3/8"
6 to 8 inch 4'-0"
1/2"
10 and over 4'-0"
5/8"
B.
Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space
between finished covering and
adjacent work.
C.
Place a hanger within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow and at the vertical horizontal
transition.
D.
Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment.
HANGERS AND SUPPORT FOR PIPING AND EQUIPMENT HVAC 23 05 29 - 4
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
August 2010 Festival Park
E. Support horizontal cast iron pipe adjacent to each hub, with 5 feet maximum spacing
between hangers.
F. Support vertical piping at every floor. Support vertical cast iron pipe at each floor at hub.
G. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or
trapeze hangers.
H. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping.
I. Install hangers with nut at base and above hanger; tighten upper nut to hanger after final
installation adjustments.
J. Portable pipe hanger systems shall be installed per manufactures instructions.
3.03 Insulated Piping: Comply with the following installation requirements.
A. Clamps: Attach galvanized clamps, including spacers (if any), to piping with clamps
projecting through insulation; do not exceed pipe stresses allowed by ASME B31.9.
B. Saddles: Install galvanized protection saddles MSS Type 39 where insulation without vapor
barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with segments of insulation that match adjoining pipe
insulation.
C. Shields: Install protective shields MSS Type 40 on cold and chilled water piping that has
vapor barrier. Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees and shall have dimensions in inches
not less than the following:
NPS
LENGTH
THICKNESS
1/4 THROUGH 3-1/2
12
0.048
4
12
0.060
5 & 6
18
0.060
8 THROUGH 14
24
0.075
16 THROUGH 24
24
0.105
D. Piping 2" and larger provide galvanized sheet metal shields with calcium silicate at
hangers/supports.
E. Insert material shall be at least as long as the protective shield.
F. Thermal Hanger Shields: Install where indicated, with insulation of same thickness as
piping.
3.04 EQUIPMENT BASES AND SUPPORTS
A. Provide equipment bases of concrete.
B. Provide templates, anchor bolts, and accessories for mounting and anchoring equipment.
C. Construct support of steel members. Brace and fasten with flanges bolted to structure.
D. Provide rigid anchors for pipes after vibration isolation components are installed.
3.05 FLASHING
HANGERS AND SUPPORT FOR PIPING AND EQUIPMENT HVAC 23 05 29 - 5
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
August 2010 Festival Park
A. Provide flexible flashing and metal counter flashing where piping and ductwork penetrate
weather or waterproofed walls, floors, and roofs.
B. Flash vent and soil pipes projecting 8 inches minimum above finished roof surface with
lead worked one inch minimum into hub, 8 inches minimum clear on sides with 24 x 24
inches sheet size. For pipes through outside walls, turn flanges back into wall and caulk,
metal counter flash and seal.
C. Flash floor drains in floors with topping over finished areas with lead, 10 inches clear on
sides with minimum 36 x 36 inch sheet size. Fasten flashing to drain clamp device.
D. Seal floor shower mop sink and all other drains watertight to adjacent materials.
E. Provide curbs for mechanical roof installations 8 inches minimum high above roofing
surface. Contact architect for all flashing details and roof construction. Seal penetrations
watertight.
3.06 SLEEVES
A. Set sleeves in position in formwork. Provide reinforcing around sleeves.
B. Extend sleeves through floors minimum one inch above finished floor level. Caulk
sleeves full depth with fire rated thermfiber and 3M caulking and provide floor plate.
C. Where piping or ductwork penetrates floor, ceiling, or wall, close off space between pipe
or duct and adjacent work with U.L. listed fire stopping insulation and caulk seal air tight.
Provide close fitting metal collar or escutcheon covers at both sides of penetration.
D. Fire protection sleeves may be flush with floor of stairways.
END OF SECTION
HANGERS AND SUPPORT FOR PIPING AND EQUIPMENT HVAC 23 05 29 - 6
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
SECTION 23 34 00 — HVAC FANS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Ceiling and inline ventilators.
B. Utility fans.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 23 02 00 — Basic Materials and Methods
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
B. Section 23 05 13 — Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment
C. Section 23 05 48 — Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. UL Compliance: Fans shall be designed, manufactured, and tested in accordance with UL
705 "Power Ventilators."
B. UL Compliance: Fans and components shall be UL listed and labeled.
C. Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory Compliance (NRTL): Fans and components
shall be NRTL listed and labeled. The term "NRTL" shall be as defined in OSHA
Regulation 1910.7.
D. NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories shall comply with NEMA standards.
E. Electrical Component Standard: Components and installation shall comply with NFPA 70
"National Electrical Code."
F. Sound Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA Standard 301 "Method for Calculating
Fan Sound Ratings From Laboratory Test Data." Test fans in accordance with AMCA
Standard 300 "Test Code for Sound Rating." Fans shall be licensed to bear the AMCA
Certified Sound Ratings Seal.
G. Fan Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of
rotation, and efficiency by factory tests and ratings in accordance with AMCA Standard
210/ASHRAE Standard 51 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
1. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections:
2. Product data for selected models, including specialties, accessories, and the
following:
a. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions
indicated.
b. Certified fan sound power ratings.
HVAC FANS 23 34 00 - 1
Clark Condon Associates
August 2010
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
C. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics plus motor and fan accessories.
d. Materials gages and finishes, include color charts.
e. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.
f. Full color paint samples.
3. Shop drawings from manufacturer detailing equipment assemblies and indicating
dimensions, weights, required clearances, components, and location and size of
field connections.
4. Coordination drawings, in accordance with Division 23 Section "Basic Materials
and Methods", for roof penetration requirements and for reflected ceiling plans
drawn accurately to scale and coordinating penetrations and units mounted above
ceiling. Show the following:
a. Roof framing and support members relative to duct penetrations.
b. Ceiling suspension members.
C. Method of attaching hangers to building structure.
d. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile.
e. Ceiling -mounted items including light fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers,
sprinkler heads, access panels, and special moldings.
5. Wiring diagrams that detail power, signal, and control wiring. Differentiate between
manufacturer -installed wiring and field- installed wiring.
6. Product certificates, signed by manufacturer, certifying that their products comply
with specified requirements.
7. Maintenance data for inclusion in Operating and Maintenance Manual specified in
Division 1 and Division 23 Section "Basic Materials and Methods".
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Fans shall be stored and handled in accordance with the unit manufacturer's instructions.
B. Lift and support units with the manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points.
C. Disassemble and reassemble units as required for movement into the final location
following manufacturer's written instructions.
D. Deliver fan units as a factory -assembled unit to the extent allowable by shipping limitations,
with protective crating and covering.
1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not operate units for any purpose, temporary or permanent, until ductwork is clean,
filters are in place, bearings lubricated, and fan has been test run under observation.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. PennBarry
B. Greenheck Fan Corporation
C. ACME
D. Substitutions under provisions of Division 1.
HVAC FANS 23 34 00 - 2
Clark Condon Associates
August 2010
2.02 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
A. Provide fans that are factory fabricated and assembled, factory tested, and factory finished
with indicated capacities and characteristics.
B. Fans and Shafts shall be statically and dynamically balanced and designed for continuous
operation at the maximum rated fan speed and motor horsepower.
C. Provide factory baked -enamel finish coat after assembly. Color shall be verified during the
submittal process.
2.03 CEILING AND INLINE VENTILATORS
A. Ceiling and inline ventilators shall be direct drive or belt drive as indicated, centrifugal
blower type. Fan wheel shall be constructed of galvanized steel and shall be dynamically
balanced. The housing shall be constructed of minimum 20 gauge corrosion resistant
galvanized steel and acoustically insulated for quiet operation. Blower and motor assembly
shall be easily removable from the housing without disturbing the ductwork. The motor
shall be permanently lubricated with built-in thermal overload protection and shall be factory
tested prior to shipment. The ceiling ventilators shall be furnished standard with a powder -
painted white steel grille.
B. Ventilators shall be certified and licensed to bear the AMCA Seal for Air and Sound
Performance. Ventilator performance shall be based on tests and procedures performed in
accordance with AMCA publication 211 and comply with the requirements of the AMCA
Certified Ratings Program. Fan sound power level ratings shall be based on tests and
procedures performed in accordance with AMCA publication 311 and comply with the
requirements of the AMCA Certified Ratings Program. Ventilators shall be UL listed and
CSA certified.
C. Accessories: The following accessories are required.
1. Dampers:
a. Aluminum backdraft damper.
b. Motor -operated volume control damper.
C. U.L. listed ceiling radiation damper for ceiling fans comply with NFPA
Standard 90A rated for 3 hours.
2. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type with thermal overload protection.
3. Speed Controls: Fan wall mounted, solid state speed controller.
2.04 ROOF SUPPLY FANS
A. Roof -mounted, filtered air supply units are of the belt -driven, double width, double inlet
(DWDI), forward curved centrifugal blower type. The unit's blower assembly shall be
mounted on vibration isolators. Motor drives shall be machine cast iron and variable pitch
and shall be factory set to the specified RPM. Belts shall be non -static and oil resistant.
Both motor and blower bearings shall be permanently lubricated with sealed ball bearings.
The blower housing shall be fabricated of heavy gauge painted steel.
B. Fan shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories (UL 705) and shall bear the AMCA
certified rating seal for sound and air performance.
HVAC FANS 23 34 00 - 3
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
August 2010 Festival Park
C. Units housing shall be minimum 18 gauge extruded aluminum with a removable aluminum
cover. The insulated cover shall be held in place with bolts for easy access to fan
components.
D. Filters shall be permanent, one inch, washable, aluminum type and shall be easily removed
for cleaning. Units carry the AMCA Certified Ratings Seal for air performance with filters in
place.
E. Accessories: The following items are required.
1. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal overload protection mounted
inside fan housing, factory -wired through an internal aluminum conduit.
2. Bird Screens: Removable'/2 inch mesh, 16 gauge, aluminum or brass wire.
3. Dampers: Motor -operated, parallel -blade, volume control dampers mounted in
curb base.
4. Roof Curb: Prefabricated, 12 inch high, heavy gauge, galvanized steel; mitered
and welded corners; 2 inch thick, rigid, fiberglass insulation adhered to inside walls;
built-in cant and mounting flange for flat roof decks; and 2 inch wood nailer. Size
as required to suit roof opening and fan base.
2.05 PROPELLER WALL AXIAL VENTILATORS AND ASSEMBLIES LOCATED IN CHLORINE
ROOMS
A. Unless noted otherwise, all materials shall be of noncorrosive aluminum or stainless steel.
B. Ventilator and assembly shall consist of propeller wall axial ventilator section, motorized
damper section and accessories as scheduled.
C. Motorized Damper Section:
1. Blades and frame shall be of aluminum construction with Air Dry Phenolic (Heresite
VR-500) coating.
2. Blade edge seals shall be Ruskiprene type or equivalent, mechanically locked in
extruded blade slots.
3. Linkage shall be stainless steel, mounted in frame.
4. Axles shall be square or hexagonal, stainless steel construction.
5. Bearings shall be non -corrosive molded synthetic.
6. Shaft shall be stainless steel.
7. Damper actuator shall be mounted inside NEMA 4 type enclosure, factory wired
through an internal aluminum conduit.
D. Gravity Damper Section:
1. Blades and frame shall be of aluminum construction with Air Dry Phenolic (Heresite
VR-500) coating.
E. Propeller Wall Axial Ventilator Section:
1. Fan motor shall be in TEFC type enclosure.
2. All steel fan components shall be coated with Air Dry Phenolic (Heresite VR-500)
coating.
F. Wall collar shall be of aluminum construction.
G. Accessories: The following items are required:
1. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal overload protection mounted
inside NEMA 4 enclosure, factory -wired through an internal aluminum conduit.
2. Bird Screens: Removable'/2 inch mesh, 16 gauge, aluminum or brass wire.
HVAC FANS 23 34 00 - 4
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
August 2010 Festival Park
PART 3 — EXECUTION
3.01 Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.02 All items required for a complete and proper installation are not necessarily indicated on the plans
or in the specifications. Provide all items required as per manufacturer's requirements.
END OF SECTION
HVAC FANS 23 34 00 - 5
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
SECTION 23 37 13 - AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Ceiling air diffusers.
B. Wall registers and grilles.
C. Louvers.
D. Other air devices indicated on drawings and schedules.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 23 02 00 — Basic Materials and Methods
B. Section 23 05 93 — Testing, Adjusting and Balancing
C. Section 23 31 13 — Metal Ductwork
D. Section 23 31 16 — Fibrous Glass Ductwork
E. Section 23 31 19 — Ductwork Accessories
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of air distribution
devices of types and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in
similar service for not less than 5 years.
B. Codes and Standards:
1. ARI Compliance: Test and rate air distribution devices in accordance with ARI 650
"Standard for Air Outlets and Inlets".
2. ASHRAE Compliance: Test and rate air distribution devices in accordance with
ASHRAE 70 "Method of Testing for Rating the Air Flow Performance of Outlets and
Inlets".
3. AMCA Compliance: Test and rate louvers in accordance with AMCA 500 "Test
Method for Louvers, Dampers and Shutters".
4. AMCA Seal: Provide louvers bearing AMCA Certified Rating Seal.
5. NFPA Compliance: Install air distribution devices in accordance with NFPA 90A
"Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems".
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for air distribution devices
including the following:
1. Schedule of air distribution devices indicating drawing designation, room location,
number furnished, model number, size, and accessories furnished.
2. Data sheet for each type of air distribution devices, and accessory furnished;
indicating construction, finish, and mounting details.
AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES 23 37 13 - 1
Clark Condon Associates
August 2010
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
3. Performance data for each type of air distribution devices furnished, including
aspiration ability, temperature and velocity traverses; throw and drop; and noise
criteria ratings. Indicate selections on data.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly -type shop drawing for each type of air
distribution devices, indicating materials and methods of assembly of components.
C. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data, including cleaning instructions for finishes,
and spare parts lists. Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in maintenance
manuals; in accordance with requirements of Division 1.
1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver air distribution devices wrapped in factory -fabricated fiber -board type containers.
Identify on outside of container type of outlet or inlet and location to be installed. Avoid
crushing or bending and prevent dirt and debris from entering and settling in devices.
B. Store air distribution devices in original cartons and protect from weather and construction
work traffic. Where possible, store indoors; when necessary to store outdoors, store above
grade and enclose with waterproof wrapping.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. Warrant the installation of the Work specified herein for one year against becoming
unserviceable or causing an objectionable appearance resulting from defective or
nonconforming workmanship.
PART 2 — PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Titus Company
B. Metalaire Industries, Inc.
C. Nailor Industries
D. Krueger
E. Price
F. Substitutions under provisions of Division One.
2.02 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
A. Unless otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard air devices when shown of size,
shape, capacity, type and accessories indicated on drawings and schedules, constructed of
materials and components as indicated and as required for complete installation and proper
air distribution.
B. Provide air devices that have, as minimum, temperature and velocity traverses, throw and
drop, and noise criteria ratings for each size device and listed in manufacturer's current data.
AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES 23 37 13 - 2
Clark Condon Associates
August 2010
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
C. Unless noted otherwise on drawings, the finish shall be #26 white. The finish shall be an
anodic acrylic paint, baked at 315OF for 30 minutes. The pencil hardness must be HB to H.
The paint must pass a 100 hour ASTM D117 Corrosive Environments Salt Spray Test without
creepage, blistering, or deterioration of film. The paint must pass a 250 hour ASTM-870
Water Immersion Test. The paint must also pass the ASTM D-2794 Reverse Impact
Cracking Test with a 50 inch pound force applied.
D. Provide air device with border styles that are compatible with adjacent ceiling or wall system,
and that are specially manufactured to fit into the wall construction or ceiling module with
accurate fit and adequate support. Refer to architectural construction drawings and
specifications for types of wall construction and ceiling systems.
E. Provide integral volume damper with roll formed steel blades where indicated on drawings or
schedules. Dampers shall be opposed blade design with a screw driver slot or a concealed
lever operator for adjustment through the face of the air device.
F. Air devices designated for fire rated systems shall be pre -assembled with UL classified
radiation damper and thermal blanket. Fire rated air devices shall be shipped completely
assembled; one assembly per carton, Each assembly shall be enclosed in plastic shrink
wrap with installation instructions.
2.03 LOUVERS
A. Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard louvers where shown; of
size, shape, capacity and type indicated; constructed of materials and components as
indicated, and as required for complete installation.
B. Provide louvers that have minimum free area, and maximum pressure drop of each type as
listed in manufacturer's current data, complying with louver schedule.
C. Provide louvers with frame and sill styles that are compatible with adjacent substrate, and
that are specifically manufactured to fit into construction openings with accurate fit and
adequate support, for weatherproof installation. Refer to architectural construction drawings
and specifications for types of substrate.
D. Louvers shall be constructed of aluminum extrusions, ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5. Weld
units or use stainless steel fasteners.
E. Louver Screens: On inside face of exterior louvers, provide 1/2" square mesh anodized
aluminum wire bird screens mounted in removable extruded aluminum frames.
F. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Ruskin Manufacturing Company
2. Greenheck Company
3. Louvers and Dampers, Inc.
4. Substitutions under provisions of Division One.
PART 3 — EXECUTION
3.01 All interior surfaces of all air devices shall be painted flat black.
3.02 See floor plans for type, neck size and CFM of air for all air distribution devices.
AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES 23 37 13 - 3
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
August 2010 Festival Park
3.03 Install all air distribution devices as detailed on plans and in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations.
END OF SECTION
AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES 23 37 13 - 4
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Park
SECTION 23 62 13 - AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all
work herein.
B. The Basic Materials and Methods, Section 15050, are included as a part of this Section
as though written in full in this document.
1.02 SCOPE
Scope of the Work shall include the furnishing and complete installation of the equipment covered
by this Section, with all auxiliaries, ready for owner's use.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 AIR-COOLED CONDENSING UNITS
A. Air-cooled condensing unit shall be designed for use with split system having a remote
direct -expansion (DX) cooling coil mounted in evaporator fan unit. Capacity shall be as
called for on the drawings when matched to the appropriate evaporator coil.
B. Condensing unit shall consist of high -efficiency hermetic compressor, air-cooled
condenser with quiet fan, factory wired controls, R-22 refrigerant and refrigeration circuit
and valves.
C. Cabinet shall be heavy -gauge galvanized steel with bonding primer and baked -enamel
finish coat. The entire cabinet shall be protected from rust.
D. Compressor shall be protected from excessive current and temperatures and shall be
provided with a thermostatically controlled crankcase heater to operate only when needed
for protection of the compressor. Compressor shall be spring -mounted on rubber
isolators. Compressor shall be located in compartment isolated from condenser fan and
coil. Provide a high -capacity dryer in the system to remove moisture and dirt.
E. Condenser fan shall be directly connected to a weather -protected, quiet, high -efficiency
motor. Fan guard shall be provided and shall be protected from rust by PVC finish.
Condenser coil shall be aluminum fin with copper tube.
F. Connections for refrigerant suction and liquid lines shall be extended outside the cabinet
and provided with service valves with gauge connections.
G. Power connections shall be made to the connectors located inside the electrical
connection box.
H. Standard operating and safety controls shall include high-pressure switch, low pressure
switch, compressor overload service, and solid-state timed -off control.
All components (parts and labor) of the sealed refrigeration circuit shall be warranted by
the manufacturer for five years.
2.02 AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT
AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNITS 23 62 13 - 1
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
August 2010 Festival Park
A. Auxiliary equipment shall consist of refrigerant lines prepared for the unit involved. These
lines shall be cleaned, dried, and pressurized at the factory.
B. Low ambient kit to allow operation at outside temperature below 35 deg. F (2 deg. C) shall
be provided.
C. Expansion valve shall be provided with the evaporator coil.
D. Provide thermostat to match the requirements of the job. Thermostat shall provide
subbase with Heat -Cool -Off and Fan On -Auto switch. See section on controls for other
related requirements.
E. Provide polyethylene structural base designed for that service and intended to support the
unit and eliminate vibration transmission.
F. Provide hard -start kit with unit.
G. Provide guards for condenser coils.
2.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Condensing unit shall be the make and model number shown on the drawings or
acceptable equivalents by Lennox, Carrier, York, or Trane.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 All HVAC equipment shall be installed as per manufacturers printed installation instructions.
3.02 All items required for a complete and proper installation are not necessarily indicated on the plans
or in the specifications. Provide all items required as per manufacturers requirements.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install the condensing unit on proper foundation as shown on the drawings, and in
location that will not restrict the air entry or discharge from the unit.
B. Install refrigerant lines as recommended by the manufacturer, taking care not to lose the
refrigerant charge contained in the lines, or allow air to enter the lines or equipment.
Locate the lines in such a way as to not obstruct access to the condensing unit or other
equipment. Lines located under ground or under concrete shall be installed in a PVC pipe
conduit for protection.
C. Provide electrical connections as required by the applicable codes. Provide control wiring
required. All power wiring and control wiring shall be in conduit and located so as not to
obstruct access to the unit or other equipment.
3.04 TESTING
A. Operate the condensing unit and the system to assure that unit is operating properly and
without excessive noise and vibration.
B. Read and record the power draw and the refrigeration suction and liquid pressures as
required by Balancing and Test, Section 15990.
AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNITS 23 62 13 - 2
Clark Condon Associates
August 2010
END OF SECTION
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNITS 23 62 13 - 3
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Park
SECTION 23 82 19 - FAN COIL UNIT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all
work herein.
B. The Basic Materials and Methods, Section 15050, are included as a part of this Section
as though written in full in this document.
1.02 SCOPE
Scope of the Work shall include the furnishing and complete installation of the equipment covered
by this Section, with all auxiliaries, ready for owner's use.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.01 FAN COIL UNITS
Fan coil units shall be factory built, manufactured as scheduled on drawings. Carrier, York, Trane
or McQuay shall be considered as equal, if they comply with the specification and schedule.
Special Note: Contractor shall field verify exact clearances required for air handling units. Units
shall be field located as required and shop drawings shall indicate final location for approval by
Architect/Engineer.
A. Furnish and install fan coil units of the type, capacities, ratings and drive motor
horsepower shown on the drawings.
B. Units shall be factory fabricated, draw-thru type, and shall have fan section, cooling coil
section, condensate drain pan, adjustable blower drive with motor on resilient mounted
base, vee-belts with guard, filter section, and mixing box (if scheduled) assembled as
integrated air handling units.
C. REQUIREMENTS:
1. Mill -galvanized steel, rigidly framed, braced, and reinforced; access panels each
side of unit; minimum panel ga. - 18; minimum weight formed framing member 14
ga.
2. Fan section, cooling coil section, and outlet frame throats shall be internally
insulated at the factory with 1" thick, 3/4 PCF density, Neoprene coated fiberglass
cemented in place with water -proof adhesive, having fire -retardant characteristics
in accordance with NFPA 90A.
3. Drain pan shall be not lighter than 14 ga.; extend completely under the coil
section and be all -galvanized, foam insulated pan with drain connections.
4. When the fan coil unit is installed above an accessible ceiling, the unit shall
incorporate a secondary drain pan. The secondary pan shall be fabricated from
galvanized sheet metal, 16 gauge minimum with cross breaking sloped towards a
drain. The sides shall be a minimum 2" tall and the corners shall be soldered
watertight. The top edge shall have a 1/4" hem to provide additional rigidity and
the secondary pan shall be supported at a minimum of six points. The pan shall
extend on all sides a minimum of 3" beyond the sides of the unit casing. Route
the secondary drain piping to a conspicuous location or install a float switch at the
low point in the secondary pan. The secondary pan should be sloped a minimum
of 1/8" per foot and supported so that the unit is not in contact with the bottom of
the secondary pan.
FAN COIL UNIT 23 82 19 - 1
Clark Condon Associates
August 2010
2.02 COILS
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
5. The fan section, including wheels, shafts, bearings, drive, etc., shall be statically
and dynamically balanced as an assembly, and the shaft shall not pass through
the first critical speed, while accelerating from rest to operating speed. Submittal
data shall state the first critical shaft speed. Shaft bearings shall be of vacuum
de -gassed steel, and shall be selected for 200,000 hours average life.
6. Coil shall be as hereinafter specified.
A. Cooling coils shall be cartridge type and, when mounted in air handling units, shall be
removable from either end. Coils shall be constructed of copper tubes with aluminum fins
and shall be designed for even distribution of air across the face of the coils; air shall not
pass around coil frames: Coils shall have same end connection for DX or chilled water
piping.
B. DX refrigerant coils shall be counter -flow refrigerant to air, shall have inlet and outlet
connections permanently marked shall have thermostatic expansion valves with
adjustable super heat.
C. Maximum face velocity across cooling coils shall be 500 FPM, unless noted otherwise on
schedule.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 All HVAC equipment shall be installed as per manufacturers printed installation instructions.
3.02 All items required for a complete and proper installation are not necessarily indicated on the plans
or in the specifications. Provide all items required as per manufacturers requirements.
END OF SECTION
FAN COIL UNIT 23 82 19 - 2
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Park
SECTION 26 02 00 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Tests
B. Inspections
C. Submittals
D. Project Coordination
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. General Conditions
B. _ _Supplementary Conditions
C. Division One
1.03 COOPERATION WITH TRADES:
A. Cooperation with trades of adjacent, related, or affected materials or operations shall be
considered a part of this work in order to affect timely and accurate placing of work and
bring together in proper and correct sequence, the work of such trades.
1.04 REFERENCES
A.
National Electrical Code (NEC)
B.
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
C.
Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. (UL)
D.
Insulated Cable Engineer's Association (ICEA).
E.
National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA).
F.
Institute of Electrical and Electronic's Engineers (IEEE).
G.
American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
H.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).
I.
International Energy Conservation Code (IECC).
1.05 COMPLETE FUNCTIONING OF WORK:
A. All work fairly implied as essential to the complete functioning of the electrical systems
shown on the Drawings and Specifications shall be completed as part of the work of this
Division unless specifically stated otherwise. It is the intention of the Drawings and
Specifications to establish the types of the systems, but not set forth each item essential
to the functioning of the system. In case of doubt as to the work intended, or in the event
of amplification or clarification thereof, the Contractor shall call upon the Architect for
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 26 02 00-1
Clark Condon Associates
August 2010
supplementary instructions, Drawings, etc.
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
B. Contractor shall review all pertinent Drawings and adjust his work to all conditions shown
there on. Discrepancies between Plans, Specifications, and actual field conditions shall
be brought to the prompt attention of the Architect.
Approximate location of transformers, feeders, branch circuits, outlets, lighting
and power panels, outlets for special systems, etc., are indicated on the
Drawings. However, the Drawings, do not give complete and accurate detailed
locations of such outlets, conduit runs, etc., and exact locations must be
determined by actual field measurement. Such locations will, at all times, be
subject to the approval of the Architect.
Communicate with the Architect and secure his approval of any outlet (light
fixture, receptacle, switch, etc.) location about which there may be the least
question. Outlets obviously placed in a location not suitable to the finished room
or without specific approval, shall be removed and relocated when so directed by
the Architect. Location of light fixtures shall be coordinated with reflected ceiling
plans.
C. Additional coordination with mechanical contractor may be required to allow adequate
clearances of mechanical equipment, fixtures and associated appurtenances. Contractor
to notify Architect and Engineer of unresolved clearances, conflicts or equipment
locations.
1.06 SCHEMATIC NATURE OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. The contract documents are schematic in nature in that they are only to establish scope
and a minimum level of quality. They are not to be used as actual working construction
drawings. The actual working construction drawings shall be the approved shop drawings.
1.07 CONTRACTOR'S QUALIFICATIONS
A. An approved contractor for the work under this division shall be:
1. A specialist in this field and have the personnel, experience, training, and skill,
and the organization to provide a practical working system.
2. Able to furnish evidence of having contracted for and installed not less than 3
systems of comparable size and type that have served their Owners satisfactorily
for not less than 3 years.
3. Perform work by persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified quality.
Persons performing electrical work shall be required to be licensed. Onsite
supervision, journeyman shall have minimum of journeyman license. Helpers,
apprentices shall have minimum of apprentice license.
1.08 DATE OF FINAL ACCEPTANCE
A. The date of final acceptance shall be the date of owner occupancy, or the date all punch
list items have been completed or final payment has been received. Refer to Division One
for additional requirements.
B. The date of final acceptance shall be documented in writing and signed by the architect,
owner and contractor.
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 26 02 00-2
Clark Condon Associates
August 2010
1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
A. Deliver products to the project properly identified with names, model numbers, types,
grades, compliance labels, and other information needed for identification.
B. Deliver products to the project at such time as the project is ready to receive the
equipment, pipe or duct properly protected from incidental damage and weather damage.
C. Damaged equipment shall be promptly removed from the site and new, undamaged
equipment shall be installed in its place promptly with no additional charge to the Owner.
1.10 SUBMITTALS
A. Coordinate with Division 1 for submittal timetable requirements, unless noted otherwise
within thirty (30) days after the Contract is awarded the Contractor shall submit a
minimum of eight (8) complete bound sets of shop drawings and complete data covering
each item of equipment or material. The first submittal of each item requiring a submittal
must be received by the Architect or Engineer within the above thirty day period. The
Architect or Engineer shall not be responsible for any delays or costs incurred due to
excessive shop drawing review time for submittals received after the thirty (30) day time
limit. The Architect and Engineer will retain one (1) copy each of all shop drawings for
their files. Where full size drawings are involved, submit one (1) print and one (1)
reproducible sepia or vellum in lieu of eight (8) sets. All literature pertaining to an item
subject to Shop Drawing submittal shall be submitted at one time. A submittal shall not
contain information from more than one Specification section, but may have a section
subdivided into items or equipment as listed in each section. The Contractor may elect to
submit each item or type of equipment separately. Each submittal shall include the
following items enclosed in a suitable binder:
1. A cover sheet with the names and addresses of the Project, Architect, MEP
Engineer, General Contractor and the Subcontractor making the submittal. The
cover sheet shall also contain the section number covering the item or items
submitted and the item nomenclature or description.
2. An index page with a listing of all data included in the Submittal.
3. A list of variations page with a listing all variations, including unfurnished or
additional required accessories, items or other features, between the submitted
equipment and the specified equipment. If there are no variations, then this page
shall state "NO VARIATIONS". Where variations affect the work of other
Contractors, then the Contractor shall certify on this page that these variations
have been fully coordinated with the affected Contractors and that all expenses
associated with the variations will be paid by the submitting Contractor. This page
will be signed by the submitting Contractor.
4. Equipment information including manufacturer's name and designation, size,
performance and capacity data as applicable. All applicable Listings, Labels,
Approvals and Standards shall be clearly indicated.
5. Dimensional data and scaled drawings as applicable to show that the submitted
equipment will fit the space available with all required Code and maintenance
clearances clearly indicated and labeled at a minimum scale of 1/4" = V-0", as
required to demonstrate that the alternate or substituted product will fit in the
space available.
6. Identification of each item of material or equipment matching that indicated on the
Drawings.
7. Sufficient pictorial, descriptive and diagrammatic data on each item to show its
conformance with the Drawings and Specifications. Any options or special
requirements or accessories shall be so indicated. All applicable information shall
be clearly indicated with arrows or another approved method.
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 26 02 00-3
Clark Condon Associates
August 2010
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
8. Additional information as required in other Sections of this Division.
9. Certification by the General Contractor and Subcontractor that the material
submitted is in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications, signed and
dated in long hand. Submittals that do not comply with the above requirements
shall be returned to the Contractor and shall be marked "REVISE AND
RESUBMIT".
B. Refer to Division 1 for additional information on shop drawings and submittals.
C. Equipment and materials submittals and shop drawings will be reviewed for compliance
with design concept only. It will be assumed that the submitting Contractor has verified
that all items submitted can be installed in the space allotted. Review of shop drawings
and submittals shall not be considered as a verification or guarantee of measurements or
building conditions.
D. Where shop drawings and submittals are marked "REVIEWED", the review of the
submittal does not indicate that submittals have been checked in detail nor does it in any
way relieve the Contractor from his responsibility to furnish material and perform work as
required by the Contract Documents.
E. Shop drawings shall be reviewed and returned to the Contractor with one of the following
categories indicated:
1. REVIEWED: Contractor need take no further submittal action, shall include this
submittal in the O&M manual and may order the equipment submitted on.
2. REVIEWED AS NOTED: Contractor shall submit a letter verifying that required
exceptions to the submittal have been received and complied with including
additional accessories or coordination action as noted, and shall include this
submittal and compliance letter in the O&M manual. The contractor may order the
equipment submitted on at the time of the returned submittal providing the
Contractor complies with the exceptions noted.
3. NOT APPROVED: Contractor shall resubmit new submittal on material,
equipment or method of installation when the alternate or substitute is not
approved, the Contractor will automatically be required to furnish the product,
material or method named in the Specifications and/or drawings. Contractor shall
not order equipment that is not approved. Repetitive requests for substitutions will
not be considered.
4. REVISE AND RESUBMIT: Contractor shall resubmit new submittal on material,
equipment or method of installation when the alternate or substitute is marked
revise and resubmit, the Contractor will automatically be required to furnish the
product, material or method named in the Specifications and/or provide as noted
on previous shop drawings. Contractor shall not order equipment marked revise
and resubmit. Repetitive requests for substitutions will not be considered.
5. CONTRACTOR'S CERTIFICATION REQUIRED: Contractor shall resubmit
submittal on material, equipment or method of installation. The Contractor's
stamp is required stating the submittal meets all conditions of the contract
documents. The stamp shall be signed by the General Contractor. The submittal
will not be reviewed if the stamp is not placed and signed on all shop drawings.
6. MANUFACTURER NOT AS SPECIFIED: Contractor shall resubmit new
submittal on material, equipment or method of installation when the alternate or
substitute is marked manufacturer not as specified, the Contractor will
automatically be required to furnish the product, material or method named in the
specifications. Contractor shall not order equipment where submittal is marked
manufacturer not as specified. Repetitive requests for substitutions will not be
considered.
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 26 02 00-4
Clark Condon Associates
August 2010
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
F. Materials and equipment which are purchased or installed without shop drawing review
shall be at the risk of the Contractor and the cost for removal and replacement of such
materials and equipment and related work which is judged unsatisfactory by the Owner or
Engineer for any reason shall be at the expense of the Contractor. The responsible
Contractor shall remove the material and equipment noted above and replace with
specified equipment or material at his own expense when directed in writing by the
Architect or Engineer.
G. Shop Drawing Submittals shall be complete and checked prior to submission to the
Engineer for review.
H. Furnish detailed shop drawings, descriptive literature, physical data and a specification
critique for each section indicating "compliance" and/or "variations" for the following items:
Distribution Panelboards
Lighting and Appliance Panelboards
Heavy Duty Disconnect Switches
Lighting Fixtures
Lighting Contactors
Time Clocks
Grounding
Photocells
Wiring Devices and Plates
Conduit and Fittings
Wire
Dry Type Transformers
Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors (TVSS)
Refer to each specification section for additional requirements.
1.11 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Prepare maintenance manuals in accordance with Division 1 and in addition to the
requirements specified in Division 1, include the following information for equipment
items:
1. Description of function, normal operating characteristics and limitations,
performance curves, engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and
commercial numbers of replacement parts.
2. Manufacturer's printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in, and
routine and normal operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping, shutdown,
and emergency instructions; and summer and winter operating instructions.
3. Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and
troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly; aligning and adjusting
instructions.
4. Servicing instructions and lubrication charts and schedules.
1.12 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Maintain a continuous record during the course of construction of all changes and
deviations in the work from the contract drawings. Upon completion of the work, purchase
a set of "Auto Positive Tracings" on vellum and make corrections as required to reflect the
electrical systems as installed. Location and size of all conduit shall be accurately shown
to dimension. Submit three prints of the tracings for approval. Make corrections to
tracings as directed and deliver "Auto Positive Tracings" to the Architect. Record drawings
shall be furnished in addition to shop drawings. Symbols on the Record drawings shall
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 26 02 00-5
Clark Condon Associates
August 2010
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
correspond to the identification symbols on the contract drawings and equipment
identification plates and tags.
B. The Contractor shall maintain a set of clearly marked black line record "AS -BUILT' prints
on the job site on which he shall mark all work details, alterations to meet site conditions
and changes made by "Change Order" notices. These shall be kept available for
inspection by the Owner, Architect or Engineer at all times.
C. Refer to Division 1 for additional requirements concerning record drawings. If the
Contractor does not keep an accurate set of as -built drawings, the pay request may be
altered or delayed at the request of the Architect. Mark the drawings with a colored pencil.
Delivery of as -built prints and reproducibles is a condition of final acceptance.
D. The record prints shall be updated on a daily basis and shall indicate accurate dimensions
for all buried or concealed work, precise locations of all concealed pipe or duct, locations
of all concealed valves, controls and devices and any deviations from the work shown on
the Construction Documents which are required for coordination. All dimensions shall
include at least two dimensions to permanent structure points.
E. Submit three prints of the tracings for approval. Make corrections to tracings as directed
and delivered "Auto Positive Tracings" to the architect. "As -Built" drawings shall be
furnished in addition to shop drawings.
F. When the option described in paragraph F., above is not exercised then upon completion
of the work, the Contractor shall transfer all marks from the submit a set of clear concise
set of reproducible record "AS -BUILT' drawings and shall submit the reproducible
drawings with corrections made by a competent draftsman and three (3) sets of black line
prints to the Architect or Engineer for review prior to scheduling the final inspection at the
completion of the work. The reproducible record "AS -BUILT' drawings shall have the
Engineers Name and Seal removed or blanked out and shall be clearly marked and
signed on each sheet as follows:
CERTIFIED RECORD DRAWINGS
DATE:
(NAME OF GENERAL CONTRACTOR)
BY:
(SIGNATURE)
(NAME OF SUBCONTRACTOR)
BY:
(SIGNATURE)
1.13 CERTIFICATIONS AND TEST REPORTS
A. Submit a detailed schedule for completion and testing of each system indicating
scheduled dates for completion of system installation and outlining tests to be performed
and schedule date for each test. This detailed completion and test schedule shall be
submittal at least 90 days before the projected Project completion date.
B. Test result reporting forms shall be submitted for review no later than the date of the
detailed schedule submitted.
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 26 02 00-6
Clark Condon Associates
August 2010
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
C. Submit 4 copies of all certifications and test reports to the Architect or Engineer for review
adequately in advance of completion of the Work to allow for remedial action as required
to correct deficiencies discovered in equipment and systems.
D. Certifications and test reports to be submitted shall include, but not be limited to those
items outlined in Section of Division 26.
1.14 MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Coordinate with Division 1 for maintenance manual requirements, unless noted otherwise
bind together in "D ring type" binders by National model no. 79-883 or equal, binders shall
be large enough to allow '/:' of spare capacity. Three (3) sets of all approved shop
drawing submittals, fabrication drawings, bulletins, maintenance instructions, operating
instructions and parts exploded views and lists for each and every piece of equipment
furnished under this Specification. All sections shall be typed and indexed into sections
and labeled for easy reference and shall utilize the individual specification section
numbers shown in the Electrical Specifications as an organization guideline. Bulletins
containing information about equipment that is not installed on the project shall be
properly marked up or stripped and reassembled. All pertinent information required by the
Owner for proper operation and maintenance of equipment supplied by Division 26 shall
be clearly and legibly set forth in memoranda that shall, likewise, be bound with bulletins.
B. Prepare maintenance manuals in accordance with Special Project Conditions, in addition
to the requirements specified in Division 26, include the following information for
equipment items:
1. Identifying names, name tags designations and locations for all equipment.
2. Fault Current calculations and Coordination Study.
3. Reviewed shop drawing submittals with exceptions noted compliance letter.
4. Fabrication drawings.
5. Equipment and device bulletins and data sheets clearly highlighted to show
equipment installed on the project and including performance curves and data as
applicable, i.e., description of function, normal operating characteristics and
limitations, performance curves, engineering data and tests, and complete
nomenclature and model numbers of replacement parts.
6. Manufacturer's printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in, and
routine and normal operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping, shutdown,
and emergency instructions; and summer and winter operating instructions.
7. Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and
troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly; aligning and adjusting
instructions, servicing instructions and lubrication charts and schedules.
8. Equipment name plate data.
9. Wiring diagrams.
10. Exploded parts views and parts lists for all equipment and devices.
11. Color coding charts for all painted equipment and conduit.
12. Location and listing of all spare parts and special keys and tools furnished to the
Owner.
13. Furnish recommended lubrication schedule for all required lubrication points with
listing of type and approximate amount of lubricant required.
C. Refer to Division 1 for additional information on Operating and Maintenance Manuals.
D. Operating and Maintenance Manuals shall be turned over to the Owner or Engineer a
minimum of 14 working days prior to the beginning of the operator training period.
1.15 OPERATOR TRAINING
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 26 02 00-7
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
August 2010 Festival Park
A. The Contractor shall furnish the services of factory trained specialists to instruct the
Owner's operating personnel. The Owner's operator training shall include 12 hours of on
site training in three 4 hour shifts.
B. Before proceeding with the instruction of Owner Personnel, prepare a typed outline in
triplicate, listing the subjects that will be covered in this instruction, and submit the outline
for review by the Owner. At the conclusion of the instruction period obtain the signature of
each person being instructed on each copy of the reviewed outline to signify that he has a
proper understanding of the operation and maintenance of the systems and resubmit the
signed outlines.
C. Refer to other Division 26 Sections for additional Operator Training requirements.
1.16 SITE VISITATION
A. Visit the site of the proposed construction in order to fully understand the facilities,
difficulties and restriction attending the execution of the work.
B. Before submitting a bid, it will be necessary for each Contractor whose work is involved to
visit the site and ascertain for himself the conditions to be met therein in installing his
work and make due provision for same in his bid. It will be assumed that this Contractor in
submitting his bid has visited the premises and that his bid covers all work necessary to
properly install the equipment shown. Failure on the part of the Contractor to comply with
this requirement shall not be considered justification for the omission or faulty installation
of any work covered by these Specifications and Drawings.
C. Understand the existing utilities from which services will be supplied; verify locations of
utility services, and determine requirements for connections.
D. Determine in advance that equipment and materials proposed for installation fit into the
confines indicated.
1.17 WARRANTY
A. The undertaking of the work described in this Division shall be considered equivalent to
the issuance, as part of this work, of a specific guarantee extending one year beyond the
date of completion of work and acceptance by Owner, against defects in materials and
workmanship. Materials, appliances and labor necessary to effect repairs and
replacement so as to maintain said work in good functioning order shall be provided as
required. Replacements necessitated by normal wear in use or by Owner's abuse are not
included under this guarantee.
1.18 TRANSFER OF ELECTRONIC FILES
A. Project documents are not intended or represented to be suitable for reuse by
Architect/Owner or others on extensions of this project or on any other project. Any such
reuse or modification without written verification or adaptation by Engineer, as appropriate
for the specific purpose intended, will be at Architect/Owner's risk and without liability or
legal exposure to Engineer or its consultants from all claims, damages, losses and
expense, including attorney's fees arising out of or resulting thereof.
B. Because data stored in electric media format can deteriorate or be modified inadvertently,
or otherwise without authorization of the data's creator, the party receiving the electronic
files agrees that it will perform acceptance tests or procedures within sixty (60) days of
receipt, after which time the receiving party shall be deemed to have accepted the data
thus transferred to be acceptable. Any errors detected within the sixty (60) day
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 26 02 00-8
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
August 2010 Festival Park
acceptance period will be corrected by the parry delivering the electronic files. Engineer is
not responsible for maintaining documents stored in electronic media format after
acceptance by the Architect/Owner.
C. When transferring documents in electronic media format, Engineer makes no
representations as to the long term compatibility, usability or readability of documents
resulting from the use of software application packages, operating systems, or computer
hardware differing from those used by Engineer at the beginning of the Project.
D. Any reuse or modifications will ' be Contractor's sole risk and without liability or legal
exposure to Architect, Engineer or any consultant.
E. The Texas Board of Architectural Examiners (TBAE) has stated that it is in violation of
Texas law for persons other than the Architect of record to revise the Architectural
drawings without the Architect's written consent.
It is agreed that "MEP" hard copy or computer -generated documents will not be issued to
any other party except directly to the Architect/Owner. The contract documents are
contractually copyrighted and cannot be used for any other project or purpose except as
specifically indicated in AIA B-141 Standard Form of Agreement Between Architect and
Owner.
If the client, Architect/Owner, or developer of the project requires electronic media for
"record purposes", then an AutoCAD based compact disc ("CD") will be prepared. The
"CD" will be submitted with all title block references intact and will be formatted in a "plot"
format to permit the end user to only view and plot the drawings. Revisions will not be
permitted in this configuration.
F. At the Architect/Owner's request, Engineer will prepare one "CD" of electronic media to
assist the contractor in the preparation of submittals. The Engineer will prepare and
submit the "CD" to the Architect/Owner for distribution to the contractor. All copies of the
"CD" will be reproduced for a cost of reproduction fee of Five Hundred Dollars ($500.00)
per "CD".
The "CD" will be prepared and all title blocks, names and dates will be removed. The "CD"
will be prepared in a ".dwg" format to permit the end user to revise the drawings.
G. This Five Hundred Dollars ($500.00) per "CD" cost of reproduction will be paid directly
from the Contractor to the Engineer. The "CD" will be prepared only after receipt of the
Five Hundred Dollars ($500.00). The Five Hundred Dollars ($500.00) per "CD" cost of
reproduction is to only recover the cost of the manhours necessary to reproduce the
documents. It is not a contractual agreement between the Contractor and Engineer to
provide any engineering services, nor any other service.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.01 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. The names and manufacturers and model numbers have been used in the Contract
documents to establish types of equipment and standards of quality. Where more than
one manufacturer is named for a specific item of equipment, only one of the specified
manufacturers will be considered for approval. Where only one manufacturer is
mentioned with the phrase "or approved equal", Contractor may submit an alternate
manufacturer for consideration, provided the following conditions are met:
1. Submit alternate equipment with complete descriptive data in shop drawing form.
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 26 02 00-9
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
August 2010 Festival Park
Provide sample of equipment upon request for review by Architect. Samples will
be returned if requested in writing.
2. Alternate equipment must be equal from the standpoint of materials, construction
and performance.
3. Alternate submittal must be presented to the Engineer/Architect ten (10) days
prior to bid date for approval.
B. The Architect and Engineer shall be the sole judge of quality and equivalence of
equipment, materials and methods.
2.02 All materials and products used on this project shall be listed by Underwriters' Laboratories.
2.03 ACCESS DOORS
A. Wherever access is required in walls or ceilings to concealed junction boxes, pull boxes,
equipment, etc., installed under this Division, furnish a hinged access door and frame with
flush latch handle to another Division for installation. Doors shall be as follows:
1. Plaster Surfaces: Milcor Style K.
2. Ceramic Tile Surfaces: Milcor Style M.
3. Drywall Surfaces: Milcor Style DW.
4. Install panels only in locations approved by the Architect.
2.04 EQUIPMENT PADS
A. Unless noted otherwise 4" high concrete pads for floor mounted equipment shall be
installed under Division 3. Pads shall conform to the shape of the equipment with a
minimum of 3" margin at equipment supports. Top and sides of pads shall be troweled to
a smooth finish, equal to floor. External corners shall be bullnosed to a 3/4" radius, unless
shown otherwise.
2.05 ESCUTCHEONS
A. Provide heavy chrome or nickel plated plates, of approved pattern, on conduit passing
through walls, floors and ceilings in finished areas. Where conduit passes through a
sleeve, no point of the conduit shall touch the building construction. Caulk around such
conduit with sufficient layers of two hour rated firesafing by Thermafiber 4.0 P.C.F.
density, U.S.G. fire test 4/11/78 and seal off openings between conduit and sleeves with
non -hardening mastic prior to application of escutcheon plate. Escutcheons shall be
Gravler Sure -Lock, or approved equal.
2.06 SPACE LIMITATIONS
A. Equipment shall be chosen which shall properly fit into the physical space provided and
shown on the drawings, allowing ample room for access, servicing, removal and
replacement of parts, etc. Adequate space shall be allowed for clearances in accordance
with Code requirements. Physical dimensions and arrangement of equipment shall be
subject to the approval of the Architect.
2.07 PAINTING
A. All factory assembled equipment for electrical work, except light fixtures, that normally is
delivered with a factory applied finish shall be delivered with a hard surface factory applied
finish such as baked -on machinery enamel which will not require additional field painting.
The finish shall consist of not less than 2 coats of medium gray color paint USA No. 61
Munsell Notation 8-3G, 6. 10/0.54 enamel. This Contractor shall protect this finish from
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 26 02 00-10
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
August 2010 Festival Park
damage due to construction operations until acceptance of the building. He shall be
responsible for satisfactorily restoring any such finishes or replacing equipment that
becomes stained or damaged.
2.08 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION
A. Conduit Systems: Provide adequate marking of major conduit which is exposed or
concealed in accessible spaces to distinguish each run as either a power or
signal/communication conduit. Except as otherwise indicated, use orange banding with
black lettering. Provide self-adhesive or snap -on type plastic markers. Indicate voltage for
that raceway. Locate markers at ends of conduit runs, on pull boxes, on junction boxes,
near switches and other control devices, near items of equipment served by the
conductors, at points where conduit passes through walls or floors, or enters non -
accessible construction and at spacings of not more than 50 feet along each run of
conduit. Switch -leg conduit and short branches for power connections do not have to be
marked, except where conduit is larger than % inch. Branch circuit conduits, junction
boxes and pull boxes shall be marked with a permanent marker indicating panel name
and branch circuit numbers.
B. Underground Cable Identification: Bury a continuous, preprinted, bright colored plastic
ribbon cable marker with each underground cable (or group of cables), regardless of
whether conductors are in conduit, duct bank, or direct buried. Locate each directly over
cables, 6 to 8 inches below finished grade.
C. Identification of Equipment:
1. All major equipment shall have a manufacturer's label identifying the
manufacturer's address, equipment model and serial numbers, equipment size,
and other pertinent data. Care shall be taken not to obliterate this nameplate in
any way.
2. A black -white -black laminated plastic engraved identifying nameplate shall be
secured by stainless steel screws to each automatic transfer switch, switchboard,
distribution panel, motor control center, motor starter panels and panelboards.
a. Identifying nameplates shall have '/4 inch high engraved letters and shall
contain the following information:
1) Name
2) Voltage
3) Phase
4) "3" or 'A" wire, and
5) Where it is fed from.
b. An example of a panelboard nameplate is:
Center Panel — 1 HB
480/277 volt, 3 phase, 4 wire
Center Fed from DP2
C. An example of an automatic transfer switch nameplate is:
Center ATS #2
480/277 volt, 3 phase, 4 wire, 4 pole
Center Fed from MSB and DPE
3. Each feeder device in a switchboard, distribution panel, and motor control center
device shall have a nameplate showing the load served in '/z inch high engraved
letters.
4. A black -white -black laminated plastic engraved identifying nameplate shall be
secured by screws to each safety switch, disconnect switch, individual motor
starter, enclosed circuit breaker, wireway, and terminal cabinet.
a. Identifying nameplates shall have '/4 inch high engraved letters and shall
indicate the equipment served.
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 26 02 00-11
Clark Condon Associates
August 2010
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
b. An example if a disconnect switch is: AHU-1.
5. Cardholders and directory cards shall be furnished for circuit identification in
panelboards. Cardholder shall be located on inside of panel door and shall be in a
metal frame with clear plastic front. Circuit lists shall be typewritten. Circuit
descriptions shall include location and name of each item of equipment served.
Spares and spaces shall be written in erasable pencil for future use. Circuit
directory shall show the room served by each circuit. The final graphs/signage
room numbers shall be used. Do not use Architectural numbering on plans.
6. Prohibited Markings: Markings which are intended to identify the manufacturer,
vendor, or other source from which the material has been obtained are prohibited
for installation within public, tenant, or common areas within the project. Also,
prohibited are materials or devices which bear evidence that markings or
insignias have been removed. Certification, testing (example, Underwriters'
Laboratories, Inc.), and approval labels are exceptions to this requirement.
7. Warning Signs: Provide warning signs where there is hazardous exposure
associated with access to or operation of electrical facilities. Provide text of
sufficient clarity and lettering of sufficient size to convey adequate information at
each location; mount permanently in an appropriate and effective location.
Comply with recognized industry standards for color and design.
8. Operational Tags: Where needed for proper and adequate information on
operation and maintenance of electrical system, provide tags of plasticized card
stock, either preprinted or hand printed. Tags shall convey the message,
example: "DO NOT OPEN THIS SWITCH WHEN BURNER IS OPERATING."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING
A. Trenching and backfilling and other earthwork operations required to install the facilities
specified herein shall conform to the applicable requirements of Division 2 (95% of
maximum standard density). Where trenching or excavation is required in improved
areas, the backfill shall be compacted to a condition equal to that of adjacent undisturbed
earth and the surface of the area restored to the condition existing prior to trenching or
excavating operations. Provide a minimum of 3" of sand underneath all conduits. The
plans indicate information pertaining to surface and sub -surface obstructions; however,
this information is not guaranteed. Should obstructions be encountered whether or not
shown, the Contractor shall alter routing of new work, reroute existing lines, remove
obstructions where permitted, or otherwise perform whatever work is necessary to satisfy
the purpose of new work and leave existing surfaces and structures in a satisfactory and
serviceable condition. All work shall comply with OSHA Standards.
3.02 WORKMANSHIP AND CONCEALMENT
A. The work of this Section shall be performed by workman skilled in their trade. Installation
shall be consistent in completeness whether concealed or exposed. Each item of
electrical work shall be concealed in walls, chases, under floors and above ceilings
except:
1. Where shown to be exposed.
2. Where exposure is necessary to the proper function.
3.03 SLEEVES, CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. This section shall be responsible for placing sleeves for all conduit passing through walls,
partitions, sound walls, beams, floors, roof, etc. Sleeves through below -grade walls shall
use water -tight fitting manufactured by O.Z. Gendey.
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 26 02 00-12
Clark Condon Associates
August 2010
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
B. All cutting and patching will be done under another Division, but this Section will be
responsible for timely performance of this work and layout of holes and setting sleeves.
C. All un-used sleeves shall be sealed with 2 hour UL approved fire sealant manufactured by
"3M" or approved equal.
D. Refer to 26 05 33 for additional requirements.
3.04 ELECTRICAL GEAR
A. Install all electrical equipment in accordance with the National Electrical Code and as
shown on the drawings.
B. Lighting contractors, time clocks, disconnect switches, etc. mounted in
mechanical/electrical rooms shall be mounted at a working height not requiring a ladder,
when wall space is available. Installation of these devices at greater elevations shall be
approved by the Engineer. Contractor shall provide a coordination sketch of each
mechanical/electrical room noting locations and mounting heights of all electrical
devices(note bottom and top elevations) shown to be installed. Sketches shall be
provided to the Engineer for review, and the general contractor for coordination with other
trades working in these rooms.
3.05 CLEANING
A. Clean lighting fixtures and equipment.
B. Touch-up and refinish scratches and marred surfaces on panels, switches, starters, and
transformers.
3.06 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
A. Tests and inspection requirements shall be coordinated with Division I.
B. Date for final acceptance test shall be sufficiently in advance of completion date of
contract to permit alterations or adjustments necessary to achieve proper functioning of
equipment prior to contract completion date.
C. Conduct re -tests as directed by Architect on portions of work or equipment altered or
adjusted as determined to be necessary by final acceptance test. No resultant delay or
consumption of time as a result of such necessary re -test beyond contract completion
date shall relieve Contractor of his responsibility under contract.
D. Put circuits and equipment into service under normal conditions, collectively and
separately, as may be required to determine satisfactory operation. Demonstrate
equipment to operate in accordance with requirements of these specifications. Perform
tests in the presence of Architect. Furnish instruments and personnel required for tests.
E. Final Inspection:
1. At the time designated by the Architect, the entire system shall be inspected by
the Architect and Engineer. The contractor or his representative shall be present
at this inspection.
2. Panelboards, switches, fixtures, etc., shall be cleaned and in operating condition.
3. Certificates and documents required hereinbefore shall be in order and presented
to the Architect prior to inspection.
4. Panel covers, junction box covers, etc., shall be removed for visual inspection of
the wire, bus bars, etc.
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 26 02 00-13
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
August 2010 Festival Park
5. After the inspection, any items which are noted as needing to be changed or
corrected in order to comply with these specifications and the drawings shall be
accomplished without delay.
END OF SECTION
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 26 02 00-14
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Park
SECTION 26 05 19 - WIRE, CABLE AND RELATED MATERIALS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE
A. Provide 600 volt building wire, cable and connectors and 300 volt wire, cable and
connectors.
B. WORK INCLUDED: Include the following Work in addition to items normally part of this
Section.
1. Wiring for lighting and power.
2. Automatic Control Wiring.
3. Connection of equipment shown.
C. WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE:
1. Heating, ventilating, and air conditioning equipment.
2. Structured cabling system.
3. Coaxial cables
1.02 STANDARDS
A. UL83
B. ASTM B-3
C. All wire cable and connectors shall be UL approved.
1.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. 600 VOLT WIRE AND CABLE
1. Southwire
2. General Cable
3. Essex
4. Cerro
5. American Insulated Wire Corporation
B. 300 VOLT WIRE AND CABLE
1. Westpenn
2. Beldon
3. Alpha
C. FLEXIBLE CABLE SYSTEMS
1. AFC Modular Cable Systems
D. CONNECTORS
1. AMP
2. Burndy
3. Ideal
4. 3M
WIRE, CABLE, AND RELATED MATERIALS 26 05 19-1
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
August 2010 Festival Park
5. O.Z. Gedney
6. Thomas & Betts
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop drawings shall include, but not limited to:
1. Cutsheets of wire, cable and connectors to indicate the performance, fabrication
procedures, product variations, and accessories.
1.05 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES WORK IN ACCORDANCE WITH:
A. National Electrical Code.
B. Local, municipal, or state codes that have jurisdiction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 WIRING
A.
B.
C.
IC
0
All wire shall be new and continuous without weld, splice, or joints throughout its length. It
must be uniform in cross-section, free from flaws, scales and other imperfections.
WIRE MATERIAL: Soft drawn, annealed, 98% pure copper, with tin coating. Aluminum
wiring is not acceptable.
TYPES:
1. Provide type "THHN/THWN" insulation for all buried feeders and service
entrance conductors.
2. Provide type "THHN/THWN" insulation for all branch circuits and above grade
feeders.
3. All wire No. 8 and larger shall be stranded. All wire No. 10 and smaller shall be
stranded or solid.
4. Provide type "XHHW" or other 90 degrees insulation wiring for branch circuit
wiring installed through continuous rows of fluorescent fixture bodies.
5. All 300-volt cable including but not limited to telephone, fire alarm, data, CATV
and security shall be UL listed for use in return air plenums.
CONDUCTOR SIZES
1. Feeder conductors shall be sized for a maximum of 2% drop in rated voltage at
scheduled_ load.
2. Branch circuit conductors shall be sized for a maximum 3% drop in the rated
voltage to the longest outlet on the circuit.
3. Minimum wire shall be No. 12, unless otherwise shown on Drawings or required
by Code.
COLOR CODING: No. 6 or larger shall use tape for color coding. No. 8 and smaller wire
shall be color coded in accordance with the governing authority requirements or as
follows:
120/208 VOLT
NEUTRAL: White
PHASE A: Black
PHASE B: Red
277/480 VOLT
Neutral: Gray
Phase A: Brown
Phase B: Purple
120/240 VOLT
Neutral: White
Phase A: Black
Phase B: Orange
WIRE, CABLE, AND RELATED MATERIALS 26 05 19-2
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
August 2010 Festival Park
PHASE C: Blue Phase C: Yellow Phase C: Blue
GROUND: Green Ground: Green Ground: Green
2.02 GROUNDING
Permanently connect all conduit work, motors, starters, and other electrical equipment to
grounding system in accordance with the National Electrical Code.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 WIRE
A. Do not pull wire into conduit until Work of an injurious nature is completed. Where two or
more circuits run to a single outlet box, each circuit shall be properly tagged. Wyreze or
approved equal may be used as a lubricant where necessary.
B. Splices shall be fully made up in outlet boxes with compression crimp -on type splice
connectors.
C. Joints and splices will not be permitted in service entrance or in feeders. Joints in branch
circuits will be permitted where branch circuits divide, and then shall consist of one
through -circuit to which the branch shall be spliced. Joints shall not be left for the fixture
hanger to make. Connect joints and splices with Buchanan Series "2000" solderless
connectors complete with insulating caps or properly sized wire nuts.
D. All stranded conductors shall be furnished with lugs or connectors.
E. Connectors furnished with circuit breakers or switches shall be suitable for copper wire
termination.
F. "Sta-Cons" shall be used to terminate stranded conductors on all switches and
receptacles.
G. All stranded #10 and small conductors shall be terminated with an approved solderless
terminal if the device or light fixture does not have provisions for clamp type securing of
the conductor.
H. The jacket for all travelers used on 3-way and 4-way switches shall be pink.
3.02 BALANCING SYSTEM
The load on each distribution and lighting panel shall be balanced to within 10% by proper
arrangement of branch circuits on the different phase legs. Provide written documentation
showing results. Submit with O & M manuals.
3.03 LOW VOLTAGE WIRING
A. Low voltage wiring shall be plenum rated. All wiring in mechanical rooms, electrical
rooms, drywall ceiling, inaccessible areas, underground, plaster ceiling, inside concealed
walls areas exposed to occupant view, and other areas subject to physical damage shall
be run in conduit.
B. Low voltage wiring shall be routed in separate raceways from power wiring systems.
C. Sleeves shall be placed in the forms of concrete, masonry and fire rated walls, floor slabs
and beams, for the passage of wiring. Sleeves should be set in place a sufficient time
WIRE, CABLE, AND RELATED MATERIALS 26 05 19-3
Clark Condon Associates
August 2010
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
ahead of the concrete work so as not to delay the work. Sleeves shall be rigid galvanized
steel.
3.04 CABLE SUPPORTS
A. Provide cable supports in all vertical raceways in accordance with Article 300-19 of the
NEC.
3.05 DEFECTS
A. Defects shall include, but are not to limited to, the following:
Tripping circuit breakers under normal operation.
Improperly connected equipment.
Damaged, torn, or skinned insulation.
END OF SECTION
WIRE, CABLE, AND RELATED MATERIALS 26 05 19-4
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Park
SECTION 26 05 26 - GROUNDING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all
work herein.
1.02 SCOPE
A. WORK COMBINED WITH OTHER SECTIONS: Combine the work specified herein with
the following Sections to form a single responsibility for the Work:
1. Electrical.
2. Basic materials and methods.
B. Provide electrical service, equipment and wiring device grounding as shown, scheduled
and as specified.
C. The types of grounding include, but not limited to, the grounding bonding of all equipment
devices, building steel piping, and as required by the National Electrical Code, Local
Inspection Department and Power Company.
1.03 STANDARDS
A. NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE (NFPA-70)
B. Local municipal and State codes that have jurisdiction.
C. NECA
1.04 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURES
A. Provide grounding products manufactured by Copperweld and Cadweld.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop drawings shall include, but not limited to the following:
1. Cut sheets of ground rods, clamps and connectors.
2. Grounding system diagram.
PART2-PRODUCTS
A. GENERAL: Provide all materials required to construct a complete grounded electrical
system.
B. GROUND RODS: Ground rods shall be 3/4" inch diameter by 10 feet long construction
with copper jacket and a steel core.
C. CLAMPS: Ground clamps shall be copper except for steel or iron pipes in which the
clamps shall be galvanized iron.
D. CONDUCTORS: Conductors shall be connected by means of an approved pressure
connector or clamp.
GROUNDING 26 05 26-1
Clark Condon Associates
August 2010
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
A. GENERAL: Install grounding system as shown and specified to ensure a properly
grounded system.
B. SERVICE ENTRANCE GROUNDING SYSTEM: Route a separate grounding electrode
conductor in conduit from each main distribution panel to the ground rod grid, incoming
cold water piping system.. Provide a bonding jumper around water meter. The grounding
electrode conductor shall be stranded copper, 98% conductivity and shall be run
continuous without splices or joints and installed at least 12" below grade.
C. BUILDING STEEL AND PIPING SYSTEM: Install a bonding jumper between building
steel and metallic piping systems to bond them to the electrical grounding system.
D. NEUTRAL: The neutral shall be grounded only at the service entrance and other
separately derived systems. The neutral shall be kept separate from the grounding
system and shall not be used as a ground.
E. GROUNDING SEPARATELY DERIVED ALTERNATING CURRENT SYSTEM
TRANSFORMERS: The center point (neutral) of each wye connected
transformer shall be bonded to the case and a grounding electrode conductor
shall be connected to a ground rod or building steel.
F. GROUNDING CONDUCTOR: A grounding conductor and metallic conduit system shall
bond all equipment served by the electrical system. Provide a flexible bonding jumper for
isolated metallic piping and ductwork and around expansion fittings and joints.
G. CONDUIT GROUNDING BUSHING:
Conduit terminating in equipment that has a ground bus such as switchboards,
panelboards, etc., shall have grounding bushings installed. Ground each conduit by
means of a grounding bushing and to the ground bus in the equipment.
H. MOTORS: The frame of all motors shall be grounded.
SPECIAL GROUNDING: Provide a #6 AWG copper grounding conductor for each
telephone board, television system, etc. Terminate the grounding conductor on ground
bus and to the building electrical grounding system. Refer to 800-40(d) and 820-40(d) of
the NEC.
J. REMOTE PANELBOARDS: Provide a grounding electrode conductor all remote panels
as required by the NEC and shown on drawings.
K. LIGHTING FIXTURES: Flexible fixture whips containing a green grounding conductor
shall be used to connect light fixtures. Flexible fixture whips shall not exceed ten feet.
L. RECEPTACLES: All receptacles shall be grounded using the branch circuit grounding
conductor. Receptacles shall use an approved grounding yoke.
3.02 TESTING: Perform a ground resistance test using a biddle analog or digital portable earth/ground
resistance tester. The system resistance shall not exceed 5 OHMS. Provide additional
electrodes as required (refer to 250-84 of the NEC or the most current edition 250-56). Test shall
not be conducted following wet weather. Provide personal instruments to conduct these tests and
GROUNDING 26 05 26-2
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
August 2010 Festival Park
submit certified test for review. Test shall be verified by Engineer.
END OF SECTION
GROUNDING 26 05 26-3
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
SECTION 26 05 33 - RACEWAYS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
A. Provide electrical raceways and fittings as shown, scheduled and specified.
B.
The types of raceways and fittings required are as follows:
1. Rigid hot -dipped galvanized steel conduit (RGS)
2. Intermediate hot -dipped galvanized steel conduit (IMC)
3. Electrical metallic tubing (EMT)
4. PVC
5. Flexible metal conduit
6. Liquid -tight flexible metal conduit
7. PVC coated rigid galvanized steel conduit
1.02 STANDARDS
A.
ANSI, C80.1 & C80.3
B.
NEMA FB-1
C.
NEMA TC3
D.
UL, 6, 797 & 1242
1.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A.
Raceways
1. Allied
2. Triangle
3. Republic
3. Carlon
4. Wheatland Tube
5. Cantex
6. Western Tube
7. Robroy Industries
B.
Fittings
1. Appleton
2. Crouse Hinds
3. Steel City
4. O.Z. Gedney
5. Carlon
6. Raco, Inc.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
Shop drawing shall include but not be limited to:
1. Cutsheets for raceways and fitting.
RACEWAYS 26 05 33 -1
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
August 2010 Festival Park
1.05 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES WORK IN ACCORDANCE WITH:
A. National Electrical Code.
B. Local, municipal, or state codes that have jurisdiction.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.01 PROVIDE CONDUIT AS FOLLOWS:
A. Except as noted or otherwise specified, all wiring shall be installed in galvanized rigid
steel, rigid aluminum conduit or electrical steel tube (EMT) of the proper size to contain
the number of conductors required in accordance with the latest edition of the N.E.C.
Where conduit sizes are shown on the drawings, these shall take preference. Contractor
shall epoxy coat galvanized rigid steel conduit for use in natatoriums.
B. EMT in sizes up to 4 inches when concealed or not exposed to damage and located
indoors only.
C. PVC coated rigid galvanized steel shall be used for all penetrations of slab on grade.
D. Rigid galvanized steel where embedded in concrete or masonry construction, mechanical
yard or in exterior/interior applications where subject to damage.
E. Carlon Schedule 40 PVC may be utilized underground, in or below slab where shown on
the construction documents.
F. MINIMUM SIZE: 1/2, inch. All homeruns shall be 3/4" minimum.
G. PVC coated rigid galvanized steel conduit shall be coated inside and outside.
H. PVC coated rigid galvanized steel conduit shall be used at cooling towers, corrosive areas
and pool pump rooms.
I. Fixture whips: Refer to 26 51 00 for additional information.
J. Flexible metal shall be used for connecting rotating equipment installed in conditioned
spaces.
K. Sealtite shall be used for connecting rotating equipment installed in non -conditioned
spaces and outside.
L. Bear the stamped approval of the UL and be approved by the Architect and Engineer.
2.02 Branch circuits run underground shall be run in Carlon Schedule 40 PVC conduit. Install ground
wire in accordance with NEC table 250-122.
2.03 FITTINGS
A. Couplings for rigid steel or intermediate conduit shall be hot dipped galvanized steel. Set
screw type is not acceptable.
B. Steel or malleable iron fittings shall be used on all other raceway types except for PVC.
C. EMT systems shall utilize steel insulated throat, threadless, water tight compression type
RACEWAYS 26 05 33 -2
Clark Condon Associates
August 2010
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
connectors and threadless steel water tight compression type couplings.
D. Coupling and connectors accessories and fittings for PVC coated rigid galvanized steel
shall be PVC coated.
E. Metal sealtite fittings shall be steel. Plastic is not acceptable.
F. Provide nylon bushing on end of all low voltage cabling system conduits (sleeves, rough -
ins, etc.).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 CONDUIT
A. GENERAL
The Drawings are diagrammatic, and are intended to show the general location of outlets,
devices, fixtures, and arrangement and control of circuits. The Contractor shall determine
exact locations by actual measurement of the building or by reference to the Architectural
Drawings.
B. Of such size, and so installed that conductors may be drawn in without injury or excessive
strain.
C. Where entering panels, pull boxes, junction boxes, or outlet boxes, shall be secured in
place with lock nuts inside and outside, and insulated bushings inside.
D. Have Red seal type VCC or approved equal cable supports in risers, as required by
N.E.C.
E. Have ends reamed after cutting and application of die.
F. Keep conduit corked and dry during construction, and swab out before conductors are
pulled.
G. Have bends and offsets made with approved tools. Bends or offsets in which the pipe is
crushed or deformed shall not be installed.
H. Where not embedded in concrete or masonry, be firmly secured by approved clamps,
half -straps or hangers.
I. Have O.Z. Gedney or approved equal expansion fittings where crossing building
expansion joints.
J. EXPANSION JOINTS: Make provision for expansion and shifting of metal or PVC
conduits where risers occur from underground.
K. Except in the mechanical equipment rooms, run conduit concealed, and by the shortest
practicable route between outlets. Install risers, drops, and offsets necessary to avoid
conflict with ductwork, piping, structural members, and similar items.
L. Install exposed conduit in mechanical rooms, and elsewhere as indicated, parallel to
horizontal and vertical lines of walls, ceilings, and floors.
M. In general, fluorescent fixtures in finished areas having suspended acoustical ceilings
shall be connected to outlet boxes of lighting grid by flexible metal conduit; length not to
RACEWAYS 26 05 33 -3
Clark Condon Associates
August 2010
exceed ten feet.
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
N. Outlet boxes in partitions shall never be set back to back. They shall be offset to prevent
undue noise transmission from room to room.
O. Concealed conduit shall run in as direct manner as possible using long bends. Exposed
conduit shall be run parallel with or at right angles to the lines of the building; and all
bends shall be made with standard conduit elbows or conduit benders. Not more than
equivalent of four quarter bends shall be used in any run between terminals and cabinet,
of between outlet or junction boxes. Approved condulets shall be used in lieu of conduit
elbows where ease of installation and appearance warrants their use and approved by the
engineer. Conduit joints shall be made with approved couplings and unions.
P. Conduits shall be continuous from outlet to outlet and from outlets to cabinets, junction or
pull boxes and shall be electrically continuous throughout. Terminals of all conduits shall
be provided with double lock nuts and bushing or terminated on conduit hubs. Use of
running threads is prohibited.
Q. Each entire conduit system shall be installed complete before any conductors are drawn
in. Every run of conduit shall be finished before covering up to guard against obstructions
and omissions.
R. Sleeves shall be placed in the forms of concrete, masonry and fire rated walls, floor slabs
and beams, for the passage of conduits. Sleeves should be set in place a sufficient time
ahead of the concrete work so as not to delay the work. Sleeves shall be rigid galvanized
steel and set to extend 4" above slab.
S. All pipe penetrations through walls and concrete floors shall be fire rated by applying USG
Thermafiber in the space between the concrete and the pipe. The fire rating shall be
additionally sealed by using 3M brand model CP 25 or 303 fire barrier caulk and putty. All
fire rating material shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's printed
instructions.
T. All conduit shall be cleaned and swabbed to remove all foreign matter and moisture prior
to pulling wire and cable. All boxes in which conduits terminate shall be cleaned of all
concrete mortar and other foreign matter.
U. Provide #30 nylon pulling line in all conduits in which permanent wiring is not installed.
V. All conduit shall be securely fastened and supported using hot galvanized malleable iron
one -hole pipe straps, clamps, hanger or other means approved by the engineer.
Supports shall be as required by NEC Table 344-3 (B)(2). Tie wire shall not be used as
support or securing means. Support conduit independently of ceiling hanger wire. Use all
thread rods to support outlet boxes, junction boxes and conduit.
W. When PVC conduit is routed underground, all stub-up's and 90' elbows shall be PVC
coated rigid galvanized steel. Use PVC coated rigid galvanized steel when penetrating
concrete on grade.
X. Route all conduit above grade unless otherwise noted on the construction documents.
Y. Contact the Architect and Engineer for an installation review before covering any below
grade or above grade conduit.
Z. All new outlets shall be flush mounted. In remodeled areas where wall construction
prohibits flush mounting, provide wiremold 2400 series. Verify exact location and routing
RACEWAYS 26 05 33 -4
Clark Condon Associates
August 2010
with architect before installation.
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
AA. Contractor shall not penetrate water proof barriers without using proper fitting to maintain
barriers. This shall include exterior walls and slabs. Coordinate with Architect for proper
methods.
3.02 FITTINGS
A. Install approved expansion fitting in all conduit runs in excess of 150 feet or when
crossing building expansion joints.
3.03 CONDUIT CORROSION PROTECTION
A. Branch circuit conduits installed in concrete slabs on fill or grade shall be positioned in a
manner to ensure complete concrete cover. In no case shall such conduits be exposed
below or above the slab surfaces, or penetrate the waterproof membrane.
B. At locations where metallic conduits pass through slabs on grade or transitions below
grade, PVC coated rigid galvanized conduit shall be used.
3.04 OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES
A. Provide an approved galvanized outlet box with adequate volume for number of
conductors installed.
B. Provide standard galvanized switch boxes of the required number of gangs. Switch
boxes where conduit is exposed shall be handy boxes or approved equal.
C. Outlet boxes for receptacles shall be similar to Universal 52151 with suitable raised cover.
Receptacle boxes where conduit is exposed shall be handy boxes or approved equal.
D. Weatherproof boxes shall be FS or FD. Provide these boxes in all non -conditioned areas,
exterior areas and natatoriums.
E. Outdoor boxes shall be NEMA 3R, with conduit connections made by Myers Hubs.
F. See notes and details on Drawings for special box requirements.
G. Provide junction boxes required to facilitate installation of the various conduit systems.
Provide support boxes required for risers, each complete with approved cable supports as
described elsewhere in this Division.
H. Outlet boxes for drywall shall be standard galvanized 4" square boxes with the
appropriate device cover.
I. Provide floor outlet fittings for telephone to match fittings for duplex floor receptacles.
J. Provide 3-1/2" deep gangable masonry boxes in all masonry wall (CMU). Steel City GW-
135-G or approved equal.
K. Provide shallow 4"x4" boxes in all demountable partitions.
L. Metallic boxes located in fire rated walls or partitions shall be separated by a minimum
horizontal distance of 24 in. This minimum separation distance between metallic boxes
may be reduced when " Wall Opening Protective Materials" (CLIV) are installed according
to the requirements of their Classification. Metallic boxes shall not be installed on
RACEWAYS 26 05 33 -5
Clark Condon Associates
August 2010
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
opposite side of walls or partitions of staggered stud construction unless "Wall Opening
Protective Materials" are installed with the metallic boxes in accordance with
Classification requirements for the protective materials.
3.05 THRU-WALL SEALS
A. Provide O.Z. Gedney "Thru-wall' seals for all conduits passing through concrete structure
below grade, above grade, and floor penetrations below grade. These prevent moisture
from entering the building.
B. Straight sleeves are not acceptable.
3.06 PULL BOXES
A. Pull boxes shall be provided for conduit systems as required and shall be constructed of
galvanized steel of not less than gauge and size specified by National Electrical Code.
B. Where two or more feeders pass through a common pull box, they shall be tagged to
indicate clearly their electrical characteristics, circuit number, and panel designation.
3.07 WIREWAYS
A. Wireways shall be installed as indicated or required and locations shall be coordinated
with architect.
B. Wireways shall be made of not less than 16-gauge sheet steel for 4 inch and 6 inch
square sizes and 14 gauge steel for 8 inch and 12 inch square sizes. Couplings end
plates and knockouts shall be furnished as required. Each section of wireways shall be
rigidly supported.
C. Wiring in wireways shall be neatly bundled, tied and suitably tagged.
D. The finish shall be ANSI-49 gray epoxy paint applied by a cathodic electrodeposition paint
process over a corrosion resistant phosphate preparation for NEMA 1 wireways. Provide
galvanized steel for NEMA 3R wireways. NEMA 3R wireways and auxiliary gutters are for
horizontal mounting only.
END OF SECTION
RACEWAYS 26 05 33 -6
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Park
SECTION 26 22 13- LOW VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTIONS TRANSFORMERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE
A. Provide 480 volt primary step down transformers as shown, scheduled and as specified.
B. Provide control power transformers as required for proper operation of starters contactors
etc.
C. The type of transformers required includes dry -type general purpose transformers.
1.02 STANDARDS
A. Products shall be designed, manufactured, tested and installed in compliance with
applicable IEEE, NEMA TPI-2002, NEMA ST1 and ST20, ANSI C33.4 and C89.2
standards.
B. All transformers shall be UL-labeled. Schlobohm, Rick (GE Consumer & Industrial)] All
transformers 15 kVA and larger shall meet the requirements of Nema TP-1 2002 per the
requirements of EPACT 2005.
1.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Provide one of the following manufacturers for general purpose use:
1. General Electric Company
2. Square D Company
3. Siemens
4. Eaton Corporation
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop drawings shall include, but not be limited to:
1. Cutsheets of transformers with sound and load ratings, dimensions, weights,
impedance rating, insulation type, temperature rise and tap configurations.
1.05 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES
A. National Electrical Code.
B. Local, municipal, and/or state codes that have jurisdiction.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL PURPOSE
A. Provide dry type, two -winding transformers with primary and secondary voltages and KVA
ratings as shown on plans. Transformers shall operate at 60 hertz. All transformers shall
be manufacture with standard materials and components.
2.02 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS FOR GENERAL PURPOSE TRANSFORMERS
A. All cores shall be constructed of high grade, non -aging silicon steel with high magnetic
LOW VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTIONS TRANSFORMERS 26 22 13-1
Clark Condon Associates
August 2010
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
permeability, and low hysteresis and eddy current losses. Magnetic flux densities are to
be kept well below the saturation point. The core laminations shall be clamped together
with structural steel angles. The completed core and coil shall be isolated from the base
by means of rubber, vibration -absorbing mounts. There shall be no metal -to -metal
contact between the core and coil and the enclosure. The vibration isolating system shall
be designed to provide a permanent fastening of the core and coil to the enclosure.
Sound isolating system requiring the complete removal of all fastening devices will not be
accepted. Windings shall be copper or electrical grade aluminum terminated on tin plated
or copper bars. Foil windings are not acceptable.
B. The transformer core shall be visibly grounded to the enclosure by means of a flexible
grounding conductor sized in accordance with NEMA, IEEE and ANSI standards.
C. Transformer coils shall be of continuous -wound type construction and shall be
impregnated with non -hygroscopic, thermo-setting varnish.
D. Transformers shall be enclosed in drip -proof, metallic enclosures designed to provide for
air cooling and prevent accidental contact with live conductors. Wiring compartment shall
be located below the core and coil and cooled by air circulation or insulated from the core
and coil by means of a suitable thermal insulation barrier. Transformer exposed to
weather or installed in a sprinkled area shall have rain shields on all openings. Entire
transformer enclosure shall be cleaned, phosphatized, primed and painted with a gray,
baked enamel.
E. Transformers shall operate at 100% nameplate KVA rating continuously while in a 40
degree C ambient without exceeding the rated average winding temperature rise of the
ANSI insulation system as described below.
Temperature rating shall be as follows:
RATING
PHASE
INSULATION -TEMP. RISE
0.025 through 3 KVA
Single
Type B - 800 C
5 through 25 KVA
Single
Type F - 1151 C
3 through 15 KVA
Three
Type F - 1151 C
37'/z KVA and larger
Single
Type H - 1500 C
30 KVA and larger
Three
Type H - 1501 C
F. Transformers shall have minimum full load rated taps in the primary windings as follows:
3 through 25 KVA
2 -
5% FCBN
15 through 300 KVA
6 -
2-'/2% TAPS, 2 above and 4 below normal
G. Maximum sound ratings shall be as follows:
KVA
db
0 to 9
40
10 to 50
45
51 to 150
50
151 to 300
55
301 to 500
60
LOW VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTIONS TRANSFORMERS 26 22 13-2
Clark Condon Associates
August 2010
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
A. General: Install transformer in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, and
recognized industry practices.
B. Housekeeping Pad: Provide a nominal 3-'/z' high, 2500 PSI (28 Day) concrete reinforced
pad with number 6 welded wire mesh. The pad shall conform to the shape of the
transformer and extend at least 3 inches beyond the length and width of the transformer.
All corners of the pad shall be rounded.
C. Mounting: Install floor mounted transformers on properly sized rubber -in -shear vibration
isolators. Trapeze mounted transformers shall use rubber -in -shear hangers. Wall
mounted transformers shall not be mounted directly to the wall without vibration isolation.
D. Connection: Route conductors in a minimum of 2 feet of flexible steel conduit to
transformer enclosure. Provide grounding conductor sized per NEC, connected to the
building grounding electrode system.
3.02 TESTING
A. Insulation, Tests: Prior to energization, check transformers windings for continuity and
test the insulation resistance. Tests shall be made using a Biddle Megger or equivalent
test instrument, per manufacturers' recommendations. Provide written documentation of
testing. Submit with O & M manuals.
B. Tap Setting: Measure current and voltage under load conditions to provide correct tap
settings.
END OF SECTION
LOW VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTIONS TRANSFORMERS 26 22 13-3
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Park
SECTION 26 2416 - PANELBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE
A. Provide panelboards as shown, scheduled and as specified herein.
B. The types of panelboards include:
1. Lighting and appliance panelboards.
2. Power distribution panelboards.
1.02 STANDARDS
A. Products shall be designed, manufactured, tested and installed in compliance with
applicable standards.
B. Products shall conform to all applicable UL standards and shall be UL-labeled.
1.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Provide one of the following manufacturers:
1. General Electric Company
2. Square D Company
3. Siemens
4. Eaton
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop drawings shall include, but not be limited to:
1. Cutsheets of all enclosures, circuit breakers, fusible switches, bussing, rating,
schedules and all accessories clearly labeled.
1.05 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES
A. WORK IN ACCORDANCE WITH:
1. National Electrical Code.
2. Local, municipal, or state codes that have jurisdiction.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS
A. General
Furnish and install power distribution, lighting and appliance panelboards as indicated in
the panelboard schedule and as shown on the plans. Power distribution panelboards
shall be equipped with fusible switches or circuit breakers as shown on the schedule.
Panelboards shall be equipped with thermal -magnetic, molded case circuit breakers of
frame and trip ratings as shown on the schedule.
B. Busing Assembly and Temperature Rise
PANELBOARDS
26 24 16-1
Clark Condon Associates
August 2010
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
Panelboard bus structure and main lugs or main breaker shall have current ratings as
shown on the panelboard schedule. Such ratings shall be established by heat rise tests
with maximum hot spot temperature on any connector or bus bar not to exceed 50°C.
Rise above 40°C ambient. Heat rise test shall be conducted in accordance with
Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL 67. The use of conductor dimensions will not be
accepted in lieu of actual heat tests. All current carrying parts of the bus shall be tin or
silver plated copper.
Bus structure shall be insulated. Bus bar connections to the branch circuit
breakers shall be distributed phase or phase sequence type and shall accept Bolt-
on circuit breakers for lighting and appliance panelboards.
Provide a bare uninsulated and/or insulated ground bus and full size neutral bus as
required and indicated in each panelboard enclosure.
C. 480/277 Volt Lighting Panelboards
Main breakers shall be vertically mounted. Horizontally mounted main breakers are not
acceptable.
Circuit breakers shall be bolt -on thermal -magnetic, molded case circuit breakers.
Breakers shall be 1, 2 or 3 pole with an integral crossbar to assure simultaneous opening
of all poles in multiple circuit breakers. Breaker shall have an over -center, trip -free,
toggle -type operating mechanism with quick -make, quick -break action and positive
handle indication. Handles shall have "ON", "OFF' and "TRIPPED" positions. Circuit
breakers shall be UL listed in accordance with UL Standard 489 and shall be rated 277
volt ac (single pole, 15-30 amperes) or 480Y/277 volts ac (2 and 3 pole) with continuous
current ratings as noted on the plan. Interrupting ratings shall be a minimum of 18,000
rms symmetrical amperes at 277 volts ac (single pole) or 480Y/277 volts ac (2 and 3
pole). Single pole, 15 and 20 ampere circuit breakers intended to switch fluorescent
lighting loads on a regular basis shall carry the SWD marking.
The lugs for terminating conductors shall be rated at 750 C on all panel boards
and circuit breakers.
D. 240 Volt Lighting and Appliance Panelboard
Main breakers shall be vertically mounted. Horizontally mounted main breakers are not
acceptable.
Circuit breakers shall be bolt -on thermal -magnetic, molded case circuit breakers.
Breakers shall be 1, 2, or 3 pole with an integral crossbar to assure simultaneous opening
of all poles in multiple circuit breakers. Breakers shall have an overcenter, trip -free,
toggle -type operating mechanism with quick -make, quick -break action and positive
handle indication. Handles shall have "ON", "OFF' and "TRIPPED" positions.
Circuit breakers shall be UL listed in accordance with UL standard 489 and shall be rated
240 volts ac maximum with continuous current rating as noted on the plans.
Branch circuit breakers feeding convenience outlets shall have sensitive instantaneous
trip settings of not more than 10 times the trip settings of the breaker to prevent repeated
arcing short resulting from frayed appliance cords. Single pole 15 and 20 ampere circuit
breakers shall be UL listed as "Switching Breakers" at 120V ac and carry the SWD
marking.
UL Class A ground fault circuit protection shall be provided on all receptacle circuits
PANELBOARDS 26 24 16-2
Clark Condon Associates
August 2010
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
serving wet areas and on all 120V ac branch circuits as specified on the plans or
panelboard schedule. This protection shall be an integral part of the branch circuit
breaker which also provides overload and short circuit protection for branch circuit wiring.
Tripping of a branch circuit breaker containing ground fault circuit interruption shall not
disturb the feeder circuit to the panelboard. A single pole circuit breaker with integral
ground fault circuit interruption shall require no more panelboard branch circuit space
than a conventional circuit breaker. Circuit breakers shall be rated 10,000 AIC at 240V
unless otherwise noted on plans.
Provide double sized neutral bus with panels served from a non -linear transformer or
when indicated on drawings. This shall be a UL approved assembly.
E. Cabinets and Fronts
The panelboard bus assembly shall be enclosed in a steel cabinet with multiple
knockouts. The rigidity and gauge of steel to be as specified in UL Standard 50 for
cabinets. Wiring gutter space shall be in accordance with UL Standard 67 for
panelboards. The box shall be fabricated from galvanized steel or equivalent rust
resistant steel. Provide stainless steel front cover for all panels located in all Pool
Equipment rooms. All NEMA-1 lighting and receptacle panels shall have hinged front
covers. The front cover shall have a door with hinges, latch and a lock. The hinged front
covers shall allow full access to the circuit breaker gutter area without having to remove
the entire front cover. All panelboard lock shall be keyed alike. Circuit breaker and
fusible distribution panels shall have four -piece trims. A circuit directory frame and card
with a clear plastic covering shall be provided on the inside of the door. Provide NEMA 1
enclosure where installed indoors unless otherwise noted. Provide NEMA 3R enclosure
where installed outside or in a sprinkled area.
F. Safety Barrier
The distribution panelboard interior assembly shall be dead front with panelboard front
removed. Main lugs or main breakers shall have barriers on five sides. The barrier in
front of the main lugs shall be hinged to a fixed part of the interior. The end of the bus
structure opposite the mains shall have barriers.
G. Integrated Equipment Short Circuit Rating
Each panelboard, as a complete unit, shall have a short circuit current rating equal to or
greater than the integrated equipment rating shown on the panelboard schedule or on the
plans. This rating shall be established by testing with the over -current devices mounted in
the panelboard. The short circuit tests on the over -current devices and on the panelboard
structure shall be made simultaneously by connecting the fault to each over -current
device with the panelboard connected to its rated voltage source. Method of testing shall
be per Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL 67. The source shall be capable of
supplying the specified panelboard short circuit current or greater. Testing of panelboard
over -current devices for short circuit rating only while individually mounted is not
acceptable. Also, testing of the bus structure alone is not acceptable. Panelboards shall
be marked with their maximum short circuit current rating at the supply voltage and shall
be t IL listed.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install panelboards, including electrical connections, in accordance with
manufacturers written instructions, NEC and recognized industry practices.
PANELBOARDS 26 24 16-3
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
August 2010 Festival Park
B. Housekeeping Pads: Mount floor mounted panelboards on 4 inch high concrete
housekeeping pads.
C. Fuses: Install fuses of the rating and class as shown in each fusible distribution panel
scheduled on drawings.
D. Conduits: Stub up three one inch conduits to an accessible location above the ceiling for
each recessed panelboard.
3.02 IDENTIFICATION
A. Nameplate: Each panelboard shall have an engraved bakelite nameplate. Nameplates
shall be white with black letters and show panel designation. Nameplates shall be
attached with stainless steel screws.
B. Directory Card: Place a neat, carefully typewritten directory card identifying the load
served by each branch circuit in the frame on the panel door, under a clear plastic cover.
Spares and spaces shall be written with erasable pencil for future use.
C. Replacement Components: Where circuit breakers or fuses are applied in compliance
with the series combination ratings marked on the equipment by the manufacturers, the
equipment enclosure(s) shall be legibly marked in the field to indicate the equipment has
been applied with a series combination rating. The marking shall be readily visible and
state "caution - Series Rated System." (NEC 110-22). Nameplate shall also identify
replacement components.
END OF SECTION
PANELBOARDS 26 24 16-4
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Park
SECTION 26 27 26 - WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE
A. Provide wiring devices as shown; scheduled, required and as specified.
B. The types of wiring devices required include:
1. Receptacles
2. Switches
3. Coverplates
1.02 STANDARDS
A. NEMA WD-1
B. NEMA WD-5
C. UL
D. Federal Spec WC-596-F and WS-896
1.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Leviton Manufacturing
B. Hubbell
C. Pass & Seymour
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop drawings shall include but not limited to:
1. Cut sheets of all devices indicating NEMA configuration, rating, materials, color,
and all accessories.
2. Cut sheets of all coverplates indicating materials, color and any engraving
specified on drawing or in the specifications.
1.05 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES WORK IN ACCORDANCE WITH:
A. National Electrical Code.
B. Local, municipal, or state codes that have jurisdiction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS
A. GENERAL
1. Provide factory assemble wiring devices with the rating type and color as required
and specified for the service indicated.
2. Provide matching one-piece multiple gang plates where switches are ganged.
WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26-1
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
August 2010 Festival Park
Provide wall plates for each receptacle furnished.
3. Architect reserves the right to select wiring device styles and colors to match wall
finish.
4. Wall plates shall be of same manufacturer as devices.
2.02 SWITCHES
A. Provide specification grade White toggle switches where indicated on the Drawings.
Provide "Red" switches for switching emergency lighting circuits where switching is
indicated. Coordinate exact locations with architect.
B. Wall switches shall be 20 amp, 120-277 volt and shall be Leviton, Hubbell or P&S as
follows:
1. SINGLE POLE SWITCHES:
Leviton 1221-2, Hubbell HBL 1221, P&S PS20AC1
2. DOUBLE POLE SWITCHES:
Leviton 1222-2, Hubbell HBL 1222, P&S PS20AC2
3. THREE WAY SWITCHES:
Leviton 1223-2, Hubbell HBL 1223, P&S PS20AC3
4. FOUR WAY SWITCHES:
Leviton 1224-2, Hubbell HBL 1224, P&S PS20AC4
5. MOMENTARY CONTACT SWITCHES:
Leviton 1257, Hubbell HBL 1557, P&S 1251
6. THREE POSITION, TWO CIRCUIT MAINTAINED CONTACT SWITCHES:
Leviton 1285, Hubbell HBL 1385, P&S 1225
7. KEY TYPE LOCKABLE CORBIN STYLE:
Leviton 1221-2KL with 2KL key or P&S PS20AC1-KL with 4609 key for each
switch, Hubbel #HBL 1221-RKL.
C. Dimmers: Provide Lutron Nova "T" series or Leviton or as shown on drawings. Wall box
dimmers shall be sized to handle the load. Where fluorescent dimming ballasts are to be
used, coordinate wall box dimmer with ballast manufacturer.
D. Light Handle Switches: Provide Leviton 1221-7L-LHC, Hubbell HBL1221-IL, P&S
PS20AC1-ISL lighted handles to switch emergency lights were noted on the drawings.
2.03 RECEPTACLES
A. Provide specification grade White receptacles where indicated on the Drawings. Provide
"Red" receptacles for receptacles on emergency power. Coordinate exact location with
architect.
B. Receptacles shall be Leviton, Hubbell or Pass & Seymour as follows:
1. Duplex 20A-125V-self grounding: (Nema configuration 5-20R):
Leviton 5362, Hubbell HBL5362, P&S 5362A
2. Simplex 20A-125V-Self Grounding: (Nema configuration 5-20R):
Leviton 5361, Hubbell HBL5361, P&S 5361
3. Isolated ground duplex, 20A-125V: (Orange, Nema configuration 5-20R)
Leviton 53621G, Hubbell IG5362, P&S IG6300.
4. Clock hanger receptacle 15A-125V: (Brown with stainless steel plate with
hanger, Nema configuration 5-15R).
Leviton 5361-CH, Hubbell 5235, P&S S3733-SS
5. Ground fault circuit interrupter (GFCI) receptacle 20A-125V; (Nema Configuration
5-20R, shall incorporate features which will lock -out or render the device
WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26-2
Clark Condon Associates
August 2010
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
incapable of being reset if ground fault protection is compromised, with "Feed
through" connectors capable of protecting connected downstream receptacles on
a single circuit, and of being installed in a 2-3/4" deep outlet box without adapter,
Leviton 8899, P & S 2094.
6. Tamper resistant receptacles 20A-125V (Nema configuration 5-20R):
Leviton 8300-SG, Hubbell HBL8300SG, P&S TR63-H.
7. Surge Protection Duplex Receptacles 20A-125V, (Nema 5-20R) Hospital grade to
include LED light and audible alarm:
Leviton 8380, Hubbell HBL 8362SA, P&S 8300SP
8. Equipment receptacles shall be coordinated with owner/manufacturer
requirements and the correct and appropriate receptacle and coverplate shall be
installed.
2.04 PLATES
A. Furnish and install plates on all outlet boxes. Oversize (Jumbo) plates are not
acceptable.
Plates shall be smooth nylon.
B. Provide Taymac Bell, Carlon or Leviton NEMA 3R weatherproof coverplates on all exterior
wiring devices. Enclosure shall be suitable for wet locations when in use.
C. Plates shall be Leviton, Pass & Seymour or Hubbell 302/304 smooth stainless steel on all
receptacles 30 amps and larger.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 WIRING DEVICE MOUNTING HEIGHTS
A. Unless noted to the contrary on plans, or directed otherwise during the progress of the
Work, wiring devices shall be set as follows:
1. Switches 42" above finished floor.
2. Wall mounted receptacles shall be installed vertically at 15 inches to the bottom
outlet above finished floor unless otherwise noted or as required by local codes.
3. Wall telephone outlets shall be mounted 15 inches to the bottom above finished
floor unless otherwise noted. Mount even with wall mounted receptacles.
4. At locations above counters, set devices at 6 inches above to the centerline
counter tops; verify exact mounting height with the architect.
3.02 INSTALLATION (Refer to 26 05 33 for outlet box specifications.)
A. Wall switches shall be set in a suitable steel box and shall be installed on the strike side
of the door as finally hung, whether so indicated on the Drawings or not.
B. Receptacles shall be installed in a suitable steel box.
C. The Architect reserves the right to relocate wiring device up to a distance of 5 feet from
the location shown, before rough -in, without additional cost.
D. Provide multi -gang device covers at locations where devices gang together.
E. Device locations are indicated schematically on the drawings along with the type and
mounting height. Final locations and mounting heights shall be coordinated with the
Architect on the jobsite, and with shop drawings of equipment; including equipment to be
furnished and installed by the Owner. Devices installed in walls covered with vinyl, fabric
WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26-3
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
August 2010 Festival Park
wallpaper or other special finishes shall be coordinated and verified with the Architect on
the job -site.
F. Stranded wire termination to switches, receptacles, devices and miscellaneous control
devices shall be with an approved solderless terminal if clamp type securing is not
possible (i.e. Sta-Con crimp on fork tongue connectors; Burndy Type TP-F).
G. Provide keyed switches in all common areas not monitored by the faculty (i.e. gym,
corridors, cafeteria, commons natatoriums).
END OF SECTION
WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26-4
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Park
SECTION 26 28 16 - SAFETY AND DISCONNECT SWITCHES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE
A. Provide safety and disconnect switches as shown, scheduled and as specified herein.
1.02 STANDARDS
A. Products shall be designed, manufactured, tested and installed in compliance with
applicable standards.
1. NEMA KS1 - Enclosed switches
2. Federal specification W-S-865C-Heavy duty switches
B. Products shall conform all applicable UL standards, including UL98 (standard for safety,
enclosed and dead front switches) and shall be UL-labeled.
1.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Provide one of the following manufacturers:
1. General Electric Company
2. Square D Company
3. Siemens
4. Eaton
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop drawings shall include, but not be limited to:
1. Cutsheets of switches with ratings, physical dimensions and all accessories
clearly labeled.
1.05 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES
A. WORK IN ACCORDANCE WITH:
1. National Electrical Code.
2. Local, municipal, or state codes that have jurisdiction.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Furnish and install heavy duty type safety switches with the number of switched poles as
indicated on the plans and specifications. All safety switches shall be NEMA Heavy Duty
Type HD, and Underwriters Laboratories listed.
2.02 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS
A. Switch Interior
All switches shall have switch blades that are fully visible in the "OFF" position when the
door is open. Switches shall have removable arc suppressor where necessary, to permit
easy access to line side lugs. Lugs shall be front removable and UL listed for 60°C and
750C copper or aluminum cables. All switches blades and contacts shall be plated
copper. Adjust fuse block to accept Class J fuses.
SAFETY AND DISCONNECT SWITCH 26 28 16-1
Clark Condon Associates
August 2010
B. Switch Mechanism
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
Switches shall have a quick -make and quick -break operating handle and mechanism,
which shall be an integral part of the box, not the cover. Padlocking provisions shall be
provided for locking in the "OFF" position with at least three padlocks. Switches shall
have a dual cover interlock to prevent unauthorized opening of the switch door when the
handle is in the "ON" position, and to prevent closing of the switch mechanism with the
door open. A means shall be provided to permit authorized personnel to release the
interlock for inspection purposes. Handle position shall indicate if switch is "ON" or
"OFF".
C. Neutral
Provide a solid neutral with the safety switch where a neutral is present in the circuit.
D. Ratings
Switches shall be horsepower rated for ac and/or do as indicated by the plans. The fused
switches shall have Class R rejection fuse clips or adjusted for Class J fuses. UL listed
short circuit ratings of the switches, when equipped with Class R fuses, shall be 200,000
symmetrical amperes.
E. Enclosures
1. Indoor switches shall be furnished in NEMA 1 enclosures.
2. Outdoor switches, switches located in wet areas or sprinkled areas shall be
furnished in NEMA 3R enclosures.
3. Switches installed in wet areas such as cooling tower areas shall be NEMA 4X
stainless steel or fiberglass reinforced polyester.
4. Switches installed in kitchens shall be stainless steel.
5. Switches installed in areas of a corrosive nature and subjected to salt air shall be
NEMA 4X stainless steel or fiberglass reinforced polyester.
F. Service Entrance
Switch shall be suitable for use as service entrance equipment when installed in
accordance with the National Electrical Code.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Install safety and disconnect switches, including electrical connections, and fuses in
accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, NEC and recognized industry
practices.
B. Location: Install switches within sight of controllers.
C. Hubs: Provide bolt -on hubs for rainproof or wet area applications.
3.02 IDENTIFICATION
A. Nameplate: Each disconnect switch shall have an engraved bakelite nameplate.
Nameplates shall be white with black letters and show equipment served. Nameplates
shall be attached with stainless steel screws.
END OF SECTION
SAFETY AND DISCONNECT SWITCH 26 28 16-2
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Park
SECTION 26 29 26 - MISCELLANEOUS ELECTRICAL CONTROLS AND WIRING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all
work herein.
1.02 SCOPE
A. Provide the various miscellaneous control devices, wiring and additional branch circuits
as required, shown and specified.
B. The types of miscellaneous control devices and wiring include but not limited to the
following.
1. Contactors
2. Relays
3. Photocells
4. Time switches
5. Additional control wiring and safety devices as shown and specified.
C. WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE:
1. Various control devices, of an electrical nature, for the safe operation and
temperature control of the heating, ventilating, air conditioning and plumbing
systems provided under Division 23.
2. All control wiring and conduit shall be furnished under Division 23. All power
wiring 120 volt or larger shall be provided by Division 26.
3. Refer to building controls specification, Division 23 for scope of work required to
be performed by Division 26 (electrical contractor).
1.03 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES
A. WORK IN ACCORDANCE WITH:
1. National Electrical Code.
2. Local municipal or state codes that have jurisdiction.
1.04 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Provide one of the following manufacturers:
1. LIGHTING CONTACTORS AND RELAYS
a.
General Electric
b.
Square D Company
C.
Automatic Switch Company
2. PHOTOCELLS
AND TIME SWITCHES
a.
Tork, Inc.
b.
Intermatic time controls
C.
AMF paragon
MISCELLANEOUS ELECTRICAL CONTROLS AND WIRING 26 29 26-1
Clark Condon Associates
August 2010
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIAL
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
A. GENERAL: This Section shall outline the basic installation of electric devices, conduit,
boxes, fittings, and wiring required for complete interconnection of several systems, this
may not reflect every required appurtenance. It does not cover integral parts of
mechanical equipment.
B. CONTACTORS AND RELAYS: Provide control wiring, contactors, and relays with the
ampere -rating and number of poles as shown, specified, and required for a complete and
functioning system.:
1. Rated at 600 volts, 60 hertz.
2. Continuously rated contacts for all types of ballast and tungsten lighting,
resistance and motor loads. Contacts shall be sized as scheduled or noted.
3. Shall have totally enclosed, double -break silver -cadmium -oxide power contacts.
Auxiliary arcing contacts are not acceptable. Contact inspection and replacement
shall be possible without disturbing line or load wiring.
4. The contactor shall have straight -through wiring with all terminals clearly marked.
5. The contactor shall be approved per UL508 and/or CSA, and be designed in
accordance with NEMA ICS2-21 1B.
6. They shall be industrial -duty rated for applications to 600 volts maximum.
7. The contactor shall have provisions for factory or field addition of:
a. Four (4) N.O. or N.C. auxiliary contacts rated 6 amperes continuous at
600 volts.
b. Single or double circuit, N.O. or N.C., 30 or 60 ampere 600 volt power -
pole adder.
8. The contactor shall have a NEMA type 1 enclosure unless otherwise noted.
9. Control power to the contactor 120V control circuit shall be provided from the
nearest panelboard 120V circuit. If the 120V control power circuit is not shown,
provide a control power transformer for 120 volt control power and a 120 volt coil
when required for control. Provide primary and secondary fuses on the control
power transformer.
10. Electrically Held Lighting - Contactor coils shall be continuously rated and
encapsulated. Electrically held contactors are not to be used unless specifically
shown on the plans.
11. Mechanically Held Lighting Contactors - Coil -clearing contacts shall be supplied
so that the contactor coils shall be energized only during the instance of
operation. Both latch and unlatch coils shall be encapsulated. All contactors
shall be mechanically held unless noted otherwise on the plans.
12. Provide 2-wire or 3-wire control modules as required to operate lighting
contactors.
13. Provide hand -off -automatic controls (H-O-A) for each lighting contractor.
C. Photocells: Provide a specification grade self contained, weatherproof, photoelectric
control that shall be mounted on an FS type weatherproof junction box. The photocell
shall:
1. Switch "ON" at dusk and "OFF" at dawn.
2. Adjustable from 2 to 50 foot candles.
3. Rated at 2000 watts.
4. Use 1" diameter cadmium sulphide cell.
5. Have a 2 minute delay to prevent false switching.
D. TIME SWITCHES: Provide a 7-day digital time clock with battery back-up feature
MISCELLANEOUS ELECTRICAL CONTROLS AND WIRING 26 29 26-2
Clark Condon Associates
August 2010
installed in a NEMA 3R enclosure.
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
E. Control wiring shall be not less than #14 AWG type TW, and shall be color coded and
labeled with Brady markers throughout. Bundle multiple conductors with Ty -Raps.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 Install miscellaneous electrical controls and wiring to provide a functioning system.
3.02 H.V.A.C. AND PLUMBING CONTROL
A. Install electrical devices not an integral part of mechanical equipment providing conduit,
boxes, fittings, wiring, and other devices.
B. Electrical contractor is responsible for providing all line voltage power to devices indicated
by controls contractor that require electrical power to operate. Electrical contractor shall
terminate line voltage power to termination points indicated by control contractor.
Electrical contractor shall coordinate with controls contractor to determine sizing and
quantities of line voltage circuits to adequately power control devices. Electrician is to
obtain circuits from nearest low voltage panel using spare circuits provided, if device
requires power not already available.
3.03 Install contactor and relays in electrical/mechanical rooms unless otherwise noted.
3.04 Install photocells on the roof unless otherwise directed by the architect. Coordinate any roof
penetrations with all other trades and shield from other light sources.
3.05 Provide miscellaneous connections for signs and other furnished equipment as shown on the
Drawings.
END OF SECTION
MISCELLANEOUS ELECTRICAL CONTROLS AND WIRING 26 29 26-3
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Park
SECTION 26 4313 - SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICE — HIGH INTERRUPTING (TVSS)
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE
A. Provide electrical and mechanical requirements for a modular high-energy surge
protective device system (SPD). The system shall provide effective high energy surge
current diversion and be suitable for application in ANSI/IEEE C62.41 Category A, B and
C3 environments, as tested by ANSI/IEEE C62.11, C62.45.
B. The system shall be constructed using multiple surge current diversion modules utilizing
metal oxide varistors (MOV) computer matched to
+/- 1 volt variance and tested for manufacturer's defects. The modules shall be designed
and constructed in a manner that ensures surge current sharing. Use of gas tubes,
silicon avalanche diodes or selenium cells are unacceptable.
1.02 STANDARDS
A. The specified system shall be designed, manufactured, tested and installed in compliance
with the following codes and standards:
Canadian Standards Association (CSA)
American National Standards Institute and
Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (ANSI/IEEE C62.11, C62.41, C62.45)
Federal Information Processing Standards Publication 94 (FIBS PUB 94)
National Electrical Manufacturer Association (NEMA LS-1 1992)
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA 20, 70, 75 and 780)
National Electric Code
Underwriters Laboratories (UL 1449 and UL 1283) (Second Edition)
International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC 801)
International Standards Organization(ISO) Company certified ISO 9001 for
manufacturing, design and service
EMC Directive 89/336/EEC - CE compliant
B. The systems individual units shall be UL Listed and labeled under UL 1449 (Second
Edition) Standard for Transient Voltage Surge Suppression and the surge ratings shall be
permanently affixed to the SPD. The units shall also be listed and labeled to UL1283
Standard for Electromagnetic Interference Filters, and CSA Listed.
1.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Liebert Corporation
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 certified. The specified system shall be tested at the
component and fully assembled level, under surge conditions with AC power applied for a
minimum of 1 hour. Testing shall include but not be limited to quality control checks,
dielectric voltage withstand test per UL and CSA requirements, UL ground continuity tests
and operational and calibration tests.
B. The unit shall be designed and manufactured in the USA by a qualified manufacturer of
line conditioning equipment and Active Tracking Filters. The manufacturer shall have
been engaged in the design and manufacture of such products for a minimum of 10
years.
SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES 26 43 13-1
Clark Condon Associates
August 2010
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.01 ENCLOSURE
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
A. The specified system shall be provided in a heavy duty NEMA 4 dust -tight, drip -tight
enclosure with no ventilation openings. The cover of the enclosure shall be hinged on the
left side and require a tool for access to internal components. A drawing pocket shall be
provided inside the door for storage of unit drawings and installation/operation manual.
All monitoring indication must be visible without opening the door. The enclosure
maximum dimensions shall be (20) inches/(508) millimeters high, (16) inches/(406)
millimeters wide and (8) inches/(203) millimeters deep.
2.02 OVERCURRENT PROTECTION (FUSING)
A. All suppression components shall be individually fused and rated to allow maximum
specified surge current capacity. For every 100 k Amps of Surge Current Capacity, 120
amps RMS of internal, integral fusing shall be required. Devices that utilize a single fuse
to protect two or more suppression paths are not accepted.
Individual surge components shall be sand packed and fused at a maximum of 17.2
amps to prevent violent failure. The fusing shall be UL listed to be capable of interrupting
up to 200kA symmetrical fault current with 480VAC applied. Replaceable fusing is
unacceptable. Overcurrent protection that limits specified surge currents is not
acceptable.
2.03 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Protection Modes
The SPD shall provide protection as follows: All modes, L-N or L-L, L-G and N-G (where
applicable) Note: L = Line, G = Ground, N = Neutral
B. UL 1449 Ratings
The maximum UL 1449 listed surge ratings for each and/or all of the specified
protection
modes shall not exceed the following:
System voltage Surge Voltage Rating
L-N L-G N-G
L-L
120/240 330 volts 400 volts 400 volts
600 volts
120/208 330 volts 400 volts 400 volts
600 volts
240 800 volts
800 volts
277/480 700 volts 800 volts 600 volts
1200 volts
480 1200 volts
1500 volts
C. Noise Attenuation
The unit shall be UL 1283 Listed as an electromagnetic interference filter. The filter shall
provide 41dB at 100kHz, 31dB at 1MHz, 35dB at 10MHz, 53dB at 100MHz, per 50 Ohm
Insertion Loss Methodology from MIL 220A. The system shall provide up to 120-dB
insertion loss from 100 kHz to 100 MHz when used in a coordinated facility system.
D. Life Cycle Testing
The SPD system shall be duty life cycle tested to survive, 10kA (8x20µs), 20kV
(1.2x50Ns), IEEE C62.41 Category C surge current with less than 5% degradation of
clamping voltage. The minimum numbers of surges the unit shall be able to protect
against are:
Model Surge Ratinq Number of Life Cycle Surges
SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES 26 43 13-2
Clark Condon Associates
August 2010
160kA per phase
320kA per phase
2.04 CONNECTIONS
Per Mode
L-N L-G N-G
12000 12000 12000
24000 24000 24000
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
Per Phase
(L-N + L-G)
24000
48000
A. The terminals shall be provided to accommodate wire sizes up to #1/0 AWG.
2.05 INTERNAL CONNECTIONS AND SERVICEABILITY
A. All surge current diversion module intra-unit connections shall be by way of low
impedance copper plates. Surge current diversion modules shall use bolted connections
to the plates for reliable, low impedance connections. The system shall be designed for
simple change out of any or all SPD component modules by a qualified electrician.
Designs that require factory service are not acceptable. All connections, conductors and
terminals must be appropriately sized for specified surge current capacity.
2.06 STANDARD FEATURES
A. Component Testing and Monitoring
The monitoring circuitry must continually verify the protection status during operation, and
display this information on the front cover status panel. The SPD must also contain a
built -in -test circuit that will verify the integrity of all fuse links and each associated MOV.
The built -in -test circuit must cycle through all phase banks and the neutral -ground bank
sending test signals to all modules. The integrity of all fuses in test must be indicted on
the status panel. All testing must be able to be performed without disconnecting power to
the SPD. Units that require external test sets or equipment are unacceptable.
B. Unit Status Indicators:
Red and green solid state indicators with printed labels shall be provided on the hinged
front cover to redundantly indicate on-line unit status. The absence of the green light and
the presence of the red light shall reliably indicate that surge protection is reduced and
service is needed to restore full operation.
C. Dry Contacts for remote monitoring:
Electrically isolated Form C dry contacts, one normally open and one normally closed set
standard on all units for remote monitoring.
D. Undervoltage detection:
Unit shall be equipped with 70% undervoltage detection capability.
E. Phase Loss Monitoring:
Unit shall be equipped with phase loss monitoring.
F. Power Loss Monitoring:
Unit shall be equipped with power loss monitoring.
2.07 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Storage Temperature:
B. Operating Temperature:
C. Relative Humidity:
D. Audible Noise:
-55 to +85 C (-67 to +187 F)
-40 to +60 C (40 to 140 F)
0% to 95%
less than 45 dBa at 5 feet (1.5 m).
SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES 26 43 13-3
Clark Condon Associates
August 2010
E. Operating Altitude:
2.08 WARRANTY
0 to 18,000 feet above sea level.
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
A. The manufacturer shall provide a full five year parts and labor warranty from date of
shipment against any part failure when installed in compliance with manufacturer's written
instructions, UL Listing requirements and any applicable national, state or local electrical
codes. Direct, factory trained, ISO 9001 certified employees must be available for 48
hour assessment. A 24 hour 800 number must be available to support warranty.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. The contractor shall install the parallel SPD with short and straight conductors as practically
possible. Locate adjacent to the switchboard or panel it is serving. The contractor shall twist the
SPD input conductors together to reduce input conductor inductance. The contractor shall follow
the SPD manufacturer's recommended installation practices as found in the installation, operation
and maintenance manual and comply with all applicable codes. Note, when TVSS location is
more than 5 feet from switchboard/panel it is protecting connection shall be made using Liebert
Accuguide cables.
END OF SECTION
SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES 26 43 13-4
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Park
SECTION 26 51 00 - LIGHTING FIXTURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE
A. Furnish and install general and emergency lighting fixtures as noted on the drawings.
Fixtures shall be completely wired with lamps installed and shall be in perfect operating
condition at the time of substantial completion.
B. The types of lighting fixtures required for this project include:
1. Fluorescent
2. Incandescent and
3. High -Intensity -Discharge (HID)
1.02 STANDARDS
A. All fixtures shall conform to all applicable UL standards and shall be UL label including
damp and wet location ratings.
B. All fluorescent ballast shall comply with certified ballast manufacture (CBM) standard and
CBM labeled.
C. NFPA 101
D. ANSI C82.1
E. NEMA-LE
F. IEEE Publication 587 Category "A" (Electronic Ballast)
1.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Provide lighting fixtures produced by manufacturers as shown and scheduled.
B. BALLAST:
1. Provide one of the following manufacturers
a. Advance Transformer Company
b. Universal Lighting Technologies
C. Osram Sylvania
C. LAMPS:
1. Provide one of the following manufacturers
a. General Electric Company
b. Osram Sylvania
C. North American Philips
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop drawings shall include a brochure with a separate cut sheet for each fixture type
arranged in alphabetical order with fixture and all accessories/options clearly labeled.
Provide performance data for each fixture. Provide an independent test lab report for
each fixture if requested by the Architect/Engineer.
B. Provide ballast and lamp data brochures indicating which lamp and ballast (if required)
will be used in each fixture type.
LIGHTING FIXTURES 2651 00-1
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
August 2010 Festival Park
C. Furnish air handling and heat removal data for light fixtures specified with these
requirements.
1.05 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES
A. WORK IN ACCORDANCE WITH:
1. National Electrical Code.
2. Local, municipal, or state codes that have jurisdiction.
3. UL fire resistance directory.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS
A. General:
Provide the size, type and rating of each light fixture shown and scheduled. All light
fixtures shall complete with reflectors, lens, trim rings, flanges, lamps, lamp holders,
ballast, starters, fuses, wiring, earthquake clips, etc. to provide a complete functioning
light fixture.
B. Lighting Fixture Types:
1. Fluorescent Fixtures
a.
Fixture ballast and lamp holders shall be pre -wired and installed. Fixture
shall be equipped with a top access plate with knockouts for conduit
entry. Fixture shall also include knockouts at each end plate for conduit
entry.
b.
Provide disconnect switch as required by the 2008 National Electrical
Code.
C.
Fixtures shall be cold roll steel finished using a multistage iron phosphate
pretreatment to ensure maximum bonding and rust inhibitor. Finish shall
be a lighting grade, baked white enamel finish with a minimum
reflectance of 85%.
d.
Door frame shall be heavy gauge flush white steel or aluminum and
hinged from one side and use a positive spring action latch on the other
side for latching.
e.
Any lamp shall be easily replaced without removing another lamp.
f.
Fixtures installed in continuous rows shall utilize nipples or other
accessories such as snap together plug in connectors supplied by the
fixture manufacturer.
g.
Provide battery ballast for emergency light fixtures.
2. Incandescent Fixtures
a.
Fixtures shall be pre -wired equipped with frame in kit and an integral
thermal protection required by UL for recessed fixtures.
b.
Provide appropriate trim rings for recessed mounted fixtures compatible
with the ceiling in which the fixture is installed.
C.
All lamps shall be inside frosted unless otherwise noted or scheduled.
3. High
Intensity Discharge Fixtures (HID)
a.
Fixtures shall be pre -wired with frame -in kit and integral thermal
protection required by UL for recessed fixtures. Ballast shall be encased
and potted and mounted on the frame -in kit.
b.
Provide remote ballast mounted on a separate mounting plate where
indicated or scheduled. Ballast shall include a splice box.
C.
Provide a heat resistant glass shield below the lamp to contain lamp
glass envelope and ARC tube to prevent them from falling to the floor
and causing damage to life and property. Lamp rated for open fixtures
LIGHTING FIXTURES 2651 00-2
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
August 2010 Festival Park
may be used in lieu of glass shield if approved by the engineer.
Provide a fuse and fuse holder installed on the line side of each ballast to
prevent branch circuit from tripping due to faulty ballast. The fuse and
fuse holder shall be mounted in a junction box for recessed fixtures and
in the base of all poles. The fuse holder shall be waterproof when
installed in damp or wet locations. Fuse size and type shall be as
recommended by ballast manufacturer.
4. Exit signs
a. Exit signs shall meet all federal, state and local codes.
b. Provide battery packs for emergency operation when specified.
2.02 BALLASTS - COORDINATE WITH LIGHT FIXTURE SCHEDULE
A. Fluorescent
1. High efficiency electronic ballast shall be high power factor (98% minimum),
operate lamp at 40 KHz, less than 10% total harmonic content, NORMAL
BALLAST FACTOR (.88) , crest factor less than 1.7, parallel lamp configuration
universal voltage, multi -lamp, class "P" thermally protected, sound "A" rating,
encased and potted and 0°F minimum starting temperature. Provide 5 year
warranty parts and labor. Ballast shall be Osram Sylvania QHE series or
approved equal by Universal Lighting Technologies or Advance Transformer
Company.
1. Program start electronic ballast shall be high power factor 98% minimum),
operate lamp at 40 KHz, less than 10% total harmonic content, normal ballast
factor 50,000 switching cycles, universal voltage, crest factor less than 1.7, multi -
lamp, class "P" thermally protected, sound "A" rating, encased and potted and
0°F minimum starting temperature. Provide 5 year warranty parts and labor.
Ballast shall be Osram Sylvania PSN Series or approved equal by Universal
Lighting Technologies or Advance Transformer Company.
2. All outdoor ballast unless otherwise noted shall be high power factor, rapid start,
class P thermally protected, encased and potted, sound rating B and a 0°F
temperature rating. Ballast shall be CBM certified by an ETL and UL approved.
3. Provide suitable dimming ballast where indicated.
4. Compact fluorescent ballast shall be electronic, shall have circuitry designed to
shut down the system reliably and safely when lamps have reached their end of
life, high power factor, sound rating "A" and UL approved. Provide 5-year
warranty, parts and labor.
B. HID
1. Provide high power factor, constant wattage auto -transformer with a -20 degree F
temperature rating. Ballast shall have a sound rating of "B" for lamps less than
400 watts. Ballast for recessed downlights or located remotely shall be encased
and potted and shall be provided with a splice box. Provide 120 volt tap for
auxiliary lamp when specified.
2.03 LAMPS — COORDINATE WITH LIGHT FIXTURE SCHEDULE
A. F032T8 fluorescent lamps shall be 24,000 hours 3,500°K, 32 watt and low mercury. Life
rating is based on 3 hours/start.
B. All incandescent lamps shall be inside frosted, extended life rated for 2500 hours unless
otherwise noted. 130 volt lamps may be used to provide extended life.
C. All HID lamps shall be base up, base down, horizontal, or universal burn as indicated or
specified.
D. All compact fluorescent (T5 and smaller diameter) lamps shall be 35000K and 4-pin
LIGHTING FIXTURES 2651 00-3
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
August 2010 Festival Park
2.04 EMERGENCY FLUORESCENT BATTERY BALLAST
A. Provide Bodine #1350 emergency battery ballast for emergency light fixtures using T8 or
T12 lamps in 9 or 10 foot ceiling.
B. Provide Bodine #B30 Emergency Ballast for emergency light fixtures using T8 lamps in
ceiling heights greater than 12 feet.
C. Provide Bodine #B84C emergency battery ballast for emergency light fixtures using
compact fluorescent lamps.
D. Provide unswitched hot leg. Hot leg shall originate from the same branch circuit as
required in NEC article 700.12 (F).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATIONS
A. General
1. Install the type of light fixture where shown and indicated in accordance with
manufacturer's written instructions.
2. Provide earthquake clips on all recessed lay -in light fixtures as required by
building code.
3. Adjust all adjustable light fixtures, as directed by the Architect.
4. Provide safety chains and wire guards for light fixtures located in gymnasium,
multi -purpose rooms, play areas, etc.
B. Coordination
1. The contractor shall verify the type of fixtures with the ceiling types as indicated
on the drawings. Any discrepancies shall immediately be brought to the
architect's attention before the contractor places his order and accepts delivery.
Fixtures shall fit exact in the type of ceiling scheduled. Provide plaster frames,
trim rings and other accessories required for a correct fit.
2. Provide supports attached to structural member to support fixtures when the
ceiling system cannot maintain support. Provide separate supports for all
recessed ceiling mounted HID fixtures.
3. Refer to architectural reflected ceiling plan for the exact location of all light
fixtures. Notify the architect ,for any discrepancies or conflicts with structural,
architectural, mechanical piping or ductwork before installation.
C. Mounting
1. Provide support channels to support outlet boxes used support surface mounted
light fixtures such as exit signs or downlights.
2. Pendant or surface mounted fixture shall be provided with required mounting
devices and accessories, including hickeys and stud -extensions, ball-aligners,
canopies and stems. Locations of fixtures in mechanical areas shall be
coordinated with mechanical contractor. Mounting stems of pendant fixtures shall
be of the correct length to uniformly maintain the fixture heights shown on the
drawings or established in the field. The allowable variation tolerance in mounting
individual fixtures shall not exceed 1/4 inch and shall not vary more than 1/2 inch
from the floor mounting height shown on the Drawings. Fixtures hung in
continuous runs shall be installed absolutely level and in line with each other.
Hanging devices shall comply with Code requirements. Fixtures shall employ
single - not twin - stem hangers unless otherwise noted.
3. All structure mounted fixtures (i.e. bracket mounted, pipe mounted and surface
mounted) shall be provided with cables of suitable size and weight to support the
LIGHTING FIXTURES 2651 00-4
Clark Condon Associates
August 2010
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
weight of the fixture. Cables shall be fastened around or fastened to the housing
of the fixture. On pendant fixtures, one safety cable of suitable size and weight to
support the weight of the fixture assembly shall connect the top of the pendant to
the supporting structure by means of welding or bolting, and one safety cable
shall connect the housing of the fixture to the bottom of the pendant. Where
more than one pendant per fixture occurs, only one pendant must be cabled.
Track fixtures for pendant mounted track shall also be supplied with clip -on safety
cables of suitable size and weight to support the weight of the fixture.
D. Electrical Connection
1. All light fixtures installed in an accessible suspended ceiling shall be connected
from a branch circuit junction box using 1/2" flexible metal conduit or MC cable
fixture pigtails not exceeding 8'- 0". All fixtures must be grounded by using a
grounding conductor. Fixture to fixture wiring of fixtures installed in an accessible
ceiling is not permitted. Fixture whips shall not lay -on ceiling tile or grid. Provide
caddy clips to provide additional support.
3.02 FINAL INSPECTION
A. Remove all plastic and protective coating from all fixtures. Fixtures shall be thoroughly
cleaned. Replace any damaged fixture or fixture parts including reflectors, louvers, lens
and metal parts that show signs of corrosion.
B. All final incandescent lamps used during construction shall be replaced with new lamps.
Replace all other defective ballast, lamps or discolored lamps, showing signs of excessive
usage.
C. Demonstrate proper operation of all fixtures and controls.
END OF SECTION
LIGHTING FIXTURES 2651 00-5
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
Wolf Pen Creek Festival Park
SECTION 311000 - SITE CLEARING; TREE REMOVAL & TREATMENT
PART1-GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Removing existing trees.
2. Pruning and trimming of existing trees.
1.2 MATERIAL OWNERSHIP
A. Except for stripped topsoil or other materials indicated to remain Owner's property, cleared
materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from Project site.
1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied
or used facilities during site -clearing operations.
1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities
without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities
having jurisdiction.
B. Salvable Improvements: Carefully remove items indicated to be salvaged and store on Owner's
premises where indicated.
C. Utility Locator Service: Notify utility locator service for area where Project is located before
site clearing.
D. Do not commence site clearing operations until temporary erosion and sedimentation control
measures are in place.
E. Drawings assume tree survey is accurate. Contractor shall notify the Owner's Representative if
existing tree locations differ from locations represented on drawings.
F. Existing tree and vegetation conditions beyond tree protection fence shall remain undisturbed
by Contractor.
G. Contractor shall not allow any vehicular traffic, parking of vehicles or stockpiling of excavated
material or construction material beyond the tree protection fence, or in any tree preservation
areas as defined on the drawings.
SITE CLEARING; TREE REMOVAL & TREATMENT 311000 - 1
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Wolf Pen Creek Festival Park
A. Retain and pay for services of qualified tree surgeon for tree pruning. Contract shall not have
less than 5 years experience in this field.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS - Not Applicable
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Contractor and all sub -contractors shall attend a preconstruction seminar given by the Owner's
Representative to review tree preservation requirements for the construction process.
B. Owner's Representative will provide clearing staking one time only. Additional staking shall be
at the expense of Contractor.
C. Owner's Representative will review clearing staking prior to clearing and may make
adjustments to locations.
D. Site preparation work shall not begin in any area where tree preservation measures have not
been completed and approved as designated on the drawings.
E. Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during
construction.
F. Locate and clearly flag trees and vegetation to remain or to be relocated.
G. Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction.
1. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to Owner.
3.2 UTILITIES
A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others
unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide
temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Landscape Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility
interruptions.
2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission.
SITE CLEARING; TREE REMOVAL & TREATMENT 311000 - 2
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek Festival Park
November 2010
3.3 TREE REMOVAL
A. Proceed with tree removal in a systematic and safe manner. Protect adjacent trees from damage
or scarring from felled trees. Protect existing improvements on site and adjacent sites. Remove
all trash and debris created by tree removal from site. Dispose of properly.
B. Because of limited construction zone, some trees to be removed may require topping in order to
prevent damage to preservation trees and fencing. These trees shall be topped and felled to the
ground in a safe manner.
C. Remove stumps to a minimum of 2 foot below natural grade. "Pop" pine stumps to remove
taproot to a minimum 3 foot depth.
D. Backfill tree hole with approved topsoil, fine grade and hydromulch
3.4 CLEARING
A. Proceed with tree removal in a systematic and safe manner. Protect tree protection fencing and
adjacent trees from damage or scarring from felled trees. Protect existing improvements on site
and adjacent sites. Remove all trash and debris created by tree removal from site. Dispose of
properly.
B. Trees may be cleared with methods as approved by Owner's Representative.
C. Because of limited construction zone, some trees to be removed may require topping in order to
prevent damage to preservation trees and fencing. These trees shall be topped and felled to the
ground in a safe manner.
D. Remove stumps to a minimum 2 foot below natural grade. "Pop" pine stumps to remove taproot
to a minimum 3 foot depth.
3.5 CLEAN-UP & TREATMENT
A. Contractor shall chip and remove all cleared material from project site. On -site burning of
material will not be allowed.
3.6 REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT OF TREES
A. If any damage to preservation trees should occur beyond what is expected during the con-
struction period, the Owner's Representative shall appraise the damage and order the re-
pair by the Contractor or responsible party.
END OF SECTION 311000
SITE CLEARING; TREE REMOVAL & TREATMENT 311000 - 3
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
SECTION 311100 - SITE PREPARATION
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
Wolf Pen Creek Festival Park
1. Visit site to ascertain actual conditions and items related to the work of this section.
2. Provide necessary protection for persons, existing buildings, improvements, utilities and
property including tree protection fencing.
3. Remove and grub all vegetation, noted on the drawings.
4. Demolition and removal of above and below grade improvements as required for new
work, including but not limited to existing paving walk, shell material, etc.
5. Mobilization of equipment at the site.
6. Providing requirements for personnel and facilities.
7. Securement of any temporary traffic channelizing devices required for the safe
construction of this project.
8. Removing above- and below -grade site improvements.
9. Disconnecting and capping or sealing site utilities.
1.2 MATERIAL OWNERSHIP
A. Except for stripped topsoil or other materials indicated to remain Owner's property, cleared
materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from Project site.
1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied
or used facilities during site -clearing operations.
1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities
without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities
having jurisdiction.
B. Salvable Improvements: Carefully remove items indicated to be salvaged and store on Owner's
premises where indicated.
C. Utility Locator Service: Notify utility locator service for area where Project is located before
site clearing.
D. Do not commence site clearing operations until temporary erosion and sedimentation control
measures are in place.
SITE PREPARATION 311100 - 1
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
Wolf Pen Creek Festival Park
E. Contractor shall provide access to utility owners, and others as designated, to the Work site at
all times to relocate, service, and inspect their facilities. The Contractor shall cooperate with
utility owners and others in facilitating such work so as not to delay the Work of this Contract.
1.4 CONTINUITY OF SERVICE
A. Contractor shall ensure continuity of utility service and shall maintain, in a safe and satisfactory
operating condition, all overhead, surface and subsurface utilities.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS - Not Applicable
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during
construction.
B. Locate and clearly flag trees and vegetation to remain or to be relocated.
C. Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction.
Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to Owner.
D. The location of staging areas and equipment shall be subject to the approval of the Owners
Representative and Owner and shall be site close to that portion of the Work for which such
items will be used.
E. The Contractor may, at his discretion, erect a temporarily fenced area for securing equipment,
materials, etc. as directed by the Owners Representative. Owner will not assume any
responsibility for security of any materials, equipment, etc. during construction of the project.
3.2 TEMPORARY TRAFFIC
A. Temporary traffic channelizing devices shall be installed in accordance with the requirements of
Part VI of the TxDOT manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways.
B. Contractor shall submit his request and plan for temporarily channelizing traffic to Owners
Representative and Owner for approval as appropriate.
C. Devices shall be maintained as necessary during the course of the Work, and shall be removed
from the Site when no longer needed, or as otherwise directed by Owners Representative to
Owner.
SITE PREPARATION 311100 - 2
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek Festival Park
November 2010
3.3 CONSTRUCTION VEHICULAR TRAFFIC
A. Construction vehicular traffic shall be restricted to routes approved by Owners Representative
and Owner.
3.4 PEDESTRIAN TRAFFIC
A. Whenever pedestrian circulation is interrupted, flashing warning lights shall be employed to
alert pedestrians.
3.5 UTILITIES
A. Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off utilities indicated to be removed.
1. Arrange with utility companies to shut off indicated utilities.
B. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others
unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide
temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission.
3.6 SITE IMPROVEMENTS
A. Remove existing above- and below -grade improvements as indicated and as necessary to
facilitate new construction.
3.7 DISPOSAL
A. Disposal: Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished materials,
and waste materials including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's
property.
1. Separate recyclable materials produced during site clearing from other nonrecyclable
materials. Store or stockpile without intermixing with other materials and transport them
to recycling facilities.
3.8 CLEANUP
A. Cleanup all debris caused by the work of this Section, keeping the premises clean and neat at all
times.
END OF SECTION 311000
SITE PREPARATION 311100 - 3
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
SECTION 311200 — TREE & PLANT PROTECTION
PART1-GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Protecting existing trees to remain.
1.2 MATERIAL OWNERSHIP
Wolf Pen Creek Festival Park
A. Except for materials indicated to remain Owner's property, cleared materials shall become
Contractor's property and shall be removed from Project site.
1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied
or used facilities during site -clearing operations.
1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities
without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities
having jurisdiction.
3. Drawings assume tree survey is accurate. Contractor shall notify the Owner's
Representative is existing tree locations differ from locations represented on drawings.
4. Existing tree and vegetation conditions beyond tree protection fence shall remain
undisturbed by Contractor.
5. Contractor shall not allow any vehicular traffic, parking of vehicles or stockpiling of
excavated material or construction material beyond the tree protection fence, or in any
tree preservation areas as defined on the drawings.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 TREE PROTECTION FENCING
A. Tree protection fencing shall be:
1. Plastic polymer safety fence, 4' Model BX2050 Safety Grid, manufactured by the Tensar
Corporation, Morrow, GA 30260, or approved equal. Color shall be high visibility
orange. Stakes for fencing shall be T-posts 6' length, driven a minimum of 2' into the
ground. Posts shall be spaced 8' o.c. maximum.
TREE & PLANT PROTECTION 311200 - 1
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 TREE PROTECTION FENCING
Wolf Pen Creek Festival Park
A. Contractor and all sub -contractors shall attend a preconstruction seminar given by the Owner's
Representative to review tree preservation requirements for the construction process.
B. Fencing shall be installed at the tree protection areas indicated on the Drawings. Fencing shall
be installed at the drip line of trees to be protected, unless otherwise approved by the Owner.
C. Owner's Representative will review tree protection fencing prior to clearing and may make
adjustments to locations of tree protection fence and location of root pruning trenching.
D. Site preparation work shall not begin in any area where tree preservation measures have not
been completed and approved as designated on the drawings.
3.2 TREE PROTECTION
A. Preserve and protect existing trees and plants to remain from foliage, branch, trunk or root
damage that could result from construction operations. Review with Owner and Architect prior
to start of construction operations.
B. Prevent the following types of damage:
1. Compaction of root zone by foot or vehicular traffic, or material storage.
2. Trunk damage from equipment operations, material storage, or from nailing or
bolting.
3. Trunk and branch damage caused by ropes or guy wires.
4. Root poisoning from spilled solvents, gasoline, paint and other noxious materials.
5. Branch damage due to improper pruning or trimming.
6. Damaged from lack of water due to: Cutting or altering natural water migration patterns
near root zones.
7. Damage from alteration of soil pH factor caused by depositing lime, concrete, plaster or
other base materials near roots.
8. Cutting of roots larger than 1-1/2 inches in diameter.
3.3 DAMAGE ASSESSMENT
A. When trees other than those designated for removal are destroyed or badly damaged as a result
of construction operations, remove and replace with same size, species and variety up to and
including 8 inches in trunk diameter. Tree larger than 8 inches in diameter shall be replaced
with an 8 inch diameter tree of the same species and variety, and total contract amount will be
reduced by an amount determined as follows - formula: D x D x .78 x $28.00 where D is
diameter in inches of tree and shrub trunk measured 12 inches above grade.
TREE & PLANT PROTECTION 311200 - 2
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
3.4 MAINTENANCE
A. Fence
Wolf Pen Creek Festival Park
All fencing shall be maintained upright, straight and level, having a neat and uniform
appearance during the construction period. Upon completion of the project all fence
material shall be removed from the site and post holes filled and graded.
B. Plant Material
Contractor shall regularly water and maintain existing trees and plants to remain.
END OF SECTION 311000
TREE & PLANT PROTECTION 311200 - 3
Revised — 112009 B/CS Unified Specifications
SECTION 3123 00
EXCAVATION AND EMBANKMENT
(Sentences and/or paragraphs that are double underlined indicate revisions that were made from the
2008 specification.)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This Section includes providing all labor, materials, tools, and equipment necessary for
excavation and embankment construction to the lines grades and cross sections indicated
in the Drawings or as directed by the ENGINEER.
1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
A. This item will be measured by the cubic yard. Cubic yards will be measured by the
difference between the surveyed original grades and the final grades. Measurements will
include all authorized excavation below grade, which are not attributed to the Contractor's
carelessness, in the opinion of the Engineer.
B. The prices bid shall be full compensation for furnishing all materials, tools, equipment, pre -
and post -grade surveys and incidentals necessary to complete the work. Payment will not
be made for borrow material that is not suitable to use in embankments. Payment for
unauthorized work will not be made.
C. All work required for the disposal of waste, including haul, and for the salvage, utilization
in the work and disposal of salvageable materials, will not be paid for directly but shall be
considered a part of "Excavation and Embankment" and included in the unit price bid for
this item. Payment will not be made for unauthorized work.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. All material to be imported to the site shall be sampled at its original location and tested for
acceptability. This testing shall be provided by the contractor at no expense to the owner.
B. A list of all compaction equipment to be utilized shall be submitted for approval prior to
equipment arriving on site.
PART 2 — PRODUCTS
2.1 ' MATERIALS
A. EXCAVATION
All excavation shall be unclassified excavation and shall consist of excavation and
disposal of all materials, of whatever character encountered in the WORK
B. EMBANKMENT
1. Material shall consist of soil native to the work site, with or without stone or
conglomerate, of a suitable quality to secure a well bonded course. Imported material
shall consist of soil hauled to the work site for use in embankment operations.
Revised—112009
B/CS Unified Specifications
2. Material for embankment shall be free of vegetation, wood, organic material, trash,
bricks, broken concrete, piping, rubble, or other objectionable material. Material
sources shall be selected to eliminate the introduction of hazardous materials into the
work site.
C. SELECT MATERIAL
Material shall have a Plasticity Index between 4 and 20 and meet all other
requirements of this specification.
2.2 TESTING REQUIREMENTS
A. All embankment material placed shall be tested. Unless otherwise shown on the plans,
material placed for the benefit of roadway construction shall be compacted as follows:
B. Structural areas (roadways, slabs, sidewalks, detention pond berms, and all areas within 5
feet of any of these) shall be compacted to 95% of the maximum dry density as determined
by the Standard Procter Density Test (ASTM D698) at a moisture content between
optimum and +4% wet of optimum moisture content.
C. Non-structural areas (as shown on plans) shall be compacted to 90% of the maximum dry
density as computed by the Standard Procter Density Test (ASTM D698) at a moisture
content between optimum and +4% wet of optimum moisture content.
D. Tests shall be taken at a minimum of one test per every 4000 square feet of embankment
per every 12" of depth. Additional tests shall be conducted at the engineer's request. All
tests meeting these requirements shall be paid for by the owner. The cost of all tests failing
these requirements shall be deducted from payment for this item.
PART 3 — EXECUTION
3.1 EXCAVATION
A. All project excavation shall conform to the requirements of this specification. The
completed roadway shall conform to the established alignment, grades and cross sections.
B. Clearing and grubbing in excavation areas must be completed prior to beginning excavation
operations.
C. Topsoil shall be removed and stockpiled for reuse on the proposed surface. Topsoil in
excess of what may be used on the finished surface shall be removed from the site by the
contractor at no additional charge. Topsoil shall be assumed to be 6" deep, but shall be
excavated deep enough to remove all roots and other organic material. Contractor shall
first check with City to determine if the City would like to stockpile the topsoil.
D. All suitable excavated materials shall be utilized, insofar as practicable, in constructing the
required roadway sections or in uniformly widening embankments, flattening slopes, etc.,
as directed by the Engineer. Unsuitable roadway excavation and excavation in excess of
that needed for construction shall be known as "Waste" and shall become the property of
the Contractor to be disposed of at a location approved by the Engineer.
Revised — 112009
B/CS Unified Specifications
E. If "Waste" material is to be placed on property owned by a third party, the City will need a
letter from the third party stating acceptance of such fill. Fill will not be allowed in 100-
year floodplain without approved permits.
F. Waste areas shall be uniformly graded to drain with the outer limits feathered to blend with
the existing ground Waste areas shall be seeded canned with suitable material or
otherwise protected from long-term erosion.
G. During construction, the roadbed and ditches shall be maintained in a condition to insure
proper drainage at all times. Ditches and channels shall be constructed and maintained to
avoid damage to the roadway section.
H. Gravel or base material on all existing streets shall be salvaged and used to tie-in new
construction with existing unpaved streets and gravel and flexible pavement driveways.
Driveways will be adjusted to provide smooth connections to new construction and shall be
restored to a condition equal to or better than that existing before work began. All
salvageable asphalt, gravel or rock base material not used in the work shall remain the
property of the city. Such unused materials, as designated by the Engineer, shall be hauled
to the city stockpile or to other stockpile locations designated by the Engineer and closer to
the project than the site above.
3.2 EMBANKMENT
A. Prior to placing any embankment, all Clearing and Grubbing operations shall have been
completed on the excavation sources and areas over which embankment is to be placed.
B. Stump holes or other small excavations in the limits of the embankments shall be backfilled
with suitable material and thoroughly compacted by approved methods before commencing
embankment construction. The surface of the ground, including plowed loosened ground,
or surface roughened by erosion or otherwise, shall be restored to approximately its original
grade by blading or other methods. Where indicated on Plans or required by the Engineer,
the ground surface thus prepared shall be compacted by sprinkling and rolling.
C. Unless otherwise indicated on the Plans the surface of all unpaved areas, other than rock,
which are to receive embankment shall be loosened by scarifying or plowing to a depth of
not less than four (4) inches. The loosened material shall be re -compacted with the new
embankment as hereinafter specified.
D. Where indicated on Plans or directed by the Engineer, the surface of hillsides to receive
embankment shall be loosened by scarifying or plowing to a depth of not less than four (4)
inches, or cut into steps before embankment materials are placed. The embankment shall
then be placed in layers, as hereinafter specified, beginning at the low side in part width
layers and increasing the widths as the embankment is raised. The material which has been
loosened shall be re -compacted simultaneously with the embankment material placed at the
same elevation.
E. Layers of embankment may be formed by utilizing equipment which will spread the
material as it is dumped, or they may be formed by being spread by blading from piles or
windrows dumped from excavating or hauling equipment in such amounts that material is
evenly distributed.
F. No material placed in the embankment by dumping in a pile or windrow shall be
incorporated in a layer in that position. All such piles or windrows shall be moved by
blading or similar methods. Clods or lumps of material shall be broken and the
embankment material mixed by blading, harrowing, disking, or similar methods.
Revised—112009
B/CS Unified Specifications
G. Water required for sprinkling to bring the material to the moisture content necessary for
maximum compaction shall be evenly applied. It shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor to secure uniform moisture content throughout the layer by such methods as
may be necessary. When water is required to achieve the required moisture content, the
water must be from a source which does not contain any hazardous materials. Water
removed from natural sources (ponds, lakes, rivers...) shall not impact any endangered
species. Potable water sources shall be metered and paid by the contractor.
H. Where embankments are to be placed adjacent to or over existing roadbeds, the roadbed
slopes shall be plowed or scarified to a depth of not less than six (6) inches and the
embankment built up in successive layers, as hereinafter specified, to the level of the old
roadbed before its height is increased. Then, if directed, the top of the old roadbed shall be
scarified and re -compacted with the next layers of the new embankment. The total depth of
the scarified and added material shall not exceed the permissible depth of layer.
I. Trees, stumps, roots, vegetation, or other unsuitable materials shall not be placed in
embankment.
Except as otherwise required by the Plans, all embankment shall be constructed in layers
approximately parallel to the finished grade of the roadbed, unless otherwise specified,
each layer shall be so constructed as to provide a uniform slope of 1/4 inch per foot from
the center line of the roadbed to the outside. Super elevated curves will require that each
layer shall be constructed to conform to the super elevation required by the governing
standard.
K. Embankments shall be constructed to the grade established by the Engineer and completed
embankments shall correspond to the general shape of the typical sections shown on the
Plans. Each section of the embankment shall correspond to the detailed section or slopes
established by the Engineer. After completion of the roadway, it shall be continuously
maintained to its finished section and grade until the project is accepted.
3.3 EARTH EMBANKMENTS
A. Earth embankments shall be defined as those composed principally of material other than
rock, and shall be constructed of accepted material from approved sources.
B. Except as otherwise specified, earth embankments shall be constructed in successive layers
for the full width of the individual roadway cross section and in such lengths as are best
suited to the sprinkling and compaction methods utilized.
C. Layers of embankment may be formed by utilizing equipment which will spread the
material as it is dumped, or they may be formed by being spread by blading from piles or
windrows dumped from excavating or hauling equipment in such amounts that material is
evenly distributed.
D. No material placed in the embankment by dumping in a pile or windrow shall be
incorporated in a layer in that position. All such piles or windrows shall be moved by
blading or similar methods. Clods or lumps of material shall be broken and the
embankment material mixed by blading, harrowing, disking, or similar methods.
E. Water required for sprinkling to bring the material to the moisture content necessary for
maximum compaction shall be evenly applied. It shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor to secure a uniform moisture content throughout the layer by such methods as
may be necessary.
4
Revised — 112009
B/CS Unified Specifications
F. All earth cuts, full or part width cuts in side hill which are not required to be excavated
below sub -grade elevation for base and backfill, shall be scarified to a uniform depth of at
least six (6) inches below grade. The material shall be mixed and reshaped by blading and
then sprinkled and rolled 'in accordance with the requirements outlined above for earth
embankments and to the same density as required for the adjacent embankment.
3.4 COMPACTION
A. Each layer shall be compacted to the required density by suitable equipment.
B. The depth of each layer, prior to compaction, shall not exceed that depth which will
produce six (6) inch compacted thickness. Prior to and in connection with, the compaction
operation each layer shall be brought to the moisture content necessary to obtain the
required density and shall be kept leveled with suitable equipment to insure uniform
compaction of the entire layer.
C. For each layer of earth embankment and select material, it is the intent of this Specification
to provide the density as required herein, unless otherwise shown on the Plans.
Embankment soils shall be sprinkled as required and compacted to the extent necessary to
provide not less than ninety-five (95) percent of the density as determined in accordance
with Texas Highway Department Test Method Tex-113-E. Field density determinations
will be made in accordance with approved methods.
D. When the Contractor states that each layer of earth embankment or select material is
complete and ready for the next layer, tests as necessary will be made by the Engineer. If
the material fails to meet the density specified, the course shall be reworked as necessary to
obtain the specified compaction, and the compaction method shall be altered on subsequent
work to obtain specified density. Such procedure shall be determined by, and subject to,
the approval of the Engineer.
E. Should the sub -grade, due to any reason or cause, lose the required stability, density, or
finish before the pavement structure is placed, it shall be re -compacted and refinished at the
sole expense of the Contractor. Excessive loss of moisture in the sub -grade shall be
prevented by sprinkling, sealing or covering with a subsequent layer of granular material.
Excessive loss of moisture shall be construed to exist when the sub -grade soil moisture
content is more than four (4) percent below the optimum for the density specified.
F. In addition to the requirements in the Roadway Excavation item of the Specifications
covering the general selection and utilization of materials to improve the roadbed,
embankments shall be constructed in proper sequence to receive the select material layers
shown on Plans, with such modifications as may be directed by the Engineer. The layer of
embankment immediately preceding the upper layer of select material shall be constructed
to the proper section and grade within a tolerance of not more than 0.10 foot from the
established section and grade when properly compacted and finished to receive the select
material layer.
3.5 PROOF ROLLING
A. Prior to the placement of any material on native earth, the area shall be proof rolled. The
native soil shall be rolled with sufficient intensity to bring out weak spots in the sub -grade
which would otherwise fail during the construction process. The proof rolling shall be
completed with equipment weighing at least 20 tons with tire pressures at least 50 and no
more than 150 psi. A minimum of two coverage's of the proof roller will be required each
Revised — 112009
B/CS Unified Specifications
succeeding trip of the proof roller shall be offset by not greater than one tire width. Rollers
shall be operated at speed between 2 and 6 miles per hour. Areas failing this test shall be
excavated to a depth not to exceed two feet and horizontally ten feet beyond the failed area
in all directions. Earth removed from this area may be replaced, stabilized, or "dried out"
at the discretion of the engineer. No additional payment will be made for proof rolling
prior to placement of embankment.
END OF SECTION
Approved — 112009
B/CS Unified Specifications
SECTION 3123 23
SELECTED BORROW
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This item shall consist of furnishing, hauling, spreading and compacting selected borrow
on the roadway to bring the roadbed up to proper grade.
1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
A. Work and accepted material as prescribed for this item will be measured by the cubic yard
of material in vehicles as delivered on the road.
B. Payment for selected borrow will be made by the cubic yard, as measured under
measurement. Payment shall be for full compensation of securing, hauling, spreading,
mixing and compacting
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Atterberg Limits
B. Sieve Analysis
PART 2 — PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. The material shall consist of soil, with or without stone or conglomerate, and of a suitable
quality to secure a well bonded course. It shall be free of vegetation or other objectionable
material and shall have a maximum Plasticity Index of 20 as determined by Texas Highway
Department Test Method Tex- 106-E.
2.2 TESTING REQUIREMENTS
A. When necessary or as directed by the City Engineer samples of the borrow material shall
be collected and tested for Atterberg Limits. In addition a Sieve Analysis shall be
performed.
PART 3 — EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. The material shall be delivered in approved vehicles of uniform capacity, and it shall be the
responsibility of the Contractor to deliver the material at the proper location. The material
shall be spread by the use of blades, drags, or other suitable equipment.
B. If the material is not well mixed or contains oversized material, it shall be thoroughly
mixed. After spreading, all oversized material shall be broken by raking, blading, disking,
harrowing, scarifying, or other approved methods.
Approved-112009
B/CS Unified Specifications
C. Borrow placed in the roadbed for the purpose of bringing the roadbed to proper grade
subsequent to lime stabilization, will be mixed with the existing material to form a
subgrade of uniform material at proper grade.
D. Borrow used for constructing or widening embankment will be sprinkled if necessary and
compacted according to SECTION 3123 00 - EXCAVATION AND EMBANKMENT.
END OF SECTION
Approved — 112009
B/CS Unified Specifications
SECTION 3123 23.53
CEMENT STABILIZED SAND BACKFILL
PART 1— GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. At the discretion of the Engineer, Cement Stabilized Sand meeting the following
specification may be allowed as trench backfill.
1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
A. Cement -stabilized sand shall be considered a part of the backfill requirement for the unit
installed and shall be considered subsidiary to the length of the unit bid. If the cement
stabilized sand is indicated to be a separate construction item for bulk backfill then the
cement stabilized sand shall be measured per cubic yard as indicated on the plans.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Mix Design
PART 2 — PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. CEMENT - Type I Portland Cement conforming to ASTM C 150.
B. SAND - Clean durable sand meeting grading requirements for fine aggregates of ASTM
C33, and the following requirements:
1. Classified as SW, SP, or SM by the United Soil Classification System of ASTM
D2487.
2. Deleterious materials:
a.) Clay lumps, ASTM C142; less than 0.5 percent.
b.) Lightweight pieces, ASTM C 123; less than 5.0 percent.
c.) Organic impurities, ASTM C40; color no darker than standard color.
d.) Plasticity index of 4 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM D4318.
3. Water: Potable water, free of oils, acids, alkalis, organic matter, or other deleterious
substances, meeting requirements of ASTM C94.
2.2 TESTING REQUIREMENTS
A. Mixing plant inspections may be performed periodically. Material samples shall be
collected and tested for change in material characteristics.
B. Random samples of delivered product will be taken in the field at point of delivery for each
day of placement in the work area. Specimens will be prepared in accordance with ASTM
D 1632 and tested for compressive strength in accordance with ASTM D 1633.
C. The cement content may be tested at the discretion of the City.
Approved — 112009
B/CS Unified Specifications
PART 3 — EXECUTION
3.1 CONSTRUCTION METHODS
A. DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
Design sand -cement mixture to produce a minimum unconfined compressive strength of 50
pounds per square inch in 48 hours and 100 pounds per square inch in 7 days when
compacted to 95% in accordance to ASTM D558 and when cured in accordance with
ASTM D1632, and tested in accordance with ASTM D1633. Mix for general use shall
contain a minimum of 1-'/z sacks of cement per cubic yard. Mix for use as sanitary sewer
embedment within 9 feet of waterlines shall contain 2 sacks of cement per cubic yard.
Compact mix with moisture content between 0% to 2% above optimum.
The maximum compressive strength in 7 days shall be 400 psi. Backfill that exceeds
the maximum compressive strength shall be removed by the contractor.
B. MIXING
1. Thoroughly mix sand, cement, and water in proportions specified by the Design
Requirements using a pugmill-type mixer. The plant shall be equipped with automatic
weight controls to ensure correct mix proportions.
2. Stamp batch ticket at plant with time of loading directly after mixing. Material not
placed and compacted within 4 hours after mixing shall be rejected.
C. PLACEMENT
Place sand -cement mixture in 8-inch-thick lifts and compact to 95% of ASTM D558
unless other specified by the engineer. The moisture content during compaction shall
be between 0% to 2% above optimum. Perform and complete compaction of sand -
cement mixture within 4 hours after addition of water at plant.
2. Do not place or compact sand -cement mixture in standing or free water.
END OF SECTION
2
Approved — 112009 B/CS Unified Specifications
SECTION 3123 33
EXCAVATING, TRENCHING, AND BACKFILLING
All excavation will meet the most current OSHA Regulations. See SECTION 31 50 50 — TRENCH
SAFETY for trench safety requirements.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The work to be performed under this Specification shall consist of furnishing all labor,
equipment and materials and performing all operations in connection with the excavating,
trenching, and backfilling for pipelines as shown on the plans and as specified herein.
1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
A. All trench excavation, backfill and compaction are not considered pay items. Payment for
these items shall be included in the unit price laid in the Proposal for each size of pipe at
their respective depths. This unit price shall be full remuneration for performing the trench
and backfill complete including grading, bell holes, sheeting, dewatering, tamping, and
water soaking; and including the furnishing of sewer pipe, all equipment, labor, materials,
power, teams, tools, and transportation necessary or incidental thereto; but not including
tunneling, or boring, all of which will be paid for extra.
PART 2 — PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Materials for pipe embedment will meet TCEQ Regulations for depth of bury and class of
pipe and City of Bryan Embedment Details as shown on the Plans.
B. Concrete (For encasement or blocking) See SECTION 32 13 13 - CONCRETE.
Material shall conform to ASTM C94. The compressive strength of the concrete shall be at
least 2,000 psi and shall contain at least four (4) sacks of cement per cubic yard.
C. Cement stabilized sand. See SECTION 31 23 23.53 — CEMENT STABILIZED SAND
BACKFILL.
2.2 TESTING REQUIREMENTS
A. Compaction tests for all backfill may be required for every 200 linear feet of trench and for
each twelve -inches (12") vertically. Density tests, shall be measured as one unit for each
test. The Owner shall pay for Geotechnical tests ordered that meet the requirements of the
plans and specifications. Failed tests shall be charged to the Contractor. Refer to City
Standard Trench Detail for compaction effort requirements.
PART 3 — EXECUTION
3.1 CONSTRUCTION METHODS
A. CONTROL OF WATER
Provide sufficient pumping equipment, in good working order, available at all times to
remove any water that accumulates in excavations. When the excavation crosses a drainage
Approved—112009
B/CS Unified Specifications
pathway, the contractor shall provide for means of alternate drainage. The discharge of
dewatering equipment shall not cause damage to private or public property.
B. SHEETING SHORING, AND BRACING
See SECTION 3150 50 — TRENCH SAFETY.
In caving ground, or in wet, saturated, or flowing materials, the contractor shall sheet,
shore, or brace the sides of the trench so as to maintain the excavation properly in place.
When excavations are made adjacent to existing building or other structures or in paved
streets, particular care must be taken to adequately sheet, shore, and brace the sides of the
excavation to prevent undermining of, or settlement beneath, the structures or pavement.
Underpinning of adjacent structures or pavement shall be done by the Contractor at his own
cost and expense, in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer and when required by the
Engineer. The pavement shall be removed, the void satisfactorily refilled and compacted,
and the pavement replaced by the Contractor. The entire expense of such removal and
subsequent replacement thereof shall be borne by the Contractor. Sheeting, shoring, and
bracing shall not be left in place, unless otherwise provided for in the contract or authorized
by the Engineer. The removal of sheeting, shoring and bracing shall be done in such a
manner as not to endanger or damage either new or existing structure, private or public
properties, and so as to avoid cave-ins or sliding of the banks. All holes or voids left by the
removal of the sheeting, shoring, or bracing shall be immediately and completely filled and
compacted with suitable materials.
C. GUARANTEE
1. Guarantee the backfilling of excavation and trenches against settlement for a period
of one (1) year after the final completion of the contract under which the work is
performed.
2. Make all repairs or replacements made necessary by settlement, including refilling,
compacting, and reseeding or resodding the upper portion of the ditch and repairing
broken or settled pavements, driveways, and sidewalks within five (5) days after
notice from the Engineer.
D. PREPARATION
1. Site Preparation
Prepare the construction site for construction operations by removing and disposing
of all obstructions and objectionable materials in accordance with contract
documents.
Alignment Grade and Minimum Cover
a. General
The water and sewer mains shall be laid and maintained to lines and grades
established by the plans and specifications with fittings, valves, hydrants,
manholes and clean -outs at the required locations, unless otherwise pre -approved
by the Engineer. Valve -operating stems shall be oriented in a manner to allow
proper operation. Hydrants shall be installed plumb.
b. Cut sheets shall be provided to the City's Inspector. The contractor shall
determine the alignment and grade or elevation of the pipeline from offset stakes.
The contractor shall also provide a continuous chalk line along the alignment of
the trench for use by the operator of the excavating equipment. The contractor
Approved — 112009
B/CS Unified Specifications
shall provide a laser beam and grade pole to assist in grading the ditch to the
proper elevation.
c. Should the ditch be graded below the required elevation, bring subgrade to the
required elevation with cement stabilized sand or rounded pea gravel. The use of
excavating materials for this application will not be allowed.
d. Where pipe grades or elevations are not definitely fixed by contract drawings,
trenches shall be excavated to a depth sufficient to provide a minimum depth of
backfill cover over the pipe. Greater pipe cover depths may be necessary for
clearance beneath existing pipes, conduits, drains, drainage structures, or other
obstructions encountered at normal pipe grades. Measurement of pipe cover
depth shall be made vertically from the outside top of pipe to finished ground or
pavement surface elevations.
3. Prior Investigation
Prior to excavation, investigation shall be made to the extent necessary to determine
the location of existing underground structures and conflicts. Care should be
exercised by the Contractor during excavation avoid damage to existing structures.
4. Unforeseen Obstructions
When obstructions that are not shown on the plans are encountered during the
progress of work and interfere so that an alteration of the plans is required, the
Engineer will alter the plans or order a deviation in line and grade or arrange for
removal, relocation or reconstruction of the obstructions.
5. Clearance
When crossing existing pipelines or other structures, alignment and grade shall be
adjusted as necessary, with the approval of the Engineer, to provide clearance as
required by federal, state or local regulations or as deemed necessary by the Engineer
to prevent future damage or contamination of either structure.
E. EXCAVATION
All excavation shall meet the most current OSHA regulations.
Classification
Excavation of trenches for pipelines is unclassified. Soils will be classified utilizing
OSHA Standards and Regulations. The Contractor shall assume that the site contains
the worse type of soils and make provisions for shoring the work area.
Trench Excavation
a. General
The trench shall be excavated to the required alignment, depth and width and in
conformance with all federal, state and local regulations for the protection of the
workmen.
b. Trench Preparation
i) Trench preparation shall proceed in advance of pipe installation for only as
far as pipe will be laid that day.
ii) The contractor shall keep the trench dry from both storm water and seepage
from the sides of the trench. Discharge from any trench dewatering pumps
shall be conducted to natural drainage channels, storm sewers or a pre-
Approved-112009 B/CS Unified Specifications
approved reservoir. Do not discharge into any municipal sewer system
without municipal approval. The contractor shall be responsible for cleaning
any storm drain system, which was used for dewatering discharge.
iii) Excavated material shall be placed in a manner that will not obstruct the
work nor endanger the workmen, obstruct sidewalks, driveways, or other
structures and shall be done in compliance with federal, state, or local
regulations.
3. Pavement Removal
Removal of pavement and road surfaces shall be a part of the trench excavation, and
the amount removed shall depend upon the width of trench required for installation of
the pipe and the dimensions of area required for the installation of valves, hydrants,
specials, manholes or other structures. The dimensions of pavement removed shall
not exceed the dimensions of the opening required for installation of pipe, valves,
hydrants, specials, manholes and other structures by more than twelve (12") inches in
any direction, unless otherwise required or pre -approved by the Engineer.
4. Width
See City Standard Bedding and Trench Detail.
5. Bell Holes
Holes for the bells shall be provided at each joint, but shall be no larger than
necessary for joint assembly and assurance that the pipe barrel will lie flat on the
trench bottom. Other than noted previously, the trench bottom shall be true and even
in order to provide support for the full length of the pipe barrel, except that a slight
depression may be provided to allow withdrawal of pipe slings or other lifting tackle.
6. Subgrade in Earth
a. Where a firm and stable foundation for the pipe can be obtained in the natural
soil, and where special embedment is not shown on the plans, or specified herein,
carefully and accurately trim the bottom of the trench to fit the lower portion of
the pipe barrel. The bottom of the trench shall be firm, stable and free of
standing water.
b. If water is allowed to collect in an originally dry trench after a reasonable time
has passed to complete the embedment of the pipe, as determined by the
Engineer, the contractor shall place a minimum of four (4") inches of clean
rounded pea gravel in the ditch and pump out all accumulated water before
placing the pipe. No deleterious materials will be allowed in the gravel. No
extra compensation will be allowed for this work.
c. Where wet, soft, or spongy material is encountered in the excavation at subgrade
level, the contractor shall remove such material at the direction of the Engineer
and replace it with crushed stone of sufficient quantity such that when fully
compacted, the subgrade is firm and stable.
7. Subgrade in Rock
a. When excavation of rock is encountered, all rock shall be removed to provide a
clearance of at least six (6") inches below and on each side of all pipe, valves and
fittings for pipe sizes twenty-four (24") inches or smaller, and nine (9") inches
for pipe sizes thirty (30") inches and larger. When excavation is completed, the
proper embedment material shall be placed on the bottom of the trench to the
previously mentioned depths, leveled and tamped.
4
Approved — 112009
B/CS Unified Specifications
b. These clearances and bedding procedures shall also be observed for pieces of
concrete or masonry and other debris or subterranean structures, such as masonry
walls, piers or foundations that may be encountered during excavation.
The installation procedures specified in this section shall be followed when
gravel formations containing loose boulders greater than eight (8") inches in
diameter are encountered.
d. In all cases, the specified clearances shall be maintained between the bottom of
all pipe and appurtenances and any part, projection or point of rock, boulder or
stones of sufficient size and placement, which, in the opinion of the Engineer,
could cause a fulcrum point.
F. CONCRETE ENCASEMENT
The Contractor shall place 2,000 psi concrete encasement under and around pipe as
shown on the embedment detail, and provide necessary anchors to prevent the pipe from
floating out of place. The contractor shall remove and relay any pipes that are floated out
of proper position
G. BACKFILLING
General
a. The Contractor shall not begin backfilling until approval has been obtained from
the Inspector. Backfilling includes refilling and consolidation of the fill in
trenches and excavations up to the natural ground surface or road grade.
b. Backfill shall be accomplished in accordance with the specified laying condition
as shown on the plans.
2. Backfill Material
a. All backfill material shall meet latest edition of ASTM D2321 unless otherwise
specified by the Engineer.
b. If excavated material is indicated on the drawings or specified for backfill, and
there is a deficiency due to a rejection of part thereof, the contractor shall provide
the required amount of sand, gravel or other pre -approved material.
Do not leave trenches open overnight without backfilling to the natural ground level.
Steel plates (1/2" in thickness) may be used to cover open trenches only with the
approval of the Engineer.
4. Compaction
Compaction requirements are as specified on the plans.
END OF SECTION
Approved—112009 B/CS Unified Specifications
SECTION 3125 13
EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The work covered by this section consists of the installation and maintenance of all erosion
siltation control devices, wash down areas, or seeding and sodding applications necessary to
effectively prevent storm water pollution of adjoining or downstream areas that may occur as a
direct or indirect result of the construction of this project. The contractor is responsible for
creating and maintaining the storm water pollution prevention plan by utilizing the base sheets
and narrative provided in the bid documents. The contractor is also responsible for submitting
the Notice of Intent (NOI) and Notice of Termination (NOT) and conducting inspections as
required by the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality (TCEQ.) The required forms for
these activities are included in the bid documents.
The engineer will provide:
1. Base Sheets for Erosion Control Plan (ECP)
2. The Narrative for the Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP)
The contractor will generate, submit, and maintain the:
1. ECP
2. SWPPP
3. NOI (if required)
4. NOT (if required)
1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Erosion and Sediment Control is measured as a lump sum item.
The work and materials as prescribed by this item will be paid on the following schedule:
A. 25% of the bid value shall be paid when the erosion control plan is fully detailed and
implemented, the NOI (if required) is submitted to both TCEQ and the City Inspector, and all of
the initial erosion control devices have been installed and are in working order.
B. 50% of the value will be prorated for the installation and maintenance of erosion control devices
during the course of construction as a percent of the total contract value. If the sediment
trapping devices on the site appear to be un-maintained, no payment of this portion of the item
shall be paid.
C. 25% will be paid at the completion of construction when the site is stabilized, the NOT is
submitted to both TCEQ and the City Inspector and all erosion control devices are removed
from the site.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. The contractors shall submit the initial erosion control plan along with the NOI (if required)
prior to receiving a notice to proceed.
B. If required, the Contractor is responsible for filing a "Notice of Intent" (NOI.) The contractor
shall comply with all TCEQ and EPA regulations and pay the filing fees associated with the
regulations. Fees associated with these regulations are subsidiary to the bid item Storm Water
Prevention. The forms are available at:
Approved — 112009
B/CS Unified Specifications
http://ww-vv.tceq.state.tx.us/assets/public/permitting/waterquality/fonns/20022.pdf
http://www.tceg.state.tx.tis/assets/public/permittin waterquality/forms/20023.pdf
C. Said NOI must be postmarked two days before construction begins. NOI's and NOT's shall be
submitted to the address shown on the forms. It is the Contractor's responsibility to file and
provide the owner a copy of the Notice of Termination (NOT) at the completion of the project.
PART 2 — PRODUCTS
N/A
PART 3 — EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to utilize whatever techniques are necessary to address
erosion problems as they occur during construction.
B. Siltation control and sediment trapping devices shall be installed prior to site clearing, grading
or utility construction operations. All devices should be positioned so as to effectively remove
silt from storm water before it leaves the site. Of particular concern, are gravel or stone blankets
placed at construction traffic exits and entrances. These controls should be closely monitored to
see that they trap sediment before it reaches the existing street and drainage system.
C. Construction activities should be phased to expose a minimum of graded area at one time. Earth
exposed by the construction process shall be re -vegetated every two weeks until vegetation is
established. Re -vegetation shall require seeding, hydromulching or sodding. Fresh growth of
vegetation shall eliminate the need for additional re -vegetation but does not constitute
stabilization.
D. Should a construction process remove any portion of the perimeter controls, the controls should
be replaced in accordance with the TCEQ guidelines. Prior to the completion of the project, all
bare areas shall be re -vegetated with a cellulose fiber hydromulch seeding process or sodded.
E. Siltation control devices placed at storm drain inlets and culverts shall be removed by the
Contractor once the site has been stabilized.
3.2 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
A. The contractor shall familiarize himself with the erosion control requirements of TCEQ. The
site superintendent, or his representative, shall make a visual inspection of all structural and/or
natural controls and newly stabilized areas as required by TCEQ, especially after a rainfall to
insure that all controls are maintained and properly functioning. Any damaged controls shall be
repaired prior to the end of the work day, including re -seeding and mulching or re -sodding if
necessary. All inspections shall be documented with a written report. Reports shall include the
effectiveness of erosion control measures, construction activities conducted since the last report
and their location. Reports shall be maintained by the Contractor along with the Erosion
Control Plan per the TCEQ guidelines.
B. The contractor is responsible for the ECP. The contractor shall continuously update the plan
with all changes. Areas already stabilized shall be noted on the plan. All sediment trapping
devices shall be installed as soon as practical after the area has been disturbed (never more than
14 days). All sediment trapping devices shall be cleaned when the sediment level reaches 25%
capacity. Sediment shall be disposed of by spreading on site or hauling away if not suitable for
fill.
Approved—112009
B/CS Unified Specifications
C. The Contractor shall be responsible for any and all materials, improvements, and maintenance
activities necessary to keep dust, silt, and mud from leaving the work zone, including being
tracked by vehicles traveling throughout the zone.
D. Should, in the opinion of the Owner, the Contractor fail to prevent the escape of dust or contain
silt and mud within the project, after due notification by the City Representative, Owner forces
will be used to clean up those affected areas, and the cost of same will be deducted from the
contract.
E. Prior to Substantial Completion, the Contractor shall verify that no dust, silt, or mud exists
within the work zone in deposits deeper than two inches (2") as a result of the contractor's
containment procedures. Should the Contractor claim final completion without removing such
deposits, they will be removed by Owner forces and the cost of which shall be deducted from
the contract.
END OF SECTION
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Park
SECTION 313116 - TERMITE CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 specification sections, apply to this section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Soil treatment with termiticide.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the EPA -Registered Label for
termiticide products.
B. Product certificates.
C. Soil Treatment Application Report: Include the following:
1. Date and time of application.
2. Moisture content of soil before application.
3. Termiticide brand name and manufacturer.
4. Quantity of undiluted termiticide used.
5. Dilutions, methods, volumes used, and rates of application.
6. Areas of application.
7. Water source for application.
D. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A specialist who is licensed according to regulations of authorities
having jurisdiction to apply termite control treatment and products in jurisdiction where Project
is located and who employs workers trained and approved by manufacturer to install
manufacturer's products.
TERMITE CONTROL 313116 - 1
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Park
B. Regulatory Requirements: Formulate and apply termiticides and termiticide devices according
to the EPA -Registered Label.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: To ensure penetration, do not treat soil that is water saturated or
frozen. Do not treat soil while precipitation is occurring. Comply with requirements of the
EPA -Registered Label and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Coordinate soil treatment application with excavating, filling, grading, and concreting
operations. Treat soil under footings, grade beams, and ground -supported slabs before
construction.
A. Soil Treatment Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by Applicator and
Contractor, certifying that termite control work, consisting of applied soil termiticide treatment,
will prevent infestation of subterranean termites. If subterranean termite activity or damage is
discovered during warranty period, re -treat soil and repair or replace damage caused by termite
infestation.
Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
1.7 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Continuing Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide 12 months' continuing
service including monitoring, inspection, and re -treatment for occurrences of termite activity.
Provide a standard continuing service agreement. State services, obligations, conditions, terms
for agreement period, and terms for future renewal options.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 SOIL TREATMENT
A. Termiticide: Provide an EPA -Registered termiticide, complying with requirements of
authorities having jurisdiction, in an aqueous solution formulated to prevent termite infestation.
Provide quantity required for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum
termiticide concentration allowed for each specific use, according to product's EPA -Registered
Label.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. BASF Corporation, Agricultural Products; Termidor.
b. Bayer Environmental Science; Premise 75.
C. FMC Corporation, Agricultural Products Group; Talstar, Prevail.
d. Syngenta; Demon TC
TERMITE CONTROL 313116 - 2
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek
November 2010 Festival Park
2. Service Life of Treatment: Soil treatment termiticide that is effective for not less than
five years against infestation of subterranean termites.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION, GENERAL
A. General: Comply with the most stringent requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and
with manufacturer's EPA -Registered Label for products.
3.2 APPLYING SOIL TREATMENT
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with
requirements for moisture content of soil per termiticide label requirements, interfaces with
earthwork, slab and foundation work, landscaping, utility installation, and other conditions
affecting performance of termite control.
B. Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
C. Soil Treatment Preparation: Remove foreign matter and impermeable soil materials that could
decrease treatment effectiveness on areas to be treated. Loosen, rake, and level soil to be
treated except previously compacted areas under slabs and footings. Termiticides may be
applied before placing compacted fill under slabs if recommended in writing by termiticide
manufacturer.
Fit filling hose connected to water source at the site with a backflow preventer,
complying with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Application: Mix soil treatment termiticide solution to a uniform consistency. Provide quantity
required for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum specified concentration of
termiticide, according to manufacturer's EPA -Registered Label, to the following so that a
continuous horizontal and vertical termiticidal barrier or treated zone is established around and
under building construction. Distribute treatment evenly.
Slabs -on -Grade and Basement Slabs: Under ground -supported slab construction,
including footings, building slabs, and attached slabs as an overall treatment. Treat soil
materials before concrete footings and slabs are placed.
2. Foundations: Adjacent soil, including soil along the entire inside perimeter of foundation
walls; along both sides of interior partition walls; around plumbing pipes and electric
conduit penetrating the slab; around interior column footers, piers, and chimney bases;
and along the entire outside perimeter, from grade to bottom of footing. Avoid soil
washout around footings.
3. Penetrations: At expansion joints, control joints, and areas where slabs will be
penetrated.
E. Avoid disturbance of treated soil after application. Keep off treated areas until completely dry.
TERMITE CONTROL 313116 - 3
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
Wolf Pen Creek
Festival Park
F. Protect termiticide solution, dispersed in treated soils and fills, from being diluted until ground -
supported slabs are installed. Use waterproof barrier according to EPA -Registered Label
instructions.
G. Post warning signs in areas of application.
H. Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation, grading,
landscaping, or other construction activities following application.
END OF SECTION 313116
TERMITE CONTROL 313116 - 4
Approved—112009
B/CS Unified Specifications
SECTION 3150 00
TRENCH SAFETY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The work specified under this section requires the Contractor to provide for the safety of
the workmen in strict compliance with 29 CFR Part 1926 1993 (Revised as of July 1, 1996
of latest Edition or Revision to) Excavations and Applicable Subparts. The submission of a
"TRENCH SAFETY PLAN" which shall fully satisfy the requirements of this specification
is required prior to a notice to proceed to start the project.
1.2 MEASUREMENT
A. MEASUREMENT
Measure "Trench Safety" as shown on the bid proposal. Shoring of trench at manholes and
other unusual structures to be included in this cost.
B. PAYMENT
Pay for "Trench Safety" as shown on the bid proposal. Payment to be full compensation for
all work described herein. There will be no increase in the Contract price because of the
incorporation of CONTRACTOR'S Trench Safety Plan or CONTRACTOR'S detailed plans
and specifications for the trench safety system into the bid documents and the Construction
Contract. There will be no increase in the Contract price because of modifications to
CONTRACTOR'S plan and/or the CONTRACTOR'S detail plans and specifications for the
trench safety system, whether or not the result of unforeseen or differing site or soil
conditions.
"Trench Safety Plan" shall be included as part of the "Trench Safety" bid item and shall not
be paid for as a separate pay item.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. CERTIFICATES
Submit manufacturer's "Certificate of Compliance," stating that the devices (trench boxes,
speed shoring, etc.) to be used for trench safety comply with the requirements of this
specification. The certificate should show the design assumptions and limitations of the
device and should be sealed by an engineer registered and licensed to practice in the state
of Texas.
B. TRENCH SAFETY PLAN
Submit a detailed TRENCH SAFETY PLAN for all work areas. Calculations shall be
provided for any areas beyond the capacity of the trench box or speed shoring and sealed
by an engineer registered and licensed to practice in the state of Texas. This plan shall
include evacuation routes for personnel.
C. COMPETENT PERSON
Contractor shall have a "Competent Person" with regard to OSHA standards, on site at all
times. Competent person is generally defined as an individual who, by training and
experience, is knowledgeable of applicable standards, capable of identifying hazards, is
Approved—112009
B/CS Unified Specifications
designated by the employer, and has the authority to take actions as needed. Contractor shall
provide written proof showing the competent person(s) for the work being performed.
PART 2 — PRODUCTS
2.2 MATERIALS
A. MATERIALS
1. Timber
Trench sheeting materials shall be full size, a minimum of 2 inches in thickness, solid
and sound, free from weakening defects such as loose knots and splits.
2. Sheet Piling
Steel sheet piling shall conform to one or more of ASTM A328/328M, ASTM
A572/A572M/ ASTM A690/A690M material requirements.
3. Structural Steel
Steel for stringers (wales) and cross braces shall conform to ASTM A588.
4. Trench Boxes
Steel trench Boxes to be constructed of steel conforming to ASTM A36/A36M.
Connecting bolts used to conform to ASTM A307. Welds shall conform to the
requirements of AWS D 1.1.
5. Miscellaneous
Miscellaneous materials to be utilized shall conform to applicable ASTM standards.
B. REFERENCED SPECIFICATIONS
The publications listed below form a part of this Specification to the extent referenced.
The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only.
American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM)
ASTM A36/A36M 1997 Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel
ASTM A307 1997 Revision A -Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts
and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile length
ASTM A328/A328M 1996 (REV) Standard Specification for Steel Sheet Piling
ASTM A572/A572M 1997 Standard Specification for High -Strength Low -Alloy
Columbium -Vanadium Steels of Structural Quality
ASTM A588/A588M 1997 Standard Specification for High -Strength Low -Alloy
Structural Steel With 50 ksi (345 MPa) Minimum Yield Point to
4 inch (100 mm) thick
ASTM A690/A690M 1994 Standard Specification for High -Strength Low -Alloy Steel
H-Pipes and Sheet Piling for Use in Marine Environments
American Welding Society, Inc. (AWS)
AWS 131.1 1998 Structural Welding Code -Steel
Occupation Safety And Health Administration (OSHA)
29 CFR Part 1926 1993 (Revised as of July 1, 1996 of latest Edition or Revision to)
Excavations and Applicable Subparts
2
Approved — 112009
B/CS Unified Specifications
PART 3 — EXECUTION
3.1 CONSTRUCTION METHODS
A. GENERAL:
The trench safety system shall be constructed, installed and maintained in accordance with
the Trench Safety Plan as outlined in 131.03. Bed and backfill pipe to a point at least one
(1) foot above top of pipe or other embedded items prior to removal of any portion of
trench safety system. Bedding and backfill shall be in accordance to other applicable
Specification Sections. Backfllling and removal of trench supports shall be in accordance
with Contractor's Trench Safety Plan. Removal of trench safety system to be accomplished
in such a manner to cause no damage to pipe or other embedded items. Remove no braces
or trench supports until all personnel have evacuated the trench. The trench shall be
backfilled to within 5 feet of natural ground prior to removal of entire trench safety system.
B. SUPERVISION:
Provide competent supervisory personnel at each trench while work is in progress to ensure
Contractor's methods, procedures, equipment and materials pertaining to the safety systems
in this Section are sufficient to meet requirements of OSHA Standards.
C. INSPECTION:
The CONTRACTOR shall make daily inspection of trench safety system to ensure that the
system meets OSHA requirements. Daily inspection shall be made by competent personnel.
If evidence of possible cave-ins or slides is apparent, all work in the trench is to cease until
necessary precautions have been taken to safeguard personnel entering trench. The
CONTRACTOR shall maintain permanent record of daily inspections.
D. TIMBER SHEETING
Timber sheeting and size of uprights, stringers (wales,) and cross bracing to be installed in
accordance with the TRENCH SAFETY PLAN. Place cross braces in true horizontal
position, spaced vertically, and secure to prevent sliding, falling or kick outs. Cross braces
to be placed at each end of stringers (wales) in addition to other locations required. Cross
braces and stringers (wales) to be placed at splices of uprights, in addition to other locations
required.
E. STEEL SHEET PILING
Steel sheet piling of equal or greater strength may be used in lieu of timber trench shoring
shown in the OSHA tables (proposed standards). Drive steel sheet piling to a least
minimum depth below trench bottom as recommended by CONTRACTOR's Registered
Licensed Professional Engineer providing design. Place cross braces in true horizontal
position and spaced vertically. Secure to prevent sliding, falling, or kick outs. Cross braces
to be placed at each end of stringers (wales), in addition to other locations required.
F. MAINTENANCE OF SAFETY SYSTEM
The safety system to be maintained in the condition as shown on the Trench Excavation
and Shoring Safety Plan as designed by the CONTRACTOR's Registered Licensed
Professional ENGINEER. The CONTRACTOR shall take all necessary precaution to
ensure the safety systems are not damaged during their use. If at any time during its use a
safety system is damaged, personnel to be immediately removed from the trench
excavation area and the safety system repaired. The CONTRACTOR is to take all
necessary precautions to ensure no loads, except those provided for in the plan, are imposed
upon the trench safety system.
END OF SECTION
Revised=112009 B/CS Unified Specifications
SECTION 3178 00
PIPE BORING, JACKING, TUNNELING AND ENCASEMENT
(Sentences and/or paragraphs that are double underlined indicate revisions that were made from the
2008 specification.)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The work to be performed under this Specification shall consist of furnishing and installing
all materials and equipment and performing all labor required to install pipelines crossing
under highways, railroads, and streets by boring, jacking, and tunneling, as specified
herein. All sewer bores will be accomplished by dry mechanical bore unless otherwise
pre -approved by the Engineer. Water line bores may utilize the wet boring technique.
All carrier pipes within the encasement conduit shall be restrained joint pipe of the type
specified on the plans, or pre -approved by the Engineer.
B. When the work per this item falls within a TxDOT or Railroad right of way, the stricter of
the applicable standards apply. This requirement includes all insurance, notification,
permitting, signage, etc. required by the right of way owner.
1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
A. MEASUREMENT
Openings provided by boring, jacking, and tunneling (including carrier pipe) will be
measured by the linear foot along the centerline of the opening, as measured from
end of pipe to end of pipe placed by boring, jacking and tunneling. There will not be
any classification for payment according to depth.
Concrete support slab in the pits and all other work necessary to meet the
requirements of the Texas Department of Transportation, railroad company, County,
and City will not be measured.
Openings provided by boring, jacking and tunneling will be paid for at the unit price
bid per linear foot. The unit price bid for boring jacking and tunneling shall be full
compensation for furnishing and placing all materials, labor, tools, carrier pipe,
carrier pipe restraint, casing spacers, equipment, pits, concrete support slabs and
incidentals necessary to complete the work.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's product data on encasement pipe.
B. Submit manufacturer's "Certificate of Compliance" to this part of the specifications for
materials furnished for the project.
C. The Contractor or subcontractor performing the work described under this section shall
demonstrate technical skill and experience in previous work of this nature. Work
experience shall be submitted to the Engineer.
D. Casing spacer data sheets demonstrating compliance with this specification.
Revised — 112009
B/CS Unified Specifications
PART 2 — PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
Steel Pipe, Ductile Iron Pipe, Reinforced Concrete Pipe, and PVC Pipe may be used as
encasement material, unless otherwise shown on the plans. The nominal inside diameter of the
encasement pipe shall be as indicated below, unless otherwise shown on the plans.
A. STEEL PIPE
Encasement pipe shall conform to ASTM Specification A134, Mild Carbon Steel, A139,
Grade A, or AWWA C200-91 Grade B, butt -welded joints with entire circumference
welded by a certified welder shall be in accordance with AWWA C200-86 Section 3. All
steel casing shall have a wall thickness as shown in the table below:
Carrier Pipe Nominal
Diameter
Casing Pipe Nominal
Diameter
Casing Pipe Minimum Thickness
6"
14"
3/8"
8"
16"
3/8"
101,1
r
ME
12"
20"
3/8"
16"
24"
3/8"
18"
30"
1 /2"
24"
36"
1/2"
Casing Pipe Thickness for Railroad crossings shall be a minimum of 1/2-inch thick
regardless of diameter.
2. Nominal diameter of casing pipe may be larger as needed for restrained joint pipe.
B. DUCTILE -IRON PIPE
-Encasement pipe shall conform to the current AWWA C150 and C151 standards. Pipe
shall be thickness Class 250 or greater, unless otherwise shown on the plans.
C. REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE
Encasement pipe shall conform to the current ANSI C-76 standards. Pipe shall be Class III
or IV, unless otherwise shown on the plans.
D. PVC PIPE
Encasement pipe shall conform to the current ASTM D2241 or AWWA C905 standards.
Pipe shall be DR 26 or SDR 26, unless otherwise shown on the plans. PVC pipe shall be
used only when specified on the plans.
E. GROUT
Grout shall be in accordance with SECTION 04 05 12 — MORTAR AND GROUT.
F. CASING SPACERS
Stainless Steel casing spacers shall be required in all casing pipes and shall be
manufactured by Cascade Products, Advance Products & Systems, Inc model no. SSI8 or
approved equal. The casing spacers shall be affixed to the carrier pipe at a spacing of 6'8"
or per the manufacturers recommendations if less than 6' 8".
G. END SEALS
End seals shall be 1/8" thick synthetic rubber secured with stainless steel banding straps.
Other end seals shall be constructed only as pre -approved by the engineering inspector.
Revised — 112009 B/CS Unified Specifications
2.2 TESTING REQUIREMENTS
A. ALLOWABLE TOLERANCES
Where grades or elevations are shown on the plans for the pipeline to be installed by
boring, jacking, and tunneling operations, maximum deviation of plan elevation shall be 0.2
foot. The maximum deviation of alignment over the length of the bore shall be 0.2 foot.
The Engineer shall determine the corrective action to be taken for tolerances above those
stated in this specification.
PART 3 — EXECUTION
3.1 CONSTRUCTION METHODS
A. ENCASEMENT REQUIREMENTS
Encasement pipe shall be required for all water mains crossing major collector and arterial
street crossings. Encasement pipe for sewer mains shall be placed as required by the City
Engineer. The casing pipe shall extend two feet (2') beyond the back of curb. Encasement
pipes may be installed by open cut with the approval of the engineer.
B. BORE AND TUNNEL PITS
Unless more stringent requirements regarding location of bore and tunnel pits are noted on
the plans, or are required by TXDOT, Railroad, County, or City, to conform to the
requirements that follow:
The Conduit to be installed by boring, jacking and tunneling shall extend to distances
as shown in the Standard Details.
2. If necessary to prevent cave-ins, sheet, shore, or brace the pit in accordance with
OSHA regulations. All pits shall be covered with 1/2" thick steel plates. Steel plates
shall be on -site prior to excavating the pit. If bore pits are too big to cover with steel
plates, Contractor shall install chain link fence, completely and securely, around
exposed pit to a height of 6 feet.
General: Unless otherwise noted, extend auger hole 10 feet beyond edge of
pavement, railroad tie, or other structure. The hole is to be bored mechanically, using
a pilot hole. An approximate 2-inch hole shall be bored the entire length of the
crossing and shall be checked for line and grade on the opposite end of the bore from
the work pit. This pilot hole shall serve as the centerline of the larger diameter hole to
be bored. The use of water or other fluids in connection with the boring operation
will be permitted only to the extent to lubricate cuttings, jetting will not be permitted.
In unconsolidated soil formations, a gel -forming colloidal drilling fluid consisting of
at least 10 percent of high-grade carefully processed bentonite may be used to
consolidate cuttings of the bit, seal the walls of the hole, and furnish lubrication for
subsequent removal of cuttings and installation of the pipe immediately thereafter.
Overcutting in excess of one inch shall be remedied by pressure grouting the entire
length of the installation.
3.2 CONSTRUCTION METHODS FOR DRY BORING
A. All sewer bores will be accomplished by dry mechanical bore unless otherwise pre -
approved by the Engineer.
B. Only workmen experienced in boring operations shall perform the work.
Revised — 112009
B/CS Unified Specifications
C. The use of water or other fluids in connection with the boring operation will NOT be
permitted except for a minor required amount of bentonite solution for cutting head.
D. The casing pipe shall be placed in the bore hole simultaneously while boring is being
performed. Installing the encasement conduit immediately by pulling it in place from
opposite the boring machine or by jacking the conduit through the bore is not acceptable.
Take proper care to secure the joints of the conduit as subsequent sections are installed by
welding joints. Provide a steel rail or timber cradle in the pit to support and guide the
conduit in its installation.
E. If after completion of the installation of the conduit, there is more than one inch (1")
clearance between the outside of the barrel of the conduit and the wall of the bore, grouting
of these voids will be required. If during construction of the bore, a cave-in occurs within
the bore, grouting of the voids between the conduit and the walls of the bore will be
required throughout the length of the bore.
F. Conform to the requirements of the Texas Department of Transportation, Railroad
Company, County, or City having jurisdiction over the right-of-way involved, as to details
of construction methods and time of construction. All work necessary to meet the
requirements of the Texas Department of Transportation, Railroad Company, County, or
City will be considered incidental to the installation of the pipeline in the right-of-way.
The Contractor shall abide by the more stringent of these specifications, or the
specifications of the regulatory agencies.
3.3 CONSTRUCTION METHODS FOR WET BORING
A. All sewer bores will be accomplished by dry mechanical bore unless otherwise pre -
approved by the Engineer. (see above)
B. Only workmen experienced in boring operations shall perform the work. A pilot hole must
be successfully completed to the satisfaction of the engineer prior back reaming the bore.
C. The use of water or other fluids in connection with the boring operation will be permitted
only to lubricate cuttings. Jetting will not be permitted. In consolidated soil formations, a
gel -forming colloidal drilling fluid consisting of at least ten (10%) percent of high-grade
bentonite may be used to consolidate cuttings of the bit, seal the walls of the hole, and
lubricate removal of cuttings and installation of the pipe immediately thereafter.
D. While boring is being performed, install the encasement conduit immediately by pulling it
in place from opposite the boring machine or by jacking the conduit through the bore.
Encasement conduit may be placed after the boring operation is complete, if permission is
obtained from TXDOT, the railroad company, the City, or the County. Take proper care to
secure the joints of the conduit as subsequent sections are installed, by use of cables or
welding joints. Provide a steel rail or timber cradle in the pit to support and guide the
conduit in its installation.
E. If after completion of the installation of the conduit, there is more than one inch (1")
clearance between the outside of the barrel of the conduit and the wall of the bore, grouting
of these voids will be required. If during construction of the bore, a cave-in occurs within
the bore, grouting of the voids between the conduit and the walls of the bore will be
required throughout the length of the bore.
F. Grouting material and equipment shall be on the jobsite before beginning installation of the
conduit, in order that the grouting around the encasement conduit is to be started
immediately after pipe is in place.
4
Revised—112009
B/CS Unified Specifications
G. Conform to the requirements of the Texas Department of Transportation, Railroad
Company, County, or City having jurisdiction over the right-of-way involved, as to details
of construction methods and time of construction. All work necessary to meet the
requirements of the Texas Department of Transportation, Railroad Company, County, or
City will be considered incidental to the installation of the pipeline in the right-of-way.
The Contractor shall abide by the more stringent of these specifications, or the
specifications of the regulatory agencies.
3.4 CONSTRUCTION METHODS FOR JACKING
A. Unless otherwise specified, the methods and equipment used in jacking conduit shall be the
Contractor's option, provided that the proposed method is pre -approved by the Engineer.
Such approval, however, shall in no way relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for
making a satisfactory installation meeting the criteria set forth herein.
B. If, after completion of the installation of the conduit, there is more than one (1") inch
clearance between the outside of the barrel of the conduit and the wall of the tunnel, the
Contractor shall completely grout the conduit in place throughout its entire length. If,
during the jacking operation, a cave-in occurs, the Contractor shall grout the entire conduit
in place throughout its entire length.
3.5 CONSTRUCTION METHODS FOR TUNNELING
A. Excavate the tunnel in such a manner and to such dimensions that will permit placing of the
proper supports in accordance with OSHA Regulations necessary to protect the
excavation. Make adequate provisions for the safety and health of the workmen. Use only
air or electric powered equipment in the tunnel. Provide adequate illumination and
ventilation.
B. Excavate only enough earth to allow installation of the tunnel liner plate. Remove earth
from within tunnel and install the next section of tunnel liner plates.
C. After completion of the tunnel, or at intervals directed by the Engineer, grout the entire
void between the tunnel lining. If after completion of the tunnel there are sags in invert of
the liner that exceed 0.2 feet of a straight line projected through the tunnel, grout the invert
to eliminate the sags.
3.6 SPECIAL PROVISIONS FOR BELL & SPIGOT ENCASEMENT PIPE
A. Where pipe using bell and spigot joints is installed as encasement pipe, completely grout
the voids between the outside of the encasement pipe and the inner wall of the bore or
tunnel throughout the length of the pipe. If directed by the City Engineer, the joints shall
be welded to prevent the joints from slipping with respect to each other.
3.7 SUPPORT OF PIPES ACROSS BORE OR TUNNEL PITS
A. After completion of the bore or tunnel and installation of the carrier pipe with the bore or
tunnel, remove all loose earth and debris from the pit down to undisturbed earth. Pour a
continuous 2,000 psi concrete or cement stabilized sand support under the carrier pipe from
the edge of the bore or tunnel to the first joint in the trench past the end of the pit. The
concrete support shall be brought up to the horizontal centerline of the pipe.
Revised — 112009
B/CS Unified Specifications
3.8 CARRIER PIPE
A. Carrier pipe may be pushed or pulled through the completed encasement pipe. Casing
spacers by Cascade Waterworks or pre -approved equivalent should be placed on the carrier
pipe to insure approximate centering within the encasement pipe and to prevent damage
during installation. Care must be exercised in order to avoid metal -to -metal contact. The
ends of the encasement pipe will be sealed with rubber seals and stainless steel bands. In
order to avoid the transfer of earth and live loads to the carrier pipe, the space between the
carrier pipe and encasement pipes shall not be filled completely.
B. All carrier pipe installed within a casing shall be restrained. The restrained section shall
extend at least five feet (5') beyond both ends of the casing pipe. Lock joint pipe, retainer
glands, or restrainer gaskets may be used for this application.
C. When ductile iron pipe is used for the carrier pipe, all ductile iron pipe shall be poly -
wrapped per the specifications.
3.9 SPOILS
A. Spoil locations shall be pre -approved by the engineering inspector. When no suitable
location for spoil can be found on site, the contractor shall be required to haul and dispose
of this material at no extra cost. Where spoils are to be placed on parking areas (asphalt or
concrete), sidewalks, or other paved surfaces, the spoils shall be placed on a barrier to
prevent the soil from embedding into the paved surface.
END OF SECTION
6
Revised - 112009 B/CS Unified Specifications
SECTION 32 1129.01
SPRINKLING
(Sentences and/or paragraphs that are double underlined indicate revisions that were made from the
2008 specification.)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This section shall consist of the authorized application of water on those portions of roadway
shown on the Plans or as directed by the Engineer.
I. Compacting and preparing roadbed excavations, roadbed embankments, backfills.
ubgrades, subbases, bases and surfacings.
2. Preventing or alleviating dust nuisance originating within the highway right-of-way and
the Project limits, which is not caused by Contractor operations at the Contractor's plants
r plant setups.
3. Other watering when ordered, except for Extra Work.
1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
A. The water furnished and the work performed, as prescribed by this section, will be paid for
in the unit price bid for the various items pertaining to the construction of embankment,
sub -grade, sub -base and base. Price will include full compensation for all costs in
connection with furnishing the water, including the city of Bryan tapping fee, and for all
costs in connection with furnishing and operating approved sprinklers and necessary
measuring devices. Payment is to include the application of the water as directed, all
hauling, equipment, tools, labor, materials and incidentals necessary to complete the work.
Payment will not be made for unauthorized work.
PART 2 — PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Water shall be furnished by the Contractor and shall be clean and free from
industrial wastes and other objectionable matter.
PART 3 — EXECUTION
3.1 CONSTRUCTION METHODS
The Contractor shall furnish and operate approved sprinklers equipped with positive and rapidly
working out -off valves and approved spray bars which will insure the distribution of water in a
uniform and controllable rate of application. The Contractor shall apply the water in the required
quantity where shown on the Plans and/or as directed by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION
Approved— 112009
B/CS Unified Specifications
SECTION 32 1129.02
ROLLING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
This section shall consist of the compaction of sub -grade, sub -base, base or asphaltic concrete
pavements by the operation of approved power rollers, tamping rollers, or pneumatic tired rollers
as herein specified and/or directed by the Engineer.
1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
The work prescribed by this section will not be paid for directly, but shall be considered as
subsidiary work pertaining to the construction of embankments sub -grade, sub -base, base and
surface, as the case may be.
PART 2 — PRODUCTS
N/A
PART 3 — EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. This work shall be done only when ordered by the Engineer. The compaction shall be
accomplished by the methods outlined in the SECTIONS 32 11 16 - SUB -GRADE
PREPARATION AND COMPACTION, SECTION 32 11 14 - FLEXIBLE BASE
CRUSHED LIMESTONE, and SECTION 32 12 16 - HOT -MIX ASPHALTIC
CONCRETE PAVEMENT. Tracked or lugged equipment will not be allowed on
pavements at any time. In the event indicated rollers are not sufficiently weighted, nor
have sufficient tire inflation capacity to produce the required degree of compaction,
additional larger sized rollers will be required at no additional expense to the city.
B. Sufficient rollers shall be provided to compact the material in a satisfactory manner.
3.2 EQUIPMENT FOR SUBGRADE, SUB -BASE AND BASE
A. PNEUMATIC TIRED ROLLERS: Large pneumatic tired rollers shall be of a type having
five (5) or more tires, with each tire being inflated to a pressure of 100 pounds per square
inch. Total weight of the unit when loaded shall not be less than twenty-five (25) tons.
The load shall be equally distributed to all wheels and the tires shall be uniformly inflated.
Small pneumatic tired rollers shall consist of not less than nine (9) pneumatic tired
wheels running on axles in such a manner that the rear group will not follow in the
tracks of the forward group and mounted in a rigid frame and provided with a body
suitable for ballast loading. The wheel base of the roller shall be not less than five
(5) nor more than ten (10) feet. The front axle shall be attached to the frame in such
a manner that the roller may be turned within a minimum circle. The pneumatic tired
roller under working conditions shall have an effective rolling width of
approximately sixty (60) inches. It shall be so designed that by ballast loading, the
Approved—112009 B/CS Unified Specifications
load may be varied uniformly from a minimum of one hundred (100) to a maximum
of four hundred (400) pounds per inch of width of tire tread.
2. The tire pressure and the compression to be provided by the pneumatic roller shall be
as directed by the Engineer. Pneumatic tired rollers shall be drawn by either a
suitable crawler -type tractor, a pneumatic -tired tractor or a truck of adequate tractive
effort, or may be of the self-propelled type and the roller when drawn or propelled by
either type of equipment shall be considered a pneumatic tired roller unit. Unless
otherwise directed, pneumatic tired rollers shall be operated within a speed range
from two (2) to four (4) miles per hour.
B. TAMPING ROLLERS: Tamping rollers shall consist of two (2) metal rollers, drums or
shells of forty (40) inches minimum diameter. Each not less than forty-two (42) inches in
length and unit mounted in a rigid frame in such a manner that each roller may oscillate
independently of the other. Each roller, drum or shell shall be surmounted by metal studs
with tamping feet projecting not less than seven (7) inches from the surface and spaced not
less than six (6) nor more than ten (10) inches measured diagonally center to center. The
cross sectional area of each tamping foot measured perpendicularly to the axis of the stud,
shall be not less than five (5) nor more than eight (8) square inches. The roller shall be
supplemented with cleaning teeth to provide self cleaning. The roller shall be so designed
that by ballast loading, the load on each tamping foot may be varied uniformly from one
hundred, twenty-five (125) to one hundred, seventy-five (175) pounds per square inch of
cross sectional area. The load per tamping foot will be determined by dividing the total
weight of the roller by the number of tamping feet in one (1) row parallel to (or
approximately so) the axis of the roller. The compression to be provided shall be as
directed by the Engineer. The tamping roller shall be drawn by suitable power equipment
of adequate tractive effort. Two (2) tamping rollers, consisting of four (4) cylinders, drawn
by approved power equipment shall be considered a roller unit. Unless otherwise directed,
tamping rollers shall be operated within a speed range of two (2) to three (3) miles per
hour.
3.3 EQUIPMENT FOR HOT MIX ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVEMENT
A. POWER FLAT WHEEL ROLLERS: Power flat wheel rollers shall be of the three (3)
wheel self-propelled type only, weighing not less than eight (8) tons nor more than twelve
(12) tons. Power flat wheel rollers shall be operated with a speed range from two (2) to
three (3) miles per hour and/or as directed.
B. PNEUMATIC TIRED ROLLERS: Pneumatic tired rollers for hot mix asphaltic concrete
pavement shall conform to the Specifications as noted above for pneumatic rollers.
END OF SECTION
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
SECTION 321400 - UNIT PAVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Concrete pavers set in aggregate and mortar setting beds.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For materials other than water and aggregates.
B. Samples for unit pavers and joint materials .
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Wolf Pen Creek Festival Park
A. The Contractor is responsible for correction of work which does not conform to the specified
requirements, including strength, tolerances and colors. Correct deficient materials as directed
by the Owner.
B. Installer: a firm with a minimum of (3) three years experience in the successful installation of
similar pavers in similar quantities. Firm must provide Owner a list of jobs completed which
can be inspected by Owner or Owner's Representative. A minimum of 2 of these completed
jobs must be located in the area similar to this job.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Warrant the work specified herein for 1 year against becoming unserviceable or causing
an objectionable appearance resulting from either defective or non conforming materials
and workmanship.
1.5 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Concrete pavers shall be delivered and unloaded at jobsite on pallets and bound in shrink wrap
plastics covers to prevent rust staining from steel strapping and in such a manner that no
damage occurs to product during hauling, handling or unloading at the jobsite.
1.6 MOCK-UPS
A. Provide layout and pattern mock-ups on jobsite at approved location.
UNIT PAVING 321400 - 1
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
Wolf Pen Creek Festival Park
B. Contractor shall provide, for approval by Owners Representative, a mock-up of each type of
unit paver pattern specified. These are to be approved by Owner's Representative prior to
commencement of whole pattern.
C. Mock-ups shall remain on the jobsite for the duration of the project unless otherwise directed by
Owners Representative.
D. Contractor shall provide a 4'X4' mock-up for approval prior to installation.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Cold -Weather Protection: Do not use frozen materials or build on frozen subgrade or setting
beds.
B. Weather Limitations for Bituminous Setting Bed: Install bituminous setting bed only when
ambient temperature is above 40 deg F (4 deg C) and when base is dry.
C. Weather Limitations for Mortar and Grout:
1. Cold -Weather Requirements: Comply with cold -weather construction requirements
contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
2. Hot -Weather Requirements: Comply with hot -weather construction requirements
contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. Do not apply mortar to substrates with
temperatures of 100 deg F (38 deg C) and higher.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 UNIT PAVERS
A. Concrete Pavers: Solid interlocking paving units complying with ASTM C 936, made from
normal -weight aggregates.
1. Paver type, size & color shall be as stated on the drawings.
2.2 AGGREGATE SETTING -BED MATERIALS
A. Sand for Leveling Course: Sound, sharp, washed, natural sand or crushed stone complying with
gradation requirements in ASTM C 33 for fine aggregate.
B. Sand for Joints: Fine, sharp, washed, natural sand or crushed stone with 100 percent passing
No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve and no more than 10 percent passing No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve.
C. Filter Fabric: Filter fabric shall be non -woven filter band, soil separator as manufactured by
DeWitt Company with a minimum permeability rate of 219 gals / sq. ft. / minimum or approved
equal.
UNIT PAVING 321400 - 2
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek Festival Park
November 2010
2.3 MORTAR SETTING -BED MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type 11.
B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.
C. Sand: ASTM C 144.
D. Water: Potable.
2.4 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES
A. General: Comply with referenced standards and with manufacturers' written instructions
Discard mortars and grout if they have reached their initial set before being used.
B. Mortar -Bed Bond Coat: Mix neat cement and water to a creamy consistency.
C. Portland Cement -Lime Setting -Bed Mortar: Type M complying with ASTM C 270, Proportion
Specification.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Mix pavers from several pallets or cubes, as they are placed, to produce uniform blend of colors
and textures.
B. Cut unit pavers with motor -driven masonry saw equipment to provide pattern indicated and to
fit adjoining work neatly. Use full units without cutting where possible.
1. For concrete pavers, a block splitter may be used.
C. Joint Pattern: As indicated on drawings.
D. Tolerances: Do not exceed 1/16-inch unit -to -unit offset from flush (lippage) nor 1/8 inch in 24
inches and 1/4 inch in 10 feet from level, or indicated slope, for finished surface of paving.
E. Expansion and Control Joints: Provide for sealant -filled joints at locations and of widths
indicated. Provide compressible foam filler as backing for sealant -filled joints unless otherwise
indicated; where unfilled joints are indicated, provide temporary filler until paver installation is
complete. Install joint filler before setting pavers.
3.2 SAND SETTING
A. Sand:
1. Spread a maximum of 1" sharp sand over the area to receive concrete pavers.
UNIT PAVING 321400 - 3
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
Wolf Pen Creek Festival Park
2. Screed until level to the grade and profile required. Minimum depth of sand should be 1"
and maximum depth shall be 1 1/2".
3. Pavers shall be clean and free of foreign materials before installation.
4. Installation should start from a corner or straight edge and proceed forward over the
undisturbed sand laying course. Installation shall be carried out where possible to
minimize cutting pavers.
5. Paving work shall be plumb, level and true to line and grade; shall be installed 1/8"
higher than adjacent paved surfaces after compaction to allow for settlement. All edges
must be retained as per Detail.
6. Paving units shall be installed hand tight and level on the undisturbed sand laying course.
String lines should be used to hold pattern lines true. Joint spaces shall not exceed 1/8".
7. Cutting of paving units to be done only with an approved masonry saw. Contractor shall
take note of areas designated as 'no cut' paver areas. Contractor to adjust walk width to
accommodate full size pavers only.
8. After initial placement of pavers, sweep and vibrate dry joint sand into the joints using a
plate vibrator until all joints are completely filled with joint sand. The number of passes
with the vibrator and effort required to produce completely filled joints will vary on
gradation, moisture content, weather, adjustment of the vibrating plate, etc. Vibration
and filling of joints is to be completed to within 6' of any unconfined edge at the end of
each day.
9. Visually and physically inspect all joints to insure that they are completely filled and
compacted. Refill and re -compact joints until a rigid putty knife cannot be inserted more
than'/4" into the joint.
10. Excess sand shall be swept into the joints or disposed of from the surface area when
joints are completely filled.
11. The completed concrete unit paving installation shall be washed down and cleaned to
provide a clean finished installation.
3.3 MORTAR SETTING -BED APPLICATIONS
A. Mortar set pavers along outside edges where indicated on drawings.
B. Saturate concrete subbase with clean water several hours before placing setting bed. Remove
surface water about one hour before placing setting bed.
C. Apply mortar -bed bond coat over surface of concrete subbase about 15 minutes before placing
mortar bed. Limit area of bond coat to avoid its drying out before placing setting bed. Do not
exceed 1/16-inch thickness for bond coat.
D. Apply mortar bed over bond coat; spread and screed mortar bed to uniform thickness at
subgrade elevations required for accurate setting of pavers to finished grades indicated.
E. Mix and place only that amount of mortar bed that can be covered with pavers before initial set.
Before placing pavers, cut back, bevel edge, and remove and discard setting -bed material that
has reached initial set.
F. Wet brick pavers before laying if the initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in. per minute
when tested according to ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb water so they are damp but not
wet at time of laying.
UNIT PAVING 321400 - 4
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
Wolf Pen Creek Festival Park
G. Place pavers before initial set of cement occurs. Immediately before placing pavers on mortar
bed, apply uniform 1/16-inch-thick bond coat to mortar bed or to back of each paver with a flat
trowel.
H. Tamp or beat pavers with a wooden block or rubber mallet to obtain full contact with setting
bed and to bring finished surfaces within indicated tolerances. Set each paver in a single
operation before initial set of mortar; do not return to areas already set or disturb pavers for
purposes of realigning finished surfaces or adjusting joints.
3.4 ATTIC STOCK
A. Contractor shall provide 50 additional pavers of each type used to the Owner for attic stock.
END OF SECTION 321400
UNIT PAVING 321400 - 5
Revised-1012009 B/CS Unified Specifications
SECTION 32 16 13
CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTER
(Sentences and/or paragraphs that are double underlined indicate revisions that were made from the
2008 specification.)
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This item shall consist of Reinforced CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTER constructed on
approved subgrade in conformity with the lines and grades established by the City
Engineer. CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTER shall also be in accordance with the
standard section, specifications and ordinances for sidewalks adopted by the city in which
CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTER is to be placed.
1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
A. Concrete curb and gutter shall be measured by the linear foot of length when complete and
in place.
B. The work performed and the materials furnished and measured shall be paid for at the
contract unit price bid for concrete curb and gutter. This shall include full compensation of
all materials, labor, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete the work.
Payment will not be made for unauthorized work.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
See SECTION 03 30 00 - CONCRETE.
PART2—PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
This item shall consist of a mixture of reinforcing steel, coarse aggregate, fine aggregate, cement
and water. The mixture shall conform to SECTION 03 30 00 - CONCRETE.
2.2 TESTING REQUIREMENTS
See SECTION 03 30 00 - CONCRETE.
PART 3 — EXECUTION
3.1 CONSTRUCTION METHODS
A. CONVENTIONALLY FORMED CONCRETE: Shape and compact subgrade, foundation,
or pavement surface to the line, grade and cross section shown on the plans. Lightly
sprinkle subgrade or foundation material immediately before concrete placement. Pour
concrete into forms, and strike off with a template '/4 to 3/8 inches less than the dimensions
of the finished curb unless otherwise approved. After initial set, plaster surface with
mortar consisting of 1 part hydraulic cement and 2 parts fine aggregate. Brush exposed
surfaces to a uniform texture.
Revised — 1012009
B/CS Unified Specifications
B. EXTRUDED OR SLIP FORMED CONCRETE: Hand tamp and sprinkle subgrade or
foundation material before concrete placement. Provide clean surfaces for concrete
placement. If required, coat cleaned surfaces with approved adhesive or coating at the rate
of application shown on the plans or as directed. Place concrete with approved self-
propelled equipment. The forming tube of the extrusion machine or the form of the slip
form machine must be easily adjustable vertically during the forward motion of the
machine to provide variable heights necessary to conform to the established grade line.
Attach a pointer or gauge to the machine so that a continual comparison can be made
between the extruded or slip form work and the grade guideline. Other methods may be
used when approved. Finish surfaces immediately after extrusion or slip forming.
C. JOINTS: Unless otherwise shown on the plans, the walk shall be cut transversely with a
jointing tool every ten (10) feet after the concrete has been thoroughly worked and has
sufficiently set. Expansion joints shall be located every forty (40) feet.
D. CURING: After the finished concrete has sufficiently set, it shall be covered with burlap
and kept wet for a period of four (4) days. As an alternate the concrete may be cured by
the application of a clear membrane seal coat that will retain 85% of the original mixing
water at the end of three (3) days.
E. CLEANUP: After the construction work has been completed, the Contractor shall remove
all debris, trash, excess materials, forms, stakes, empty sacks, etc. occasioned by his work
from the premises. The site shall be left with a neat appearance. All excavation shall be
backfilled and all excess excavated materials shall be disposed of.
END OF SECTION
2
Revised - 112009 B/CS Unified Specifications
Additional Revisions-1012009
SECTION 32 16 13.01
CONCRETE SIDEWALK
(Sentences andlor paragraphs that are double underlined indicate revisions that were made from the
2008 specification. Additional revisions are indicated by a dashed underline.)
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
This item shall consist of Reinforced Concrete Sidewalk constructed on approved subgrade in
conformity with the lines and grades established by the City Engineer. Sidewalks shall also be in
accordance with the standard section, specifications and ordinances for sidewalks adopted by the
city in which sidewalk is to be placed.
1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
A. Concrete sidewalk shall be measured by the square foot of surface area when complete and
in place.
B. The work performed and the materials furnished and measured shall be paid for at the
contract unit price bid for concrete sidewalk. This shall include full compensation of all
materials, labor, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete the work.
Payment will not be made for unauthorized work.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
See SECTION 03 30 00 - CONCRETE.
---------------------------
PART 2 — PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
This item shall consist of a mixture of reinforcing steel, coarse aggregate, fine aggregate, cement
and water. The mixture shall conform to SECTION 03 30 00 - CONCRETE.
----------------------------
2.2 TESTING REQUIREMENTS
See SECTION 03 30 00 - CONCRETE.
---------------------------
PART 3 — EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. The subgrade shall be excavated and fine graded to a true grade. Any backfill shall be
watered and tamped well ahead of the placing of the concrete. If dry, the subgrade shall be
sprinkled immediately before depositing any concrete. Forms shall be metal or wood, free
of warp and of a depth equal to the depth of the concrete. They shall be secured and
accurately staked to line and grade and held in a true position during the placing of the
concrete. Expansion joints of an approved material shall be used between the sidewalk and
all abutting concrete. Placement of concrete may begin after the subgrade is thoroughly
compacted and the forms, expansion joints (where necessary) and reinforcing steel are in
Revised — 112009
Additional Revisions — 1012009
B/CS Unified Specifications
place. The concrete shall be thoroughly worked with a flat spade or similar tool along the
forms as the pouring continues to insure the absence of honeycombs. No concrete over
thirty (30) minutes old or retempered concrete shall be used. After the placing of the
concrete has sufficiently advanced, the concrete shall be struck off flush with the forms.
Then the concrete shall be worked with a wooden float to flush excess mortar to the
surface. All exposed corners are to be edged or rounded to the radius shown on the Plans.
B. Unless otherwise shown on the plans, the walk shall be cut transversely with a jointing tool
at a width equal to the sidewalk width after the concrete has been thoroughly worked and
has sufficiently set. Expansion joints shall be located every forty (40) feet.
C. After the finished concrete has sufficiently set, it shall be covered with burlap and kept wet
for a period of four (4) days. As an alternate the concrete may be cured by the application
of a clear membrane seal coat that will retain 85% of the original mixing water at the end
of three (3) days.
D. After the construction work has been completed, the Contractor shall remove all debris,
trash, excess materials, forms, stakes, empty sacks, etc. occasioned by his work from the
premises. The site shall be left with a neat appearance. All excavation shall be backfilled
and all excess excavated materials shall be disposed of.
END OF SECTION
Revised—112009
B/CS Unified Specifications
SECTION 32 17 23.23
REFLECTORIZED PAVEMENT MARKERS (RPMs)
PART1-GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
This item shall govern for the furnishing and installing of rai ed reflectorized pavement markers
RPMs at locations designated on the plans or as directed by the Engineer.
1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
A. Pavement markers will be measured as each pavement marker complete and in place.
B. The price shall be full compensation for furnishing all materials, all preparation and
installation, all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the work.
PART 2—PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. The RPMs shall be conform to Item No. 672, Texas Department of Transportation's
Standard Specifications for Construction and Maintenance of Highways. Streets. and
Bridges. June 2004; provided, however, that all buttons used on any one project shall be of
the same material and same manufacture.
B. The base of the marker shall be flat (the deviation from a flat surface shall not exceed 1/16
inch), and designed to be bonded to either asphaltic or portland cement concrete pavement,
with an approved adhesive meeting the requirements stated in Test Method TEX-61 I J.
2.2 OPTICAL REQUIREMENTS
The specific intensity of each reflective surface shall not be less than the following values when
tested at a 0.2 angle of divergence and when the incident light is parallel to the base of the
marker.
Horz. Ent. Angle
Amber
Red
4 e ee
3M
200
0.755
20 degrees
1.50
L44
4 �0
A. ANGLE OF INCIDENCE: The angle of incidence is the angle formed by a ray from the
light source to the marker, and normal to the leading edge of the marker face.
B. ANGLE OF DIVERGENCE: The angle of divergence is the angle formed by a ray from
the light source to the marker, and the returned ray from the marker to the measuring
receptor.
Revised — 112009
B/CS Unified Specifications
C. SPECIFIC INTENSITY: The specific intensity is the mean candle power of the reflected
light at a given incidence and divergence angle for each foot candle at the reflector on a
plane perpendicular to the incident light. (Test Method TEX-842-13)
2.3 STRENGTH REQUIREMENTS
The markers shall comply with the adhesion requirements of Test Method TEX-611-J. The
marker shall withstand a falling -ball impact of 5 (five) feet without breaking, cracking or being
significantly deformed when tested according to Test Method TEX-430-A. The marker shall
show no change in shape or color when subjected to the requirements of Test Method TEX-846-
B. The temperature shall be 140' F with the marker in a vertical position.
2.4 MARKER TYPES
The color and number of reflective surfaces of the buttons or markers shall be as designated in
the Plans and Specifications.
2.5 SAMPLING
Should any of the specimens selected for strength testing, as specified in the section, "Strength
Requirements", fail to comply with the strength requirements of this specification; five (5)
additional specimens will be tested. The failure of any one of these five (5) specimens shall be
cause for the rejection of the entire lot or shipment represented by the sample.
PART 3 — EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
The RPMs shall be placed in accordance with the plans or as directed by the Engineer. The
pavement surface shall be prepared by buffing, grinding, or other methods approved by the
Engineer. After preparation, the surface must be free of dirt, grease, oil, moisture, loose unsound
pavement, and any other material, which would adversely affect the bond of the adhesive. The
wet epoxy or bituminous material shall be applied so that 100% of the bonding area of the button
will be in contact and shall be of sufficient thickness so that the excess adhesive shall be forced
out around the perimeter of the button. When the project is complete, the button shall be firmly
bonded to the pavement. Lines formed by the buttons shall be true, and the entire installation
shall present a neat appearance.
END OF SECTION
2
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
SECTION 323113 - CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES
PART1-GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Chain -Link Fences: Industrial.
2. Gates: Swing.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
Wolf Pen Creek Festival Park
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show locations, components, materials, dimensions, sizes, weights, and
finishes of components. Include plans, gate elevations, sections, details of post anchorage,
attachment, bracing, and other required installation and operational clearances.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 CHAIN -LINK FENCE FABRIC
A. General: Height to match existing. Comply with ASTM A 392, CLFMI CLF 2445, and
requirements indicated below:
1. Steel Wire Fabric: Metallic -coated wire with a diameter of 0.148 inch.
a. Mesh Size: to match existing.
b. Aluminum Coating: ASTM A 491, Type I.
C. Metallic (Zinc) Coating: ASTM A 392, Type II.
d. Zn-5-AI-MM Aluminum-Mischmetal Alloy Coating: ASTM F 1345, Type III.
2. Aluminum Wire Fabric: ASTM F 1183, with mill finish, and wire diameter of 0.148
inches.
a. Mesh Size: 2 inches.
3. Selvage: Knuckled at both selvages.
CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES 323113 - 1
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
2.2 INDUSTRIAL FENCE FRAMING
Wolf Pen Creek Festival Park
A. Posts and Rails: Comply with ASTM F 1043 for framing, ASTM F 1083 for Group IC round
pipe, and the following:
1. Group: IA, round steel pipe, Schedule 40.
2. Fence Height: to match existing.
3. Strength Requirement: Light industrial according to ASTM F 1043.
4. Coating for Steel Framing:
a. Metallic coating.
2.3 INDUSTRIAL SWING GATES
A. General: Comply with ASTM F 900 for double swing gate types.
1. Metal Pipe and Tubing: Galvanized steel. Comply with ASTM F 1083 and
ASTM F 1043 for materials and protective coatings.
2. Metal Pipe and Tubing: Aluminum. Comply with ASTM B 429 and ASTM F 1043 for
materials and protective coatings.
B. Frames and Bracing: Fabricate members from round, galvanized steel tubing with outside
dimension and weight according to ASTM F 900 and the following:
1. Gate Fabric Height: 2 inches less than adjacent fence height.
2. Leaf Width: to match existing.
3. Frame Members:
a. Tubular Steel: to match existing.
C. Frame Corner Construction:
1. Assembled with corner fittings and 5/16-inch-diameter, adjustable truss rods for panels 5
feet wide or wider.
D. Hardware: Latches permitting operation from both sides of gate, hinges, center gate stops and
keepers for each gate leaf more than 5 feet wide. Fabricate latches with integral eye openings
for padlocking; padlock accessible from both sides of gate.
2.4 FITTINGS
A. General: Comply with ASTM F 626.
B. Finish:
1. Metallic Coating for Pressed Steel or Cast Iron: Not less than 1.2 oz. /sq. ft. (366 g /sq.
m) zinc.
2. Aluminum: Mill finish.
CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES 323113 - 2
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
2.5 FENCE GROUNDING
Wolf Pen Creek Festival Park
A. Conductors: Bare, solid wire for No. 6 AWG and smaller; stranded wire for No. 4 AWG and
larger.
1. Material above Finished Grade: Copper.
2. Material on or below Finished Grade: Copper.
3. Bonding Jumpers: Braided copper tape, 1 inch wide, woven of No. 30 AWG bare copper
wire, terminated with copper ferrules.
B. Connectors and Grounding Rods: Comply with UL 467.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install chain -link fencing to comply with ASTM F 567 and more stringent
requirements specified.
B. Post Excavation: Drill or hand -excavate holes for posts to diameters and spacings indicated, in
firm, undisturbed soil.
C. Post Setting: Set posts in concrete at indicated spacing into firm, undisturbed soil.
1. Concrete Fill: Place concrete around posts to dimensions indicated and vibrate or tamp
for consolidation. Protect aboveground portion of posts from concrete splatter.
D. Terminal Posts: Locate terminal end, corner, and gate posts per ASTM F 567 and terminal pull
posts at changes in horizontal or vertical alignment.
E. Line Posts: Space line posts uniformly at 10 feet o.c.
F. Post Bracing and Intermediate Rails: Install according to ASTM F 567. Install braces at end
and gate posts and at both sides of corner and pull posts.
G. Top Rail: Install according to ASTM F 567.
H. Bottom Rails: Install, spanning between posts.
I. Chain -Link Fabric: Apply fabric to outside of enclosing framework. Leave 2 inches between
finish grade or surface and bottom selvage, unless otherwise indicated.
J. Tie Wires: Attach wire per ASTM F 626. Bend ends of wire to minimize hazard to individuals
and clothing.
K. Fasteners: Install nuts for tension bands and carriage bolts on the side of the fence opposite the
fabric side. Peen ends of bolts or score threads to prevent removal of nuts.
CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES 323113 - 3
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek Festival Park
November 2010
3.2 GATE INSTALLATION
A. Install gates according to manufacturer's written instructions, level, plumb, and secure for full
opening without interference. Attach fabric as for fencing. Attach hardware using tamper -
resistant or concealed means. Install ground -set items in concrete for anchorage. Adjust
hardware for smooth operation and lubricate where necessary.
B. Fence Grounding: Install at maximum intervals of 1500 feet.
C. Fences within 100 Feet of Buildings, Structures, Walkways, and Roadways: Ground at
maximum intervals of 750 feet.
1. Grounding Method: At each grounding location, drive a grounding rod vertically until
the top is 6 inches below finished grade. Connect rod to fence with No. 6 AWG
conductor. Connect conductor to each fence component at the grounding location.
D. Bonding Method for Gates: Connect bonding jumper between gatepost and gate frame.
Connections: Make connections so possibility of galvanic action or electrolysis is
minimized.
E. Bonding to Lightning Protection System: If fence terminates at lightning -protected building or
structure, ground the fence and bond the fence grounding conductor to lightning protection
down conductor or lightning protection grounding conductor complying with NFPA 780.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Grounding -Resistance Testing: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform field
quality -control testing.
END OF SECTION 323113
CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES 323113 - 4
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
SECTION 328400 - PLANTING IRRIGATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
Wolf Pen Creek Festival Park
A. This Section includes piping, valves, sprinklers, accessories, controls, and wiring for automatic -
control irrigation system.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Irrigation Lateral Lines: Downstream from control valves to sprinklers, specialties, and drain
valves. Piping is under pressure during flow.
B. Drain Piping: Downstream from circuit -piping drain valves. Piping is not under pressure.
C. Irrigation Main Piping: Downstream from point of connection to water distribution piping to,
and including, control valves. Piping is under water -distribution -system pressure.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include pressure ratings, rated capacities, and settings of selected models for the
following:
1. General -duty valves.
2. Specialty valves.
3. Control -valve boxes.
4. Sprinklers.
5. Irrigation accessories.
6. Controllers.
B. Evidence of State of Texas irrigation license and required experience.
C. Shop Drawings: Show irrigation system piping, including plan layout, and locations, types,
sizes, capacities, and flow characteristics of irrigation system piping components. Include water
meters, backflow preventers, valves, piping, sprinklers and devices, accessories, controls, and
wiring. Show areas of sprinkler spray and overspray. Show wire size and number of
conductors for each control cable.
D. Record and As -built Drawings:
The Contractor shall provide and keep up to date and complete "as -built" record set of
blueline ozalid prints which shall be corrected daily and show every change from the
original drawings and specifications and the exact "as -built" locations, sizes, and kinds of
equipment. Prints for this purpose may be obtained from the Architect at cost. This set
of drawings shall be kept on the site and shall be used only as a record set.
PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 - 1
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
Wolf Pen Creek Festival Park
2. These drawings shall also serve as work progress sheets and shall be the basis for mea-
surement and payment for work completed. These drawings shall be available at all
times for inspection and shall be kept in a location designated by the Architect. Should
the record blue line as -built progress sheets not be available for review or not up-to-date
at the time of any inspection (refer to Section 3.10 - Inspection Schedule), it will be as-
sumed no work has been completed and the Contractor will be assessed the cost of that
site visit at the current billing rate of the Architect. No other observations shall take
place prior to payment of that assessment.
3. The Contractor shall make neat and legible notations on the as -built progress sheets daily
as the work proceeds, showing the work as actually installed.
4. Before the date of the final inspection, the Contractor shall transfer all information from
the "as -built" prints to a sepia mylar or similar mylar material procured from the Archi-
tect. All work shall be in waterproof India ink and applied to the mylar by a technical
pen made expressly for use on mylar material. Contractor shall use symbols and notation
consistent with original drawings.
5. The Contractor shall dimension from two (2) permanent points of reference, building
corners, sidewalk, or road intersections, etc., the location of the following items:
a. Connection to existing water lines.
b. Connection to existing electrical power.
C. Gate valves.
d. Routing of sprinkler pressure lines (dimensions max. 100' along routing).
e. Sprinkler control valves.
f. Routing of control wiring.
g. Quick coupling valves.
h. Other related equipment as directed by the Architect.
E. Controller Charts:
As -built drawings shall be approved by the Architect before controllers charts are pre-
pared.
a. Index sheet stating Contractor's address and telephone number, list of equipment
with name and addresses of local manufacturer's representative.
b. Catalog and parts sheets on every material and equipment installed under this con-
tract.
C. Guarantee statement.
d. Complete operating and maintenance instruction on all major equipment.
F. Operation and maintenance instructions.
G. Spares and Special Tools — Provide Owner with 2 spare sprinkler heads of each size and type.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 - 2
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
Wolf Pen Creek Festival Park
B. Installer — Installation of Irrigation System installation shall be performed under the direction of
a State of Texas licensed irrigator with not less than 5 years experience in this type of work.
C. Manufacturer's Directions: Manufacturer's directions and detailed drawings shall be followed in
all cases where the manufacturers of articles used in this contract furnish directions covering
points not shown in the drawings and specifications.
D. Ordinances, Codes and Regulations: All local, municipal and state laws, and rules and
regulations governing or relating to any portion of this work are hereby incorporated into and
made a part of these specifications, and their provisions shall be carried out by the Contractor.
Anything contained in these specifications shall not be construed to conflict with any of the
above rules and regulations and requirements of the same. However, when these specifications
and drawings call for or describe materials, workmanship, or construction of a better quality,
higher standard, or larger size than is required by the above rules and regulations, these
specifications and drawings shall take precedence.
E. Explanation of Drawings:
1. Due to the scale of drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, sleeves, etc.,
which may be required. The Contractor shall carefully investigate the structural and fi-
nished conditions affecting all of his work and plan his work accordingly, furnishing such
fittings, etc., as may be required to meet such conditions. Drawings are generally dia-
grammatic and indicative of the work to be installed. The work shall be installed in such
a manner as to avoid conflicts between irrigation systems, planting, and architectural fea-
tures.
2. The word Architect as used herein shall refer to the City Engineer's authorized represent-
ative or the Landscape Architect.
3. All work called for on the drawings by notes or details shall be furnished and installed
whether or not specifically mentioned in the specifications.
4. The Contractor shall not willfully install the irrigation system as shown on the drawings
when it is obvious in the field that obstructions, grade differences or discrepancies in area
dimensions exist that might not have been considered in engineering. Such obstructions
or differences should be brought to the attention of the City Engineer's authorized repre-
sentative. In the event this notification is not performed, the irrigation contractor shall
assume full responsibility for any revisions necessary.
1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY AND HANDLING
A. Materials shall be delivered in manufacturer's unopened packaging labeled to indicate
manufacturer's name and product identification. Insure that packaging and labeling remain
intact until installation. Materials shall be stored protected from the elements, including direct
sunlight.
B. Pipes shall be handled so as to prevent being damaged and to maintain their straightness. Pipe
ends shall be wrapped. Pipes shall be stored on beds the full length of the pipes. Damaged or
dented pipes or fittings shall not be used.
PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 - 3
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
1.6 SUBSTITUTIONS
Wolf Pen Creek Festival Park
A. If the Irrigation Contractor wishes to substitute any equipment or materials for those equipment
or materials listed on the irrigation drawings and specifications, he may do so by providing the
following information to the City Engineer's authorized representative for approval:
1. Provide a statement indicating the reason for making the substitution. Use a separate
sheet of paper for each item to be substituted.
2. Provide descriptive catalog literature, performance charts and flow charts for each item to
be substituted.
3. Provide the amount of cost savings if the substituted item is approved.
B. City Engineer's authorized representative shall have the sole responsibility in accepting or
rejecting any substituted item as an approved equal to those equipment and materials listed on
the irrigation drawings and specifications.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
manufacturers specified.
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
2.2 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS
A. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L, water tube, annealed temper.
1. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B 16.18, cast -copper -alloy or ASME B 16.22, wrought -
copper, solder joint fittings. Furnish wrought -copper fittings if indicated.
2. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast -copper -alloy, hexagonal -stock body, with ball-and-
socket, metal -to -metal seating surfaces and solder joint or threaded ends.
B. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K, water tube, drawn temper.
1. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B 16.18, cast -copper -alloy or ASME B 16.22, wrought -
copper, solder joint fittings. Furnish wrought -copper fittings if indicated.
2. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast -copper -alloy, hexagonal -stock body, with ball-and-
socket, metal -to -metal seating surfaces and solder joint or threaded ends.
C. Mainline PVC Pipe:
Pressure Main Line:
PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 - 4
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
Wolf Pen Creek Festival Park
a. Pressure main line piping 6" and larger shall be Class 200 rubber gasket pipe and
4" and smaller shall be PVC Schedule 40 with solvent welded joints.
b. Pipe shall be made from an NSF approved Type I, Grade I, PVC compound con-
forming to ASTM resin specification D1785. All pipe must meet requirements as
set forth in Federal Specification PS-22-70, with an appropriate standard dimen-
sion (S.D.R.) (Solvent -weld Pipe).
PVC Non -Pressure Lateral Line Piping:
a. Non -pressure buried lateral line piping shall be PVC class 200 with solvent -weld
joints.
b. Pipe shall be made from NSF approved, Type I, Grade II PVC compound con-
forming to ASTM resin specification D1784. All pipe must meet requirements set
forth in Federal Specification PS-22-70 with an appropriate standard dimension ra-
tio.
3. Fittings 6" and larger shall be push on Ductile Iron designed and manufactured using
ASTM A-536 Grade 70-50-05 ductile iron with tensile strength of 70,000 psi such as
manufactured by Harco or approved equal.
4. Fittings 4" and smaller shall be Schedule 40, I-2, II -I NSF approved conforming to
ASTM test procedure D2466 PVC solvent -weld fittings.
5. Solvent cement and primer for PVC solvent -weld pipe and fittings shall be of type and
installation methods prescribed by the manufacturer.
6. All PVC pipe must bear the following markings:
a. Manufacturer's name.
b. Nominal pipe size.
C. Schedule or class.
d. Pressure rating in P.S.I.
e. NSF (National Sanitation Foundation) approval.
f. Date of expiration.
7. All fittings shall bear the manufacturer's name or trademark, material designation, appli-
cable I.P.S., schedule number and NSF seal of approval
D. Irrigation Lateral Line Pipe
1. Pipes % inch diameter and larger: ASTM D 2231, PVC, 1120 or 1220, SDR 21.0, 200
PSI
2. Pipes'h inch diameter: ASTM D 2241, PVC, 1120 or 1220, SDR 13.5, 315 PSI
E. Fittings for Solvent Welded Joints
1. Schedule 40: ASTM D 2466
2. Schedule 80: ASTM D 2467
F. Fittings for Threaded Joints
ASTM D 2466, PVC, Schedule 80
PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 - 5
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek Festival Park
November 2010
2.3 GENERAL -DUTY VALVES
A. Gate valves 4" and smaller shall be MSS SP-80, Class 125, Type 1, nonrising-stem, bronze
body with solid wedge, threaded ends, and malleable -iron handwheel.
Gate valves 4" and smaller shall be similar to those manufactured by Nibco, Hammond or
approved equal
All gate valves shall be installed per installation detail.
B. Gate valves 6 inch and larger shall be cast or ductile iron. They shall conform to AWWA C-509.
Stem shall be fitted with a 2" x2" square wrench nut and shall be opened counter —clockwise.
Stem extension shall be added to bring operating nut to within 2 (two) feet of finished grade.
2.4 REMOTE CONTROL VALVES
A. Plastic Automatic Control Valves: Molded -plastic body, normally closed, diaphragm type with
manual flow adjustment, and operated by 24-V ac solenoid.
1. All electric control valves shall be of the same manufacturer.
2. All electric control valves shall have a manual flow adjustment and pressure regulating
module.
3. Provide and install one control valve box for each electric control valve.
4. Electric remote control valve shall be RainBird PED, size as shown on plan.
B. Automatic Drain Valves: Spring -loaded -ball type of construction and designed to open for
drainage if line pressure drops below 2-1/2 to 3 psig.
C. Quick -Couplers: Factory -fabricated, bronze or brass, two-piece assembly. Include coupler
water -seal valve; removable upper body with spring -loaded or weighted, purple rubber -covered
cap; hose swivel with ASME B1.20.7, 3/4-11.5NH threads for garden hose on outlet; and
operating key.
Manufacturers:
a. Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp.
All quick couplers shall be installed using KBI "o"-ring style swing joint and located in
10" round valve box with Purple lid.
D. Remote Control -Valve Boxes: Box and cover, with open bottom and openings for piping;
designed for installing flush with grade. Include size as required for valves and service.
1. Valve boxes shall be heavy duty plastic 17 inch by 11-3/4 inch by 12 inch depth, black
with black cover. Valve box shall be Series 1419, non -hinged, non -bolt cover, by Carson
Industries, Inc., 1925 Street, LaVerne, CA 91750, 213-732-6265, or approved equal.
2. Manufacturers:
a. Carson Industries LLC.
b. Christy Concrete Products, Inc.
PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 - 6
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
E. Gate Valve and Control Wire Splice Boxes
Wolf Pen Creek Festival Park
1. Control wire splice boxes shall be heavy duty plastic 10 inch diameter by 10-1/4 inch
deep, black with black cover, No. 910-12B, by Carson Industries, Inc. or approved equal.
F. Drainage Backfill: Cleaned gravel or crushed stone, graded from 3/8 inch minimum to 1 inch
maximum.
2.5 SPRINKLERS
A. Description: Brass or plastic housing and corrosion -resistant interior parts designed for uniform
coverage over entire spray area indicated, at available water pressure.
Manufacturers:
a. Hunter Industries Incorporated.
b. Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp.
2. Flush, Surface Sprinklers: Fixed pattern, with screw -type flow adjustment.
3. Bubblers: Fixed pattern, with screw -type flow adjustment.
4. Shrubbery Sprinklers: Fixed pattern, with screw -type flow adjustment.
5. Pop-up, Spray Sprinklers: Fixed pattern, with screw -type flow adjustment and stainless -
steel retraction spring.
6. Pop-up, Rotary, Spray Sprinklers: Gear drive, full -circle and adjustable part -circle types.
7. Pop-up, Rotary, Impact Sprinklers: Impact drive, full -circle and part -circle types.
8. Aboveground, Rotary, Impact Sprinklers: Impact drive, full -circle and part -circle types.
2.6 SPRINKLER SPECIALTIES
A. Strainer/Filter Units: Brass or plastic housing, with corrosion -resistant internal parts; of size
and capacity required for devices downstream from unit.
B. Emitters: PE or vinyl body.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Amiad Filtration Systems.
b. Netafim USA.
C. Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp.
2. Single -Outlet Emitters: To deliver the following flow at approximately 20 psig:
a. Flow: 1 gph.
b. Tubing Size: 1/8-inch minimum ID and 10 feet long.
3. Outlet Caps: Plastic, for outlets without tubing.
PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 - 7
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
Wolf Pen Creek Festival Park
C. Drip Tubes: flexible PE or PVC tubing for emitters and other devices, of length indicated and
with plugged end.
Manufacturers:
a. Netafim USA.
b. Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp.
2. Dripperline
Dripperline shall consist of nominal sized one-half inch low density, linear polyethylene
tubing, housing internal pressure compensating, continuously self -flushing, integral drip
emitters. The tubing shall have an outside diameter (O.D.) of 0.67 inches, and an inside
diameter (I.D.) of 0.57 inches. The emitters shall have the ability to independently
regulate discharge rates, with an output pressure of seven (7) to seventy (70) psi, at a
constant flow of 0.60 gallons per hour (GPH). The dripperline shall have factory install
emitters with check valves 12 inches on center.
3. Automatic line flushing valve shall be installed at the end of each independent zone. The
valve shall be capable of flushing one gallon of water at the beginning of each irrigation
cycle.
D. Commercial Control Zone Kits for zones with flows from 3.0 to 40.0 GPM
1. Control Zone Kit shall be Rain Bird's Commercial Control Zone Kit with Rain Bird's 1"
or 1 ''/z" PESB valve, Quick Check Basket Filter with 200-mesh (75 micron) screen and
40 psi Pressure Regulator.
2. The 1" control zone kit shall have a 1" isolation ball valve.
3. The filter shall be a 1" inline Quick Check Basket Filter body constructed of heavy-duty,
glass -filled, UV resistant polypropylene capable of withstanding pressures of not less
than 150 psi (10,3 bars). The design shall be a basket style body with jar -top cap. The
cap shall incorporate an indicator that goes from green to red during operation when the
filter element needs cleaning. The filter element shall be constructed of a durable
stainless steel mesh attached to a propylene frame and shall be a standard 200-mesh (75
micron). The screen shall be serviceable for cleaning purposes by unscrewing the cap
from the body and removing the filter element.
4. The control zone kit shall have an inline pressure regulator. The pressure regulator shall
be constructed of durable, UV resistant non -corrosive material able to accommodate an
inlet pressure rating of not less than 150 psi (10,3 bar). The pressure regulating device is
a normally open device that allows full flow with little pressure loss unless the inlet
pressure is greater than the preset level. As the inlet pressure increases above the preset
level it compresses a spring and begins to reduce the flow and downstream pressure. The
inline pressure regulator shall have a preset outlet pressure of approximately 40 psi (2,8
bar).
5. The control zone kit shall have a 1" Rain Bird PESB series automatic irrigation control
valve. The valve pressure rating not to be less than 150 psi (10,3 bars). The valve body
and bonnet shall be constructed of high -impact, weather -resistant plastic, stainless steel
and other chemical/UV resistant materials. The valve shall have a diaphragm constructed
of a durable Buna-N rubber material reinforced with nylon.
6. Models: XCZ-100-B-COM
Medium Flow Kit for 3.0 to 20.0 GPM (11 to 76 1/m). Includes a 1" PESB Valve, Basket
Filter with 200 mesh (75 micron) screen, 40 psi Pressure Regulator and ball valve.
PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 - 8
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
2.7 CONTROLLER(S)
Wolf Pen Creek Festival Park
A. Controller(s) shall be Hybrid type Controller(s) as specified on drawings.
1. Controller shall be a Hybrid type, capable of fully automatic or manual operation of the
system.
2. Controller shall operate on a minimum of 117 volts A.C. input power and be capable of
operating 24 volt A.C. electric remote control valves. Controller shall have a reset circuit
breaker to protect it from power overload.
3. The controller shall have the specified number of stations. Each station shall have a time
setting knob capable of being set for incrementally variable timing or set to omit the
station from the irrigation cycle.
4. Controller shall have a 365 day calendar, event day off, water budget, cycle and soak and
a master "on -off' switch.
5. Controller shall have a UL-listed 24V AC transformer. All station wiring shall be color -
coded with section indicator key visibly imprinted.
6. Operation instructions and location of water source supplying system shall be printed on
face of controller. Section location chart shall be placed inside cabinet door.
B. [Battery Powered Controller — Controllers shall be TBOS Controller with field
transmitter by Rain Bird:
1. Controllers shall be capable of fully automatic or manual operation of the system.
The control module shall be housed in an ABS plastic cabinet and shall be potted in
insure waterproof operation.
2. Controllers shall operate with only one 9V alkaline batter (EnergizerTM and
DuracellTM are recommended) and is capable of operating potted latching solenoid
remote control valves.
3. Controller shall have station timing of 1 minute to 12 hours in 1-increments with a
365-day calendar.
4. Controller shall be available in 1, 2 or 4 station control modules.
5. Controller shall have automatic rain shutoff.]
2.8 WIRING
A. Wiring: AWG-ULUF 600 volt with solid -copper conductors and insulated cable; suitable for
direct burial.
Manufacturers:
a. Paige Cable
b. Regency Wire and Cable
C. Approved equal
2. Feeder -Circuit Cables: No. 12 AWG minimum, between building and controllers and
runs over 1,000 LF.
3. Low -Voltage, Branch -Circuit Cables: No. 14 AWG minimum, between controllers and
automatic control valves; color -coded different from feeder -circuit -cable jacket color;
with jackets of different colors for multiple -cable installation in same trench.
4. Install 3 spare wire from each controller to fartherest valve in each direction.
PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 - 9
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
Wolf Pen Creek Festival Park
5. Where more than one (1) wire is placed in a trench, the wiring shall be taped together at
intervals of ten (10) feet.
6. An expansion curl shall be provided within three (3) feet of each wire connection. Ex-
pansion curl shall be of sufficient length at each splice connection at each electric control,
so that in case of repair, the valve bonnet may be brought to the surface without discon-
necting the control wires. Control wires shall be laid loosely in trench without stress or
stretching of control wire conductors.
7. All splices shall be made with Scotch-Lok #3576 Connector Sealing Packs, Rainbird
Snap-Tite wire connector, DBY (Direct Bury) Splice by 3M or approved equal. Use one
splice per connector sealing pack.
8. Field splices between the automatic controller and electrical control valves, less than 500'
apart, will not be allowed without prior approval of the Architect.
9. All field splices shall be installed in a 10" round valve box.
2.9 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
A. Backflow Preventers shall be bronze and copper, Double Check Assembly: Febco No. 805 by
Febco Sales, Inc. (CMB Industries), P.O. Box 8070, Fresno, CA 92747, 209-252-0791, or
approved equal. Size as per drawings.
2.10 REMOTE CONTROL VALVE TIES
A. Remote control valve ties shall be Christy's Valve I.D. tag model ID-STD-Y with wire to attach
numbered tag to valve.
2.11 SOLVENT CEMENT FOR SOLVENT WELDED JOINTS
A. CHRISTY'S RED HOT BLUE GLUE T. Christy Enterprises, Inc., 1207 W. Struck Avenue,
No. E, Orange, CA 92667, 800-258-4583, or approved equal. Use a compatible primer
recommended by the solvent cement manufacturer.
2.12 SEALANT FOR THREADED JOINTS UNDER CONSTANT PRESSURE
A. RECTOR SEAL LIQUID TEFLON by Rector Seal Corp., 2830 Produce Row, Houston, Texas
77023, 713-928-6423, or approved equal.
2.13 SLEEVES UNDER PAVING FOR CONTROL WIRE AND IRRIGATION LINES
A. ASTM D 2455, PVC, Schedule 40 sized as shown on drawings.
2.14 FITTINGS FOR THREADED JOINTS
A. ASTM D 2466, PVC, Schedule 80.
PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 - 10
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek Festival Park
November 2010
2.15 RAINFALL MONITOR
A. Provide a Mini-Clik by Glen Hilton Products or approved equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Site Conditions:
1. All scaled dimensions are approximate. The Contractor shall check and verify all size
dimensions and receive Architect's approval prior to proceeding with work under this
section.
2. Exercise extreme care in excavating and working near existing utilities. Contractor shall
be responsible for damages to utilities which are caused by his operations or neglect.
Check existing utilities drawings for existing utility locations.
3. Coordinate installation of sprinkler irrigation materials including pipe, so there shall be
NO interference with utilities or other construction or difficulty in planting trees, shrubs,
and ground covers. Coordinate work other site contractors.
4. The Contractor shall carefully check all grades to satisfy himself that he may safely pro-
ceed before starting work on the sprinkler irrigation system.
5. No machine trenching, unless approved by Architect, is to be done within drip line of
trees. Trenching is done by hand, tunneling or boring or other methods approved by
Architect. It is understood that the piping layout is diagrammatic and piping shall be
routed around trees and shrubs in such manner to avoid damage to plants.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Physical Layout:
Piping and head layout is shown on plans in schematic form only. All pipes to be in-
stalled directly behind curbs, walks, and walls wherever possible.
Prior to installation, the Contractor shall stake out all pressure supply lines, routing and
location of sprinkler heads.
All layout shall be approved by Architect prior to installation.
B. Water Supply:
Sprinkler Irrigation system shall be connected to water supply points -of- connection as
indicated on the drawings.
Connections shall be made at approximate locations as shown on drawings. Contractor is
responsible for minor changes caused by actual site conditions.
3.3 EARTHWORK
A. Refer to Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.
PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 - 11
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
Wolf Pen Creek Festival Park
B. Location of Heads — Design location is represented as accurately as possible. Make minor
adjustments on site with approval of Landscape Architect as necessary to ensure consistent and
even spacing where applicable. Set all heads minimum 6" from back of curb and 4" from edge
of concrete walls.
C. Install piping and wiring in sleeves under sidewalks, roadways, parking lots, and railroads.
D. [Drain Pockets: Excavate to sizes indicated. Backfill with cleaned gravel or crushed stone,
graded from 3/4 to 3 inches (19 to 75 mm), to 12 inches (300 mm) below grade. Cover gravel
or crushed stone with sheet of asphalt -saturated felt and backfill remainder with excavated
material.]
E. Provide minimum cover over top of underground piping according to the following:
1. Irrigation Main Piping: Minimum depth of 18 inches below finished grade.
2. Circuit Piping: 12 inches
3. Drain Piping: 12 inches
4. Sleeves: 24 inches
F. BACKFILL-
1. The trenches shall not be backfilled until all required tests are performed. Trenches shall
be carefully backfilled with the excavated materials approved for backfilling, consisting
of earth, loam, sandy clay, sand, or other approved materials, free from large clods of
earth or stones. Backfill shall be mechanically compacted in landscaped areas to a dry
density equal to adjacent undisturbed soil in planting area. Backfill will conform to adja-
cent grades without dips, sunken areas, humps or other surface irregularities.
2. A fine granular material backfill will be initially placed on all lines (minimum 4" depth).
No foreign matter larger than one-half (1/2) inch in size will be permitted in the initial
backfill.
3. Where rock is encountered in trenching, 4" of sand above the pipe and 4" of sand below
the pipe will be used as the initial backfill.
4. Flooding of trenches will be permitted only with approval of Architect.
5. If settlement occurs and subsequent adjustments in pipe, valves, sprinkler heads, lawn or
planting, or other construction are necessary, the Contractor shall make all required ad-
justments without cost to the City Engineer.
G. EXISTING LAWNS — Where trenching is required across existing lawns, (or in even of
changes or repairs after new lawn has been established), uniformly cut strips of sod 6 inches
wider than trench. Remove sod in rolls of suitable size for handling and keep moistened until
replanted.
1. Backfill trench to within 6 inches of finished grade and compact. Continue fill with
acceptable topsoil and compact to bring sod even with existing lawn.
2. Replant sod within 2 days after removal, roll and water generously.
3. Resod and restore to original condition all sod areas not in healthy condition equal to
adjoining lawns 30 days after replanting.
PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 - 12
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek Festival Park
November 2010
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. General - Unless otherwise indicated, Contractor shall comply with requirements of the
governing Uniform Plumbing Code.
B. Pipes
1. Piping Mains and Laterals - Lay out sprinkler mainlines and perform line adjustments
and site modifications to laterals prior to excavation. Lay pipe on solid subbase,
uniformly sloped without humps or depressions.
2. PVC Pipe Assembly
a. Cut PVC pipe square and de -burr. Clean pipe and fittings using primer as
recommended by the PVC pipe manufacturer. Use purple tinted primer to aid in
visual inspection.
b. Apply a thin even flow coat of PVC solvent cement to inside of the fitting and pipe
mating surface. Cure joints as recommended by the manufacturer and keep pipe
and fitting out of service during curing period. Construct watertight joints equal or
greater in strength than the pipe. Do not tap pipe at fittings.
3. Install plastic pipe in dry weather, when temperature is above 40 degrees F. and in
accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Allow joints to cure at least 24
hours at temperature above 40 degrees F. before testing.
4. Plastic pipe shall be snaked in the trenches in a manner to provide for expansion and
contraction as recommended by pipe manufacturer.
C. Sleeves Under Paving - The majority of sleeves under paving are existing as shown on
drawings. Where boring is required for new sleeves (refer to drawings), it shall be a "wet bore."
Install sleeves 12" beyond edge of pavement. Perform trench and backfill in accordance with
these specifications.
D. Concrete Thrust Blocks
1. Install where the rubber-gasketed irrigation main changes direction as at ells and tees and
where the rubber-gasketed main terminates.
2. Pressure tests shall not be made for a period of 36 to 48 hours following the completion
of pouring of the blocks.
3. Blocks for these mains shall be sized and placed in strict accordance with the pipe
manufacturer's specifications and shall be of an adequate size and so placed as to take all
thrust created by the maximum internal water pressure.
E. Irrigation Heads
1. Flush irrigation lines with full head of water and install heads after hydrostatic test is
completed.
2. Install heads at manufacturer's recommended heights.
3. Locate part -circle heads to maintain a minimum distance of 4, 12, 24, 48 inches from
walls and 2 inches form other boundaries, unless otherwise indicated.
4. Check for uniformity of coverage and pattern correctness. Adjust for 100% coverage
where required.
PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 - 13
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
Wolf Pen Creek Festival Park
Install nozzles with water running at reduced pressure starting with the head closest to the
valve.
Adjust arcs and radius at normal operating pressure.
F. Drip Tubing
Tubing installed in planting beds is to be placed at spacing indicated on drawings in
shallow trench and covered with planting backfill mix 1"-2" deep and then covered with
mulch. Tubing is to be placed after bed preparation is complete and plant material is
planted. Refer to Section 329300 — Plants.
Drip tubing is to be placed on top of root balls of trees in planting beds to allow for even
watering of trees.
All tubing is to be reviewed by Owner's Representative prior to burying.
G. Electric Remote Control Valves
1. Adjust automatic control valves to provide flow rate at rated operating pressure required
for each irrigation section.
2. Install valves in valve boxes, arranged for easy adjustment and removal. Locate valves to
ensure ease of access for maintenance such that no physical interference with other
elements of the project exist.
H. Remote Control Valve Tags - One Remote Control Valve Tag shall be attached to stem of each
electric remote control valve. Tags shall be numbered sequentially. Numbers shall correspond
to station numbers in electric controller. Provide tags and corresponding numbers for wires
pulled for future valves.
I. Valve Boxes - Install valve boxes to cover electric remote control valves. Install one valve
per valve box. Top of valve box shall be flush with finished grade. Bury minimum 4 bricks
under base of each box as support.
J. Control Wire Splice Boxes - Install control wire splice box to cover any splice in control wire.
Top of valve box shall be flush with finished grade. Bury minimum 4 bricks under base of each
box as support. Install control wire splice box to cover wires pulled for future valves.
K. Gravel Backfill - Backfill valve boxes and control wire splice boxes with gravel, minimum 6
inch depth.
L. Electric Controller
1. Controllers shall be fully grounded.
2. Connect remote control valves to controller in clockwise sequence to correspond with
stations 1, 2, 3, successively.
3. Affix a non -fading copy of irrigation diagram to cabinet door below controller's name.
Irrigation diagram shall be sealed between two plastic sheets, 20 mils. minimum
thickness. Irrigation diagram shall show clearly all valves operated by the controller,
showing station number, valve size, and type of planting irrigated.
4. Provide galvanized padlock against vandalism. Provide two keys to Owner. Keys to be
matched with existing controller keylocking mechanisms.
5. Power to Controller & Locations: Locations shown on plan for controllers is
approximate. Final location shall be determined on site by Owner. Contractor shall
PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 - 14
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
Wolf Pen Creek Festival Park
supply 120 VAC to controller from adjacent existing power sources. Follow local
governing codes in electrical work.
6. Lightning Protection and Grounding: Provide full grounding and lightning protection per
system manufacturer's recommendations. Grounding network shall measure 10 OHMS
or less when measured with a Vibra-Ground instrument
M. Irrigation Control Wires
1. Provide 24 volt system for control of automatic circuit -section valves of underground
irrigation system. Provide unit capacity to suit number of circuits indicated.
2. Install control wires with irrigation mains and laterals in common trench where possible.
Lay control wires neatly together to side of pipe. Provide looped slack at valves, corners,
bores and snake wire in trench to allow for contraction. Tie wires in bundles at 10 foot
intervals. Line splices will be allowed on runs of 500 Ft. or more. Splices shall be made
and placed in control wire splice boxes.
3. Common ground wire shall be green. No other wires shall be green.
4. Supply one extra wire, for each direction of run, to valve which is located the greatest
distance from the controller. Extra wire shall be white. Leave two loops of wire at each
valve location.
5. Color of wire from controller to control valve shall be consistent to each valve.
6. Solder splices and protect with splicing material specified. Provide 12 inch long
expansion loop within 3 feet of each wire connection and splice on runs of wire 100 feet
or longer.
N. Backflow Preventers
1. Make required connection to water supply according to local codes and manufacturer's
written instructions.
2. Install pressure type backflow devices at required grade in accordance with the local
Plumbing Code. Exposed mainline and mainline risers above PVC pipe main elevation
shall be copper. Install one brass union in riser downstream of device.
3. Insulate all above ground piping.
3.5 TESTING
A. General - Notify Landscape Architect 48 hours in advance when testing will be conducted.
Conduct tests in presence of Landscape Architect.
B. Hydrostatic Test - Test irrigation main line, before backfilling trenches, to a hydrostatic
pressure of not less than 100 psi for 1 hour. Piping may be tested in sections to expedite work.
Remove and repair or replace piping and connections which do not pass hydrostatic testing.
System shall not lose more than 1-1/2 gallons of water in 1 hour.
C. Shut off mainline at backflow preventer during non working hours until Contractor has
demonstrated the mainline is stable.
D. Operational Testing - Perform operational testing after hydrostatic testing is completed, backfill
is in place and irrigation heads are adjusted to final position.
PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 - 15
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
Wolf Pen Creek Festival Park
1. Demonstrate to Landscape Architect that system meets coverage requirements, is a
specified and indicated, and that automatic controls function properly.
2. Coverage requirements are based on operation of one circuit at a time.
3. After completion of grading, sodding and rolling of grass areas, carefully adjust lawn
sprinkler heads so they will be flush with or not more than 1/2 inch above finished grade.
Set shrub sprinkler heads not more than 1/2 inch above top of mulch.
3.6 MAINTENANCE
A. Contractor shall correctly maintain the irrigation system during the installation process and
throughout the landscaping maintenance service period. Specified in Section 329400 - Exterior
Landscape Maintenance.
B. Contractor shall provide "As Built" Drawings for new work, showing dimensioned location of
valves, meters, backflow preventers, controllers, and mainline. Contractor shall request
reproducible mylars from the Landscape Architect in preparation of "As Built" Drawings.
END OF SECTION 328400
PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 - 16
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
SECTION 329201 - HYDROMULCHING
PART1-GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Hydromulch seeding.
2. Fertilization.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of soil.
Wolf Pen Creek Festival Park
B. Manufactured Topsoil: Soil produced off -site by homogeneously blending mineral soils or sand
with stabilized organic soil amendments to produce topsoil or planting soil.
C. Pesticide: A substance or mixture intended for preventing, destroying, repelling, or mitigating a
pest. This includes insecticides, miticides, herbicides, fungicides, rodenticides, and
molluscicides. It also includes substances or mixtures intended for use as a plant regulator,
defoliant, or desiccant.
D. Pests: Living organisms that occur where they are not desired or that cause damage to plants,
animals, or people. These include insects, mites, grubs, mollusks (snails and slugs), rodents
(gophers, moles, and mice), unwanted plants (weeds), fungi, bacteria, and viruses.
E. Topsoil shall be friable clay loam surface soil reasonably free of clay lumps, stones, weeds,
roots and other objectionable material, a product of on site operations.
F. Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete, or top surface
of a fill or backfill before planting soil is placed.
G. Subsoil: All soil beneath the topsoil layer of the soil profile, and typified by the lack of organic
matter and soil organisms.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Certification of grass seed.
Certification of each seed mixture for turfgrass sod: Certification shall be submitted from
the supplier for each type of seed specified. Certification shall accompany the delivery of
the seed and shall indicate that the seed is in accordance with the requirements of the
local and state authorities.
HYDROMULCHING 329201 - 1
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
Wolf Pen Creek Festival Park
C. Fertilizer certification: Certification shall be submitted from the fertilizer manufacturer as to
the chemical analysis of the fertilizer, a listing of the elements contained therein and their
percentages. Certification shall also indicate that the fertilizer is in accordance with the
requirements of the local and state authorities.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time supervisor
on Project site when work is in progress.
Pesticide Applicator: State licensed, commercial.
B. Soil Analysis: For each unamended soil type, furnish soil analysis and a written report by a
qualified soil -testing laboratory.
1. The soil -testing laboratory shall oversee soil sampling.
2. Report suitability of tested soil for turf growth.
a. State recommendations for nitrogen, phosphorus, and potash nutrients and soil
amendments to be added to produce satisfactory planting soil suitable for healthy,
viable plants.
b. Report presence of problem salts, minerals, or heavy metals; if present, provide
additional recommendations for corrective action.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Seed and Other Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in original, unopened
containers showing weight, certified analysis, name and address of manufacturer, and indication
of conformance with state and federal laws, as applicable.
B. Fertilizer Delivery: Fertilizer shall be delivered in the manufacturer's unopened containers,
labeled to indicate the manufacturer's name and product identification. Containers shall be
stored protected from ground contact and from the elements.
1.6 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Initial Turf Maintenance Service: Provide full maintenance by skilled employees of landscape
Installer. Maintain as required in Section 329301. Begin maintenance immediately after each
area is planted and continue until acceptable turf is.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Type - Turfgrass seed shall be appropriate to season. The seed shall be harvested within 1 year
prior to planting, free of Johnsongrass, field bind weed, dodder seed, and free of other weed
seed to the limits allowable under the Federal Seed Act and applicable seed laws. The seed
HYDROMULCHING 329201 -2
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
Wolf Pen Creek Festival Park
shall be extra fancy grade, treated with fungicide, and shall have a germination and purity that
will produce, after allowance for Federal Seed Act tolerances, a pure live seed content of not
less than 85 percent, using the formula: purity percent times (germination percent times plus
hard or sound seed percent). Seed shall be labeled in accordance with U.S. Department of
Agriculture rules and regulations.
B. Amounts
Item Rate Per 1000 Sq.Ft.
Seed As per season, see below
Fertilizer 12 lbs.
Water As needed
Real Virgin Wood Minimum 50 lbs. to achieve
Fiber Mulch covering of seeded area
C. Spring/Summer Planting
(April 15 to Sept. 15)
Hulled Bermuda 2 lbs./1000 Sq. Ft.
D. Fall/Winter Planting
(Sept. 15 to April 15)
Unhulled Bermuda 1 'h lbs./1000 Sq. Ft.
KY Fesque 5 lbs./1000 Sq. Ft.
E. Fertilize as per Paragraph B.
F. Fertilizer for Fertilizing: (Tank Mix) shall be 13-13-13 grade, pelleted, uniform in composition,
free -flowing, and suitable for application with approved equipment. The fertilizer shall be
delivered to the site in bags or other convenient containers, each fully labeled, conforming to
the applicable state fertilizer laws, and bearing the name or trademark and warranty of the
producer.
G. Wood Cellulose Fiber Mulch: Wood cellulose fiber mulch, for use with the hydraulic
application of grass seed and fertilizer, shall consist of specially prepared wood cellulose fiber.
It shall be processed in such a manner that it will not contain germination or growth inhibiting
factors. It shall be dyed an appropriate color to allow visual metering of its application. The
wood cellulose fibers shall have the property of becoming evenly dispersed and suspended
when agitated in water. When sprayed uniformly on the surface of the soil, the fibers shall form
a blotter -like groundcover which readily absorbs water and allows infiltration to the underlying
soil. Weight specifications from suppliers for all applications shall refer only to air dry weight
of the fiber, a standard equivalent to 19 percent moisture. The mulch material shall be supplied
in packages having a gross weight not in excess of 100 pounds and be marked by the
manufacturer to show the dry weight content. Suppliers shall be prepared to certify that
laboratory and field testing of their product has been accomplished and that it meets all of the
foregoing requirements.
H. Slurry Mix Components Per Acre:
Wood Cellulose Fiber Mulch 2,000 pounds
Grass Seed As Specified
Fertilizer (13-13-13) As Specified
HYDROMULCHING 329201 - 3
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTIONS
Wolf Pen Creek Festival Park
A. Surfaces indicated to be seeded shall be inspected to verify that all preparatory work in the area
has been completed. Seeding shall not start until all preparatory work has been completed.
Requests for inspections shall be made at least two days prior to anticipated date of inspection.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. All areas to receive seed shall be stripped and/or treated with a contact herbicide prior to
seeding as necessary to remove weeds, unless otherwise noted on drawings.
B. Areas to receive seeding shall be loosened by manual or mechanical means to a depth of 1 1/2
inches, leveled and fine graded by hand raking. All stone (1" in diameter and larger in the top
2" of soil) are to be removed, tree stumps, brush, roots, vegetation, rubbish and other foreign
matter shall be removed from the site. No foreign matter may be buried on the site. All tree
stumps must be removed to a depth of two (2) feet below finish subgrade.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Special Mulching Equipment and Procedures: Hydraulic equipment used for the application of
fertilizer, seed, and slurry of prepared wood fiber mulch shall have a built-in agitation system
with an operating capacity sufficient to agitate, suspend, and homogeneously mix a slurry
containing up to forty (40) pounds of fiber plus a combined total of seventy (70) pounds of
fertilizer solids for each one hundred (100) gallons of water. The slurry distribution lines shall
be large enough to prevent stoppage. The discharge line shall be equipped with a set of
hydraulic spray nozzles which provide even distribution of the slurry on the slopes to be seeded.
The slurry tank shall have a minimum capacity of eight hundred (800) gallons and shall be
mounted on a traveling unit which may be either self-propelled or drawn with a separate unit
which will place the slurry tank and spray nozzles within sufficient proximity to the areas to be
seeded so as to provide uniform distribution without waste. The Owner's Representative may
authorize equipment with smaller tank capacity provided that the equipment has the necessary
agitation system and sufficient pump capacity to spray the slurry in a uniform coat.
B. Mixing: Care shall be taken that the slurry preparation takes place on the site of the work.
Spraying shall commence immediately when the tank is full.
C. Operators of hydromulching equipment shall be thoroughly experienced in this type of
application. Apply specified slurry mix in a motion to form a uniform mat at specified rate.
The operator shall spray the area with a uniform, visible coat by using the green color of the
wood pulp as a guide. Keep hydromulch within areas designated and keep from contact with
other plant material. Slurry mixture which has not been applied within four (4) hours of mixing
shall not be used and shall be removed from the site.
HYDROMULCHING 329201 - 4
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
Wolf Pen Creek Festival Park
D. After installation, the Contractor shall not operate any equipment over the covered area.
Immediately after application, thoroughly wash off any plant material, planting areas, or paved
areas not intended to receive slurry mix. Keep all paved and planting areas clean during
maintenance operations.
E. Seeded Areas: If, in the opinion of the Landscape Architect, unplanted skips and areas are
noted after hydromulching, the Contractor shall be required to seed the planted areas with the
grasses that were to have been planted at no additional cost to the Owner.
3.4 MAINTENANCE OF HYDROSEEDED AREAS
A. After installation, hydroseeded areas shall be watered in an amount and as often as necessary to
keep seed beds moistened to their full depth for a period of 2 weeks.
B. After initial 2 weeks of watering, seeded areas shall be watered and maintained to insure a
healthy, vigorous growth throughout the installation period and the landscape maintenance
period.
3.5 GUARANTEE
A. A written guarantee shall be provided guaranteeing to maintain the treated areas in a healthy,
vigorous, undamaged condition for a period of [60 days ] beginning on the date of written
acceptance of the work.
B. Contractor shall guarantee a full stand of grass, 95% cover with no bare areas in excess of 6
inches diameter.
C. Guarantee shall provide for timely filling, leveling and repairing eroded areas, reseeding areas
exhibiting lack of healthy growth and mowing as necessary to maintain a neat appearance.
END OF SECTION 329201
HYDROMULCHING 329201 - 5
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
SECTION 329202 - SODDING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Sod.
2. Fertilization.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of soil.
Wolf Pen Creek Festival Park
B. Manufactured Topsoil: Soil produced off -site by homogeneously blending mineral soils or sand
with stabilized organic soil amendments to produce topsoil or planting soil.
C. Pesticide: A substance or mixture intended for preventing, destroying, repelling, or mitigating a
pest. This includes insecticides, miticides, herbicides, fungicides, rodenticides, and
molluscicides. It also includes substances or mixtures intended for use as a plant regulator,
defoliant, or desiccant.
D. Pests: Living organisms that occur where they are not desired or that cause damage to plants,
animals, or people. These include insects, mites, grubs, mollusks (snails and slugs), rodents
(gophers, moles, and mice), unwanted plants (weeds), fungi, bacteria, and viruses.
E. Topsoil shall be friable clay loam surface soil reasonably free of clay lumps, stones, weeds,
roots and other objectionable material, a product of on site operations.
F. Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete, or top surface
of a fill or backfill before planting soil is placed.
G. Subsoil: All soil beneath the topsoil layer of the soil profile, and typified by the lack of organic
matter and soil organisms.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Certification of grass sod.
1. Sod Certification — Certification shall be submitted from the sod nursery as to the grass
species, location of the field from which the sod has been stripped and the date of
stripping. Certification shall accompany the delivery of the sod.
SODDING 329202 - 1
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
Wolf Pen Creek Festival Park
C. Fertilizer certification: Certification shall be submitted from the fertilizer manufacturer as to
the chemical analysis of the fertilizer, a listing of the elements contained therein and their
percentages. Certification shall also indicate that the fertilizer is in accordance with the
requirements of the local and state authorities.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time supervisor
on Project site when work is in progress.
Pesticide Applicator: State licensed, commercial.
B. Soil Analysis: For each unamended soil type, furnish soil analysis and a written report by a
qualified soil -testing laboratory.
1. The soil -testing laboratory shall oversee soil sampling.
2. Report suitability of tested soil for turf growth.
a. State recommendations for nitrogen, phosphorus, and potash nutrients and soil
amendments to be added to produce satisfactory planting soil suitable for healthy,
viable plants.
b. Report presence of problem salts, minerals, or heavy metals; if present, provide
additional recommendations for corrective action.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Sod Delivery - Sod shall be delivered on pallets with the root system protected from exposure to
wind and sun. Stripping and delivery shall be timed so that sod will be placed within 48 hours
of stripping.
B. Fertilizer Delivery: Fertilizer shall be delivered in the manufacturer's unopened containers,
labeled to indicate the manufacturer's name and product identification. Containers shall be
stored protected from ground contact and from the elements.
1.6 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Initial Turf Maintenance Service: Provide full maintenance by skilled employees of landscape
Installer. Maintain as required in Section 329301. Begin maintenance immediately after each
area is planted and continue until acceptable turf is established.
SODDING
329202 - 2
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
Wolf Pen Creek Festival Park
A. Sod shall be nursery grown Common Bermuda sod having a healthy, virile root system of
dense, thickly matted roots throughout the soil of the sod for a minimum thickness of 1 inch.
Sod shall be free of noxious weeds and undesirable native grasses. Soil attached to the sod shall
be free of stones and debris.
B. Sod shall have been mowed within 7 days of being stripped. Sod shall be provided in
rectangular pads of not less than 12 inches nor more than 24 inches. Dry sod will be rejected.
C. Fertilizer: shall be 13-13-13 grade, pelleted, uniform in composition, free -flowing, and suitable
for application with approved equipment. The fertilizer shall be delivered to the site in bags or
other convenient containers, each fully labeled, conforming to the applicable state fertilizer
laws, and bearing the name or trademark and warranty of the producer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTIONS
A. Surfaces indicated to receive sod shall be inspected to verify that all preparatory work in the
area has been completed. Sod installation shall not start until all preparatory work has been
completed. Requests for inspections shall be made at least two days prior to anticipated date of
inspection.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Strip existing vegetation and 1 inch of existing soil from all areas to receive sod not stripped
and graded under previous work.
B. After stripping, loosen soil to a depth of 2 inches prior to laying sod. Break up compacted soil.
Remove all stones, roots, vegetation, rubbish, debris and other foreign matter 1" in diameter or
larger from the top 2" of soil. No foreign matter may be buried on site.
C. Hand rake to achieve a uniform loose depth to 2 inches and a smooth, consistent grade
immediately prior to laying sod.
D. Finish grade to be 1" below top of adjacent hardscape.
E. Immediately prior to placing sod, apply the fertilizer and lightly moisten.
SODDING 329202 - 3
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
3.3 INSTALLATION
Wolf Pen Creek Festival Park
A. All sod shall be carefully laid in parallel rows in a smooth manner, alternating all sod joints. Fit
sod strips tightly together so that no joints are visible and tamp firmly. Cut pieces of sod to fill
any voids left.
B. Water sod immediately after planting, slowly but thoroughly, to secure at least six (6) inches
penetration into the soil below the sod. Do not allow the blades of grass to wilt. The sodded
area shall be thoroughly rolled in 2 directions to form a thoroughly even, solid mat. Any voids
left in block sodding shall be filled with cut sod pieces and/or topsoil.
C. Following the completion of the installation, the sod shall be watered in an amount and as often
as necessary to maintain healthy growth of the grass.
D. Treat entire areas of sod for fire ants during the 60 day maintenance period as per
manufacturer's instructions and Section 329300, Plants.
E. Apply second application of fertilizer 60 days after planting as per Section 329300, Plants.
3.4 MAINTENANCE OF SODDED AREAS
A. Sodded area shall be maintained in good condition throughout the installation process and
throughout the maintenance period as specified in Section 329301, Exterior Landscape
Maintenance.
B. Upon completion of work, clean areas within Contract limits, remove tools, supplies and
equipment. Wash down curbs and pavement areas. Scrub curbs and walks as necessary to
insure a clean surface. Provide site clean and free of materials and suitable for use as intended.
3.5 GUARANTEE
A. A written guarantee shall be provided guaranteeing to maintain the treated areas in a healthy,
vigorous, undamaged condition for a period of 60 days beginning on the date of written
acceptance of the work.
B. Guarantee shall provide for timely filling, leveling and repairing eroded areas, reseeding areas
exhibiting lack of healthy growth and mowing as necessary to maintain a neat appearance.
END OF SECTION 329202
SODDING 329202 - 4
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
SECTION 329300 - PLANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Plants.
2. Planting soils.
3. Plant drainage.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
Wolf Pen Creek Festival Park
A. Backfill: The earth used to replace or the act of replacing earth in an excavation.
B. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface adjacent to planting bed.
C. Prepared Backfill Mix: Soil produced off -site by homogeneously blending mineral soils or sand
with stabilized organic soil amendments to produce topsoil or planting soil.
D. Pesticide: A substance or mixture intended for preventing, destroying, repelling, or mitigating a
pest. This includes insecticides, miticides, herbicides, fungicides, rodenticides, and
molluscicides. It also includes substances or mixtures intended for use as a plant regulator,
defoliant, or desiccant.
E. Pests: Living organisms that occur where they are not desired, or that cause damage to plants,
animals, or people. These include insects, mites, grubs, mollusks (snails and slugs), rodents
(gophers, moles, and mice), unwanted plants (weeds), fungi, bacteria, and viruses.
F. Topsoil: Standardized topsoil; existing, native surface topsoil; existing, in -place surface soil;
imported topsoil; or manufactured topsoil that is modified with soil amendments and perhaps
fertilizers to produce a soil mixture best for plant growth.
G. Root Flare: Also called "trunk flare." The area at the base of the plant's stem or trunk where
the stem or trunk broadens to form roots; the area of transition between the root system and the
stem or trunk.
H. Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete, or the top
surface of a fill or backfill before planting soil is placed.
I. Subsoil: All soil beneath the topsoil layer of the soil profile, and typified by the lack of organic
matter and soil organisms.
PLANTS 329300 - 1
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek Festival Park
November 2010
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Work Schedule: Contractor shall submit a work schedule for all planting work prior to
purchase and installation of plant material.
B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including soils.
C. Samples of backfill mix.
D. Samples of mulch.
E. Product certificates.
F. Maintenance Instructions: Recommended procedures to be established by Owner for
maintenance of plants during a calendar year. Including manufacturer's recommendations and
instructions recommending procedures to be established by Owner for maintenance of planting
work. Submit instructions prior to expiration of Contractor's required maintenance period.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer: Installation of planting work shall be performed by a single firm specializing in
landscape and planting work. Contractor shall be licensed by the Texas Association of
Nurserymen, shall possess an agricultural certificate, shall be a licensed pest applicator, and
shall have not less than 5 years of experience in this type of work.
B. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time supervisor
on Project site when work is in progress.
Pesticide Applicator: State licensed, commercial.
C. Provide quality, size, genus, species, and variety of plants indicated, complying with applicable
requirements in ANSI Z60.1. Provide healthy, vigorous stock, grown in recognized nursery in
accordance with good horticultural practice and free of disease, insects, eggs, larvae and defects
such as knots, sun -scald, injuries, abrasions or disfigurement.
D. Delivery, Storage and Handling
1. Compliance: Ship planting materials with Certificates of Inspection as required by
governing authorities. Comply with all applicable local, state, and federal requirements
regarding materials, methods of work, and disposal of excess and waste materials.
2. Substitutions: Do not make substitutions unless approved in writing by Owner's
Representative. If specified planting material is not obtainable, submit proof of non -
availability to Owner's Representative together with proposal for use of equivalent
material. Contractor shall submit proposal in a timely manner as to not impact project
completion or installation of other work.
3. Analysis and Standards: All packaged products shall be delivered in original
manufacturer's sealed containers. For unpackaged materials, submit analysis by
recognized laboratory made in accordance with methods established by the Association
of Official Agriculture Chemists, wherever applicable.
PLANTS 329300 - 2
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
Wolf Pen Creek Festival Park
4. Inspection: Notify Owner's Representative at least 2 weeks prior to installation, of
location where materials that have been selected for planting may be inspected, either at
place of growth or the site prior to planting. Plant material will be inspected for
compliance with requirements for genus, species, variety, size and quality. Owner's
Representative retains right to further inspect trees for size and conditions of balls and
root systems, insects, injuries and latent defects, and to reject unsatisfactory or defective
material at any time during progress of work. Contractor shall remove rejected trees
immediately from site and replace with specified materials. Plant material not installed in
accordance with Contract Documents will be rejected.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace plantings and accessories that fail in
materials, workmanship, or growth within specified warranty period.
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Death and unsatisfactory growth, except for defects resulting from abuse, lack of
adequate maintenance, or neglect by Owner, or incidents that are beyond
Contractor's control.
b. Structural failures including plantings falling or blowing over.
Warranty Periods from Date of Substantial Completion:
a. Trees, Shrubs, Vines, and Ornamental Grasses: 12 months.
b. Ground Covers, Biennials, Perennials, and Other Plants: 12 months.
C. Annuals: Three months.
Remove and replace trees, shrubs and groundcover found to be dead or in unhealthy
condition during warranty period. Replace trees, shrubs and groundcover which are in
doubtful condition at end of warranty period. However, if in the opinion of Owner, such
doubtful material may survive, Contractor shall extend the warranty period for a full
growing season. Owner will determine which items are in doubtful condition.
1.6 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Initial Maintenance Service: Provide maintenance by skilled employees of landscape Installer.
Begin maintenance immediately after plants are installed throughout the maintenance period.
See Section 329301 — Exterior Landscape Maintenance.
1. Maintenance Period for Trees and Shrubs: 60 days from date of Substantial Completion.
2. Maintenance Period for Ground Cover and Other Plants: 60 days from date of
Substantial Completion.
3. Maintenance Period for New Lawns: 60 days from date of Substantial Completion.
PLANTS 329300 - 3
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
1.7 JOB CONDITIONS
Wolf Pen Creek Festival Park
A. Work Scheduling: Proceed with and complete planting work in a timely manner, working
within seasonal limitations for each kind of planting work required.
B. Planting Time
1. Correlate planting with specified maintenance periods to provide maintenance from date
of Substantial Completion.
2. Plant frost -tender trees only after danger of frost is past or sufficiently before frost season
to allow for establishment before first frost. Do not plant in frozen ground.
3. Plant trees, shrubs and groundcover after final grades are established and prior to planting
of lawns, unless otherwise directed by Owner's Representative in writing. If planting
occurs after lawn work, protect lawn areas and promptly repair damage to lawns resulting
from planting operations.
C. Utilities: Refer to drawings and coordinate with Utility Contractor for location of utilities.
Contractor shall be responsible for damage to existing utilities and structures.
D. Security: The Owner will not assume any responsibility for security of any materials,
equipment, etc. during construction of the project until project acceptance.
E. Excavation: When conditions detrimental to plant growth are encountered, such as rubble fill,
adverse drainage conditions beyond the scope of this contract, or obstructions, notify Owner's
Representative of such conditions, immediately and before planting.
F. Pollution Control: Control dust caused by planting operations. Dampen surfaces as necessary.
Comply with pollution control regulations of governing authorities.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 PLANT MATERIAL
A. General: Furnish nursery -grown plants true to genus, species, variety, cultivar, stem form,
shearing, and other features indicated in Plant Schedule or Plant Legend shown on Drawings
and complying with ANSI Z60.1; and with healthy root systems developed by transplanting or
root pruning. Provide well -shaped, fully branched, healthy, vigorous stock, densely foliated
when in leaf and free of disease, pests, eggs, larvae, and defects such as knots, sun scald,
injuries, abrasions, and disfigurement.
2.2 FERTILIZERS
A. Fertilizer for planting areas shall be granular fertilizer shall be a commercial fertilizer, uniform
in composition, free flowing, and suitable for application with approved equipment. Fertilizer
which has been exposed to high humidity and moisture, has become caked or otherwise
damaged making it unsuitable for use, will not be acceptable. Application shall be Osmocote
13.13.13 + Iron by Sierra Chemical, 1-800-492-8255, 1001 Yosemite Dr., Milpitas, CA 95035,
or approved equal. Broadcast and rototill fertilizer at the rate of 3 lbs. actual nitrogen per 1000
square feet into prepared planting soil.
PLANTS 329300 - 4
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
Wolf Pen Creek Festival Park
B. Plant tablet shall be Agriform 20-10-5 Planting Tablets shall be evenly placed in planting pits at
the following rate:
Material No. of Tablets
1 gallon/4" pots 1/2 (or granular fertilizer)
5 gallon 1
15 gallon 2
30 gallon 3
Greater than 30 gallon 1 — for each '/2 inch
C. Additional Microlife Ultimate fertilizer shall be evenly dispersed through soil in planting pits at
the following rate:
Material No. of ounces per planting pit
30 gallon 3
65 gallon 6
D. Tree Inoculent: Rhizanova Mycorrhizal Inoculant as supplied by San Jacinto Landscape Supply,
Houston, TX, shall be applied to all trees and plant materials 65 gal. and larger at the rate of one
3 oz. dry pack per caliper inch.
2.3 PLANTING SOILS
A. Prepared Backfill Mix: Shall be 33% topsoil, 33% sharp sand, and 33% enriched bark mulch or
approved commercially available soil mix. Add fertilizer as per specifications.
B. Topsoils
1. Provide topsoil which is fertile, friable, natural loam, surface soil, free of subsoil, clay
lumps, brush, weeds and other litter, and free of roots, stumps, stones larger than 2 inches
in any dimension and other extraneous or toxic matter harmful to plant growth.
2. Obtain topsoil only from naturally, well -drained sites where topsoil occurs in a depth of
not less than 4 inches. Topsoil shall not be collected from sites that are infected with
growth of, or the reproductive parts of noxious weeds, especially nut grass. Topsoil shall
not be stripped, collected or deposited while wet. Topsoil shall not be excessively acid or
alkaline or contain toxic substances which may be harmful to plant growth. Topsoil shall
be without admixture of subsoil.
C. Compost Mulch for bed preparation shall be Organic mulch free from deleterious materials and
suitable for top dressing of trees, shrubs or plants. Mulch shall be composted, well -rotted,
blended double -shredded hardwood mulch, black or dark brown in color. Mulch pieces shall be
sized to pass through a 1" screen. Compost mulch: Enriched bark mulch for bed prep shall be
With additional organic of peat and/or manure. No dyes, mushroom compost or other additives
shall be used to artificially enhance the appearance of the level of composting.
D. Sharp Sand: Sand shall be thoroughly washed, coarse, graded sharp, construction or brick sand,
free of clay balls, weeds, and grass. So-called cushion sand, blow sand, or creek silt is not
acceptable for substitution where sharp sand is specified.
PLANTS 329300 - 5
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
2.4 MULCHES
Wolf Pen Creek Festival Park
A. Mulch for Top Dressing: Shredded hardwood Organic mulch free from deleterious materials
and suitable for top dressing of trees, shrubs or plants. Mulch shall be composted, well -rotted,
blended double -shredded hardwood mulch, black or dark brown in color. Mulch pieces shall be
sized to pass through a V screen. No dyes, mushroom compost or other additives shall be used
to artificially enhance the appearance of the level of composting. Mulch shall be Native
Hardwood Mulch as supplied by Natures Way Resources, 101 Sherbrook Circle, Conroe, TX,
or approved equal.
2.5 PESTICIDES
A. General: Pesticide registered and approved by EPA, acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, and of type recommended by manufacturer for each specific problem and as
required for Project conditions and application. Do not use restricted pesticides unless
authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction.
2.6 HERBICIDE
A. Pre -emergent herbicide shall be Team Pro as manufactured by Bonus Corp Fertilizer, Houston,
TX, or approved equal. Apply pre -emergent over all planting areas prior to spreading mulch at
the rate of 7 lbs./1000 sq. feet.
B. If necessary, contact herbicide shall be Roundup by Monsanto, 800 N. Lindbergh, St. Louis,
MO 63167, 314-694-1000, or approved equal. Apply Roundup only if necessary and if
approved by owner or owner's representative. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended
rate of application.
2.7 STAKING AND GUYING
A. Reference drawings for staking and guying material.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PLANTING
A. Excavation for Trees and Large Shrubs
1. Excavate pits with vertical sides and with bottom of excavation slightly raised at center to
provide proper drainage. Rough up sides of pit.
2. Make excavations at least half again as wide as the ball diameter and equal to the ball
depth, plus 4" allowance for setting of ball on a layer of compacted backfill.
3. Dispose of subsoil removed from planting excavations. Do not mix with planting soil or
use as backfill.
B. Planting Trees and Large Shrubs
PLANTS 329300 - 6
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
Wolf Pen Creek Festival Park
1. Set stock on layer of compacted prepared planting soil backfill mix, plumb and in center
of pit at same elevation as adjacent finished planting grades. Distribute additional
fertilizer evenly throughout backfill mix in hole at specified rate. Place prepared planting
soil backfill mix around base and sides of ball and work each layer to settle backfill and
eliminate voids and air pockets. When excavation is approximately 2/3 full, water
thoroughly before placing remainder of backfill. For trees, apply Tree Inoculant at rate
specified according to size of tree. Repeat watering until no more water is absorbed.
Dish top of backfill to allow for mulching.
2. Prune, thin out, and shape shrubs in accordance with standard horticultural practice.
Prune shrubs to retain natural character. Remove and replace excessively pruned or
misformed stock resulting from improper pruning.
3. Stake and guy trees as per the drawings.
C. Excavation and Soil Preparation for Shrubs/Groundcovers in Planting Beds
1. Excavate entire planting beds to a depth of 8 inches. Planting beds to have vertical sides.
2. Dispose of subsoil removed from planting beds excavations. Do not mix with planting
soil or use as backfill.
3. Till bottom of planter 2"-4", leave bottom of planter un-compacted. Backfill with 8" of
prepared backfill mix.
D. Planting of Shrubs in Beds
Set stock on layer of prepared planting soil backfill mix, plumb and slightly above
adjacent finished planting grades. Place additional prepared planting soil backfill mix
around base and sides of ball and work each layer to settle backfill and eliminate voids
and air pockets. Layer and distribute additional fertilizer in planting hole at specified
rate. Water entire bed thoroughly, adjusting plant if settling occurs.
3.2 PLANT MAINTENANCE
A. Maintain plantings by pruning, cultivating, watering, weeding, fertilizing, mulching, restoring
planting saucers, resetting to proper grades or vertical position, and performing other operations
as required to establish healthy, viable plantings. Spray or treat as required to keep trees and
shrubs free of insects and disease.
B. Fill in as necessary soil subsidence that may occur because of settling or other processes.
Replace mulch materials damaged or lost in areas of subsidence.
C. Apply treatments as required to keep plant materials, planted areas, and soils free of pests and
pathogens or disease. Use practices to minimize the use of pesticides and reduce hazards.
D. Apply pesticides and other chemical products and biological control agents in accordance with
authorities having jurisdiction and manufacturer's written recommendations. Coordinate
applications with Owner's operations and others in proximity to the Work. Notify Owner before
each application is performed.
PLANTS 329300 - 7
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
Wolf Pen Creek Festival Park
E. Protect plants from damage due to landscape operations and operations of other contractors and
trades. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. Treat, repair, or
replace damaged plantings.
END OF SECTION 329300
PLANTS 329300 - 8
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
SECTION 329301 - EXTERIOR LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
1.3
A.
1.4
A.
1.5
A.
B.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Wolf Pen Creek -Festival Park
Drawings and General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and all applicable specification sections, apply to this section.
WORK COVERED
Furnish all labor, materials and equipment as necessary to provide a landscape maintenance
program in strict accordance with the Specifications and Drawings as prepared by Clark
Condon Associates.
RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS
Examine all section for work related to this section.
REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES
Perform Work in accordance with all applicable laws, codes, and regulations required by
authorities having jurisdiction over such work and provide for all permits required by local
authorities.
CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES
The Contractor shall begin maintenance immediately upon starting any portion of the Work of
this contract.
The Contractor's Maintenance Period shall continue60 days beyond Substantial Completion of
all Work in this contract.
C. Trees, Shrubs and Groundcovers: The Contractor's maintenance of new planting shall consist
of watering, cultivating, weeding, mulching, re -staking, tightening and repairing of guys,
resetting plants to proper grades or upright position, restoration of the planting saucer, and
furnishing and applying such sprays and invigorants as are necessary to keep the plantings free
of insects and disease and in thriving condition.
D. Irrigation System: Maintenance of irrigation system shall consist of monitoring and adjustment
of the duration and frequency of the watering schedule, adjustment of heads for coverage and
elevation, repair of leaks in both mains and lateral lines and all other work required to establish
a complete working irrigation system.
E. Lawns: Maintenance of new lawns shall consist of mowing, watering, weeding, repair of all
erosion and reseeding as necessary to establish a uniform stand of specified grasses.
F. Trash Pick-up: Pick up trash on site and empty trash receptacles at each site visit.
EXTERIOR LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE 329301 - 1
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
1.6 PROTECTION
Wolf Pen Creek -Festival Park
A. Protect planting areas and lawns at all times against damage of all kinds for duration of
maintenance period. Maintenance includes temporary protection fences, barriers and signs as
required for protection. If any plants become damaged or injured, because sufficient protection
was not provided, treat or replace as directed by Owner at no additional cost to Owner.
1.7 FINAL ACCEPTANCE
A. Work under this section will be accepted by Landscape Architect upon satisfactory completion
of all work, including maintenance, replacement of plant materials and lawns under the
Warranty Period. Upon final Acceptance, the Owner will assume responsibility for
maintenance of the Work.
1.8 WARRANTIES AND REPLACEMENTS
A. Refer to other sections.
1.9 MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
A. At the completion of work, furnish two (2) copies of written maintenance instructions to
Owner and one (1) copy to Landscape Architect for maintenance and care of all planting
throughout the year.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Materials required for installed items shall match those already in use.
B. Samples of all materials not specified under other sections of these Specifications shall be
submitted for review by Landscape Architect prior to use.
C. Topdress Fertilizer: Commercial fertilizer with guaranteed analysis of 16-6-8 or as required
for application use. Fertilizer shall have a salt index per nuturient of less than 65.
2.2 REQUIRED EQUIPMENT
A. Contractor shall have available for their use the following maintenance equipment:
1. Lawn Mowers
2. Gasoline Powered Edgers
3. Trash Collection Equipment
4. Line Trimmers
5. Miscellaneous Hand Tools, Rakes, Brooms, Etc.
6. Blowers
7. Other as needed.
EXTERIOR LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE 329301 -2
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 WATERING
Wolf Pen Creek -Festival Park
A. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to assure that the correct watering of plant
materials is being accomplished through the following irrigation techniques:
B. Regular deep watering to all new trees until there are definite signs that the trees have
established themselves, new growth is apparent, and no trees are experiencing stress
conditions.
C. Frequent watering to the lawn areas to insure against drying. This may be accomplished as
above, by the automatic sprinkler system, hand watering or portable sprinklers. Contractor
shall monitor settings of automatic sprinkler controls and recommend necessary adjustments
according to climatic changes.
D. Contractor shall be responsible for watering areas within the project limits that do not have
irrigation systems.
E. Contractor shall be responsible for damages to irrigation system caused by maintenance
operations.
3.2 MAINTENANCE OF TURF AREAS
A. Mowing lawn/grass areas shall be accomplished with sharp, properly adjusted mowers of the
correct size for the various areas.
B. Mowing frequency shall be as per the Landscape Maintenance Program. Blade heights shall be
set according to the following schedule.
1. 1 '/2 inches Initial Mowing
2. 1 '/2 inches April — November
3. 2 inches December — March
C. In the event of a prolonged rainy period and a surge of leaf growth is anticipated, the mower
height may be readjusted to prevent "scalping" or skinning of lawn on preceding cuts.
D. Lawn shall be edged evenly at all walks, headers and other structures as per the schedule. Use
an egder, not a line trimmer.
E. Until the establishment of the turf, the Contractor will be responsible for replacing soils that
have eroded onto the paved areas. Residual soils on paving will be removed and if not mingled
with objectionable materials may be re -used in eroded areas.
F. Immediately upon observing any lawn grass spreading into shrub or groundcover areas, the
Contractor shall initiate a program of removal and maintain this program throughout the
maintenance period.
G. Any lawn grass appearing in paved areas shall receive an application of soil sterilant according
to manufacturer's direction. The sterilant shall be approved and will not be detrimental
structurally to paved areas.
H. Special effort shall be given to the control to fire ants infesting the site. After control is
accomplished, the ant mounds shall be lowered and tamped to the existing grade.
EXTERIOR LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE 329301 -3
Clark Condon Associates Wolf Pen Creek -Festival Park
November 2010
I. Apply top dress fertilizer after grassing, if needed.
3.3 MAINTENANCE OF TREES AND SHRUBS
A. Contractor shall adjust and tighten as required all tree staking and guying. Removal as directed
by Owner's Representative.
B. All weeds within the mulched area around each tree and in each shrub bed shall be removed as
often as required. Under no circumstances shall weeds and grass within planted areas be
allowed to attain more than 4 inches growth.
C. Contractor shall be continuously alert for signs of insect presence or damage or the presence or
damage from plant fungi. Upon locating such evidence, the Contractor shall report it to the
Owner's Representative and take action as directed.
3.4 MAINTENANCE OF IRRIGATION SYSTEM
A. Irrigation System: Maintenance of irrigation system shall consist of monitoring and adjustment
of the duration and frequency of the watering schedule, adjustment of heads for coverage and
elevation, repair of leaks in both mains and lateral lines and all other work required to establish
a complete working irrigation system.
3.5 TRASH COLLECTION
A. Removal of debris from the site unrelated to horticultural maintenance (paper, bottles, can,
"Pirate" signs, etc.) shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Contractor shall pick up trash
and empty trash receptacles at each site visit. Frequency as per Landscape Maintenance
Program.
3.6 DE -WATERING
A. Contractor shall de -water by pumping or siphoning as often as necessary to remove excess
moisture from soil in planting areas and tree balls. De -watering to occur during scheduled
visits as required.
PART 4-SCHEDULES
4.1 THE EXECUTION ITEMS OF PART 3 IN THIS SPECIFICATION SHALL BE
PERFORMED AS PER THE FOLLOWING SCHEDULE AS APPLICABLE FOR THE
MAINTENANCE PERIOD:
MONTH
# OF VISITS PER MONTH
January
2
February
2
March
4
April
4
May
5
June
4
July
5
August
5
September
5
October
3
November
2
EXTERIOR LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE 329301 -4
Clark Condon Associates
November 2010
December
4.2 TOPDRESS FERTILIZER
A. Thirty (30) days after seeding.
Wolf Pen Creek -Festival Park
4.3 MULCHING, WEEDING, WEED CONTROL, GUYING AND STAKING ADJUSTMENT
A. As required at each visit.
4.4 MEETING
A. Contractor shall meet once each month and at the end of the maintenance period with the
Owner's on -site maintenance personnel. Contractor shall review irrigation system schedule
and operation and other pertinent and helpful maintenance information at each meeting.
END OF SECTION 329301
EXTERIOR LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE 329301 - 5